Home

9 - Sharp

1. 3 Unit mm 37 28 5 34 37 25 2868 522 NOE ae a E E a f 4 i z 2 M3 tapped holes 2 M3 tapped holes 2 tapped holes x X Attach the camera angle bracket to amp 45 20 5 one of the tapped M3 holes 20 mm 30 mounting pitch 3 places External dimensions of camera angle bracket 4 slotted holes wide 5 Unit mm for securing on the camera body n 20 ce RE 25 N U 39 z558 2 slotted holes 3 2 mm wide 225 for attachment to the mounting surface 28 31 lt 1 4 20 UNC threaded hole 20 17 for attachment to the mounting surface 28 6 21 Installation Conditions and Method External dimensions of extension camera cable IV S20EC2 4 Unit mm 4000 IV S20EC4 2000 IV S20EC2 I s When the camera cable and ext
2. Setting order 1 gt Configuration example VO SETTINGS Camera 1 image capturing CCD trigger MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG ME m Mash 2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIAL Camera 2 Image capturing onitor 8 OUTPUT OBJ TYPE PARARE SR S T L CCD SAMPLING AUTOMATIC Select one of Remote key pad x the following Settings listed in section LO NR END 11 3 CCD trigger 5 IV S20 main housing Power supply Start sampling input 24 VDC photo sensor or Warning lamp 1 External output YO to Y7 Type selection switch X1 to X4 proximity sensor Measurement is started when the CCD trigger level is ON Measurement is started when a CCD trigger signal is received Work Black White CCD trigger Edge Measurement Level Time chart when auto mode edge is selected for as the CCD sampling start _ Restarts CCD sampling automatically after measurement is completed pet M SV Object type m number input Specified object type number X1 to X4 CCD trigger Black White Blac
3. IV S20 main housing plan view Personal computer IBM PC AT converter IV S30SP IV S20 main housing Communication connector side view RS232C RS422 ra RS 232C communication cable An RS 232C communication cable is an accessory that comes with the IV S30SP Cable length 1 5m Connector 9 pin D sub male IV S20 side 9 pin D sub female personal computer side The IV S30SP software can be used on any personal computer that has the operating environment described below Item Specifications Personal computer PC AT compatible machine Pentium 90MHz or more Pentium 133MHz or more is recommended CPU Microsoft Windows 95 98 Japanese version Microsoft Windows NT4 0 Japanese version At least 32M bytes RAM memory 48M bytes or more is recommended Operating system Memory Hardware diskette Vacant area of 30M bytes SVGA or better monitor resolution 800 x 600 pixels 256 colors minimum CD ROM drive 1 set RS 232C port 1 port or more Microsoft Mouse or equivalent pointing device Monitor A printer compatible wit
4. 6 23 Lens holder DU o IV S30C1 Installation Conditions and Method 2 Installation Attach the IV S30C1 camera on the mounting surface with the camera angle bracket supplied with the camera Installation example 1 Camera front view Camera side view Camera angle bracket Camera lens IV S20L16 or similar Mounting surface o IV S30C1 Installation example 2 IV S30C1 Camera angle bracket Mounting surface Installation example 3 IV S30C1 Camera angle bracket y Mounting surface Bi Installation procedure Attach the camera angle bracket to the tapped M3 hole on the camera body 20 mm mounting pitch one of three holes Two screws M 3 x 6 are supplied with the camera for attaching the angle 2 Attach the camera controller angle to the mounting surface with the slotted holes 3 2 mm wide 20 mm mounting pitch or 1 4 20 UNC threaded hole The external dimensions of the camera angle bracket and camera body are shown on the following page 6 24 Installation Conditions and Method External dimensions when the IV S20L16 ca
5. After all of the parameters have been downloaded from the connected IV S20 the message COMMUNICATING sending data will change to COMM COMPLETE complete sending data Note Perform the operation above with the MAIN OPS MENU displayed on the target IV S20 12 2 Other Settings and Operations 3 Total initialization When you newly set conditions it is recommended that you first initialize the settings The following conditions should be initialized All conditions gt This section Measurement conditions for each measurement program number gt See Item 8 Initialization edit in section 9 2 Measurement conditions for each object type number The total initialization function initializes all of the conditions for each object type all object types input output conditions camera position adjustment and display mode The data stored in the flash memory and the data in the monitor display memory RAM are initialized returned to their initial state Operating procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key SYSTEM SETUP OPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH RECEIVING PARMS EXEC MINIT ALL PARMS EXEC amp SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH
6. 9 48 Distance and angle measurement gray scale 9 60 Lead Inspection en edet edes reete et o o dente dtt cu e a ec nd 9 75 Positional deviation measurement ssssssessseseeneeneeen nennen ener nennen nnne nen 9 37 SIUE G 9 m EL 12 8 Serial OUIpl a bec tL a a 11 2 Serial communication settings sssssssssssssssssseeeeeen nennen nnne nnn 11 18 Serial communication conditions sess ennt nnns 11 1 Set condition configuration enne 7 7 SEL key SET PE E Eat E EUR ete andit eU TERR sae e Maurus 5 8 7 9 Setting and operating procedure sssssssssssssssseeee eene eene nennen nene entren nennen nens 7 1 Setting Sree Niani EE 7 3 Setting window Bounda y i aa RD Eee pea a d 9 7 Shared settings drsa a a aaa a ct SLE 9 3 Kim ee eae ae 6 3 9 117 EEEE L S EEEN CE 9 9 G 10 Sfer te MIS LOI AIA E A HE 16 1 Spectral sensitivity characteristics CCD 22 6 4 Start CCD sampling 4 5 1
7. Glossary Expansion and contraction to eliminate binary noise in the image When an image is converted to black and white a number of unwanted dots may appear in the image These noises can be eliminated during the preliminary processing Dot control processing of binary val ues is used to eliminate this problem as described below DExpansion If a white area contains a single isolated black point the system will interrupt the black point to white Q Contraction If a black area contains a single isolated white point the system will converts the white point to black Expansion gt contraction Delete isolated black points by expansion and then restore the original image size by contraction conversion Expansion Co ntraction Q Contraction gt expansion Delete isolated white points by contraction and then restore the original image size by expansion c c c o o 5 D 2o S gt 9 c S c B n emo F m Fillet width shading width Size of a hollow rectangle which closely matches to the target object in a binary image white part Horizontal direction Length of a side parallel to the X axis Vertical direction Length of a side parallel to the Y axis Fillet height vertical Fillet width horizontal m Flat width gt See Edge detection Glossary Full pixel reading progressive scan A sy
8. 12 3 TWIG QS WNION ns E 1 1 amp rgo 15 1 V Mene viele 9 4 6 3 6 5 W Whole imade 2 eene 8 3 Life eT G 11 Window shape selecting and setting 9 3 X AYSCOMOGCTION at cia a e a e e A a E A 9 20 correction Standard high precision enne 9 20 correction image displays h e a E nenne nennt nennen nes 8 7 I 14
9. 7 8 8 9 Image display areas tie a HER 7 3 Image processing specifications nennen nnns 16 1 Image Settlhgss re pet nue 9 6 Initialization Initialize measurement conditions for each measurement program number 9 31 Initialize measurement condition of each type 9 32 Total initializatiOn eere tenete devi Hee AE edd tee eu do de eevee deu as 12 3 Input termirials XO to X6 ih ed Eee Roda oe e eai 6 17 to 18 Input output conditions settings nnnm nnns 11 1 Installation Condition 2 ea ineat ade AAEE EA 6 1 Installation method Installing the camera body eene nnne nennen enne nein 6 12 Installing the IV S20 main housing sssssssssssseeeeeenenee ennemis 6 10 Installati n Space n mL REP bere IRURE LER M IERI RR 6 9 Interface computer link es snnt nennen 14 5 Interlinie transfer roit rete e anite redet EU EEG Ee ER ee Pee eU eeu ES G 7 LUCE Sea tdi bot Le t LE LN dE LI OE teu 5 1 avd t tie Hip E ea nin ead edited eae G 7 IV S20 main housing sssssssssssssseeeeeneee enne nnne enne nner en ren 4 1 5 1 16 1 IV 520BC2 45
10. Numerical calculation Setting details CDCALC RESULT See the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for calculation result specified output data at any value from 00 to 15 OBJECT TYPE type Select the type of data being calculated A number of formula settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2 Selection of 2 The first line of the display Total area A Record 00 0 to 15 NOO 0 to 15 Number of objects K FORMULA ABS NOO 0 to 15 Numerical calculations NC the second line will not be displayed 00000000 0 the second line will not Constant C be displayed Note Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N 00 to 15 than that used for 1 CALC RESULT N 00 to 15 UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT Set the upper and lower limits for decisions 5 OUTPUT Set the evaluation output for the results of the calculations amp RUN A TEST RUN Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test make a test run UPPER MENU Returns you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3 as follows 2 Number of formulas Total area A 00A to 15A ABS TAN ATAN 00 to 15 99999999 9 to 99999999 9 The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front
11. TITLE REGIST TYPE 00 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR Indicates that object IV S20 STUVWXYZ type 00 is selected set 0123456789 lt gt SP gt DEL END TITLE REGIST TYPE Setting details AtoZ 0109 These characters and symbols are used to enter the title name to gt SP space bar This is used to make spaces These are used to move the cursor This is used to delete the character to the DEL delete right of the cursor END This key is used to return to the TYPE COND conditions of object type menu The title that has been entered will be displayed in the top left corner of the run menu screen TYPE00 IV S20 F L C1ALLC2NO O K VX X MEAS XXXXXXms MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION 9 33 Positional deviation measurement 9 3 Positional deviation and absolute position measurement The gray scale search function makes it possible to measure positional deviation as Purpose well as the absolute position It is also possible to detect the position of sub pixel units with great accuracy Application Used to determine the position of machine parts and substrates Determining the location of the positioning the fiducial mark mark that identifies the position of the substrate 1 1 point search Detecting the deviation in position in X and Y direc
12. Processing mode Binary conversion Binary Threshold ian Fixed threshold values gt m gt Point setting conversion correction value 0 to 255 Average lightness gt Point setting evaluation condition output condition These settings are found in the TYPEO00 MEAS 1 to 3 menu f EN EVALUATION COND 9OUTPUT CONDITION N OBJECT TYPE COND OBJECT TYPE COND 3 FINAL CALC RESULT a FINAL OUTPUT COND MAIN OPS MENU final numerical calculation final output conditions see section 9 2 4 see PC Function in Chapter 10 9 108 Existence inspection by point measurement 2 Setting details An explanation of the 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for each measurement program from the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type ane press SET key c Select to item 10 MEASUREMENT 1 1 MEASUREMENT 2 or item 2 MEASUREMENT 3 on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu TYPEO0 MEAS 1 This is how the line looks DMEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH when the object type is DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV Set to 00 and th
13. 9 26 T T rminationiode eer ced redet eei tet eee d e i t ae Pra ecd i ERI e YER 13 4 15 3 Threshold value setting i nerie a E EA EEA N 9 7 G 10 to 11 Area measurement by binary conversion ssssseseseeeeeneeeee ener 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion 9 93 Degree of match inspection for shape and size ssssssseeeenm nen 9 51 Distance and angle measurement center detection 9 62 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity sse 9 61 Existence inspection by point measurement sss eene 9 109 LG AGINSPOCTION EN 9 76 Object identification by binary 5 9 76 Positional deviation measurement sssssssssseseseeeeeenen nennen nnne nnne 9 41 Through image display mode ssssssseessseeeneenenenee enne nnne i 7 8 DBlurii eim 10 12 BEI PC MIN 10 10 RU SC 9 33 Total area Counting quantities by binary conversion essssseseseeeee eee 9 94 Object identification by binary conversion ssssssseseseeeeeneeneeneneenen nennen nens 9 103 Total 1 a
14. 12 1 OW E 9 5 SHOT MAG 6 4 Communication general purpose serial interface sse 13 1 COMMUNICATION iu osito teda rada ant ddnde ow a radar ada a dag vdd ad a a Rn a Rd a ia 5 2 6 16 Communication format general purpose serial I F 13 4 Communication standard nnne n nnne 11 18 Comparative calculations between images 9 24 to 25 9 27 Compatible models computer link 14 1 Computer link conditions esses 11 1 11 19 14 1 G 2 Computer link output and general purpose serial 11 20 Conditions for each measurement program measurement conditions Area measurement by binary conversion ssssssesseseeeeneneeneeeene eene ener 9 84 Counting quantities by binary conversion sssssssseeeeenemeeeenen nennen 9 92 to 93 Degree of match inspection for shape and size Genter of gravity cH e epe ptite dette tonii eta 9 62 eie ene EE 9 59 Distance and angle measurement ssssssssssssseseseeeeene enne nennen nnne nnn nnns 9 57 Existence inspection by
15. 1 87mm IV 60LD body Lighting section cm View A Light area Camera center Workpieces LA Object to be y measured When the light is projected from above the object and if reflection off the object influences the image processing try the following countermeasures Tilt the camera center axis within a range that does not affect the image processing to move away from the light reflected from the object Camera center 50mm Lighting distance 150 s Reflected light Workpieces 1 Object be measured Separate the camera from the lighting equipment Install the IV 60LD lighting equipment so that it will shines from an angle that prevents creation of the reflection One light Two lights IV S20 camera 7 IV 60LD body IV S20 camera B 9 IV 60LD body AZ Z Z 6 2 Installation Conditions and Method 2 and shutter speed The illuminance provided by the lighting equipment and the shutter speed must be set within the proper range The following graph shows the relation between illuminance and shutter speed for the IV S20L16 camera lens focal length 16 mm with an aperture setting of f 1 6 Determine the proper amount of illuminance and the correct shutter speed by referring to this graph Adjust the aperture as necessary To measure a m
16. E The setting sequence of the starting point conditions in a gray scale search MEASURE WINDOW 2REFFERENCE IMAGE gt SEARCH AREA gt DETECTED COORD 5 CONTRACT PIXELS ACCURANCY UPPER MENU Information about the recording of a reference image In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame The specifications for the windows are as follows In the case of a rectangular window _ Line ype Reference image Solid line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels 32X32 pixels X X Y X X Y 65536 pixels Search area Dotted line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels 32X32 pixels 512 X 480 pixels In the case of a horizontal line Sa Line type Movement Minimum length Maximum length Reference image Solid line n a horizontal direction units of 4 pixels Units of 4 Search area Dotted line n a vertical direction units of 1 pixel pixels 8 pixels 512 pixels In the case of a vertical line Ses Line type Movement Length Minimum length Maximum length Reference image Solid line n a horizontal direction units of 1 pixel Units of 4 Search area Dotted line a vertical direction units of 4 pixels pixels 8 pixels 480 pixels When either a horizontal or a vertical line is selected please bear the following in mind The reference image
17. When correction registration has been set to YES in items 6 and 7 on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu the pattern MEAS RESULT display will be corrected on the MAIN OPS MENU Note When the monitor camera mode has been set to the 2 screen divided display mode cameras 1 and 2 the patterns will not be displayed even if MEAS RESULT OUT is specified Patterns will not be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 5 PATTERN DISPLAY with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to MEAS RESULT OUT or NO with the right and left keys and press the SET key Display examples When the display mode has been set When the display mode has been set to MEAS RESULT OUT to NO TYPEO00 FH C1ALLC2NO TYPEO0 FH C1ALLC2NO O K VX X O K VX X MEAS XXXXXXms MEAS XXXXXXms MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION REGST NO 0 0 7 REGST NO 0 0 7 X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLI 000 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLO X 000 0 OK Y DEVIAT MDL E Y DEVIAT MD 000 0 OK MATCH MDLO MATCH MDLO 10000 OK e ANGL DEV 4001 7 OK ANGL DEV 001 7 OK X COORD MDL1 X 534 X COO X 5340 OK e Y COORD MD 480 Y COO X DEVIAT MDL F001 X DEV 001 0 OK Y DEVIAT MDL E Y DEV 001 0 OK MATCH MDL1 09999 OK MATCH MD 09999 OK
18. X0 6 00001 BUSY MSR CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG When the cursor is moved to the REG CHNG change register item and the up or down key is pressed the point number display will show groups of 16 objects at a time 9 Up key Next set of numbers Down key Previous set of numbers The following is an example of how the results are displayed when AV LIGHT LEVEL average light level is selected for the processing mode TYPEO0 FH C1ALLC2NO OK VX X MEAS XXXXXXms MEAS1 CAM1 POINT MEAS Display of the measured results P Average light level of registered points P000 116 OK and the OK NG evaluation of each P001 120 OK P002 114 OK P003 118 OK P004 116 P005 115 P006 P007 6 00000 vo 7 BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 9 114 System settings 9 11 System settings 1 light level monitor 1 Purpose 1 Allows the system to monitor changes the lighting of the environment If the light level exceeds the preset lighting range it will be regarded as a change in the environment and Light level over range will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU 2 Automatic adjustment of the threshold values used for binary conversions can follow changes in the lighting environment The threshold value is modified from the
19. 1 Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU M 1 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM save data in flash memory or OPERATIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen DATA SAVE Do you want to save the data YES MOVE NO ESC Press the SET key C The data saving operation will start and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen SAVING REFERENCE IMAGE MEE SYSTEM I O MEAS CONDITIONS When the data has been saved in the IV S20 flash memory the display will change from SAVING to SAVING COMPLETE Note If the ESC key is pressed the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV S20 flash memory In this case if the power to the IV S20 main husing is turned OFF or if the type No is changed the settings will be deleted 2 Press the ESC key The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU f the cursor was moved to OPERATIONS in step 1 the screen will automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU Continued on the following page 3 20 Operation Examples Degree of match inspection Continued from the preceding page 12 Degree of match inspection Press the TRG BRT key and the inspection result for image
20. xo 6 000 0 7 MSR CHNG JREG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG By moving the cursor to REG CHNG change registration and pressing the up key it is possible to see the measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations This is done by scrolling through them in this order registration numbers 0 1 2 3 7 These are followed by the results of the numerical calculations NOO to N15 The measurements screen also has this feature Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll back through the results in the opposite order Unregistered numbers will be skipped When there are no recorded numbers other than those currently on display or if no measurement has actually been carried out then it will not be possible to scroll through the data The displays for other modes are as follows 1 point search 1 point search 1 point edge REGST NO 0 0 7 REGST NO 0 0 7 X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLO X 000 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLO X 000 0 OK Y DEVIAT MDLO Y 000 0 OK Y DEVIAT MDLO Y 000 0 OK MATCH MDLO 10000 OK MATCH MDLO 10000 OK e ANGULAR DEVIT 001 7 OK XCOORD MDL1 X 5340 OK Y COORD MDL1 Y 480 0 OK ______ X DEVIAT MDL1 001 0 ow Y DEVIAT MDL1 Y 001 0 OK ro 1
21. Error recover 00041 ON y Outputting Y1 14 29 Computer link 3 Program 07377 TMR 000 0050 00040 00000 000 00000 F 044 04100 00006 00007 cl 1 PA 2 00007 008 OCT 377 09000 00007 04100 04101 TMR 001 0030 T001 04107 00007 Fc012 CMP 09000 000 07357 04100 07354 ord Fc012 CMP 09000 377 07356 04101 Ong F 000w XFER 09004 10412 04100 00040 00010 00010 04120 00040 00011 00011 04121 00040 00012 00012 04101 00041 00013 04107 00013 04101 00041 00006 04107 14 30 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Computer link Explanation of the program The nu T A 00 0040 mbers 1 to 16 below correspond to the same numbers on the preceding page Turn on the power and wait for 5 sec 07377 is kept ON for only 1 scan after the power is turned ON The camera is started 00040 enters a measurement trigger The trigger input 00007 is self latched when the operation start has begin 00000 ON The termination code of the write register is cleared The time out detection timer monitoring the computer link is started Time out error A check is made for normal termination Normal termination 09000 000 A check is made for errors Occurrence of an error 09000 0
22. 1 Connections Connections between IV S20s are shown below Communication connectors on the IV S20 Communication connectors on the IV S20 RS232C RS422 9 pin D sub RS232C RS422 9 pin D sub Pin NO Signal name Signalname Function Frame ground Frame ground Received data Transmitted Transmitted data data SG Signal ground Signal ground Received data 1 FL1 Memory protection 1 1 FL1 Memory protection 1 6 FL2 Memory protection 2 6 FL2 Memory protection 2 RS 232C The maximum length of the communication cable depends on the communication speed Communication speed k bps Cable length 9 6 192 15 m max Conduct a communication test before 38 4 57 6 115 2 2to3m using the moduleto transfer data 2 Operating procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key gt SYSTEM SETUP DOPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU Ww DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH amp RECEIVING PARMS EXEC 1 CDINIT ALL PARMS EXEC 1 Move the cursor to item 6 RECEIVING PARMS receive all parameters with the up and down keys and press the SET key cC Communication with the connected IV S20 will be started and the progress of communica tion will be displayed on the bottom of the screen COMMUNICATING SYSTEM I O E OBJECT TYPE DATA MEH
23. 3 Operation on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Y OBJECT TYPE COND OBJECT TYPE NO EDIT TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 CAMERA 17 POS ADJ CAMERA1 MEAS 0 CAMERA2 POS ADJ CAMERA2 FCIH 00 0 15 COPY OBJ TYPE00 RAE NO TO NEXT SUB MENU NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY NO TO NEXT SUB MENU NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 8SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 MEASUREMENT 3 FINAL CALC RESULT 5SYSTEM IN OUT HALT MEAS ON NG UPPER MENU NO TO NEXT SUB MENU NO TO NEXT SUB MENU NO TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU NO YES 1 Move the cursor to MEAS 0 CAMERA measurement 0 camera 1 and press the SET key gt The TYPE00 MEASOQ type 00 measurement 0 menu will be displayed 4 Operation on TYPE00 MEAS0 menu Y TYPEOO MEASO 11 copy INITIALIZATION MEAS PROG COND 37 EVALUATION COND 2 SELECT MEAS TYPE NO MEAS POSITION DEVIATE EXEC TYPEO00 CAM1NO EXEC TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU 8UPPER MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU 1 Move the cursor to SELECT MEAS TYPE selection of measurement and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to MEAS POSITION DEVIATE measurement of positional deviation and press
24. DISTANCE SETTINGS TYPEO0 MEAS 1 DST amp ANGL MEAS i DDISTANCE NUMBER 00 0 15 DISTANCE TYPE NO DIST BETW 2PT DIST BETW X DIST BETW Y POINT NO 1 ST PNTOO AUX NO POINT NO 2 ST PNTOO UPPER MENU _ If auxiliary point settings have been made in the AUX CONDITIONS auxiliary condition menu then they may be used for the measurement conditions here Items 3 and will be displayed if except NO is selected in item 2 Distance settings Setting details CDDISTANCE NUMBER Set this to any number from 0 to 15 distance selection Set the distance type to be the distance between two points distance DISTANCE TYPE between X coordinates or distance between Y coordinates POINT NO 1 Enter the number either the starting point number or the auxiliary number for the starting point of the measurement distance between two POINT NO 2 points that was specified in item 2 BUPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu The distance type when distance between two points has been selected The distance between 2 points A xoxiysva vay Point 1 X1 Y1 Point 2 X2 2 The distance type when distance between X coordinates has been selected The distance between X coordinates X2 X11 Point 1 X1 Y1 2 2 2 The distance type when distance between Y coordinates has been selected Point 1 X1 Y1 The distance between Y
25. PIXEL MDLO DETECT ACCURANCY UPPER MENU detection coordinates pixel contraction accuracy of detection This is the sequence of events when a 2 point search is selected MEAS WINDOW REF IMAGE MODEL1 SEARCH AREA MDLO measurement window reference images DTECT COORD MDLO EN CONTR PIXEL MEAS WINDOW MDL1 detection coordinates pixel contraction measurement window REF IMAGE MODEL1 SEARCH AREA SDTECT COORD MDL1 reference images MDL1 detection coordinates LA CONTR PIXEL MDL1 DETECT ACCURANCY UPPER MENU pixel contraction accuracy of detection Information about the recording of a reference image In order to record a reference image it is necessary to use the freeze frame The specifications for the windows are as follows In the case of a rectangular window Reference image Solid line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels 32 x 32 pixels X xY X x Y 65536 pixels Search area Dotted line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels 32 x 32 pixels 512 x 480 pixels E In the case of a horizontal line a E Line type Movement Minimum length Maximum length Reference image Solid line In a horizontal direction units of 4 pixels Units of 4 In a vertical direction units of 1 pixel pixels Spm 312 pixels Se
26. gt ae cp pep 5 5 22 5 2 slotted holes 3 2 mm wide I for attachment to the mounting surface 28 31 lt 1 4 20 UNC threaded hole 20 uo uu for attachment to the mounting surface 28 When the camera head cable is bent its bending radius should be larger than 40 mm If the camera cable will be bent repeatedly during operation design the cable layout so that the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use components that can be flexed up to 2 million times Head cable Bending radius Min 40 mm 6 31 Chapter 7 Setting and Operating Outlines 7 1 Setting and operating procedures The setting and operating procedures are outlined below D System design Measurement program positional deviation measurement degree of match inspection etc Number of cameras externally connected devices system components Input output measurement start input result output object type change etc Lighting equi pment illumination shutter speed lens etc 2 Installation assembly Connection of cameras and monitor to the IV S20 main housing Installation of the IV S20 main housing and camera body Connection of a power supply input output terminals and external devices Ref section 1 2 Measurement programs 4 1 Basic system configuration 4 2 System configuration examples Chapter 11 Input
27. Camera 1 on the whole screen Camera 2 on the whole screen When CAM has been specified in item When 2 has been specified in item 1 MONITOR OUTPUT 1 MONITOR OUTPUT C1ALL C2NO C1NO C2ALL 8 1 Run Menu Conditions and Settings Simultaneous display on a divided screen When CAM1 has been set to UP When 182 has been specified item 1 CUP MONITOR OUTPUT When item 2 182 has been set to CAM1 MD CAM2 MD When CAM1 has been set to LO Screen for camera 1 When CAM has been set to UP C2UP Screen for camera 2 When CAM has been set to LO i C2LO 2 Output monitor switching by parallel input On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key Move the cursor to 3 1 0 CONDITIONS input output conditions on the SYSTEM SETUP menu and press the SET key gt IN OUT SETTINGS MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRG SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL INPUT PARALLEL CHG MEAS NO X5 X6 NO YES PARALLEL INPUT X5 EXT INP REG REF IMG MSRO PARALLEL INPUT X6 EXT INP CHG IMG OUT CAM CAM MEAS OUTPUT STATUS BUSY READY 8 SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU 9COMPUTER LINK NEXT SUB MENU GAIN OFFSET TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU _ Item 2 is displayed when CCD TRG CCD trigger has been specified in item T
28. 1 TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA1_y ADJ REG 0 PNTSXY id MEAS 0 CAMERAS TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ABSCAMERA2 gt NO ADJ REG 0 TPNTSXY 4 ERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 2 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU HALT MEAS ON NG NO YES UPPER MENU Setting procedure 1 Select item 5 POS ADJ CAMERA 1 for camera 1 or item 7 POS ADJ CAMERA 2 for camera 2 using the up and down keys 2 Move the cursor to NO ADJ no adjustment using the left and right keys Then select either X and Y correction angular correction standard or angular correction high precision using the up and down keys 3 Move the cursor to REG 0 register 0 using the left and right keys and then select 0 to 7 using the up and down keys Registration No 0 to 7 correspond to register No 0 to 7 MEASURING COND measurement condition menu in positional deviation measurement 4 n the case of an X and Y correction move the cursor to 1PNTSXY first X and Y point using the left and right keys and then select XY or X or Y using the up and down keys In the case of angular correction it is unnecessary to perform step 4 5 Press the SET key Move the cursor to item UPPER MENU and press the SET key
29. 6MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU 9 Move the cursor to REGST NO register number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 00 and press the SET key 10 Move the cursor to 3DISTANCE distance selection with the up and down keys and press the SET key 11 Move the cursor to the lower limit or upper limit and press the SET key Select the digits with the left and right keys and enter the value 280 0 to 300 0 with the up and down keys Criteria for distance judgement 280 0 to 300 0 pixels oistance 280 0 300 0 OPIXEL After defining the lower and upper limits press the SET key and ESC key 12 Move the cursor to UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu 13 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu Y 11 Setting the final evaluation output condition This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally see page 3 30 The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112 When the final evaluation result is OK C112 is ON and when the result is NG it is OFF The result of final evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112 The setting procedures are the same as described in item 9 in section 3 2 Position measureme
30. IV S20 main housing Power supply 24 VDC Chapter 5 Part Names and Functions This section describes the names and functions of the IV S20 main housing the camera camera lens camera body and camera cable and the remote key pad which comprise the IV S20 system See section 6 2 and 6 3 for details about the housing brackets camera angle bracket and conversion connector 5 1 IV S20 main housing 9 Frame ground terminal Power terminal block D I O terminal block IE 2 09 mark SHARP ws software version 2 09 POWER IV S20 main housing front 8 Power lamp POWER I IT VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2 RS232C RS422 IV S20 main housing side Monitor connector VIDEO 5 Camera 1 connector CAMERA1 Camera 2 connector CAMERA2 I O terminal block pes to X6 C OUTPUT YO to Y7 BUSY C Remote key pad connector REMOTE Communication connector RS232C RS422 The block has 7 input terminals and 9 output terminals External devices are con
31. 1 Output evaluation mento lo Measurement 0 1 type WW 5 25 N 250 2 3 717 Yo Yi 115 5 5 Camera 1 Camera 2 0 518 data data 1 1 1 1 1 Data on Dataon Data on measure measure measure SC SC CR ment 1 ment 2 lment 3 2 L Measurement gt Number of the measurement whose numerical data will be output 0 to Object type gt Object type for which the measurement was executed 00 to 15 Output evaluation result YO to Y15 gt 0 NG or unspecified 1 OK Logical result calculation evaluation calculation result These data are output in the order of the measurement function numbers 0 to 3 4 level reading code 28 13 The illuminance level measured by the illuminance monitor function and the evaluation result are read Command f 1 1 2 8 5 SC SCICR amp Hi 1 o 1 m Response d 2 8 Re Ro PS 8 ce otio SC SC CR 1 1 1 1 Camera No 1 camera 1 2 camera 2 Object type Object type for which the measurement was executed 00 to 15 Result 0 NG 1 OK 0 to 255 0 13 10 Communication 5 Corrected light level reading code 29 0 The corrected light level measured by the illuminance monitor function the evalu
32. MENU The type can be manually changed the MAIN OPS MENU Note If OBJ NO MANL MODE is set to YES the type cannot be changed with an external interface parallel I O or general purpose serial IF The type cannot be manually changed on the MAIN OPS MENU Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 9 OBJ NO MANL MODE with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to YES or NO with the left and right keys and press the SET key Changing the object type on the MAIN OPS MENU 1 Move the cursor to MANL TYPE CHG with the left and right keys 2 Change the object type number displayed in the uppermost area with the up and down keys 8 9 Run Menu Conditions and Settings 9 Image display Select the desired measurement image status FREEZE or THROUGH on the MAIN OPS MENU RUN MENU SETTINGS MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 2 CAM1 amp 2 1 amp 2 CAM1 MD CAM2 MD CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO NO PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR i OBJ NO MANL MODE NO YES DIMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH UPPER MENU 10 Main operations menu lock 8 To prevent accidental changes to conditions you have set the
33. O An error response has been returned from the programmable controller Communications are performed normally The error code is contained in the evaluation result area and the error code is displayed on the monitor Take the proper measures according to the error code different models use different codes A time out has occurred during communication through the computer link Make sure the power supply of the programmable controller and check the connections of the cables Check the communication conditions and computer link settings Start address error larger than the end address Check the address Hardware errors SDRAM error Flash memory error Replace the IV S20 itself VRAM error has occurred Flash ROM delete error Flash ROM write error Flash ROM verify error Replace the IV S20 itself Processing errors The measurement conditions for the specified object type have not been set The setting area is larger than the screen due to positional correction Correction after binary conversion The illuminance monitor function system has not been set Correction after binary conversion The threshold range has exceeded the specified range No edge detection A reference image has not been registered 15 3 Check the abnormal setting Troubleshooting Termination code hex The number of labels excee
34. 2 Contents of the measurement result block for each measurement function 1 Positional deviation absolute position measurement 1st point center coordinates Registration 2nd point No 0 center coordinates Angular deviation Provided Registration The registration No 1 to 7 contain the same data as the No 1 to 7 registration No 0 When a sign is provided if the highest order bit of the data is on 1 a minus sign is used and if the bit is off 0 a pulus sign is used The value decimal is pressed two s comple ment notation A two s complement number is obtained by inverting the Os and 1s in a binary number and adding 1 Note If a registration number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brought forward Example of the data in block 0 Only registration No 0 082005280FA00EBOFF76 X Y X Y Angular Center coordinates Center coordinates deviation 13 of 1st point of 2st point Registration No 0 These data are in hexadecimal They are converted to the actual decimal measurements as shown below Data Decimal Measurement number result value Center coordinates X of 1st point Center coordinates of 2nd point Angular deviation 13 15 Communication Sign br Decimal digits point digit Data example Hexa decimal Measure ment result 2 point None Non
35. 00 lt ol gt PC scan YO C001 cycle I Output refresh Has a measurement start NO input signal been received YES Y Image processing for measurement 0 using camera 1 Y Ladder circuit calculation based on output conditions for measurement 0 of camera 1 Ex C000 LL NO2 C 1 0X0 Y NLA C000 Y Measurement processing for measurement 0 using camera 2 Ladder calculation based on output conditions for measurement 0 of camera 2 Measurement EDS eee cee a processing Measurement processing for measurement 1 cycle Y Ladder calculation based on output conditions for measurement 1 Y Measurement processing for measurement 2 Y Ladder calculation based on output conditions for measurement 2 Y Measurement processing for measurement 3 y Ladder calculation based on output conditions for measurement 3 PC Function 1 Power ON sequence The parallel output terminals YO to Y7 are reset and the data memories input relays output relays auxiliary relays timer and counter are cleared 2 PC scan cycle In the PC scan cycle the following three operations 1 to 3 are repeated cyclically 1 Input refresh The ON OFF data from the parallel input terminals XO to X6 is written into the data memory input
36. 6 Counting quantities by binary conversion Checks the number of objects max 3000 pcs when there is more than one object in an image Measurement of the object s position is optional When the specified pixel field has been converted to a binary image the white areas 1 are measured or identified as separate objects and counted Counting pieces of food or parts Measured result E Number of workpieces total area siz Inspection procedure Capture image Convert to binary values Measure quantity total area size Detailed instruc Setting measurement program gt See 9 8 Counting quantities by binary conversion tion 7 Object identification labeling by binary conversion When there are several objects and the measuring position is arbitrary the presence or absence of objects and the size of the objects can be determined The specified pixel area is converted to a binary image The number of objects total size of the white area the objects and the area center of gravity main axis angle fillet diameter and circumference of each white area can be measured Counting the number of food products or parts measuring the sloped angle or center of gravity of parts and measuring the size of food products Measurement of 6 objects Measured result E Object identification labeling and Objects numbering number of objects present total area E Area center of gravity main axi
37. C119 TMO 0010 4 10msX10 100ms Measurement termination C119 C000 20 A C NG output OK External trigger input BUSY 100ms External output YOO 3 Pipeline control If the interval between triggers is too close to the total measuring time on a non stop conveyor line the time allowed for outputting the measurement result is reduced and the external device will not receive the measurement results In this case a pipeline control type of circuit should be created so that the external device can receive the measurement results in the next cycle C112 YOO O OK NG output Final evaluation result External output Measurement Measurement Measurement Measurement kK N aa N 1 gt IK N 2 gt p N 3 BUSY L L Evaluation Evaluation Evaluation C112 YOO result of N result of N 1 result of N 2 10 15 PC Function 10 5 PC monitor screen On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to PC MONTR item on the menu bar at the bottom of the screen and press the SET key Then the PC monitor screen will be displayed TYPE00 AREA1 FL C1ALLC2NO OK B C112 C1 002 2 OK MEAS XXXXXXms C2 100 0 OK ONO FIAL NUMERIC CALC Select BUSY or READY ANOO 00008600 0 A on the I O SETTINGS menu QD The ON B or OFF L status
38. This completes the settings for positional correction 9 21 Shared settings 3 Correction example Example of correcting the first X and Y point 1 Amount of correction X2 X1 Y2 Y1 specified by measurement 0 positional deviation measurement Coordinates X1 Y1 of object in the reference image model 0 Target object coordinates X2 Y2 Measured results Detected coordinates X2 Y2 Y2 Y1 Deviation amount X2 X1 Y2 Y1 Search area X2 X1 2 Measuring a point using measurement 1 Li H ve Point X2 X1 f the first point is X only the X position will be corrected Likewise if the first point is Y only the Y position will be corrected 9 22 Shared settings Example of angular correction 1 Detection of the amount of angular deviation using measurement 0 2 point search positional deviation measurement Reference image Reference image model 0 Bote Sy e Detected coordinates gt SS model 0 Searcharea ys model 0 Reference image model 1 A 2d Detected coordinates IN model 1 Search area model 1 Target image Detecting the amount of angular deviation Detected coordinates model 0 Position of reference image Detected coordinates model 1 2 Performi
39. 6 2 Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO registration number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 0 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 4 MATCH degree of match with the up and down keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the right and left keys and press the SET key Select a digit with the right and left keys and then set the value to 09000 with the up and down keys Criteria for successful match 90 00 to 100 0095 amaron 09000 10000 After defining the lower limit press the SET key and ESC key 5 Move the cursor to 6 NUMBER with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the right and left keys and enter the value to 005 with the up and down keys Move the cursor to the upper limit position with the right and left keys and enter the value to 005 with the up and down keys numer 005 005 After defining the lower and upper limit press the SET key 6 Move the cursor to UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu 7 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu 0 Setting the final evaluation output condition Y This setting is used to output the result o
40. Object to be measured Detection point 1 6 Move the cursor to 12 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu 7 On the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu move the cursor to 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu co Operation on the EVALUATION COND menu M 1 Move the cursor to 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation condition with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The EVALUATION COND menu will be displayed EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS1 DEG OF MATCH DREGST NO 00 0 15 OUT 21 MATCH MDL 0 10000 10000 NO 3 LO 000 0 511 0 NO RD MDLO 000 0479 0 No 4 LIGT LVL MDL 0 000 07255 0 NO CN mw MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU 2 Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO register number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 00 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 2 MATCH MDLO degree of match model 0 with the up and down keys and press the SET key Continued on the following page 3 19 Operation Examples Degree of match inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 4 Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the left and right keys and pr
41. gt The OBJECT TYPE COND menu will be displayed 3 Operation on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 H i DOBJECT TYPE NO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPE00 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 CAMERA NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA1 NO ADJ REG 0 1 PNTSXY MS 11 6MEAS 0 CAMERA2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 2 POS ADJ CAMERA2 NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY amp SELECT CAMERA IMG NO 1 1 CAM1 amp 2 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU HALT MEASONNG YES UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to 6POS ADJ CAMERA1 position correction with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to REG 0 1PNTSXY registration 0 1 first point XY with the right left up and down keys and press the SET key Correction of X Y coordinates 3 Move the cursor to 2UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Move the cursor to QDPERATIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The MAIN OPS MENU will be displayed This completes the settings for position correction using a deviation measurement Run the program and the pre
42. instruc Setting measurement program See 9 3 Positional deviation absolute position tion measurement Overview 2 Degree of match for shape and size Compare a good criterion image to an objective image by inspecting matching levels using the garay scale seach function Determine whether the port is acceptable or NG by checking similarities between the criterion image and the workpiece image A matching level comparison using binary images is also possible Detect positional deviation of labels detect contamination of different parts inspectthe mounting of electronic parts on PC boards detect mis print inspect for missing electric parts such as terminals and simple letter inspection Detecting label deviations on packages Appli cation 144 Search area 144 Search area Criterion image i for positioning Criterion image for positioning for positioning 1 for positioning SERIAL NO 8F053G26 MODEL IV S20 8F053G26 MODEL IV S20 SERIAL NO Criterion image HI Criterion image for measuring object for measuring object A Good label ANG label Inspection procedure D Conduct a gray scale search of the criterion image position 2 Correct the position of the object being measured from the coordinates for the criterion image obtained in item 1 above 8 If the matching level of the object image is low the IV S20 can determine that the label posi
43. 2 00 OFF 01 ON Auxiliary relay C127 Evaluation None None Result Providied Provided Evaluation None None Results of numerical m calculations measurement 0 Result Providied Provided camera 1 Evaluation None 2 None Result Providied 8 Provided Results of numerical calculations measurement 0 camera 2 to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical NOO to N15 contain the same data as those in the calculations measurement 1 item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical NOO to N15 contain the same data as those in the calculations measurement 2 item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical NOO to N15 contain the same data as those in the calculations measurement 3 item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of final numerical ANOO to AN15 contain the same data as those in calculations the item measurement 0 camera 1 Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 NG 1 OK or 2 no evaluation Note 1 All items will be output regardless of whether the registration is YES or NO Note 2 The data in block 50 are not output using measurement 3 code 12 They are output using measurement 4 code 13 gt See page 13 7 13 24 Communication Results of numerical calculations measurement 0 camera 1 Decimal Sign Evaluation None None Resu
44. CNT CNO 0 7 SET VL 000 000 999 DEL UPPER MENU 61 PAGE 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT i INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC 3 Move the cursor to 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to the Oth column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the up down left and right keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to AUXRLY C000 0 127 auxiliary relay C000 with the left and right keys specify C000 with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The logic symbol will be displayed in the Oth column of INPUT 0 PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C000 LOGIC JF 5 Move the cursor to OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET key Select OUTYOO 0 to 15 with the left and right keys enter 00 with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO 00 Yoo LOGIC b lt gt 6 Move the cursor to 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Continued on the following page 3 48 Operation Examples Numeric calculation Continued from the preceding page Y 5 Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU 1 Press the ESC key gt The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed
45. Center of gravity Window for triggering the shutter operation The center of gravity is the geographical center of the image It is determined by treating the binary image to be measured as an object that has mass C mount A system for mounting lenses on a camera body The flange back the distance from the reference level for mounting a lens to the focal plane surface is defined as 17 526 mm Computer link Programmable controllers PC are equipped with communication protocols The computer link is used to transfer data between the PC and an external computer or the like using this communication protocol The IV S20 supports the computer link protocols used by Sharp Omron and Mitsubishi PCs Therefore the PC does not need a custom communication program in order to create a computer link with the IV S20 Contraction G gt See Expansion and contraction to eliminate binary noise in the image Glossary E Edge emphasis gt See Pre processing Edge extruction gt See Pre processing Expansion gt See Expansion and contraction to elimiate binary noise in the image Edge detection The edge refers to the boundaries between the brighter white and darker black parts in an image The edge detection function is used to detect this boundary by processing the image ge a width width A B Brightness __ Difference in darkness level A Sca
46. NEXT SUB MENU CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH RECEIVING PARMS EXEC INIT ALL PARMS EXEC BSELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS 1 Move the cursor to DBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type using the up and down keys and press the SET key ohe OBJECT TYPE COND menu will be displayed Y Continued on the following page 3 2 Operation Examples Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the preceding page Y 3 Operation on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu OBJECT TYPE COND FC1H TYPE NO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPEO0 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 CAMERA NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA1 NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 6 0 CAMERA2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 ADJ REG 0 1 PNTSXY SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 QMEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 1 PMEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU 8HALTMEAS NO YES UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to MEASUREMENT 1 and press the SET key Y D The TYPEO0 MEAS type 00 measurement 1 menu will be displayed Operation on the TYPEO0 MEAS1 menu eS TYPEO0 MEAS1 MEAS SELECTION
47. Nu Line used in detecting the object If the position of the line used in to detect the object is out of position relative to the reference point then it is adjusted accordingly If this correction is unnecessary then set 1 REGST NO registration number to REG NO disable registration which is in the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu see page 9 74 Return to the MEASURING COND menu and select 6 UPPER MENU v Continued on the following page 9 77 Lead inspection Continued from the previous page Select item 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation conditions on the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 INSPECT LEAD REGSTNO 0 0 3 TEST RESULT OUT XCOORD 0000 5110 0000 OK NO Y COORD 000 0 479 0 000 0 OK No These displays can be set using MATCH 10000 10000 10000 the up and down keys The MEAS OBJ CRT 0 0 0 7 Choices are NO YO 7 C000 to NUMBER _ 000 128 ino 0127 DDISTANCE 000 0 702 0 050 0 OK INO 1048 01 E Maximum distance amp L LNGTH 000 0 702 0 1000 OK No Minimum distance 097 0 A TEST RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU Items 2 to 4 and to 8 will not be displayed if the setting at items 1 and 5 is REG NO disable registration on the MEASURING COND mesurement condition menu Evaluation conditions Setting details Enter
48. 01NO0 to 01N15 result for measurement 0 camera 1 to 02300 02N15 Calculation result for measurement 0 camera 2 NOO to 15 1300 to 1N15 Calculation result for measurement 1 NOO to 15 2300 to 2N15 Calculation result for measurement 2 to 15 3NO0 to 3N15 Calculation result for measurement 3 NOO to 15 ANOO to AN15 ABS TAN 00 to 15 C Constant 99999999 9 to 99999999 9 9 19 Shared settings 5 Position correction Based on the positional deviation data measurement 0 positional deviation measurement the correction of the image coordinates is dealt with using measurements 1 to 3 1 Correction details The types of position correction available are XY correction angular correction standard and angular correction high precision The position is adjusted according to the amount of deviation in X and Y at the first point model 0 detected in measurement 0 There are three correction directions X axis correction Y axis correction and X and Y axis correction X axis correction Adjusted misalignment in the X axis Y axis correction Adjusted misalignment in the Y axis X and Y axes correction Adjusted misalignment in both the X and Y axes XY correction The position is adjusted because of a detected angular deviation in rotation 2 point search 2 point edge 1 point search 1 point edge from measurement 0 Angular correction s
49. 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL UPPER MENU PAGEO g 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC E INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 i LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows Degree of match M 00MO to 15MO 00M1 to 15M1 Coordinates X Y 00X0 to 15X0 00Y0 to 15YO 00X1 to 15X1 00Y1 to 15Y1 Light level G 00G to 15G 00G to 15G Calculation N NOO to N15 Auxiliary relay C C000 to C127 The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU Continued on the following page 9 55 Degree of match inspection Continued form the previous page Pressing the TRG BRT key will run a check by starting a manual measurement Shown below is an example of how the display will look when the gray scale search mode has been selected and both models 0 and 1 have been set to Search YES Display of the inspection TYPEOO0 FL C1ALL C2NO result VX X Final evaluation result gt O K Measuring time MEAS XXXXXXms Measurement number and MEAS1 CAM1 DEG OF MATCH camera number Registration number for the measurement condition REGST NO 00 0 15 S nC ane MATCH MDL 0 09878 OK 9 X COORD MDL 0 X 288 0 OK Detected coordinates for model 0 Y COORD MDL 0 190 0 OK Average light level for mo
50. 8 1 Output terminals YO to Y7 BUSY sssssssssssssseseeees entente enne entries nn ren rents nnne en 6 16 Output terminals YO to Y 15 7 mio re ete e eet tec e 10 10 P Parallel input on tmd ti tide rtu eS ee TER ee ETERNA IS 11 1 Parallel inpUteXD eee tees bati mao lette eed son utm LIE M M ue 8 2 11 1 Parameter setting support software for IV S20 4 2 7 14 Partial Image neenon nee een 8 3 atl erc E 11 18 Patterndisplay aiuta eter t bee dett Pap tea dea P d e er LP ds Fea 8 5 TURCO zo kunt ac D Se Lt D ILS ta Eco cios 10 1 PG manufacturer inet Lo e t e LER 11 19 ooi E ete Dac vri D deerat dir e rd 7 3 PC Monitor Screen uio tr IH edebat ne ee ve aan 10 16 PO scam cycle ii ote aet t e eo e diete ter iO btt ptt ue ode aud 10 2 PC SDeGITICatlOL S6 1o idu DON EV URN EY ERU RR NR nad 16 2 Peripheral object identification by binary conversion eeeeenm 9 102 PIXeli da G 8 Pixel ContEactlon i E Ui e at On eee t tei aq ede reddes 9 6 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 48 Distance and angle measurement gray scale search 9 60 Lead M E Te Toni o 9 E
51. Capture the workpiece image to be measured 9 Move the captured image of the object so that the upper left corner of the captured image is right on top of the upper left edge of the reference image Calculates the level of matching between the two images based on the stored gray scale image data 4 If the match is G slide the reference image over one pixel width and then measure the level of matching at that position 5 Repeat step 4 above for the whole workpiece image until a good match is found Output Application Maximum matching level value Shape inspection The center coordinates where the highest level of matching is obtained 777777 gt Positional deviation measurement Detected image Search range in the image Gray scale processing gray image processing This is a process used to handle the unmodified captured image data obtained from the CCD camera In other words the image data is not converted to binary values This process produces more precise results than binary image processing one pixel one bit by using 8 bits one pixel 256 gray levels to represent each pixel in a gray scale image Advantage Theoretically better precision and reliability can be offered because the image contains more information about the brightness of each pixel in the image Disadvantage More processing time is required because this approach must handle a large amount of d
52. Chapter 7 Setting and Operating Outlines sesssss 7 1 to 14 7 1 Setting and operating procedures 7 1 7 2 Screen specifications 7 2 1 Operation run screen 7 2 2 Menu configuration 7 4 3 Set condition configuration 7 7 4 Image display 7 8 7 3 Remote key pad specifications 7 9 7 4 Operation flow 7 10 1 Processing after power is turned ON and main loop processing 7 10 2 Operation flow after a measurement start input signal is given 7 12 7 5 When using the IV S30SP 7 14 Chapter 8 Run Menu Conditions and Settings 8 1 to 10 1 Output monitor 8 1 2 Image capture 8 3 3 Message display 8 4 4 Pattern display 8 5 5 Binary image display 8 6 6 8 angle correction image display 8 7 7 Crosshair cursor display 8 8 8 Manually setting the object type 8 9 9 Image display 8 10 10 Main operations menu lock 8 10 Chapter 9 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type 9 1 to 117 9 1 Outline 9 1 9 2 Shared settings 9 3 1 Window shape selection and settings 9 3 2 Image settings 9 6 3 Evaluation conditions 9 13 4 Numerical calculations 9 14 5 Position correction 9 20 6 Comparative calculations between images 9 24 7 Copying editing 9 28 8 Editing after initialization 9 31 9 Title registration 9 33 9 3 Positional deviation and absolute position measurement 9 34 9 4 Degree of match insp
53. Check whether the camera position has changed Make sure that the illuminance monitor window has been set to the intermediate illumination Make sure that the criteria have been set properly 15 2 Troubleshooting 2 Causes of termination codes when an error occurs and remedies When an abnormal termination code other than 00 is received take the following measures Termination Communication errors code hex The specified processing code does not exist Check the processing code The wrong number of data items was specified in the text Check the number of data items in the text The text data is outside the acceptable range Check the text setting range The results of the check sums are not identical Check the checksoms Check the communication environment for problems such as electric noise which may come in on the communication line The header code was not attached to the head of the communication command Check whether the header code was attached to the head of the communication command An asynchronous error has occurred Check the communication environment for problems such as electric noise which may come in on the communication line The communication command contains an improper number of data items Check the number of data items in the communication command o x o x P o 2
54. Computer Link 4 Connection with an OMRON PC Applicable models Host link modules 1 C500 LK203 C1000H 2 C200 LK201 C200H RS 232C 3 C200 LK202 C200H RS 422 4 CV CPU link port CV1000 CVM1 5 CV500 LK201 CV1000 CVM1 Start the OMRON PC in the monitor mode when turning ON the power If the OMRON PC is started in any other mode a computer link error will occur The operation mode is specified using the following items for each support tool The initial mode setting switch on the memory module or the monitor mode rising bits of the system setting FUN49 instruction Installed support tool Support tools other than the programming console OFF The bit used to set the monitor mode in the system setting FUN49 instruction Program mode Monitor mode Memory module initial setting switch ON Operation mode No support tool Operation mode Monitor mode Operation mode Programming console Programming console setting mode 2 1 Insert the ladder program step shown below at address 000000 ARTOOI FUN49 00000 E s A302 000 000 2 When the programming console is used set the PC to the monitor mode using the switch For details see the user s manual for the OMRON PLC module 1 Module setting Item Description Module No 00 to 31 Transmission speed k bit sec 19 2 9 6 Command level 1 Parity Odd or
55. OPS MENU can be locked so that Display procedure Follow the procedure described below when turning ON the power to the IV S20 main housing and the POWER ON SETTINGS menu will be displayed on the monitor 1 Turn ON the power to the IV S20 main housing while holding down the ESC key 2 Keep pressing the ESC key down for approx 3 sec after turning ON the power and the menu will be displayed POWER ON SETTINGS MAIN OPS MENU UNLOCK LOCK OPERATION ciem Description All of the operating conditions for the NECS IV S20 can be changed The MAIN OPS MENU is locked and LOCK no change can be made Operation procedure 1 On the POWER ON SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 1 MAIN OPS MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to UNLOCK or LOCK with the left and right keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to item 2 OPERATION with the up and down keys and press the SET key Press the SET key once more gt The screan returns to the MAIN OPS MENU Display when the MAIN OPS MENU is locked TYPE00 AREA1 F L C1ALLC2NO OK LOCK MEAS XXXXXXms MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION 8 10 FREEZE Measurements can be made on a frozen image THROUGH Measurements can be made on a frozen image Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item IMAGE DISPLAY with the up and down keys and press t
56. Only YO is OK Measurement 0 using camera 1 Positional deviation measurement Measurement function of measurement 0 using camera 2 none Measurement function of measurement 1 none 7 Measurement functional 1 In this example the write start measurement 2 none address has been set to Measurement function of 09000 measurement3 none 2 The data in registers 09014 to 09024 are the same as those shown in the example on page X 1st point i 13 6 center coordinates Output data from measurem 2nd point ent 1 using center camera coordinates block 1 Angular deviation Note 1 The PC must be write enabled A Mitsubishi or OMRON PC will operate in the same manner but use different PC register and relay addresses Note 2 If the PC has not been connected to the object type input parallel on the IV S20 the object type No is set to 0 To set different types first enter the object type numbers parallel using the type input terminals on the IV S20 14 28 Computer link 2 Flow chart lt 5 second interval Y 4 Camera starts operation 00040 ON Transferring the result output YO to Y15 from registers 09004 and 09005 to addresses 0412 and 10413 Y Toma o relay Turning ON relay 00013 Y Outputting YO
57. SELECT CAMERA CAM1 2 copy EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC SMEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU In item D select MEASR BIN AREA measure the area of binary images Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item SELECT CAMERA IMG camera selection which is in the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Select item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs 2 a 2 MEASURING COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 MEAS BIN AREA DREGST NO 00 0 15 REG NO YES BINARY AREA COND TO NEXT SUB MENU SSUPPER MENU _ _ p If YES is specified in item 1 REGST NO registration number then item 2 will be displayed 1 Measurement conditions Setting details REGST NO Set this to any number from 0 to 15 and select NO or registration number YES to store it BINARY AREA COND The condition for binary areas are set on the next menu conditions for binary areas UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Select item 2 BINARY AREA COND conditions for binary areas v Continued on the following page 9 84 Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the previous page This is how the display looks MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE when item MEAS WIN
58. Y Operation on the SYSTEM SETUP menu SYSTEM SETUP FC1H DOPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 11 IO CONDITIONS NEXT SUB MENU ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU BDISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH amp RECEIVING PARMS EXEC DINIT ALL PARMS EXEC amp SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS 1 Move the cursor to OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The OBJECT TYPE COND menu will be displayed Y Continued on the following page 3 31 Operation Examples Lead inspection ds ada from the preceding page 3 Operation on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 H DOBJECT NO 00 0 15 QEDIT COPY OBJ TYPE00 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA1 ADJ REG 0 PNTSXY 6 0 CAMERA2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 17 MEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 2MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU i FINAL CALC RESULT NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU BHALT MEASONNG NO YES UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to
59. operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operatiory during P P P P P condition C C C C measurement measurement CJC C C C When the object type is H Parallel output is valid for E changed all Y output v control after the auxiliary relays turn OFF measurementresultis i determined 1 ri Parallel output D is YO to Y7 m Ix Result output X Result output Serial output Note Result output The data to be sent to the personal computer will be response of general purpose serial command code Wig 11 6 Setting the Input Output Conditions 4 Measurement start input general purpose serial object type change general purpose serial result output general purpose serial parallel Setting order 1 Configuration example VO SETTINGS Camera 1 image capturing D MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG M Camera 2 image capturing SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU e Personal computer Command response Monitor L Remote key pad IV S20 main housing Power supply 24 VDC 4 See pages 13 6 and 13 7 for details about the measurement execution commands codes 10 11 12 and 13 Time
60. the criteria and the evaluation result OK NG is output Command JObject 1 8 scisclcr Response i Object Output evaluation i result 1 8 YO Y1 Y15SCjSC CR BEIC 010 and 1 Bu H The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement execution function 1 code 10 2 Measurement execution function 6 evaluation result measurement data fixed code 19 The measurement for a specified object type is executed and the evaluation result OK measurement data obtained from each measurement function are output E Command Object 1 9 type scisc cR D 1 1 1 m Response DET Object Output evaluation mento jo e l Measurement 0 a SC SC type result wiw 5 545 1 9 ous 515 12 122 1 2 H L YO elo 15 HE 352225 data data 1 1 1 Data on Dataon Data on i measure measure measure QUSE CR ment 1 2 ment 2 2 ment 3 2 P D 1 NG and The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement execution function 2 code 11 13 3 Measurement execution function 7 evaluation result measurement numerical data code TAG The measurement for a specified object type is executed and the evaluation result OK N
61. 12 1 Settings 1 Change the Japanese or English display mode The language used on the screen scan be set to Japanese or English Operating procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key BOE 1 CDs BIET AR IE Fitta Vp Ffit QAKARE Fff 2 1 5 Ffa ORTE N JAPANESE ENGLISH 2 1 6252 291 RT COS DRE FIT FIT QI ATW RAF EIT DEF 1 Move the cursor to item 5 DISPLAY MODE display mode with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to JAPANESE or ENGLISH with the left and right keys 3 When you change to another menu it will be displayed in the selected language Display example SYSTEM SETUP OPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU CONDITIONS NEXT SUB MENU ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU BDISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH i RECEIVING PARMS EXEC DINIT ALLPARMS EXEC SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS SYSTEM SETUP menu shown above in the English mode 12 1 Other Settings and Operations 2 Download all parameters The IV S20 can download a complete set of parameters system I O data and data about all object types from an identical IV S20 IV S20 IV S20 Opposite side SYSTEM SETUP menu MAIN OPS MENUJ All parameters system I O data and data about all object types are downloaded
62. 25 1 25 1 25 1 6 6 Installation Conditions and Method Resolution Lens focal length f 35mm_ Lens focal length f 50mm Lens focal length f 75mm Focal i 3 3 4 8 6 2 7 6 9 0 64 1 88 length 396 560 161 t72 610 336 105 4 18 3 21 0 59 0 41 0 24 8 57 6 48 4 Camera installation distance mm 5 Resolution 7 5 Resolution mm 600 573 612 37 2 119 5 37 4 399 547 78 0 23 0 86 6 47 9 72 0 36 8 140 6 44 5 47 5 540 928 277 84 6 57 7 800 82 8 36 6 161 8 51 6 55 1 53 4 107 6 324 83 2 67 6 87 8 93 6 36 4 62 7 53 0 122 4 97 9 104 5 36 3 70 2 52 7 137 2 108 1 115 3 36 2 77 8 52 4 152 0 118 2 126 1 85 4 52 2 166 8 1300 128 4 136 9 36 0 267 5 87 2 93 0 52 0 181 6 56 1 79 7 116 9 1400 138 5 147 8 35 9 288 6 94 3 100 6 51 9 196 4 60 9 79 4 126 8 1500 148 7 158 6 35 8 309 8 101 4 108 1 51 8 211 21 65 6 79 1 136 7 158 8 169 4 35 8 115 7 51 6 226 0 169 0 180 2 35 7 123 3 51 5 240 8 179 1 191 1 130 9 51 4 255 6 189 3 201 9 35 7 138 5 51 4 270 4 2000 199 4 2127 35 6 415 5 136 9 146 0 51 3 285 2 89 3 78 0 186 0 2500 250 2 266 9 35 5 521 2 172 4 183 9 51 0 3592 113 0 120 5 77 4 235 3 300 9 321 0 35 4 626 9 207 9 351 6 375 1 732 6 243 5 402 4 429 2 35 3 838 4 279 0 453 1 483 4 35 3 207 7 221 5
63. 9 87 Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the previous page OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO00 MEAS 1 MEAS BIN AREA DPAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE i INPUT SIGNAL T AREA A00 0 15 CAL N00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICAL SYMBOL J E H l DEL OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL OUPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT i INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows Selection of 3 Input signals Total area A 00A to 15A Calculation N NOO to N15 Secondary relay C C000 to C127 The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of A are registration numbers For more information on output condition see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following page 9 88 Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the previous page Pressing the TRG BRT key will display the size of the area inside the measurement window in pixels TYPEO0 FL C1ALLC2NO O K VX X MEAS XXXXXXms lt MEAS1 CAM1 MEAS BIN AREA REGST NO 00 0 15 lt AREA 001884 0 7 BUSY PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG Display of measured results Final evaluation resu
64. Computer Link 2 Degree of match inspection for shape and size F F No of Decimal ign digits point digit Registration No 0 Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration No 1 to 15 No 0 Degree of match positioning Provided Si No of Decimal Item ign digits point digit Degree of match of measured obiect Provided None Position coordinates None positioning None Position coordinates None measuring object X Y X Y None Evaluation Positioning None Degree of match Measured object None Registration No 0 Position X None Evaluation ing Y None Position coordinates Measured X None object Y None Evaluation Positioning None Light level Measured object None m mj ro mj roj mj ro m m _HRI HR RL RIA Positioning None Light level N Measured object None Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration No 1 to 15 No O 14 7 Computer Link 3 Distance and angle measurement No of Decimal Bleck uu Sign digits point digit Registration Size measurement Distance Noe 8 1 Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration No 1 to 15 No O Block No of Decimal Sign digit EN Measurement x None start point cue en
65. Coordinate Model 0 0x0 to 7x0 deviation x Model 1 0 1 to 7x1 Coordinate Model 0 OyO to 7yO deviation y Model 1 Oy1 to 7y1 Angle deviation 0B to 7B 00B to 15B inspection Model 0 positioning 00 to 15GO Light level G STER Model 1 measuring object 00G1 to 15G1 Start point coordinates S 00S to 63S Auxiliary point coordinates H to 15H 000 to 0D7 istance D 000 to 150 30 to 3D7 OKO to OK7 Quantity K to 3K7 OLO to OL7 Lead length L 3LO to 3L7 Numerical calculation N to N15 to N15 NOO to N15 INOOto N15 Auxiliary relay C000 to C127 Measurement function Area earning pai to conversion conversion ur epis aeter ment Total area A 00A to 15A OA to 3A to label 8R000 to 3R127 Point P P000 to P255 Numerical calculation N NOO to N15 NOO to N15 NOO to N15 NOO to N15 Auxiliary relay C000 to C127 10 6 PC Function Auxiliary relay C000 to C127 The functions of the auxiliary relays C000 to C127 are explained below Relay No which can be used for input and output signals Function relay name Use for input signals C000 to C109 Relays for internal calculation internal calculation processing cycle can be used Use for output signals For the final output conditions relays also used for output in the measurement C110 C111 Reserved ar
66. NEXT SUB MENU ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH RECEIVING PARMS EXEC INIT ALL PARMS EXEC amp SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS 1 Move the cursor to OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key gt The OBJECT TYPE COND menu will be displayed M Continued on the following page 3 15 Operation Examples Degree of match inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 3 Operation on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu OBJECT TYPE COND F C1 H OBJECTTYPENO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPE00 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU i MEAS 0 CAMERA1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA1 NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 6 0 CAMERA2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 17 MEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU HALT MEASONNG NO YES UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to MEASUREMENT 1 and press the SET key c The TYPE00 MEAS1 type 00 measurement 1 menu will be displayed Y 4 Operation on the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 menu TYPEO0 MEAS1 QDMEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH
67. On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key CAMERA1 amp 2 RUN MENU SETTINGS MONITOR OUTPUT CAM 2 182 CAM1 MD CAM2 MD CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO NO B PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO 8DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR 9OBJ NO MANL MODE NO YES IMAGE DISPLAY UPPER MENU FREEZE THROUGH MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK Description All data will be displayed YES RESULT NO Data other than the numerical result will not be displayed NO No messages will be displayed Setting to NO reduces the processing time YES RESULT OK gt YES RESULT NO lt NO Operation procedure E 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item MESSAGE DISPLAY with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO or NO with the left and right keys and press the SET key Display examples When the display mode has been When the display mode has been set to YES RESULT OK set to YES RESULT NO TYPE00 MEAS XXXXXXms MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION REGST NO 0 0 7 X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLO X 000 00K Y 000 00 MAT
68. REF IMAGE MODEL1 reference images 8 SEARCH AREA MDL1 Q DTECT COORD MDL1 detection coordinates dQ CONTR PIXEL MDL1 pixel contraction Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window for model 0 If FREE is selected then the position of the cursor is optional Select number of pixel contractions for model 0 CP See page 9 6 gray scale processing using shared settings When either X LINE horizontal line or Y LINE vertical line are selected in item 1 MEAS WINDOW MDLO you can select only 1 or 2 in item 5 Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item 1 to above DDETECT ACCURACY accuracy of detection Set the level of detection precision for models 0 and 1 CP See page 9 6 gray scale processing in shared settings UPPER MENU Continued on the following page This will return you to the menu MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu 9 37 Positional deviation measurement Continued from the previous page Specify a 1P SCH 1 point search a 2P SCH 2 point search or a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge The setting sequence for the gray scale search conditions This is the sequence of events when a 1 point search or a 1 point search 1 point edge is selected MEAS WINDOW REF IMAGE MODELO SEARCH AREA MDLO measurement window reference images DTECT COORD MDLO
69. Start CCD m 9 x x sampling by E 5i turning ON pee measurement pi p H i start input 1 i A CCD trigger i a cycle H Stop CCD sampling i i by measurement i i command CCD trigger i i window Black White 1 1 not highlighted A Trigger r Trigger n H x BUSY signal is turned OFF 3 x at the conclusion X 9 BUSY output x of the result output X Terminate i measurement C119 Measurement result is valid at the i end of a measurement N ET PC calculation P P P P PC operation P P P P PIPIPIPIPIP IP P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P PIPIP P PIPIP condition during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C When the object type is changed 3 Parallel output is valid for PC control after e all Y output and auxiliary relays i the measurement result is determined 1 turn OFF Parallel output lt 77 JE Result output a Result output Note Result output The data in the block No set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT amp SERIAL OUTPUT on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu will be transmitted to the personal computer See page 11 20 11 12 Monitor mat Setting the Input Output Conditions 9 Measurement start input CCD trigger start sampling auto object type change result output parallel
70. a Object type number input X1 to X4 Specified object type number Specified object type number BUSY output Mae BUSY signal is turned OFF at the conclusion of the result output Terminate measurement C119 sat 8 a Measurement result is valid at the enay of a measurement PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation unma PIPIPIPIP condition C C C C measurement C C C C C C C C measurement C C C C C When the object type is Parallel output is valid for changed all Y output and x PC control after the auxiliary relays turn OFF measurement resultis 1 i determined Parallel output 34 7 r YO to Y7 ard f Result output Result output 2 Result _ Result Computer link outputoutput When a Sharp PC is used a write enable command EWR is transmitted from the IV S20 to the PC in the following cases When the power is applied to the IV S20 When a write mode nonconformity error code 10 uj occurs after a result write command WRG is transmitted when the power is disconnected from the PC When the output method is changed from the serial interface to the computer link 11 5 Setting the Input Output Conditions 3 Measurement start input parallel object type change parallel result output general pu
71. and edge extraction whole Edge Display images with sharp boundaries between brighter and darker areas emphasis Used to stabilize and create a binary outline of obscure objects Display images after extracting and clarifying the boundaries between the brighter and darker areas Edge Used to measure objects with low contrast extraction Horizontal edge extraction Display only the with horizontal boundaries an object Vertical edge extraction Display only the vertical boundaries of an object Example of an image OFF Smoothing SHARP SHARP SHARP SHARP SHARP SHARP Edge emphasis Edge extraction All SHARP SHARP SHARP Edge extraction horizontal WH VNR 1 m Q D x Q 5 gt lt D a Q M 1 P NI S I4 3f 33 1 OW VEN Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Distance and angle measurement center of gravity page 9 62 Area measurement by binary conversion page 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion page 9 93 Identifying object by binary conversion page 9 101 9 9 Shared settings 7 The expansion contraction method of eliminating noise in binary images When converting an image to binary values it is often the case that dots of noise will show up in the converted image This noise may be eliminated during pre processing by u
72. changed However since this function eliminates the necessity of physical position adjustments the changeover time can be reduced Object type 1 Object type 2 lt Feeding direction lt Feeding direction Trigger window The internal CCD trigger can be used with camera 1 It cannot be used with camera 2 An image that can be used to set the sample window conditions is obtained when the display mode is switched from the through mode to the freeze mode 2 Setting procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET key c On the OBJECT TYPE COND menu move the cursor to item 45 SYSTEM IN OUT and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE I O MONITOR LIGHT LVL 1 1 2 NO YES LIGHT LEVEL COND NEXT SUB MENU TRIGGER CCD START REG NO YES BIN AVG LIT LVL CCD TRIGGER COND TO NEXT SUB MENU B COMPUTER LINK OUT BLOCK 00 MESR 0 CMRO1 amp SERIAL OUTPUT BSHUTTER SPEED 1 00060 1 30 1 10000 STORE REF IMAGE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP BUPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to item 3 TRIGGER CCD START with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to BIN or AVG LIT LVL with the left and right keys and press the SET key 11 17 Setting the Input Output Conditions 2 Move the cursor to item 4
73. n horizontal direction units of 4 pixels Units of 4 Search area Dotted line IN a vertical direction units of 1 pixel pixels Select the shape of the measurement window 512 pixels In the case of a vertical line EE Line type Movement Minimum length Maximum length Reference image Solidline n horizontal direction units of 1 pixel Units of 4 Search area Dotted line a vertical direction units of 4 pixels pixels 8 pixels 480 pixels When either a horizontal or a vertical line is selected please bear the following in mind The reference image must be shorter than the search area Example of recording Reference image i Bex The measurement window is set to Search area 7 BOX rectangular v Continued on the following page 9 75 Lead inspection Continued from the previous page Return to the MEASURING COND menu and select item 5 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS conditions for objects to be measured Continued from page 9 74 Select CONDFOR MEAS conditions for objects to be measured DETECT MODE CNTR BRT DRK DETECT DIRECTION HORI gt VERT f S DETECT AREA MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 This is how the display looks when THRESHOLD VALUE GRYS 050 0 255 EDGE W 1 8 YES is specified in item LEAD FLAT W04 1 16 LENGTH MEAS measurement of lead len
74. o D Connect the IV 8S20HC3 camera cable s to the CAMERA 1 and CAMERA 2 connectors on the IV S20 main housing Note Only connect or disconnect the camera connectors while the power is OFF Push the convex side of the connector into the concave side of the mating connector When the connector is all the way on it clicks To disconnect the connector hold the plug of the connector and pull it straight out A camera connected to the camera 1 connector CAMERA is treated as camera 1 by IV S20 system and a camera connected to the camera 2 connector CAMERA is treated as camera 2 Note You must have a camera connected to the camera 1 connector The IV S20HC3 camera cable is 3m long If you need a longer cable order extension camera cable IV S20EC2 cable length 2m or IV S20EC4 cable length 4m Extension camera cable IV S20EC2 4 Camera connector of IV S20 main housing 2 Plug the other end of the IV S20HC3 camera conversion cable into the IV S30C1 and tighten the securing ring on the plug housing 8 Screw the IV S20L16 camera lens or similar into the lens holder on the IV S30C1 until it is Secure Camera lens IV S20L16 or similar
75. 1 Move the cursor to item 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM save data in flash memeory with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen DATA SAVE Do you want to save data YES SET NO ESC 2 Press the SET key C The data saving will start and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen SAVING REFERENCE IMAGE SYSTEM I O OBJECT TYPE DATA When the data has been saved in the IV S20 flash memmory the display will change from SAVING saving to SAVING COMPLETE complete saving Note If the ESC key is pressed the set data entered will not be saved in the IV S20 flash memory In this case if the power to the IV S20 main housing is turned OFF or if the object type No is changed the data will be deleted The set data you have entered can be saved in the IV S20 flash memory by moving the cursor to item OPERATIONS on the SYSTEM SETUP menu and pressing the SET key 12 4 Other Settings and Operations 12 2 Maintenance 1 Camera position adjustment This function facilitates adjustment of the camera position and direction with respect to the object being measured and the lens aperture when a camera is replaced or when a camera is dislocated By using this function you will need not to adjust the settings for the measurement condit
76. 255 LLM 100 255 277 1 Move the cursor to GFHRESHOLD VALUE threshold value and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to L LM lower limit with the left and right keys and adjust the lower limit threshold value with the up and down keys Adjustment of threshold value An example of adjustment is shown below using a white object on a black background When the dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image if the lower limit is set higher the black part in the binary image will become larger If the lower limit is set lower the white part will become larger Increase and decrease the lower limit value find the value at which the white part in the binary image starts growing and the value at which the black part starts growing Then set the lower limit at the value halfway between these points This will ensure reliable operation The size of the white area changes Mies N Black 25 depending on the threshold value setting As the value increases the black part grows larger L sable range As the value decreases the white part grows larger Lower limit threshold Horizontal coordinate Inspection image of the dotted line Changing the lower limit threshold value If the stable range in the lower limit threshold value is less than 20 actual measurement measurement errors may occur 3 After setting the lower limit press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to UPPER MENU a
77. 3 Label 0 to 127 Each label contains the same as block 70 Circumference in registration No 0 Label 0 8 1 to to to Label 127 8 1 Circumference in registration No 1 Label 0 to 127 Circumference in registration No 2 Label 0 to 127 Circumference in registration No 3 Label 0 to 127 14 12 Each label contains the same as block 74 Computer Link 8 Point measurement 1 In the binary mode Block Item No of digits Evaluation Point 2 Point No 0 to 7 White black information Evaluation Point Point No 8 to 15 White black information Evaluation Point Point No 16 to 23 White black information Point No 248 to 255 Note If a point number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brought forward Data example Only point No 1 to 8 Judgment EDFA OK NG Point No pg P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 PI 1 Judgment OK OK OK NG OK OK NG OK Judg White 0 NG 1 OK ment black information White black information Point No P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 White black White White White White White Black White Black 0 black 1 white 2 In the average light level mode Item No of digits Evaluation Point 2 Point No Dummy data 2 Evaluation Point 2 Point No Dummy data 2 Evaluation Point 2 Point No 16 to 23 M Dummy data 2 Evaluation Point
78. 3 Surround the image to be measured with a window solid line Move the cursor to MOVE UP L or LO R and press the SET key Then position the window The white rectangle is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time The upper left corner is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time The lower right corner is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time When the position is correct press the SET key Image window Positioning mark After the image window position has been defined move the cursor to REG register with left and right keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to DISP display with the left and right keys and press the SET key Then the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen After checking the image press the ESC key Continued on the following page 3 10 Operation Examples Position measurement Continued from the preceding page 4 Press the ESC key move the cursor to 3BEARCH AREA search window and press the SET key 5 Create a search window dotted line to be used as the search area The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with the image stored in step 3 The gray scale search function performs the search operation see the Glossary The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3 Search
79. 69 69 69 IV S20 main housing ia Cx De Dee IIT BIEZ SIM l Im o 7 va I 5 ve T qe 1 VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2 RS232C RS422 REMOTE To improve the noise resistance of the constant voltage power supply connected to the IV S20 main housing observe the following precautions Ground the FG terminal of the constant voltage power supply according to the class 3 grounding The power line between the IV S20 main housing and the constant voltage power supply must be as short as possible Recommended distance less than 30 cm Do not run the power supply line near any noise generating sources such as electric motor lines Use twisted pair wire for the power supply line 6 12 Installation Conditions and Method The constant voltage power supply 24VDC connected to the IV S20 main housing should not be ground its positive terminal If the positive terminal of the constant voltage power supply is grounded while using external equipment connected to the SG or FG terminals the short circuit shown below will be created This circuit will let a large current flow through the SG line inside the IV S20 and may destroy the circuit or cause smoke or a fire External equipment IV S20 main monitor or the like housing Constant voltage power supply 24 VDC for the IV S20 RS 232C RS 422 When the SG or FG conduct current
80. CAM2 OFFSET ADJ f 1 026 displayed Different models 4 CAMERA2 GAIN t 1 245 use different values ADJ MON CONTRAST 1 1 050 6 UPPER MENU Gain and offset adjustment Details of adjustment selection The offset for camera 1 is adjusted with the up and down keys The complete signal level is shifted leaving the amplitude of D CAM1 OFFSET ADJ the image signals from the CCD camera unchanged As the offset value is increased the whole screen will becomes more white The gain for camera 1 is adjusted with the up and down keys The amplitude of the image signals from the CCD camera is changed As the gain value is reduced the screen will CAMERAT GAIN become lighter and as the gain value is increased the EH screen will become darker The offset for camera 2 is adjusted with the up and down keys 3 CAM2 OFFSET ADJ The adjustment procedure is the same as that in Item The gain for camera 2 is adjusted with the up and down keys CAMERA2 GAIN The adjustment procedure is the same as that in Item 0 The monitor contrast is adjusted with the up and down keys The intensity of image signals sent to the monitor is adjusted ADJ MON CONTRAST As the contrast value is increased the contrast on the screen will become stronger 6 UPPER MENU The screen will return to the I O SETTINGS menu 11 22 Chapter 12 Other Settings and Operations SYSTEM SET UP menu
81. Contents Review the system configuration sys tem equipment measurement items in stallation requirements etc 2 Installation Make connections assemble and assembly wire the system equipment an IV S20 camera peripheral equipment etc 8 Configuration Run the software and set the input output requirements communication requirements with the externally con nected equipment 4 Measurement Run the software and set the meas condition urement requirements set the meas settings urement inspection areas pass fail criterie 6 Test Perform an actual test using the re inspection quirements you enterd 7 Maintenance Procedures for performing ordinary in spections Chapters in this manual Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 2 Precautions for Use Chapter 4 System configuration Chapter 6 Installation Conditions and Method Chapter 16 Specifications Chapter 5 Part Name and Function Chapter 6 Installation Conditions and Method Chapter 2 Precautions for Use Chapter 7 Setting and Operation Outline Chapter 11 Setting the Input Output Conditions Chapter 13 Communication General Purpose Serial Interface Chapter 14 Computer link Chapter 7 Setting and Operation Outline Chapter 8 Run Menu Conditions and Settings Chapter 9 Setting the Condition of Each Object Type Chapter 10 PC functions Chapters 3 7 to 12 13 14 and Chapter 15 Troubleshoot
82. Continued on the following page 10 10 PC Function From the preceding page 11 INPUT SIGNAL LOGICAL SYMBOL OUTPUT SIGNAL UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 INPUTO 6099 y 3 Ladder circuit 2 setting output signals RESULTS OUTPUT TYPEOO DPAGE NO 0 7 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE AUXRLY 112 0 127 EXT INP X0 0 6 0 7 CNT CNO 0 7 ANO0 0 15 OUT 00 0 15 v4 DEL OUT 00 0 15 AUXRLY 000 0 127 TMR TMO 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 CNT CNO 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 DEL 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT LOGIC wt INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC 1 Move the cursor to item 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to the row where a ladder circuit output relay will be placed and press the SET key An output relay can only be placed only on rows where input signals have already been placed 2 Move the cursor to item 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Select the kind of output signal and the number set value After moving the cursor to the desired output signal with the left and right keys select a number set value with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The output symbol and signal will be displayed on the row specified in step 1 Display example PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C000 YOO LOGIC 4h lt gt Y Continued on the following page 10
83. Decima point digit Label unit area Window label center of gravity Registration No 0 Label 0 Window label fillet diamete Window label circumference Label 1 to 31 32 to 63 Labels 1 to 127 contain the same data as 64 to 95 label 0 96 to 127 32 to 63 Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as 64 to 95 label 0 in block 10 96 to 127 0 to 31 32 to 63 Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as 64 to 95 label 0 in block 10 96 to 127 0 to 31 32 to 63 Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as 64 to 95 label 0 in block 10 96 to 127 Label 0 Label unit area in registration No to None Label 127 Label unit area in registration No Label 0 to 127 Label unit area in registration No Label 0 to 127 Label unit area in registration No Label 0 to 127 Label 0 Each label contains the same as block 60 Center of gravity in registration No 0 iG Label 127 Y Center of gravity in registration No Label 0 to 127 Center of gravity in registration No Label 0 to 127 Center of gravity in registration No Label 0 to 127 Each label contains the same as block 64 Continued on the following page 13 21 Communication Decimal point digit Label 0 Main axis angle in registration No 0 to Label 127 Label 0 Main axis angle in registration No 1 to Label 127 Label 0 Main axis angle in registration No 2 to Lab
84. L1 to L4 Lead length Number of leads Detect missing or incorrectly spaced leads Inspection line Inspection procedure CD Calculate the mid points K1 to K4 of the leads along the inspection line 2 Look for bent leads by comparing the difference between the maximum and minimum distances of P1 to 8 Check the maximum and minimum length of the leads L1 to L4 Operating instruction example See 3 5 Lead inspection Setting measurement program See 9 6 Lead inspection Detect the existence absence and size of a workpiece when the workpiece is one point or measurement position is fixed Convert the specified pixel area to binary values and measure the size of the white area Check for the existence of bearings inserted by a bearing insert machine prevent contam ination of different parts in automobile production lines determine the type of water proof caps check for the existence absence of bottle labels inspect the cuircuit traces on PWBs check for the presence of grease check for existence of frozen foods Measured result Workpiece Workpiece area Inspection procedure Capture image gt Convert to binary values Measure area Operating instruction example See 3 1 Area measurement by binary conversion Setting measurement program See 9 7 Area measurement by binary conversion Overview
85. Object identification and numbering labeling is a process for locating separate object and assigning serial numbers labels one at a time in a binary image By this process multiple objects in the same binary image can be handled separately or as a group Object identification in order of Binary scanning conversion Object identification in order of area 2 3 4 Island 1 Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Distance and angle measurement center of gravity page 9 62 Counting quantities by binary conversion page 9 93 Identifying object by binary conversion page 9 101 5 Binary processing fixed threshold value correction By setting THESHLD ADJ threshold adjustment function the IV S20 can cope with variations in lighting Note In order to use the THESHLD ADJ threshold adjustment function the monitor brightness functions must be selected to measure variations monitor brightness function a Fails to convert the image BIN ILLM MON UNSET due to a variation in lighting correcting binary value monitor illumination not selected error will occur Threshold correction using either VAR DIFF enter variations in lighting as value and VAR RATE enter variations in lighting as a rate can be selected the THRSHOLD ADJ the threshold adjustment function Set selection item Details of correction Variation Correct the threshold value by adding th
86. On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 3 CONDITIONS and press the SET key SETTING TRIG INP PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL See the next page INPUT PARALLEL After selecting CHG MEAS 5 6 NO YES REG REF IMG PARALLEL INPUT X5 EXT INP REG REF IMG MSRO COMPARE IMAGES T o MOPS caine T ARA EVALUATION ADJ 00 the up down PARALLEL INPUT X6 EXT INP CHG IMG OUT CAM CAM MEAS keys OUTPUT STATUS BUSY READY tems 5 and 6 SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU are not displayed COMPUTER LINK TO NEXT SUB MENU when item 4 has GAIN OFFSET TO NEXT SUB MENU been set to YES UPPER MENU i i i i _ i _ EE Input output condition Setting details D Vice M i Select an input interface for starting the measurement on the IV S20 The display of item 2 and 3 depends on the setting in item MEAS TRIG INP I F gt gt See Item 1 on the next page ieee eo cM cn Turn ON or OFF the input terminals INPUT X5 and X6 to specify the X5 and X6 9 measurement number C See item 2 on the next page Select the type of input terminal INPUT X5 The function uses the terminal as an external input signal External input See Chapter 10 When X5 is switched from OFF to ON on the MAIN OPS MENU the referen
87. Press the SET key once more Then the settings will be stored and the test will be executed c The results of the evaluation OK NG based on the calculation formulas will be displayed Noo X 01X0 00X0 00000140 0 00000160 0 00000147 0 OK V 01YO 00YO 00000090 0 00000095 0 00000091 0 OK OK When the test result based on the formula is within the specified range NG When the test result based on the formula is out of the specified range 7 Move the cursor to 7 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The TYPE00 MEAS1 menu will be displayed Continued on the following page 3 46 Operation Examples Numeric calculation Continued from the preceding page Y 3 Operation on the OUTPUT CONDITIONS menu 1 On the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 menu move the cursor to 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS output conditions with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The OUTPUT CONDITIONS menu will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to 1 REGIST NO register number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES with the left and right keys and press the SET key c Items 2 to 6 will be displayed OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO0 MEAS 1 DEG OF MATCH DREGIST NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE No INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 00 0 15 MATCH 0 0 1 CRD X0 0 1 CRD Y0 0 1 LVL 0 0 1 AL N00 0 15 A
88. Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration No 1 to 15 No 0 13 17 Communication 3 Distance and angle measurement No of Decimal Sign digits point digit Registration Size measurement Distance None 8 1 Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration No 1 to 15 No O No of Decimal Sign EM a digit Registration Measurement No 0 start point ome MEAN ND ME NR Registration No 1 to 63 contain the same data as the registration 1 to 63 No 0 Evaluation Distance Evaluation Angle Registration No 0 Registration No 1 to 15 Registration No 0 No of digits 2 Registration No 1 to 15 conta data as the registration No 0 Sign None Decimal point digit None in the same None 2 None Registration No 1 to 15 Registration No 1 to 15 contai data as the registration No 0 in the same Evaluation Start point Registration No None 2 None Registration No 1 to 63 Registration No 1 to 63 conta data as the registration No 0 in the same Evaluation Auxiliary point Registration No None 2 None Registration No 1 to 15 Registration No 1 to 15 conta data as the registration No 0 in the same Auxiliary point X coor dinate Y coor dinate Registra tion No 0 4 4 None
89. STANDARD RS232C RS422 4 W RS422 2 W BAUD RATE kbps 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 4 8 8 NO OF DATABITS BITS 8BITS PARITY CHECK EVEN ODD NO B OF STOP BITS 1BITS 2BITS 6 TERMINATOR CR CR LF UPPER MENU 11 18 Setting the Input Output Conditions 11 5 Computer link When PC LINK has been specified in item 3 SERIAL OUTPUT on the I O SETTINGS menu page 11 1 the computer link conditions must be set on the COMPUTER LINK menu On the I O SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 9 COMPUTER LINK and press the SET key gt COMPUTER LINK D PC MANUFACTURER SHARP COMM PORT LNK MDL MITSUBISHI OMRON STATION NUMBER 01 8 WRITE TOP ADDRESS 09000 UPPER MENU _ Item Setting range Sharp 00 to 37 Mitsubishi 00 to 31 OMRON 00 to 31 Sharp 09000 to 99776 Mitsubishi D0000 to 09999 OMRON DM0000 to DM9999 L gt Station No Write address max 512 bytes In this book octal notation is indicated by adding s e When MITSUBISHI is selected in 1 on the COMPUTER LINK menu COMPUTER LINK PC MANUFACTURER 2 STATION NUMBER 8 WRITE TOP ADDRESS D0000 CONTROL PROCEDURE FORM1 FORM4 5 BLOCK WRT COMMAND WW QW SHARP COMM PORT LNK MDL MITSUBISHI OMRON 00 UPPER MENU Menu Setting details Select either FORM 1 or 4 for the control procedure FORM 1 No line terminator FORM 4 With li
90. a photo sensor or proximity 3 When a personal computer is connected Purpose application sensor etc Measurement is started by a CCD trigger sampling start input personal computer and the measurement data is output to a personal computer The object type number is selected by the personal computer Camera 1 image CCD trigger pea Camera 2 image H Remote key pad Data computer link I Monitor Lh IV S20 main housing Power supply Programmable a controller Type switching parallel I F 4 6 Start sampling input a photo sensor or proximity sensor etc System Configuration 3 System configuration example for measurement triggered by a command from a personal computer Purpose application Measurement is started by a trigger from a personal computer and the measurement data is output to the personal computer The object type number is selected by the personal computer Camera 1 image Camera 2 image Personal computer Command response Monitor Remote key pad LI So cI
91. all Y output and after the measurement result is auxiliary relays turn OFF determined Parallel output YO to Y7 a Result output X Result output Setting the Input Output Conditions 2 Measurement start input parallel object type change parallel result output computer link parallel Setting order 1 8 9 Configuration example VO SETTINGS Camera 1 image capturing D MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG m Camera 2 image capturing Monitor 8 SERIAL OUTPUT PC LINK SERIAL INPUT PARALLEL L 1 Remote keypad Data Computer link Is SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU l 9 COMPUTER LINK TO NEXT SUB MENU 9 IV S20 main housing Power supply s 7 Programmable 24 VDC EET controller Object type change parallel IF L X1 to X4 External trigger XO photo sensor or proximity sensor The data in a specified block No set in item 59 COMPUTER LINK OUT amp SERIAL OUTPUT on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu will be output through the computer link See page 11 20 Time chart 10 ms or more lt gt Measurement start input X0 10 ms 10 ms or more or more e
92. gt 2UPPER MENU Information about the recording of a reference image In order to record a reference image it is necessary to use the freeze frame The specifications for the windows are as follows In the case of a rectangular window Reference image Solid line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels 32 X 32 pixels 32 X 32 pixels X X Y X X Y 65536 pixels 512 X 480 pixels Search area Dotted line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels In the case of a horizontal line Lap Line type Reference image Solid line Movement Minimum length Maximum length Units of 4 pixels In a horizontal direction units of 4 pixels In a vertical direction units of 1 pixel 8 pixels 512 pixels Search area Dotted line n the case of a vertical line 0 T Line type Movement Minimum length Maximum length Reference image Solid line Units of 4 pixels In a horizontal direction units of 1 pixel In a vertical direction units of 4 pixels 8 pixels 480 pixels Search area Dotted line When using either a horizontal or a vertical line please bear the following in mind The length of the reference image must be less than that of the search area v Continued on the following page 9 49 Degree of match inspection Continued from the previous page When the GRAY IMG PROC gray scale processing mode is selected Example of recording This example shows
93. menu SYSTEM SETUP FC1H OPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 11 VOCONDITIONS NEXT SUB MENU ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH BRECEIVING PARMS EXEC DINIT ALL PARMS EXEC amp SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS 1 Move the cursor to DBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The OBJECT TYPE COND menu will be displayed Y Continued on the following page 3 22 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 3 Operation on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu OBJECT TYPE COND FC1H OBJECTTYPENO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPE00 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 CAMERA1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA1 NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 6 0 CAMERA2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 17 MEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 2MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL CALC RESULT NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU HALT MEAS ONNG NO YES UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to MEASUREMENT 1 with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The TYPEO0
94. registration with the right and left keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to DISP display with the left and right keys and press the SET key Then M the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen After checking the image press the ESC key Continued on the following page 3 33 Operation Examples Lead inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 5 Press the ESC key move the cursor to 3 SEARCH AREA search window with the up and down keys and press the SET key 6 Create a search window dotted line to be used as the search area The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with the image stored in step 3 The gray scale search function performs the search operation see Glossary The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3 Search window 7 After defining the search window size and position press the ESC key 8 Move the cursor to UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu 9 On the MEASURING COND menu move the cursor to 3 OBJ NO FOR MEAS vwith the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES with the right and left keys and press the SET key c The items 4 and 5 will be displayed MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS1 INSPECT LEAD DREGST NO 0 0 3 REG NO YES
95. results etc 13 3 Personal computer Communication 13 3 Communication format The communication formats of the commands and responses between the IV S20 and a personal computer are outlined below E Command 4 4 S L Processing Text I code E Response P Tam ior Checksum code code 1 Processing code and text d 4 9 Text 1 Processing _ Terminator Checksum code They depend on the contents of communication See pages 13 1 and 13 6 and after On abnormal termination no text is provided 2 Termination code The termination code is a 2 digit hexadecimal number When an output is sent through the general purpose serial I F 00 is sent on normal termi nation On abnormal termination a code other than 00 IS sent See page 15 3 3 Checksum code SC and SC To improve the reliability of the transmitted data in addition to a parity check error detection by a checksum is used for error detection When the IV S20 does not need to complete a checksum for error detection use an at sign ASCII code 40 in each of the checksum codes SC and SC included in the command Error detection using a checksum The ASCII code for each data byte from the processing code to the end of text prior to the checksum code is added The final value is compared to the checksum code whi
96. separately UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu Information about the window settings In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the frame First freeze the frame Then operate the camera normally Finally freeze the frame again The first frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final binary image The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating steps 1 to 10 above Example of recording The binary image will be the contents of the measurement window after the portion excluded by the mask window has been removed Measurement window OR Mask window Return to the MEASURING COND menu and select item 3 UPPER MENU Continued on the following page 9 85 Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the previous page Select item 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation condition on the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 menu EVALUATION COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 MEAS BIN AREA These displays can be set using DREGSTNO 00 0 15 TEST RESULT OUT AREA 000000 245760 002000 OK Miguel A TEST RUN SET KEY to C127 DUPPER MENU Items and 3 will be displayed if the REGST NO registration number is set to YES on the MEASURING COND menu Evaluation conditions Setting details REGST NO Se
97. xo 6 0000000 yo 7 Q0000000 Ssusvi xo 6 0000000 yo 7 Q0000000 Busvi MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 8 5 Run Menu Conditions and Settings 5 Binary image display Select YES or NO to display a binary image on the MAIN OPS MENU On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key RUN MENU SETTINGS MONITOR OUTPUT 1 182 CAMERA1 amp 2 CAM1 MD CAM2 MD CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO B PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO 8DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR OBJ NO MANL MODE NO YES IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH QUPPER MENU SHOW BINARY IMAGE Description A binary image will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU Note When the monitor camera mode has been set to the 2 screen divided display mode cameras 1 and 2 the binary image will not be displayed even if YES is selected A binary image will not be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 6 SHOW BINARY IMAGE with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the curso
98. 0 44 2 Input 1 114 O Page 3 Input 2 m mm mH GF HG O Page 4 Input 3 m 90 114 imama Imai Io v Continued on the following page PC Function From the preceding page Y 2 Ladder circuit creation 1 setting input signals OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO0 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION PAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE 17 9INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 00 0 7 2 MATCH M0 0 1 CRD X0 0 1 CRD YO 0 1 DEVIAT x0 0 1 DEVIAT y0 0 1 AGL DV B NC CAL NO0 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICAL SYMBOL lis e DEL 4 OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL c UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 Ladder circuit LOGIC cursor INPUT2 LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC 1 Move the cursor to item SET POSITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key The ladder circuit cursor can be moved with the up down left and right keys Move the cursor to a position where an input terminal will be placed and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to item 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET key n the case of the positional deviation measurement degree of match inspection lead inspection object counting by binary conversion or label measurement by binary conversion first move the cursor to REGT NO register number with the left and right keys and select a number with the up and down keys This registration number should be th
99. 0 registration No 00 will be displayed TYPEO0 FL C1ALLC2NO VX X OK MEAS XXXXXXms lt MEAS1 CAM1 DEG OF MATCH REGST NO 00 0 15 lt MATCH MDLO 09735 X COORD MDL 0 X 090 0 OK lt Y COORD MDL 0 Y2092 0 OK LIGTLVL 018 4 OK X0 6 00 BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PG MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 4 Display of inspection result Final evaluation result 2 Measuring time Registration No EH Degree of match to reference image 3 X Y coordinates pixels of detection point Average light level in image window 1 Move the cursor to REG CHNG registration change with the left and right keys and press the up or down key The result of evaluating image 1 registration No 01 will be displayed 2 The final evaluation result will be displayed as OK in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the items have been evaluated as acceptable If there is a single unacceptable item NG will be displayed 09735 means that the degree of match percentage of pixels that match between an object image and the reference image is 97 35 The acceptance and rejection criteria based on the degree of match In order to evaluate acceptability based on the degree of match first an image of a good specimen is stor
100. 0 0 7 REG NO YES sll C1 2 Jr UPPER MENU _ 2 Move the cursor to 2 SEARCH CRITERIA criteria search condition with the up and down keys and press the SET key v The gray scale search matching setting menu image window and search window will be displayed Continued on the following page 3 32 Operation Examples Lead inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 3 1 6 Image adjustment Press the TRG BRT key on the remote key pad and the level brightness of the screen will be switched between H and L 1 a Image window 1 1 mel Search window Shae NM Indicates camera 1 DMEASURE WINDOW RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE 1 Press the SEL key c The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed If the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see press the TRG BRT key to reduce the brightness of the image Then the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from H to L 2 Adjust the focus and aperture iris of the camera lens see p 5 1 so that the object to be measured is clear and easily distinguished 3 Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode c The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T through to freeze To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations the screen must be in the freeze image mode See
101. 0 1 NOO 0 15 lt DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000650 0 00000700 0 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 TEST A RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU NOO X 0 0 0 1 YO NO1 M NO0O 0M1 00065000 0 00070000 0 00064000 0 NG N02 NOS3 Numerical calculation Setting details CDCALC RESULT Set the recording and display of the results from arithmetical operation for calculation result specified output data at any value from 00 to 15 TYPE type Select the type of data being calculated A number of formula settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2 Selection of 2 The first line of the display The coordinates XY the deviation coordinates xy and the degree of 7 Model 0 to 1 match with the reference image M Angular deviation B Record 0 0 to 7 NOO 0 to 15 ABS TAN NOO 0 to 15 the Numerical calculations NC second line will not be displayed Constant C Ses the second line will not Note Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N 00 to 15 than that used for 1 CALC RESULT N 00 to 15 TEST A RUN Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test make a test run FORMULA UPPER MENU Returns you to the TYPEO0 MEASO menu The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in
102. 0 15 REG NO YES TO NEXT SUB MENU START POINT NO START POINT MODE starting point mode START POINT COND start point condition AUX CONDITIONS auxiliary condition B DISTANCE COND distance condition amp ANGLE CONDITIONS angular condition These are set in the next menu UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Select item START POINT COND conditions for the starting point ie elect the GRAY SEARCH gray scale search for starting point mode Select the EDGE DETECT edge detection for starting point mode v Continued on the following page When the GRAV center of gravity is selected Go to page 9 6 9 59 Go to page 9 61 If item 1 START POINT NO is set to YES enable registration then items 2 to will be displayed Measurement conditions Setting details Set the starting point number to any number from 0 to 15 and then set REG registration to YES to save your selection Select either GRAY SEARCH gray scale search or EDGE DETECT edge detection as the starting point mode Distance and angle measurement From the previous page When the GRAY SEARCH gray scale search starting point mode is selected as the START POINT COND starting point condition DMEAS WINDOW RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE ANN IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP Th
103. 1 1 O O Data on Dataon Data on measure measure measure SC SC CR ment 1 ment 2 2 ment 3 2 L Object type Object type for which the measurement was executed 00 to 15 Output evaluation result YO to Y15 0 NG or unspecified 1 OK CD Measurement programs 0 to 3 Measurement 0 0 none 1 positional deviation absolute position measurement camera 1 and camera 2 Measurement 1 to 3 0 none 2 shape and size comparison 3 distance angle measurement gray edge 4 distance angle measurement center of gravity 5 lead inspection 6 area measurement after binary conversion 7 object counting after binary conversion 8 label measurement after binary conversion 9 existence detection with a point measurement Measurement data The measurement programs vary in terms of the data they produce Only the data in block 0 of each measurement program is output If the registration for a measurement program has been set to NO there is no data for that measurement and the data from the next measurement number is brought forward Ex An example of the measurement 0 of object type 01 camera 1 positional deviation absolute position measurement is given below Command 1101 CR L L Object type Processing code 13 6 Communication Response 110001000000000000000010000 L J l l J l
104. 1 DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS E SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2 COPY EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 3 EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 2 a fours tae 1 Move the cursor to 1 MEAS SELECTION selection of measurement and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to CHECK DEG OF MATCH degree of match inspection and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions of measurement program and press the SET key c The MEASURING COND measurement condition menu will be displayed Y Continued on the following page 3 16 Operation Examples Degree of match inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 5b Operation on the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu 1 Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO register number and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES and press the SET key c Items 2 to 5 will be displayed MEASURING COND TYPEO00 MEAS1 DEG OF MATCH 1 DREGST NO 00 0 15 REG NO YES4 MODE GRAY IMG PROC BINARY IMG PROC _ 5 MODEL 0 POSITION NO SEARCH SEARCH MODEL 1 MEAS OBJ NO YES NO SEARCH YES SEARCH EVALUATE CRITERIA TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 2 Move the cursor to 3 MODEL 0 POSITION model 0 positioning and press t
105. 11 PC Function From the preceding page Kind of Data output memory signal No EI YO to Y7 Output to the parallel I F general purpose serial I F and computer link aen AE Y8 to Y15 Output to the general purpose serial I F or computer link A timer terminal will be turned ON for a set amount of time set value 000 to 999 unit 10 ms after the timer instruction is input Decrementing type When the timer instruction input is turned OFF the timer terminal will be turned OFF Timer instruction i 0250 Ti 25 sec ni S Output instruction external output Timer terminal C001 2 5 sec 2 5 sec TMO YOO While the counter reset relay is OFF if a counter instruction input is cycled from OFF to ON the number of times you set set value 000 to 999 the counter terminal will be turned ON Decrementing type When the counter reset relay is turned ON the counter terminal is turned OFF Create a circuit to turn the counter reset relay ON and OFF on the row following a row that containing a counter instruction Ex C002 Counter instruction Counter 0003 Counter set value instructions CNO to CN7 C120 C Resetting the CNO ET Output instruction A external output Counter terminal X5 EE C120 coo _ _ YO1 The output relay on the row where the cursor is located will be delet
106. 1642 JW20H B Communication port in the uen JW 21CM link module JW30H Communication port in models JW 32CUH H1 M1 Communication port in models JW 33CUH H1 H2 H3 JW 21CM link module JW50H 70H 100H Communication port in models BOUE JW 10CM link module Mitsubishi T AnA AnN AJ71C24 Sx A1S A1SJ71C24 A0J2 A0J72C24 S1 OMRON C1000H C500 LK203 C200H RS 232C C200H LK201 C200H RS 422 C200H LK202 REM CV CPU link ii CV500 LK201 CVM1 CV CPU link P CV500 LK201 CS1W SCU21 14 1 Computer Link 14 2 Data flow Specify the CCD TRIG camera 1 or the PARALLEL parallel interface as the source of the MEAS TRIG INP I F measurement start input signal See Chapter 11 Input Output Conditions Settings The data flow for a measurement start input CCD trigger parallel signal and an object type change command parallel is shown below IV S20 o D Enter MexSuroment start signal eco camera or BC CCD trigger parallel z _ Write measurement data PC Recei leti 8 Receive a completion response 2 3 Computer link The block of measurement data to be written from the IV S20 to the PC in step 2 can be specified on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu See page 11 21 When a Sharp PC is connected The IV S20 sends write enable command EWR to the PC in the following cases When the power is applied to the IV S20 When a Sharp PC is selected
107. 2 Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM save data in flash memory or OPERATIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key Press the SET key once more c The set data will be saved in the IV S20 flash memory and the screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU Y 6 Degree of match inspection Press the TRG BRT key and the difference in the X Y coordinates of the detection points in images 1 and 2 will be calculated The results will be evaluated and output TYPEOO FL C1ALLC2NO O K VX X MEAS XXXXXXms MEAS1 CAM1 DEG OF MATCH REGST NO 00 0 15 MATCH MDL 0 09735 OK X COORD MDL 0 X 090 0 OK Y COORD MDL 0 Y 092 0 OK LIGT LVL MDLO 018 4 OK X0 6 MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG i If the difference between X Y coordinates is within the range set on the numeric calculation menu YO will be turned ON and a filled box will be displayed If the difference is not within the range YO is turned OFF and an empty box will be displayed 00NOO0 00NO1 C000 a If the result is within the range Output condition C and 0001 are turned ON OK the auxiliary relay i 00 will be turned ON and IM Final output condition lt gt output YOO will be turned ON Move the cursor to REG CHNG registration change a
108. 3 Kita Otsuka Toshima Ku Tokyo Address 12 17 4 Chome Yayoi Cho Nakano Ku Tokyo 170 0004 Postal code 164 0013 03 3918 5237 03 3383 6301 Asahi Precision Co Ltd 1 21 1 Chome Sirako Wako City Saitama 351 0101 048 466 8801 Chugai Optronics Co Ltd 2 15 13 Thukishima Chuou Ku Tokyo 104 0052 03 3536 4766 Tamron Co Ltd 1385 Hasunuma Omiya City Saitama 330 8556 048 684 9129 Canon Sales Company Inc Optical Lens Sales Department 3 Optical filter Suple Adress Postal code Phone Sakai Glass Engneering Co Ltd 2 3 6 Sengoku Koutou Ku Tokyo 135 0015 03 3647 6031 2 13 29 Kounan Minato Ku Tokyo Appendix 1 108 0075 03 3740 3388 Table of standard items related to the IV 830 handled by SHARP SHARP s article Nbr Moritex s article Nr Item name Specifications IV 1A0101 ML 0614 CCTV lens C mount f 6 IV 1A0102 ML 0813 CCTV lens C mount f 8mm IV 1A0103 ML 1214 CCTV lens C mount 12 IV 1A0104 ML 2514 CCTV lens C mount f 25 mm IV 1A0105 ML 3514 CCTV lens C mount f 35 mm IV 1A0106 IV 1A0107 ML 5018 ML 7527 CCTV lens CCTV lens f 50 mm f 75 mm C mount C mount IV 1A0201 ML EXR Close up ring A set of 7 intermediate rings IV 1A0301 MML1 65D Telecentric lens C mount 1x
109. 4 1 4 2 System configuration examples 4 4 1 System configuration example for measurement triggered by an external trigger such as a photo sensor 4 4 2 System configuration example for measurement triggered by the internal CCD sensor trigger 4 5 3 System configuration example for measurement triggered by a command from a personal computer 4 7 Chapter 5 Part Names and Functions annan 5 1 to5 5 1 IV S20 main housing 5 1 5 2 Camera section 5 2 1 Camera 5 2 2 Cemera lens IV S20L16 5 4 3 Camera conversion cable IV S20HC3 5 4 5 3 Remote key pad 5 5 C 1 Chapter 6 Installation Conditions and Method 6 1 to 31 6 1 Installation conditions 6 1 1 Lighting equipment 6 1 2 and shutter speed 6 3 3 Optimum lens and resolution 6 4 6 2 Connection installation and wiring of IV S20 main housing 6 8 1 Connection 6 8 2 Installation 6 10 3 Connecting a power supply 6 12 4 Connecting to the input output terminals parallel I F 6 14 5 Connection for communications with personal computer general purpose serial I F 6 16 6 Connecting a programmable controller using the computer link function 6 18 6 3 Connection and installation methods of camera IV S20C1 IV S30C1 C2 6 19 1 Connecting and installation to the IV S20C1 6 19 2 Installing and connecting the IV S30C1 6 23 3 Installing and connectiong the IV S30C2 6 27
110. 9 66 Angular deviation positional deviation measurement sssesseeeene eene 9 41 Angle number distance and angle measurement sese eene 9 66 Angle type distance and angle nennen 9 66 Area area measurement by binary conversion sssessssseeseneeeeeneeeenennen nennen 9 86 ote uo or x coste tette cerry doeet et eeu G 1 Counting quantities by binary conversion ssssssssssseeeeeeeeennee ennt nnne ns 9 93 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity 9 62 Object identification by binary conversion sssssssssseeeeeeeeneennenee enne nennen nennen 9 101 Area measurement by binary conversion Measurement data block Communication general purpose serial I F sese 13 20 Gomputert lik c s iioc e Put toi p a ee et eden fen drea 14 10 E 1 5 9 82 Oper tion example etit Ere f e rl t ter 3 2 Setting SEQUENCE sss at ado etl ate ds eee cca ead denen veces 9 83 Setting detalls hati Adee a ed 9 84 Area setting procedule eto RD EC Eee a e e o tulit late d Ee Fe een 9 26 Artifact processing e 9 12 Distance and angle measurement e
111. A Direction B Center dark horizontal left and right Edge detection point Detection area AES ui s Sci m ni i Riu m ima i n Edge detection of the inside and outside edges of a two circles B Moving right horizontally C Moving left horizontally from dark to light from dark to light D Moving left horizontally from light to dark A Moving right horizontally from light to dark Detection area gt The edge detection point coordinates are used as a reference point to detect an out of position condition Edge detection in binary images is much quicker than in a gray scale search However the binary image detection process is less precise at detecting position Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Positional deviation measurement edge detection page 9 39 Distance and angle measurement edge detection page 9 61 Lead inspection edge detection page 9 76 9 11 Shared settings 9 Artifact processing Artifact processing is a method of processing that eliminates the false detection of the edge of the target object when an artifact is in the line being scanned This process can be used during edge detection The real edge of the target object is detected by computing the average duration of the dark area in the scan line which is much longer for a target object than for an artifact Example of detection A
112. Assign object type number and 5 Object type m Response RCIRC H L Read out image camera condition SC SC L RCIRC D SC H Ds Camera 1 i Camera 2 SC i L 0 No 1 All 2 Upper 3 Middle 4 Lower Set output image camera condition SC SC D Camera 1 CR wu Camera 2 13 12 0 No 1 All 2 Upper 3 Middle 4 Lower Communication Process function Initialize all parameters Process code E Command 6 0 L Communication format 1 1 1 1 i m Response 1 6 0 L Initialize measurement conditions E Command E Object type m Response Initialize reference image T 1 5 5 L Response c o o o iO S o o Initialize conditions 6 and 3 m Response RCIRC 1 6 3 Initialize system Self diagnositc 6 4 Object type il Command L Response RCIRC L SC SC L 13 13 Communication Process function sore Communication format ode il
113. CCD trigger level is ON Measurement is started when a CCD trigger signal is received Work Black White CCD trigger Edge Measurement Level 11 15 Setting the Input Output Conditions Time chart when auto mode edge is selected for as the CCD sampling start _ Restarts CCD sampling automatically after measurement is completed CCD trigger cycle When a trigger signal is input during sending object type change command this command will be invalid j Result AR Result Serial Type A output f D 4 Al output CCD trigger Black white i Black White Black window not highlighted Tum OFF i 4 i TH BUSY signal by i Trigger termination of result Trigger output a BUSY output E B L Terminate i measurement gt 4 C119 zi x i Measurement result is valid at the end of i a measurement E E x PC calculation Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P condition C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C during measurement C CICICIC When the object type is changed Parallel output is valid for PC control after all Y
114. Camera 2 D Connect the camera cable s to the CAMERA 1 CAMERA 2 connectors the controller Note 1 Make sure to turn OFF the power before connecting or disconnecting the cameras To connect them match the keyed portion of the connectors and press in When they are firmly connected you will hear a click To unplug a connector hold the plug housing and pull it straight out Any camera plugged into the CAMERA 1 connector will be system camera 1 and any camera plugged into the CAMERA 2 connector will be system camera 2 in the IV S20 system Note 2 Make sure to connect a camera to CAMERA 1 The camera cable is 3 m long If you need a longer cable purchase the IV S20EC2 camera extension cable 2 m or the IV S20EC4 camera extension cable 4 2 Plug the camera connector on the IV S20HC3 camera conversion cable into the cable connector on the IV S30C2 camera and screw it down to secure the connection 6 27 Installation Conditions and Method 9 Screw a commercially available lens into the camera head of the IV S30C2 Lens Camera head commercially available iod 1 Screw the lens in until the camera image is focused 2 Secure the lens using the lens locking ring on the camera head Lens locking rin
115. Conversion connector 1 pc D sub connector 1 pc 9 pin D sub male rock screw M2 6 communication connector for the IV S20 main housing Screw M x 6 for securing angle bracket 6 pcs Instruction manual 1 set V S20 main housing 1 set Access ories Housing bracket 8 2 pcs Monitor cable D 1 pc Conversion connector 1 pc D sub connector 1 pc 9 pin D sub male rock screw M2 6 communication connector for the IV S20 main housing Screw M x 6 for securing angle bracket 6 pcs Instruction manual 1 set IV S20C1 IV S30C1 Camera body 1 set Access ories Camera angle bracket 1 pc Screw M x 6 for securing angle bracket 2 pcs Camera 9 1 set Access ories Camera angle bracket 1 pc Screw M x 6 for securing angle bracket 2 pcs IV S30C2 Micro camera 00 1 set Access ories Camera angle bracket 1 pc Camera head angle bracket 1 pc Screw M 3 x 6 pcs Instruction manual 1 set 4 2 System Configuration Model type Components IV S20L16 Camera lens 1 1 pc IV S20EC2 Extension camera cable 2 m 1 pc IV S20EC4 Extension camera cable 4 m 1 pc IV S20HC3 Camera conversion cable 41 3 m 1 pc Monochrome monitor 9 type 1 pc IV 09MT 1 Access ory 1 LCD monitor IV 10MT Pair chassis type IV 10MTV With a mounting frame IV 10MTK Wit
116. Counting quantities by binary conversion ssssssssssseeeeeeeeneenneee enne eene nnne ns 9 93 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 51 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity 9 62 Object identification by binary 510 9 101 Processing code general purpose serial I F esee 13 1 Processing function general purpose serial I F 13 1 Processing mode existence inspection by point measurement 9 109 Production configuration E nnne en nennen ennemi nennen enne 4 2 Program examples Computer link i fu tad e e ee 14 17 PO TUnDGtlon tuc m a deg ce a exse e da Ge 10 14 Programmable output auxiliary relay C116 7 2 oreet ti hte i nct abes c M cede Mater Ree cet dure 1 1 G 9 l 11 R Randomr shutter zieht erc egeo edd 1 1 G 9 Reading partial mage RR 1 1 Rectangular Window 9 3 Reference image Degree of match inspection for shape and size Binary processing e icti e ad e d od a n e
117. DETECT AREA THRESHOLD VALUE L gt 6 PROC PROJECTION LEAD LNG MEAS DIR UPPER MENU Information about setting the conditions for objects to be measured In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame Specifications for the area of detection Units of 1 pixel Units of 1 pixel 0X0 pixels 512X480 pixels v Continued on the following page 9 76 Lead inspection Continued from the previous page Examples of settings Example when 1 DETECT MODE detection mode is set to CNTR BRT center bright or and 2 DETECT DIRECTION detection direction is set to HORI horizontal Center point Edge Line used in P ade Edge Flat detecting the object width width Brightness Difference in light A Direction B Example when 1 DETECT MODE detection mode is set to CNTR DRK center dark DETECT DIRECTION detection direction is set to HORI horizontal Center point wii A H n Edge Line used in we Edge Flat detecting the object width width Brightness Difference in light A Direction B Example when 6 LEAD LNG MEAS DIR measurement direction of lead length is set to VERT vertical 2 DETECT DIRECTION detection direction is set to VERT vertical Lead length
118. Enter item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT amp SERIAL OUTPUT on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu to specify selection see the next page 1 Data in specified blocks 1 In the case of a computer link Data in the specified blocks will be output after the data block 0 from measurement numbers 0 to 3 is output by the write register of the PC See page 14 3 Write register map Sharp Misubist OMRON D0000 H DMO0000 gt 3 Result top write address 2 Appended information Result top write Data in a specified block address H H 512 bytes 2 2 Set the result top write address in item 3 WRITE TOP ADDRESS on the COMPUTER LINK menu See the preceding page 8 The top address to which the data in the specified blocks will be written is obtained by adding 512 bytes to the result top write address Setting examples for various manufacturers Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON Result top write address 09000 09300 D0000 DMO0000 Top address of data in specified blocks 19000 19300 D0256 DM0256 11 20 Setting the Input Output Conditions 2 When the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel I F signal and the results are output by a general purpose serial I F signal When the IV S20 responds data in a specified block is output after the output data block 0 from the measurement No 0 to 3 in response to the measurement run command 2 processing
119. LM 100 0 255 GB INVERT B W NO YES BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD ADJ 8IMAGE PRE PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE EMPHASIS ALL EDGE HORZ EDGE VERT EDGE BINARY NOIS FILTR NO EXP CONTR CONTR EXP NUM OF FILTR PASS EXPD 0 0 5 CONTR 0 0 5 UPPER MENU If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image setting is hindered press the ESC key Only item will be displayed Abinary image will be displayed in the window 2 Move the cursor to QMEAS WINDOW POSIT with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Surround the image to be measured with a window rectangle solid line Move the cursor to MOVE UP L or LO R and press the SET key Then position the window When the position is correct press the SET key MOVE The white rectangle is moved using the up down right or left keys one pixel at a time UP L The upper left corner is moved using the up down right or left keys one pixel at a time LO R The lower right corner is moved using the up down right or left keys one pixel at a time Object to be measured white Au cw After the window position has been defined press the ESC key Continued on the following page 3 4 Operation Examples Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the preceding page Y 8 Operation on the BIN AREA SET menu screen setting an image for binary conversion 5 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM
120. Lens Close up shot ring l There is a relationships as shown on page 6 6 and 6 7 among the camera installation distance the field of view in the vertical horizontal direction the lens focal length f the aperture setting the focal length and the resolution Example When the camera installation distance is 500 mm and the field of view in the horizontal direction is 110 mm the optimum lens can be selected as described in the following procedure The required information is taken from the table on page 6 6 Lens focal length f 16mm Reso gt lution 129 6 138 3 16 4 270 1 D Selecting the lens focal length and aperture f stp setting Follow the line for a camera installation distance of 500 mm for the view in the horizontal direction that is closest to 110 mm which is 114 6 mm A 114 6 mm field of view is shown in the column for a lens focal length f of 16 mm Therefore a lens with focal length of 16 mm is considered to be optimum Installation Conditions and Method Q Considering the focal length The actual focal length 16 5 mm is longer than the lens focal length f 2 16 mm by 0 5 mm However if the camera installation distance of 500 mm is within the focal range distance from an object of the actual lens f 2 16 mm you can use it 1 The focus range of the IV S20L16 camera lens f 16 mm built into the IV S20 is from 50 mm to infinity Therefore the camera installa
121. MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu will be displayed Y 4 Operation on the TYPEO0 MEAS1 menu TYPEO0 MEAS 1 MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH 1 DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AR CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS 2 SELECT CAMERA CAM i CAM2 COPY EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC 8 MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 3 EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to 1MEAS SELECTION select measurement with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE distance and angle measurement gray scale and adge with the left and right keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to MES PRG COND conditions of measurement program with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The MEASURING COND measurement condition menu will be displayed 2 72 72 v Continued on the following page 3 23 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 5 Operation on MEASURING COND menu 1 Move the cursor to START POINT NO starting point number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 00 set the cursor to YES with the left and right keys and press the SET key c Items o Gwill be displayed MEASURING CON
122. NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV 2 INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS SELECT CAMERA CAM1 2 COPY EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU QOUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to 1MEAS SELECTION select measurement and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to MEASR BIN AREA area measurement by binary conversion and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 6MEAS PROG COND conditions of measurement program and press the SET key y D The MEASURING COND measurement condition menu will be displayed Operation on the MEASURING COND menu 1 Move the cursor to TREGST NO register number and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to YES and press the SET key item will be highlighted MEASURING COND reca M ae E EET 2 DREGST NO 00 0 15 REG NO YES BINARY AREA COND TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 3 Move the cursor to BINARY AREA COND condition for measurement window with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The BIN AREA SET binary zone setting menu and a measurement window will be displayed Continued on the following page wa wa 3 3 Operation Examples Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the preceding
123. None 1 Registration No 1 to 15 Registration No 1 to 15 conta data as the registration No 0 in the same Evaluation Degree of match Degree of match Registration No 0 Registration No 1 to 15 Registration No 0 Registration No 1 to 15 None 2 Registration No 1 to 15 contai data as the registration No O None in the same Provided 4 None Registration No 1 to 15 conta data as the registration No 0 in the same Number of labels 13 18 Communication 4 Lead inspection Reference No 0 Line No 0 Line No 1 to 7 Quantity at center point Line No 1 to 7 contain the same data as line No O Reference No 1 to 3 Reference No 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No 0 No Decimal Reference No 0 Evaluation Quantity Evaluation Distance Distance Shortest Distance Longest 4 The lead number with an NG distance Number of leads Line No 0 with NG distance Evaluation Lead length 1 None None None Lead length Shortest Lead length Longest The lead number with an NG length Number of leads with NG length Line No 1 to 7 Line No 1 to 7 contain the same data as line No O Evaluation X coordinate None None Reference Y coordinate None Reference X coordinate None detection coordinates Y coordinate Evaluation Degree of match Deg
124. O to 3 DREGST NO Corresponds to the registration number entered in item 1 REGST NO registration number registration number in the MEASURING COND menu Set the range that will produce an OK evaluation for the X and Y coordinates in X COORD X coordinates the reference image These coordinates are set in the SEARCH CRITERIA Y COORD Y coordinates reference search conditions item on the MEASURING COND menu 4 MATCH degree of match Set the range that will produce an OK evaluation for the degree of match with with the reference Image the reference image MEAS OBJ Enter the measurement object number for the object being evaluated Corresponds to the 3 OBJ NO FOR MEAS measurement object number on measurement object the MEASURING COND menu NUMBER number of Set the number of objects from 0 to 128 that can exist between the edge objects detection points and still produce an OK evaluation Z DISTANCE distance Set the range of distances from 0 to 702 0 between edge detection points that will produce an OK evaluation The longest and shortest distances will be displayed in the test results Set the range of lead lengths from 0 to 702 0 that will produce an OK amp L LNGTH lead length evaluation The longest and shortest distances will be displayed in the test results 9MAKE A TEST RUN Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test 4 PRIOR ME
125. OK decision ANGULAR DEVIT Set the amount of angular displacement for models 0 and 1 that will angular deviation still produce an OK decision 8X COORD MDL1 X coordinates 9 Y COORD MDL1 Y coordinates 2X DEVIAT MDL1 range of X deviation Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item 2 to 6 Y DEVIAT MDL1 above range of Y deviation MATCH MDL1 degree of match with the reference image A TEST RUN Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition display the test results UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPE MEASO menu The X and Y coordinates come from either the point of detection in the reference image or from the point at which the edge was detected in the target image Verify your settings by testing the upper and lower limits for decisions that you have set This can be done using item 43 MAKE A TEST RUN make a test run For more information about evaluation condition see section 9 2 3 Evaluation conditions Return to the TYPE00 MEASO and select item 6 NUMERIC CALC COND conditions for numerical calculations v Continued on the following page 9 41 Positional deviation measurement Continued from the previous page NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION DCALC RESULT Noo 0 15 OBJECT TYPE NO COORD X Y DEVIAT x y MATCH M ANGL DEV B NUM CALC NC CNST C FORMULA REG 0 0 7 MDLO
126. Object Type 1 Outline of setting the measurement program MEAS 0 CAMERA 1 TYPE00 MEAS0 Displayed when MEAS 0 CAMERA 2 DSELECT MEAS NO MEAS POSITION DEVIATE et oe 00 COPY lt 0 1 PHONE INITIALIZATION EXEC i MEASUREMENT 1 MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT E EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU SNUMERIC CAL COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU L gt TYPE00 MEAS1 Displayed when object type 00 is selected and MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH measurement 1 is selected DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAY INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2 COPY EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 8NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU m Select the camera 2 a SS Will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG camera selection on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu Set the specific Set the determination Set the method for conditions for each conditions testing numeric calculation measurement program testing Set the output conditions s
127. Output Condi tions and Settings 6 1 Installation conditions 6 2 Connection and installation methods 6 3 Equipment connections y 3 Turning ON the power supply the IV S20 main housing and monitor v 4 Environment settings Input output conditions related to external devices Communication conditions shutter speed lighting monitor output monitor v 5 Setting the conditions for each object typel Object type No specification Edit copy an Setting meas measurement 0 to 3 Setting positional correction YES NO Setting system total numerical calculations Setting final output conditions Setting system input output d initialization urement program conditions Japanese En ving total init C Operation v 6 Other settings glish display switching all parameter recei ialization saving to flash memory etc y Test inspection Chapter 7 Setting and Operating Outlines Chapter 11 Input Output Condi tions and Settings Chapter 11 Input Output Condi tions and Settings LChapter 14 Computer Link See the setting procedures start ing on page 9 1 Chapter 8 Run Menu Condi tions and Settings Chapter 9 Setting the Condi tions for Each Object Type Chapter 10 PC Functions 12 1 Settings Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Chapters 3 7 to 12 13 and 14 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Setting and Operatin
128. PIXEL MDL1 1 UPPER MENU RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE REF 0 MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP SEARCH AREA MDLO MOVE UP L 216 200 LO R 295 279 DTECT COORD MDLO CNTR FREE 256 240 i amp MEAS WINDOW MDL1 RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE REF IMAGE MODEL1 MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP 8EEEARCH AREA MDL1 MOVE UP L 224 512 LO R 287 512 DTECT COORD MDL1 CNTR FREE 256 240 DETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD These items in the dotted line are only displayed when 2 point search is Selected You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately by using the ESC key Men Setting details MEAS WINDOW MDLO measurement window Select the measurement window shape for model 0 REF IMAGE MODELO reference images Record a reference image for model 0 The upper left or lower right area of the screen specified above will change according the setting in item MEAS WINDOW MDLO The setting at The display in the upper left and item 1 lower right areas of the screen RECTANGLE rectangle Upper left lower right poe ALIE Starting point end point Y LINE vertical line SEARCH AREA MDLO search area Set the search area for model 0 DTECT COORD MDLO detection coordinates 5 CONTR PIXEL MDLO pixel contraction MEAS WINDOW MDL1 measurement window
129. Set PARALLEL INPUT X6 to CHG IMG OUT CAM Every time the signal X6 is turned ON from OFF camera display will be switched Camera 1 on Camera 2 on Cameras 1 and 2 gt zm the whole screen the whole screen on a divided screen Note You can change the display part of the image from the CAM1 amp 2 to the UP MD or LO by key input or by using a general purpose serial interface command An the example of the display on the MAIN OPS MENU is the same as that shown in Item 1 above Output monitor switching by key input 8 2 Run Menu Conditions and Settings 2 Image capture In item 3 CAPTURE AN IMAGE on the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu specify the range of lines which will be captured during operation On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 1 OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key RUN MENU SETTINGS OUTPUT CAM1 182 CAMERA1 amp 2 CAM1 MD CAM2 MD CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO NO B PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO 5 BINARY IMAGE YES NO SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO 8 DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR OBJ NO MANL MODE NO YES DIMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH QUPPER MENU _ CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE An image of the specified lines
130. When BIN CONV binary is selected When AV LIGHT LEVEL as the processing mode average light level is selected as the processing mode v v Continued on the following page Go to page 9 112 9 110 Existence inspection by point measurement Continued from the previous page when BIN CONV binary conversion was selected for the processing mode OK NG judgment White Will be OK if a majority of the objects to be measured is seen as white Black Will be OK if a majority of the objects to be measured is seen as black Example When the object to be measured is an 8 x 8 area 64 pixels and white was selected for an OK judgement if the amount of white in the area is 3 P001 WH OK NO 33 pixels or judgment of OK P002 WH will be produced P003 IWH OK 7 These displays can be set using the up P004 IWH INO and down keys 7 P005 Pm The choices are NO YO to 7 C000 to P006 C127 P007 m Not displayed for point numbers which MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU have not been previously registered on the point setting menu D CHG PAGE Point numbers 2 to 9 can be displayed as groups of 8 objects page change using the up and down keys Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions display the test results The white or black judgment condition assigned to point numbers 0 to 255 i
131. a power supply Connect a commercially available constant voltage power supply to the power terminals POWER 24 V 0 V on the IV S20 main housing Use a 24 VDC 10 350 mA or more constant voltage power supply Use an individual power supply to supply power to the IV S20 main housing If the power supply is used to power other equipment measurement errors may occur Check the polarity of the power supply terminals 24 V and 0 V If power is supplied with the polarity inverted the IV S20 main housing may be damaged Only connect or disconnect the camera cable and other equipment while the power is OFF Frame ground Constant voltage terminal power supply N i T 24 VDC as e f i 7 Fuse 1A Power supply terminal 0 POWER 24V amp G9 G9 G9 elis 69 69 WS G 69 69 69 GW W Power supply terminal POWER OV INPUT m POWER xt x2 x4 x xe eo 24v ov YO Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7_ BUSY C L OUTPUT J This distance must be as short as possible Recommended distance less than 30 cm 69 S 9 69 9 69 69 S S 69 G9
132. a recorded image when model 0 positioning is set to SEARCH search and model 1 object to be measured is set to YES SEARCH do not search The reference image for model 0 positioning 5 2 The detection coordinates for model 0 positioning E E The search area for model 0 positioning m x Measurement window rectangular The reference image for model 1 object to be measured The search area for model 1 object to be measured The detection coordinates for model 1 object to be measured Example of a horizontal line measurement window SEARCH Crosshair cursor detection coordinates Solid line reference line Dotted line search line Example of a vertical line measurement window SEARCH Crosshair cursor detection coordinates Solid line reference line Dotted line search line Y Return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu and select item 6 UPPER MENU v Go to page 9 53 9 50 Degree of match inspection REFERENCE IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP QDETECTED COORD CNTR FREE 255 240 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 NO YES i INVERT B W BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD ADJ VAR DIFF VAR RATE IMAGE PRE PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE EMPHASIS ALL EDGE HORZ EDGE VERT EDGE BINARY NOIS FILTR EXPD gt CONTR CONTR gt EXPD NUM OF FILTR PASS EXPD 0 0 5 CONTRO 0 5 i 3 UPPER MENU Continued from page 9
133. and Y coordinates AUX01 PERIMETER 362 5 095 9 OK ST PT00 259 0 178 0 ST PT01 466 0 178 0 ST PT02 361 0 228 0 9 71 Lead inspection 9 6 Lead inspection Based on positional information obtained from the gray scale search function inspect the QUiposo condition of IC leads and connector pins No of detected lead pins Max 128 pieces Application Checks IC leads and packages for connectors Check the alignment of things like IC leads and packages for connectors 1 gt gt QN K1 5 K2 Line used in checking the object Example Lead inspection P1 to The distance between the center of 2 adjacent leads K1 to K4 The center points of leads L1 to L4 Length of lead Number of leads A lead with inadequate position Checking sequence D Determine the center points K1 to K4 of those leads which are in a line to inspect 2 Check for any bending of leads that may have occurred by comparing the shortest and longest P measurements with variations in those measurements within the reference image 8 Check the length of the leads which is measured based the direction specified before by comparing the shortest and longest L measurements against those within the reference image 9 72 Lead inspection 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU gt SYSTEM SETUP gt OBJECT TYPE CON
134. as follows D Danger Improper handling is likely to lead to death or serious injury Caution Improper handling may lead to injury or damage to equipment Even when only a Z Caution is given serious results may occur depending on the circumstances In all cases important points are described Be sure to follow the advice given The following symbols are used to prohibit or explain required action Q This means do not do what is described For example prohibited disassembly is shown as Q Q This means an action you must take For example a ground connection that must be made is shown as 1 Installation ACaution Use only in the environment specified in the catalog rinstruction manual and user s manual Electric shock fire or malfunction may result if used in high temperature high humidity dusty or corrosive atmosphere environments or if excessive vibration or impact occurs Install only as described in the manual An improper installation may cause the equipment to fail breakdown or malfunction Never leave wire cuttings or any other foreign matter lying about A fire breakdown or malfunction may result from objects left near the equipment 2 Wiring ACaution Do not connect cameras other than those specified IV S20C1 S30C1 S30C2 to the main housing of the IV S20 Connecting any other camera may damage the IV S20 or the camera Connect only to t
135. at position 6 above TEST A RUN Pressing the SET key will store the setting details as well as run a test Both the numerical make a test run results of the tests and the OK or NG judgment will be displayed at position 5 and 7 above UPPER MENU Will return to the TYPEO0 MEASO menu Numerical calculation NC The number of styles may be set as follows depending on the selections made in items 3 QC OBJECTTYPE _ Model Modeli The numbers from 0 to 7 in front of the characters are registration numbers 9 15 Shared settings Setting procedure Setting the headings on the NUMERIC CALC numerical calculation menu D CALC RESULT ET EM OBJECT TYPE type C Eerme numborcayes ORMURA P eniin Y EVALUATION Sa E COND evaluation Set the judgment output conditions 5 OUTPUT output condition menu y before making any Carry out a calculation TEST A RUN E calculations Enter the upper and lower limits 4 UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT Record the measurement criteria 6 TEST A RUN N ordone All recording is finished v Done Previous menu UPPER MENU Output error An error will be output if there are too many digits as well as if there is an attempt to divide by zero Order of calculation The calculation results are produced in order from NOO to N15 Parall
136. awe 2 X2 Y2 coordinates Y2 Y1 Return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu and select item 6 ANGLE CONDITIONS if the GRAY amp EDGE is selected and select item 4 ANGLE CONDITIONS if the GRAV center of gravity mode is selected Continued on the following page 9 65 Distance and angle measurement Continued from the previous page GRAY amp EDGE GRAV If auxiliary point settings have been cp c DEM made in the AUX CONDITIONS auxiliary condition menu then they ANGLE TYPE NO 3PT ANGL 2PT ANGL HORI VERT may be used for the measurement POINT NO 1 ST PNTOO 1 AUX NO POINT NO 2 ST PNTOO AUX NO POINT NO 3 ST PNTOO AUX NO UPPER MENU Items 8 and will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 2 If 3PT ANGL 3 point angle is selected in item 2 then item 5 will be displayed Angle settings Setting details DANGLE NO Set the angle number to any number from 0 to 15 Select either a 3 point angle 3 points of data are required or a 2 point ANGLE TYPE angle horizontal and vertical POINT NO 1 POINT NO 2 Enter the starting point number for the angle type to be measured as specified in item 2 5 POINT NO 3 UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu Angle When a 3 point angle is specified Angle 180 0j Point 2 Sma Angle 180 0j Point 1 Point 1 Poi
137. binary conversion ssssesseeeeeeneeeeene nennen enne enn 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion 9 93 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 51 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity seen 9 62 Existence inspection by point measurement sess eene nnnm 9 109 Object identification by binary conversion ssssssseseseeneeneeneenenennnnen nnne tennis 9 101 Block measurement data nennen e nennen nen 13 15 Communication general purpose I F Area measurement by binary conversion menn nnne 13 20 Counting quantities by binary conversion esssssssseseseeeeeeeen enne 13 20 Degree of match inspection for shape and 13 17 Distance and angle measurement ssssssssssseeeeeeeeneeneen nnne nenne 13 18 Final numeric calculation result sese een nennen 13 24 Lead Inspection asd Ee cd Le eid 13 19 Object identification by binary 13 20 to 21 measurement oerte ci EE HE LEE Ree 13 23 Positional deviation absolute position m
138. cameras It is the smallest image processing system in the industry with the dark and light processing capabilities as of August 1998 12 Simultaneous display of two screens The screen can display two images from two cameras alternately or simultaneously by dividing the screen into two horizontally When displaying multiple images each camera image can be posi tioned in the upper middle or lower views 13 Crosshair cursor display A crosshair cursor is displayed This cursor is convenient for manual positioning 14 Display language changeable between Japanese and English Menus and other messages displayed on the screen can be switched between Japanese and En glish Overview 1 2 Measurement program The IV S20 integrates the following eight measurement programs Positional deviation absolute position measurement matching inspection distance and angle measurement lead inspection area measurement by binary conversion object counting by binary conversion labeling measurements by 1 binary conversion and point measurements You can select operating condition parameters to suit your application of the IV S20 1 Positional deviation absolute position measurement The gray scale search function makes it possible to measure positional deviation as Purpose well as the absolute position It is also possible to detect the position of sub pixel units with great a
139. chart 5 ms or less Result i Result Serial St output F d output Mesurement BUSY signal is _ Mesurement i trigger turned OFF at the trigger command conclusion of the command result output H BUSY output us 1 1 1 1 Terminate Measurement result is valid at the end of a measurement measurement T D C119 x PC calculation condition When the mE type is changed M Parallel output is valid for PC all Y output and auxiliary relays turn OFF control after the measurement 2 result is determined Parallel output i T 7 YO to Y7 Mig Result output Pd Result output Setting the Input Output Conditions 5 Measurement start input CCD trigger start sampling parallel object type change parallel result output parallel Setting order 1 gt Configuration example VO SETTINGS Camera 1 image capturing CCD trigger MEAS TRIG INP PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG E START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIA Camera 2 image capturing Monitor 8 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL MES LI CCD SAMPLING PARALLEL Remote keypad 1 L gt Settings listed in Section 11 3 CCD trigger CE IV S20 main housing Power supply 24
140. citet roter ede rite taotum Piura detta ML cd uod 4 2 6 8 AEU HX 4 2 7 14 ci dees etse dI e oh gad ue te RE 4 2 16 6 IV 60LD tis IPTE 4 2 6 2 16 7 L Label area objects identification by binary conversion 9 103 Label number objects identification by binary 9 103 Ladder circuit program creation eseese ae Ea EE AAE a AAAA nnne nennen nns 10 3 Examples of a final output conditions and a ladder circuit 10 16 Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder 10 3 Procedure for creating the final output conditions in a ladder circuit 10 8 Program CXAMPIOS E EP 10 14 Lead inspection Measurement data block Communication general purpose serial 13 18 Computer 14 9 RR RAIL 3 31 TNs bates EE RR UPC 1 5 9 72 Setting Sequence eid ea p d Fas reg t a ec Dad toe ab e dar Le Efe RE ae 9 73 Setting detalls e E Ee E en i etim r
141. cursor to SET SCRN and press SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key Select item MEASUREMENT 1 0 MEASUREMENT 2 or 12 MEASUREMENT 3 on the OBJET TYPE COND menu gt TYPE00 MEAS 1 This is how the line looks DMEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH n bles EL Sel DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV measurement is 1 INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA CAMI CAM2 EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO SINITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 1 In item D select CNT BIN OBJ measure the area of binary images Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item SELECT CAMERA IMG camera selection which is in the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Select item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 CNT BIN OBJ DREGST NO 00 0 3 REG NO YES BINARY AREA COND TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU _ _ _ _ _ If YES is specified in item 1 REGST NO registration number then item 2 will be displayed Measurement conditions Setting details CDREGST NO Set this to any number from 0 to 3 and select NO or YES registrati
142. detection is being used 1 point edge 2 point edge When edge detection is being used with a gray scale search 1 point search 1 point edge When using edge detection try to limit variations in the brightness at the perimeter of the workpieces by manipulating things like the lighting SGRAY SCALE COND Set the conditions for a gray scale search in the next menu conditions for a gray scale search EDGE DETECT COND _ Set the conditions for edge detection in the next menu condi tions for edge detection UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO00 MEASOQ object type measurement 0 menu When you specify a 1P EDGE 1 point edge or a 2P EDGE 2 point edge in item 2 SELECT MODE be sure to select item 4 EDGE DETECT COND edge detection conditions Go to page 9 39 When you specify a 1P SCH 1 point search a 2P SCH 2 point search or a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge in item 2 SELECT MODE be sure to select item select item 8 GRAY SCALE COND gray scale search conditions Continued on the following page 9 36 Positional deviation measurement Continued from the previous page Specify a 1P SCH 1 point search a 2P SCH 2 point search or a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge in item 2 SELECT MODE Then select item 3 GRAY SCALE COND gray scale search Y DMEAS WINDOW MDLO CONTR PIXEL MDLO 1 CONTR
143. display Displays numerical calculation results No display Measurement number selectable from X5 and X6 Not available Select between BUSY and READY outputs BUSY output only Added evaluation using average density from CCD trigger Area only after binary conversion Shutter speed can be set for each object type One time for all types Shutter speed can be set continuously Fixed value only Possible to test using the through image Only available in version 1 6 Store monitor brightness level setting in flash memory No storing in flash memory Note In version 2 0 selection numbers are counted from 0 compared with version 1 6 except camera numbers M vezo Ver 1 6 oF earlier Object type numbers 0 to 15 1 to 16 Measurement program numbers Measurement 0 to 3 Measurement 1 to 4 Setting numbers for each menu such as registration numbers Start at 0 Start at 1 mode numbers etc Appendix 6 Alphabetical Index A Absolute value of difference eeesssssssssssesssssseseeeee nennen nnnne nenne seras nnne sinere nen 9 24 9 25 ACCOSSODJ 3 ciet tune DRE E ERU ERR E 4 2 Adjustment of image brightness nnn nens 7 8 Angle DIACK CLs x E H 4 1 Angle conditions distance and angle measurement sese
144. distance X coordinate distance and Y SETTINGS menu coordinate distance between two points which are manually designated The IMAGE DISPLAY has been added These measurements can also be made on the through images Details about the improved functions Improved functions The BLOCK SPACING for block registration has been improved Minimum 4 pixels Minimum 0 pixel Increase decrease spaces in units of 4 pixels In units of 1 pixel Point measurement The monitoring window size and position can now be changed in units of one pixel instead of four pixels monitor Reference page The number of labels is also output to a dummy label in the object General purpose identification by binary conversion operation Appendix 3 Bl Detalis about the improved functions in software version 2 02 compared with version 2 01 iem Improved functions Reference page Lead inspection Increased number of leads the can be inspected from 64 to 128 pins max 9 72 Form 4 has been added to the control procedures and a QW command Computer link 11 18 14 24 has been added the block write commands when the Mitsubishi is set 9 51 9 62 Binary processing VAR RATE variation rate has been added to the THRSHLD ADJ 9 85 9 93 9 101 9 109 Communication Blocks 60 to 77 have been added to the Label measurement after binary general purpose se conversion operation rial compu
145. equivalent Vibration resistance Amplitude 0 15mm 10 to 57 Hz 9 8m s 57 to 150 Hz No of sweeps 10 1 octave min 3 directions X Y Z Shock resistance Weight JIS C 0912 or equivalent 147m s each 3 times in X Y and Z directions Approx 6 kg Dimensions mm 220 W x 238 D x 257 H except protuding portions Dielectrical strength Insulation resistance AC1000V 1 minute between AC plug and shassis DC500V 10M ohms or more between AC plug and shassis Accessories Outlune dimensions drawings 1 One instruction manual Unit mm D LO N Y 220 252 X NUN N u e L1 Y No T C N Specifications 2 LED lighting equipment IV 60LD specifications Item Specifications 36 LEDs 5mm High brightness LEDs Standard lighting range LEDs used Standard lighting range Approx 50mm x 50mm work distance at 150mm Input voltage 24 VDC 10 2P terminal Current consumption Approx 2W Lighting level adjustment Semi fixed volume Operation ambient temperature 0 to 45 C Storage ambient temperature 10 to 60 C Operation ambient humidity 35 to 90 RH non condensing Operation atmosphere No corrosive gases or dust Vibration resistance JIS C
146. even Transmission code Databit 7 ASCII Databit Stop bit 2 1 1 1 N procedure 1 N procedure Synchronous change over switch Internal synchronization CTS change over switch 0 V normally ON 5 V supply switch OFF Enter the unit number of the IV S20 as a component of CV500 LK201 system When communication port 1 is used the unit number is fixed at 00 and when communication port 2 is used any number 00 to 31 can be used 14 26 Computer Link 2 Using memory To allow the memory to be used by the IV S20 enter a result write start address within the following setting range Range address D data register 0 to 9999 3 Connections D Example of RS 232C communication C500 LK203 C200 LK201 CV500 LK201 CV500 LK201 Communication port 2 Communication port 1 CV CPU module Communication connector on the IV S20 RS232C RS422 name Shielded cable Signal Connector ae A m Connector shield hood 2 2 3 4 5 9 V 15m or less RS 232C 2 Example of RS 422 communication IV S20 communication connector RS232C RS422 Pin No Signal name Case FG F prsata 4 A 7 8 RA EE 9 l Calculator link Shielded twisted pair cable module SG 1 km max Pin numbers
147. for communications with personal computer general purpose serial I F Connect a personal computer to the communication connector RS232C RS422 on the IV S20 main housing A 9 pin D sub male connector is included with the IV S20 IV S20N and IV S20M HSS lel eS S lS Ss SHARP P IV S20 main housing plan view Personal computer VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2 RS232C RS422 REMOTE IV S20 main housing side view RS 232C RS 422 Communication connector RS232C RS422 9 pin D sub female rock screw M2 6 1 When communicating through the RS 232C port IV S20 pin arrangement of the communication connector for RS 232C 5 1 9 pin D sub female Communication standard RS 232C Details Received data personal computer gt gt IV S20 Transmitted data Direc tion Input IV S20 gt personal computer Output Signal ground Frame ground Communication connector the IV S20 RS232C RS422 9 pin D sub Signal Connector shield Personal computer DOS V IBM PC PC98 series 9 pin D sub 25 pin D sub Pin No Pin No Function Connector Connec
148. items and as follows ____ Modelo Mode Angular deviation B OB to 7B Numerical calculation NC ABS TAN ATAN 00 to 15 Constant C 99999999 9 to 99999999 9 The numbers ranging from O to 7 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on numerical calculations see section 9 2 4 Numerical calculations Note You must run a test using item 6 TEST A RUN before making any calculations Return to the TYPEO0 MEASO menu and select item 7 OUTPUT CONDITIONS output condition v Continued on the following page 9 42 Positional deviation measurement Continued from the previous page OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO0 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION DPAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 00 0 7 i MATCH M0 0 1 CRD X0 0 1 CRD YO 0 1 DEVIAT x0 0 1 DEVIAT y0 0 1 AGL DV B CAL N00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 i LOGIC SYMBOL DEL 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC m INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUTS 1 LOGIC The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows INPUT SIGNAL Model 0 Degree of match M to 7MO OM1 to 7M1 Coordinates X Y to 7X0 0YO to 7YO OX1 to 7X1 0Y1 to 7Y1 Coordinate deviation x y 0x0 to 7x0 0yO to 7yO 0 1 to 7x1 0y1 to 7y1 Calculation
149. key gt Select item 4 MEAS 0 CAMERA 1 measurement 0 camera 1 or 6 MEAS 0 CAMERA 2 measurement 0 camera 2 on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for object types menu Indicates that the object type 00 is selected TYPE00 MEASO DSELECT MEAS TYPE NO MEAS POSITION DEVIATE COPY EXEC TYPE00 CMR 1DIFF MESURE INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU 8UPPER MENU Select MEAS POSITION DEVIATE measuring positional deviation on the D SELECT MEAS TYPE line Select item MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement program MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION DREGST NO 0 0 7 REG NO YES i SELECT MODE 1P SCH_2P SCH 1P EDGE 2P EDGE 1P SCH 1P EDGE GRAY SCALE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EDGE DETECT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 9 Items SELECT MODE and EDGE DETECT COND are displayed when item 1 REGST NO is set to YES Measurement conditions Setting details REGST NO First enter the REGST NO registration number from 0 to 7 then chose registration number YES or NO depending on whether you wish to record that selection Select a mode Enter a mode for each registration number hen only a gray scale search is being used 1 point search 2 point search QSELECT MODE When only edge
150. match inspection acceptance and rejection criteria 3 14 Degree of match inspection for shape and 5 een 9 53 Distance and angle measurement nennen nnne ennt nennen nnns 9 67 Lead Inspection uie oen dina adco aisa 9 78 Positional deviation measurement sssssessssseseseeeeenen nennen nnne enne nnn nnns 9 41 Degree of match inspection for shape and size Measurement data block Communication general purpose serial 13 17 Gompu ter Hhk oreet ete 14 7 Operation exambple 2 23 22 Rer pet inner Eee leg Lait a eran de 3 15 Cutlil16 5 blessed cef Pe ela ri Satna ovat e tet ons codes td re ude ee 1 4 9 45 Setting Sedquelce 5 8 ain hae B CADRE aftu 9 46 Setting detalls 1 2 1 ios at ion ee it Re 9 47 Detection area detection direction detection mode Distance and angle measurement edge detection sse 9 61 Eead INSPECTION iun A icit et e tus e ed o e e bete 9 76 Positional deviation nnne innen nnns 9 39 Detection precision detection coordinate ssssseeseeeeneeneennen nennen nnns 9 6 Degree of match inspection for shape and s
151. must be shorter than the search area Return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu and select item 4 AUX CONDITIONS auxiliary condition Go to page 9 64 9 60 Distance and angle measurement Continued from page 9 59 When the EDGE DETECT edge detection starting point mode is selected as the START POINT COND starting point conditions DETECT MODE CHANGE DRK BRT BRT DRK CNTR BRT DRK DETECT DIRECTION HORI gt 1 DETECT AREA MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 THRESHOLD VALUE GRYS 050 0 255 EDGE W 1 8 FLAT W04 1 16 PROC PROJECTION NO YES A uere MENU You can switch between displaying all the headings together and displaying each one separately using the ESC key Menu Setting details Select the detection mode Keanu priu Change point or Darktolight _ Light to dark 7 Center light or dark center Select the detection direction Draw a dotted line rectangle around the search area aan In order to enhance detection performance make dimension Y as short as possible THRESHOLD VALUE Set the width of the edge 1 to 8 and the flat 1 to 16 as well as the threshold values difference in the light level 0 to 255 B PROC PROJECTION Select whether to employ artifact processing or not artifact processing c For more information about artifact processing see page 9 12 Artifact processing using shared s
152. n n n 3 the I O terminal block and the power terminal block on the IV S20 i VIDEO CAMERA CAMERA RS232G RS422 2 REMOTE i EE et S Aa Camera cable 6 9 Installation Conditions and Method 2 Installation To install the IV S20 main housing secure the bottom of the housing on the mounting surface with the two main housing brackets supplied with the IV S20 IV S20N IV S20 main housing Housing bracket Mounting surface lll Mounting procedure D Attach the two housing brackets on the bottom of the IV S20 main housing Four screws M 3 x 6 are supplied with the IV S20 IV S20N and IV S20M to attach the brackets Housing bracket 2 pcs 1 je Bottom view 2 C Screw position 4 places 2 Secure the housing on the mounting surface with the brackets 9 138 5 Unit mm T 31 xL snare H wet ALO j pr IV S20 Mounting position TSS SSeS SS a al POWER 4 places la N I LI 21 Housing bracket T 555 CAMERA1 CAMERAS Aeneas X x Y 148 lt The external dimensions of the housin
153. of 1 pixel iv c gt Move the crosshair cursor in the image window to set detection point 0 L Object to be measured After defining the crosshair cursor position press the SET key and ESC key 7 Move the cursor to 12 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu Operation for gray scale search matching setting setting the image 1 Y 1 On the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu move the cursor to 1 REGST NO register number with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Enter the number 01 with the up and down keys move the cursor to YES with the left and right keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 3 MODEL 0 POSITION model 0 positioning with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to SEARCH enable search with the left and right keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to 5 EVALUATE CRITERIA criteria conditions with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The gray scale search matching setting menu image window and search window will be displayed 5 Create a reference image search area and detection point 1 for image 1 the same as you did when creating them in item 7 Image 1 Image window solid line g pee ag Search window dotted line
154. of the calculations 8 RUN A TEST Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test make a test run 7 UPPER MENU Returns you to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 menu The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items as follows 2 Type Mathematical expression Total area A number of objects K OA to 3A OK to 3K Area per label H OROOO to 3R127 0GX000 to 3GX127 0GY000 to 3GY127 Center of gravity by label GX GY Main axis angle of each label B 0B000 to 3B127 OFX000 to OFX127 0FYO00OO0 to OFY127 Fillet width of each label FX F Y Perimeter of each label CR OCRO000 to 3CR127 Numerical calculation NC ABS TAN ATAN 00 to 15 Constant C 99999999 9 to 99999999 9 The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on numerical calculations see section 9 2 4 Numerical calculations Note You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS v Continued on the following page 9 104 Object identification labeling by binary conversion Continued from the previous page OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO0 MEAS 1 LABEL BIN OBJ DPAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 0 0 3 T ARA A QTY K O
155. of the characters are registration numbers For more information on numerical calculations see section 9 2 4 Numerical calculations Note You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations Numerical calculation NC Constant C Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS v Continued on the following page 9 95 Counting quantities by binary convension Continued from the previous page OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO00 MEAS 1 CNT BIN OBJ DPAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 0 0 3 T ARA A CAL NO0 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICALSYMBOL 1 DEL OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL amp UPPER MENU PAGEO Ol cd 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC If item 1 PAGE NO registration number is set to YES then items 2 to 5 will be displayed The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made in item 3 as follows Total area A to Calculation N NOO to N15 The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following page 9 96 Counting quantities by binary convension Continued from the previous
156. of the input relays X00 to X06 is displayed 2 The ON B or OFF U status of the output relays YOO to Y15 is displayed 3 The ON B or OFF L status of the auxiliary relays C000 to C127 is displayed 4 The current timer value is displayed 5 The current counter value is displayed 6 The results ANOO to AN15 of the final numerical calculations are displayed 7 Menu bar Menuber Description OUT CHNG Scu the output relay address YOO to Y15 with the up and down keys in units of AUX CHNG Change the auxiliary relay address C000 to C127 with the up and down keys i units of 8 points Change the final numerical calculation address ANOO to AN15 with the up and down keys in units of 8 points RUN SCRN Press the SET key to return to the MAIN OPS MENU Manually change the object type number 00 to 15 with the up and down keys Fr The object type number can be changed by setting the OBJ NO MANL MODE item MANL TYP CHG fo YES See page 8 9 The image will be cleared every time the object type is changed However when the CAPTURE AN IMAGE item has been set to NO the image will not be cleared The other data displayed is the same as on the MAIN OPS MENU See page 72 10 16 Chapter 11 Setting the Input Output Conditions 11 1 Outline This chapter explains the input output settings on the IV S20 The conditions are set on the IN OUT CND menu
157. of the specified output data is D CALC RESULT stored may be set from 00 to 15 OBJECT TYPE Select the type of data being calculated A number of style settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item Selection of 2 The first line of the display Calculation results for Measurement 0 0 to 3 camera 1 1 to 2 measurements N NOO 0 to 15 ANOO 0 to 15 ABS TAN ANOO 0 to 15 the second line will not be displayed 00000000 0 the second line will not be displayed Note Please use a smaller number for entering numbers at AN 00 to 15 than that 1 CALC RESULT calculations results AN 00 to 15 8 FORMULA registaration number Final calculation results AN Numerical calculations NC Constant C 4 UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT Enter the upper and lower limits for making a decision 5 OUTPUT Setting the output of the calculation results RUN A TEST Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test UPPER MENU This will return you to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type 9 18 Shared settings Based on the settings at items 2 and 3 the number of styles may be entered as follows Q OBJECT TYPE Number of styles INDV MEAS RSLT N Results of the calculations for measurements FINAL RESULT AN Results of final calculations NUM CALC NC Numerical calculations
158. on the following page 9 69 Distance and angle measurement Continued form the previous page Pressing the TRG BRT key will run a measurement of distance and angle after manually measuring the starting point Below is an example of the results display for a distance measurement Display of measured results Final evaluation result FL C1ALLC2NO VX X TYPEO0 OK Measuring time Measurement number camera number and measurement type contents gray scale or center of gravity gt MEAS XXXXXXms MEAS1 CAM1 DST amp AGL GRAY DISTOO BETWEEN 2PT gt 207 0 PIXEL OK Distance number Measurement of distance in pixels and decision result The X and Y coordinates of the starting point numbers Bra 00 259 0 178 0 ST PNT 01 466 0 178 0 DISTO1 BETWEEN Y 50 0 PIXEL OK ae ST PNT 00 259 0 178 0 ST PNT 02 361 0 228 0 I 7 BUSY REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG By moving the cursor to REG CHNG change registration and pressing the up key it is possible to see the measurement results corresponding to other types of data which may be scrolled through in this order distance number 00 to 15 angle number 00 to 15 starting point number 00 to 15 auxiliary point number 00 to 15 and then returning again to distance number w
159. page 3 29 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page 13 Measuring the distance Press the TRG BRT key and the distance between the specified detection point 0 start point 00 and detection point 1 start point 01 and the coordinates of these points will be displayed in pixel d 2 8 TYPEOO FL C1ALLC2NO Display of measured result Q K Final evaluation result 2 MEAS XXXXXXms Measuring time MEAS1 CAM1 DST amp AGL GRAY Measurement No and details of measurement DISTOO BETWN SPT Distance No 00 Measured distance in pixels and judgment result X Y coordinates of start point 00 and point 01 228 0 0PIXEL OK lt ST PNT 00 132 0 298 0 ST PNT 01 360 0 298 0 DISTO1 NO ID 5 MSR CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 3 Move the cursor to REG CHNG registration change with the left and right keys and press the up or down key The coordinates of the start point 00 and point 01 and the degree of match with the reference image will be displayed MEAS XXXXXXms MEAS1 CAM1 DST amp AGL GRAY ST PT00 GRAY SEARCH lt Start point No 00 132 0 298 0 OK lt Coordinates of start point 00 MATCH 09944 OK Degree of match with reference image ST PT 01 GRAY SEARCH lt Start point No 01 3
160. page Pressing the TRG BRT key will display the total area in pixels and the number of objects inside the measurement window TYPEOO FL C1ALLC2NO X Display of measured results Q K lt Final evaluation results MEAS XXXXXXms lt Measuring time MEAS1 CAM1 CNT BIN OBJ lt Measurement number camera number and measurement program title REGST NO 00 0 3 Registration number NUMBER 00006 OK Number of objects and evaluation results TOTAL ARA 004434 OK lt Total area in pixels and evaluation results 6 0000000 vo 7 00000000 Busy 0 MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG By moving the cursor to REG CHNG change registration item and pressing the up key you can see the measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations This is done by scrolling through them in this order registration numbers 0 to 3 numerical calculation results to ON15 and then returns to registration number The measurements screen also has this feature Unregistered numbers will be skipped When there are no recorded numbers other than those currently on display or if no measurement 9 97 Object identification labeling by binary conversion 9 9 Object identification labeling by binary conversion Purpose When there are several objects and the measuring position is arbitrary the presence or absence of objects and the size of the objects can be
161. pin D sub female on the IV S20 main housing See Chapter 14 Computer Link for details about the procedure for connecting to specific manufacturers controllers The pin arrangement of the communication connector on the IV S20 main housing is shown on page 6 16 to 6 17 In the case of RS 232C the maximum communication cable length depends on the com munication speed Communication speed Cable length 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 Conduct a communication test before using the devices for measurements Connect the input output terminals of the programmable controller to the input output terminals on the IV S20 main housing See item 4 Connecting to the input output terminals parallel I F for details about wiring procedure 6 18 Installation Conditions and Method 6 3 Connection and installation methods of camera IV S20C1 IV S30C1 C2 1 Connecting and installation to the IV S20C1 1 Connection Connect the cameras up to 2 cameras remote key pad and monitor to the IV S20 main housing Camera 2 connector Camera 1 connector Monitor connector side view Monit eee onitor D Camera 1 e I o D Camera cable PR Plug Camera 2 FI D Co
162. point DETECTED COORD Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window detection coordinates If FREE is selected then the cursor may be positioned as desired Set the number of pixel contractions CONTRACT PIXELS C See page 9 6 gray scale processing using shared settings pixel contraction When either a X LINE horizontal or a Y LINE vertical line are selected in item 1 the choices here will be 1 or 2 DDETECT ACCURACY Select the level of precision used for detection detection accurac S 9 6 le processing using shared settings 2 UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu The setting sequence of the starting point criteria in a gray scale search MEASURE WINDOW REFERENCE IMAGE SEARCH AREA EE 4 DETECTED COORD 5 CONTRACT PIXELS DDETECT ACCURACY gt UPPER MENU Information about the recording of a reference image In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame The specifications for the windows are as follows In the case of a rectangular window Lmeipe Movement Sie Minimum Maimum Solid line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels 32X32 pixels XXY XX Y 65536 pixels Search area Dotted line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pixels 3232 pixels 512480 pixels In the case of a horizontal line eme Line type Movement Length Minimum length Maximum length Reference image Solidline
163. point detection can both be detected Not available Increased number of edge detection directions to 4 Horizontal gt lt 3 vertical 4 Artifact processing added Two directions Horizontal E vertical 4L Not available Measurement of positional deviation Binary conversion measurement Ability to assign X axis correction and Y axis correction independently for a two point search Rotation correction function added Function to count quantities was added up to 3000 items including an area filter Increased number of object identification before area filter 3000 objects Ellipse window added Only simultaneous correction of X and Y axes Not available Up to 128 objects Up to 128 objects Only rectangle and circle Binary conversion pre processing available for each window Settable only for each measurement Point measurement Lead inspection PC functions Numerical calculations Verification using average density is possible Added lead length inspection function Display maximum and minimum values Display NG positions Added AND STR and OR STR operation instructions Density after binary conversion only Lead pitch only Average value only No display Check for doubled use of the same instruction No check Added list of functions used and execution monitor Direct Y output and auxiliary relay for evaluation result added also numeric value ca
164. point edge DDETECT MODE MDLO CHANGE DRK gt BRT BRT DRK CNTR BRT DRK DETECT DIR MDLO gt VERT 1 DETECT AREA MDLO MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 THRESHOLD MODEL0 GRYS LO050 0 255 EDGE W 1 8 FLAT W04 1 16 B PRC PROJECT MDLO NO YES These items in the dotted 6DETECT MODE MDL1 CHANGE DRK gt BRT BRT DRK CNTR BRTDRK 4 line are only displayed DETECT DIR MDL1 HORI 1 when 2 point edge is 8DETECT AREA MDL1 MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 selected QTHRESHOLD MODEL1 GRYS 000 0 255 EDGE W 1 8 FLAT W04 1 16 PRC PROJECT MDL1 NO YES REG REF COORD SET KEY QUPPER MENU _ You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately by using the ESC key Menu Setting details QDDETECT MODE Select the detection mode for model 0 detection mode Point of change or From dark to light From light to dark Centering light or dark center 2 DETECT DIR MDLO Select the direction in which detection will take place for detection direction model 0 Set up a dotted line rectangular perimeter around the search DETECT AREA MDLO area for model 0 area of detection In order to increase the speed of the searches make the length of Y as small as possible THRESHOLD MODELO Set the width of the edge 1 to 8 and the flat 1 to 16 as well threshold values as the difference in the ligh
165. point edge 2 point edge REGST NO 0 0 7 REGST NO 0 0 7 X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLO X 000 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLO X 000 0 OK Y DEVIAT MDLO Y 000 0 OK Y DEVIAT MDLO Y 000 0 OK i ANGULAR DEVIT 001 7 OK XCOORD MDL1 X 5340 Ue eet Y COORD MDL1 Y 480 0 OK i X DEVIAT MDL1 001 0 OK Y DEVIAT MDL1 Y2 001 0 OK 9 44 Degree of match inspection Purpose 9 4 Degree of match inspection for shape and size The comparison requires the use of the gray scale search function for measuring the new image against the reference image By identifying the differences between images decisions can be made about the new image being tested The acceptance of the workpiece in the image being tested is based its level of similarity to the reference image It is also possible to make matching decisions about images which have undergone binary conversion Applica tions Checking the positional deviation of labels checking for the wrong part or other foreign objects mixing in with the desired parts checking for sufficiently high precision in the mounting of electrical components on PC boards checking for rius check for missing electrical parts such as terminals and simple inspection of lettering Example Checking for label misalignment 1 Search area used to Ue 1 Search
166. point measurement eene enne nnns 9 109 Lead Inspections die ett ip eie NR BER RM 9 74 Object identification by binary conversion sssssssesssseeeeeneeeeenen ennemis 9 100 Positional deviation measurement 9 3 Conditions for objects to be measured lead 9 74 9 76 Conditions for object type setting sessssssssssssssssseseeenne eintreten nnns snnt entres 9 1 Connection method Gonnectionwithi1M S20 2 2 ii dedere d eat d eee cad Ede te YE aea eat a ec e EOD den ae ree E ants 6 7 Connection with Mitsubishi PO sss senten tens 14 12 Connection with OMRON PO nennen nennen entretenir 14 15 Connection with Sharp PC eiie eer Geena eect dedere e me e mae eto a do 14 6 OWING CLON REPRE RUP 5 1 GO CIOS sc n idet A AR E ainda c pu EE ae a c eae 5 1 Contraction binary noise 9 10 G 2 G 4 Conversion COTIIG GLO side eR ERA 4 1 Coordinates Degree of match inspection for shape and 9 53 Positional deviation measurement sssssssssssseeneneneene nennen nennen enhn 9 41 Coordinates X Y lead in
167. position of the line will be adjusted according to positional deviation detected in a gray scale search 9 73 Lead inspection 2 Setti Ane ng details xplanation of item 6 MEAS PROG COND condition for measurement programs from the TYPE MEAS 1 to 3 menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of objrct type and press SET key gt Select item MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 or 2 MEASUREMENT 3 on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu TYPEO0 MEAS1 This is how the line looks DMEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH when the object type is DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV Set to 00 and the selected INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA measurement is 1 CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS Q COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA CAM1 2 COPY EXEC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC amp MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 8NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU Select INSPECT LEAD lead inspection in item 1 Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item SELECT CAMERA IMG camera selection which is in the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Select item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 INSPECT LEAD DR
168. setting When the screen is returned from the SYSTEM SETUP menu to the MAIN screen OPS MENU if CAPTURE AN IMAGE has been set to NO the image will not be cleared The object type number 00 to 15 can be changed using the up and dow keys MANL TYP The object type number can be changed manually by setting the OBJ NO CHG MANL MODE item to YES See page 8 9 manual Every time the object type is changed the image will be cleared However type change the image will not be cleared when CAPTURE AN IMAGE has been set to NO The screen shows the measuring time determined by the following time from measurement start to measurement end lt Actual measured time gt Only at changing type Type change CCD exposure time CCD image Image Measurement result time Shutter speed _ capture time processing time display time Input I F Monitor display measurement time gt with serial CCD trigger lt _ Input I F Monitor display measurement time with parallel input gt To decrease the measuring time 1 Increase the shutter speed page 9 117 2 Change the CCD image capture mode CAPTURE AN IMAGE to PARTIAL IMAGE see page 8 3 and 3 Set the result displays MESSAGE DISPLAY and PATTERN DISPLAY to NO see page 8 4 and 8 5 9 Display the measured results for each mesurement program The IV S20 can store the setting conditio
169. sub computer RS 232C 422 converter l 5 ES 7 101 Pin No 9 Function name nn r ounces Connector frame ground Transmitted data IV S20 5 gt Personal computer Received data Personal computer 5 gt IV S20 Memory protection 1 Memory protection 2 15m or less 1 km or less lt lt RS 232C RS 422 6 17 Installation Conditions and Method 6 Connecting a programmable controller using the computer link function Connect a programmable controller to the communication connector RS232C RS422 and the input output terminals on the IV S20 main housing Input output terminals Programmable controller c p a lisieisisisialsicistalll HARP IV S20 main Tristes housing SS Se POWER an view S Q z c 2 E O 2 VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2 RS232C RS422 REMOTE IV S20 main housing side view RS 232C RS 422 Communication connector RS232C RS422 Connect the computer link connector RS 232C RS 411 of a programmable controller to the communication connector RS232C RS422 9
170. the SET key 3 Move the cursor to MEAS PROG COND conditions of measurement program and press the SET key c The MEASURING COND measurement condition menu will be displayed 5 Operation on the MEASURING COND menu y 1 Move the cursor to TREGST NO register number and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES and press the SET key c Items io Gwill be displayed DREGST NO SELECT MODE SGRAY SCALE COND EDGE DETECT COND UPPER MENU MEASURING COND TYPEO0 MEASO POS DEVIATION 0 0 7 REG NO YES4 1 i1P SCH 2P SCH 1P EDGE 2P EDGE 1P SCH 1P EDGE TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU 2 Move the cursor to SELECT MODE and press the SET key Move the cursor to 1P SCH 1 point search and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 3 GRAY SCALE COND gray scale search condition and press the SET key C The gray scale search matching setting menu image window and search window will be displayed Continued on the following page 3 9 Operation Examples Position measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 6 Image adjustment 3 Y FC1H Press the TRG BRT key on the remote key pad and the level brightness of the screen will be switched between H and L Indicates camera 1 Lise Image window D Search window DMEAS WINDOW MDLO RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE 1 Press the SEL key c The image ta
171. the illumination of the light Source Operations cannot be carried out using the remote key pad Make sure that the remote key pad cable has been correctly connected to the IV S20 General purpose serial communications cannot be performed Make sure that the communication cable has been correctly connected Make sure that each terminal of the communication cable is porperly connected Make sure that the communication conditions standard speed and parity check in the personal computer conform to those of the IV S20 Check the cable for disconnection and the connectors for contact failure Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned ON the power Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the screen Continued on the following page 15 1 Troubleshooting Phenomenon Make sure that the communication cable has been correctly connected Make sure that the communication cable route does not run near electrically noisy devices Make sure that each terminal of the camera cables is properly connected Communications through a computer link cannot be established Make sure that the communication conditions standard speed and parity check in the personal computer conform to those of the IV S20 Make sure that a compatible model the station No and result write sta
172. the measurement data to be output using the left right up and down keys Specify a block number to be returned in addition to block 0 00 If block 00 is specified data from block 00 will not be returned a second time 3 After the settings are complete press the SET key 11 21 Move the cursor to item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT amp SERIAL OUTPUT with the up and Setting the Input Output Conditions 11 7 Gain offset adjustment The gain and offset of the IV S20 can only be adjusted by our service engineers Users must not try to change them The data which can be adjusted is shown below for reference purpose only Generally an image from the CCD camera can be optimized by adjusting the optical system such as the lens iris To make fine adjustments the IV S20 is equipped with functions to adjust the offset and gain of image signals from cameras 1 and 2 and the contrast on an external monitor screen The gain and offset are adjusted by checking the display on the screen The screen is kept in the through mode On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 3 I O CONDITIONS and press the SET key c On the I O SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 40 GAIN OFFSET and press the SET key ADJUST GAIN amp OFFSET CD CAM1 OFFSET ADJ 1 1 026 2 CAMERA1 GAIN 1 1 245 The average values are
173. through the RS 232C port Communication connector on Z 31 1J 312J the IV S20 RS232C RS422 Communication port CN3 Connector EG eese d FG RDc r TDc U GND Short circuit terminal 15m or less RS 232C 2 Communication through the RS 422 port 4 wire system 14 Communication connector on Z 31 1J 31 2J the IV S20 RS232C RS422 Terminal block TC1 Pin No Signal name Pin No Signal name Connector shield Shielded twisted pair cable 1 km or less RS 422 A 14 21 Computer Link 5 When a JW 21CM or JW 10CM is used Communication through the RS 422 port 4 wire system Communication connector on JW 21CM the IV S20 RS232C RS422 JW 10CM 2 Pin No Signal name 4 7 8 9 j Connector Eg f aaa eae eene SHIELD Ground Shielded twisted pair cable 1 km or less RS 422 4 wire system When a Z 3314J 332J is used Communication through the RS 422 port 2 wire system Communication connector on Z 331J 332J the IV S20 RS232C RS422 Host communication port T1 Pin No Signal name Terminal name L1 8 ou 9 Connector eR 1 pte ERE ER ERE Shielded twisted pair cable 1 km or less RS 422 2 wire system 14 22 Computer Link 3 Connection with a Mitsubish
174. to 15 gsm G 4 Focal kengli aere 6 4 ger c ELI 5 1 Freeze image display mode 7 8 Full pixel readlrig rto mde te A 1 1 G 5 G Gain OffSet akt ea dedu 11 1 11 22 Gray scale processing 1 tenda dp e EL Lect een Ede ee PUn d eT ER 9 6 G 6 Gray scale searcli Itti ion time toe te OS IR 1 2 G 6 Gray scale search conditions positional deviation measurement 9 36 H Halogen e e ex ee ee EM UHR G 6 Halt on NG measurement oie ete eiae ce tete ei 9 2 Hardware specifications nnne nenne nennen nennen nennt nnne nenne 16 2 High frequency lighting d ec ine ede ko ena i ea a c ra Pk oa de G 6 Blorizontal terr er ein mE eT I A ai iach an EE pe m E 9 4 I VO DOME HATING sez scoot ES 6 18 l Oterminal block rettet tee ested dl ces a eee Rp Haste etae Tao ae de wigan 5 2 Ill minance light level aedi detiene eee etie tete ste tret inten 6 3 Illuminance light level monitor mmm 9 115 G 7 Illuminance light level monitor condition seen 9 115 Image captUfe sii REDI REANO ibis 8 3 Image change key SEL ee idee eue eene tie e ena aed 5 3 7 9 IMAGE GISPlAY a
175. to ST PNT starting point with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to REGST NO registration with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 00 and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to 69DEGREE OF MATCH with the up and down keys and press the SET key 5 Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the left and right keys and press the SET key Select the digit to change with the left and right keys and then set the value to 09000 with the up and down keys Criteria for a successful match 90 00 to 100 0096 DEGREE OF MATCH 09000 10000 After defining the lower limit press the SET key and ESC key 6 Move the cursor to REGST NO register number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 01 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 7 Move the criteria for successfull match 90 00 to 100 0095 for the registration No 01 in the same manner as in steps 4 and 5 Y Continued on the following page 3 27 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page 8 Move the cursor to TIDBJECT with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to DIST display with the left and right keys and press the SET key EVALUATION COND TYPEO00 MEAS1 DST amp ANGL MEAS OBJECT ST PNT AUX PNT DIST OUT ANGLE REGST NO 00 0 15 DIST BETWEEN 2PT DISTANCE 000 0 702 0 0PIXEL NO
176. to the flash memory To save the copied settings in flash memory go to item 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM or item OPERATIONS which are both found on the SYSTEM SETUP menu 9 30 Shared settings 8 Editing after initialization When you first start to set all of the parameters we recommend that you initialize the conditions first The contents required to initialize are as follows All of the conditions c See 12 1 3 Total initialization Measurement conditions of each measurement program c 1 Measurement conditions of each type number c 2 1 Initialize measurement conditions for each measurememt program number The IV S20 will always start up with the measuring program for an object type which has been specified and stored in the memory RAM If the measurement 0 program was specified then a camera number will also have been specified Any measurement conditions stored in flash memory will remain as they were before initialization Operation procedure for measurement program 0 This example shows the initialization of object type 01 measurement 0 camera 1 measurement of positional deviation On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key c On the conditions for ob
177. value decreases the white part grows larger Lower limit threshold Horizontal coordinate of the dotted line Changing the lower limit threshold value If the stable range in the lower limit threshold value is less than 20 actual measurement measurement errors may occur The IV S20 captures images using CCDs which are the light sensitive elements in the camera The IV 520 may capture more than one target image to be measured for image processing and it may capture images not required for measurement In these cases a window is used to pick out just the desired target for measurement The area inside the window will contain the object to be measured and the areas outside the window will be ignored Window Object to be measured a Objects outside the designated measurement area Appendix Appendix 1 Support tools available on the market Manufacturers of the support tools which can be used with the IV S20 are listed below Products available from SHARP gt See the next page 1 Lighting equipment Supplier Moritex Corporation Address 3 1 14 Jingumae Shibuya Ku Tokyo Postal code 150 0001 03 3401 9711 Nippon PI Co Ltd 1 17 1 Toranomon Minato Ku Tokyo 105 0001 03 3504 3321 Rawtronocs Corporation 6 1 3 Chome Kamifukuoka Kamifukuoka City Saitama 356 0004 0492 64 1391 Hayashi Watch Works Co Ltd 2 Lens lens barrel Suplier Seiwa Optical Corp 1 28
178. will be displayed 2 When the final evaluation result is OK YO is turned ON and a filled box llis displayed When the result is NG an empty box J is displayed When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON YO is turned ON according to the condition set in step 10 for final evaluation output p 10 put a7 Operation Examples Point measurement 3 6 Existence inspection by point measurement Shown below is an example of an operation for checking the existence of an object by detecting whether the points are white or not 7 segment display 1 Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU after initialize all conditions MAIN OPS MENU 0 FL C1ALLC2NO VX X MEAS ms MEASO CAM1 NO X0 6 0000 Yo 7 BUSY l MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 1 Move the cursor to SET SCRN with the left and right keys and press the SET key c The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Y 2 Operation on the SYSTEM SETUP menu SYSTEM SETUP OPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 11 S O CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU BDISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH ORECEIVING PARMS EXEC DINIT ALL PARMS EXEC amp SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS 1 M
179. window After defining the search window size and position press the ESC key 6 Move the cursor to 2UPPER MENU and press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu 7 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEASO type 00 measurement 0 menu Y Operation on the EVALUATION COND evaluation condition menu 1 Move the cursor to GEVALUATION COND and press the SET key gt The EVALUATION COND menu will be displayed EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEASO POS DEVIATION REGST NO 0 0 7 OUT 2 X COORD MDLO 000 0 511 0 NO COORD MDLO 000 0 479 0 NO X DEVIAT MDLO 000 0 511 0 NO Y DEVIAT MDLO 000 0 479 0 NO MATCH MDLO 10000 10000 NO 7X SET KEY 4 5 a ES Y 2 Move the cursor to REGST NO register number and press the SET key Move the number to 0 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to MATCH MDLO and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the left and right keys and press the SET key Select the digit to change with the left and right keys and then set the value to 09000 with the up and down keys Criteria for a successful match 90 00 to 100 0096 09000 10000 After defining the lower limit press the SET key 5 Press the ESC key move the cursor to UPPER MENU and pres
180. window in units of 1 pixel 2 WINDOW If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1 then the two variables you must set POSIT the center and the diameter Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type a rectangle circle or ellipse MASK WINDOW A mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window screens out those parts of the image which are not needed for the measurement process Set the size and position of the mask window which is drawn with a dotted line using units of 1 pixel SIDE If a circle or ellipse is selected in item Q then the two variables you must set mask window position the center and the diameter It is possible to set the heading so that the mask window is actually bigger than the measurement window THRESHOLD VALUE Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to 255 C See setting threshold values in shared settings on page 9 7 Select whether to invert the black and white in the image YES or NO INVERT B W NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been converted black and white to binary values Inversion YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary values Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion BINARY PROCESS rocessing method VAR DIFF or VAR RATE C See methods
181. 0 MEASUREMENT 1 with the up and down keys and press the SET key y The TYPE00 MEAS1 type 00 measurement 1 menu will be displayed Operation on the TYPEO0 MEAS1 menu TYPE00 MEAS1 MEAS SELECTION ES NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ 2 POINT MEAS SELECT CAMERA 1 2 EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 8NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU _ 1 Move the cursor to 1 MEAS SELECTION selection of measurement with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to INSPECT LEAD lead inspection with the right and left keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 6 MES PRG COND conditions of measurement program with the up and down keys and press the SET key y The MEASURING COND measurement condition menu will be displayed Operation on the MEASURING COND menu 1 Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO registration number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES with the right and left keys and press the SET key REGST NO 0 0 3 REG NO YES c The item 2 will be displayed Q SEARCH CRITERIA TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS1 INSPECT L 8 OBJ NO FOR MEAS CRT 0
182. 0 0007999 DEL UPPER MENU PAGE 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 LOGIC 3 INPUT2 LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC 3 Move the cursor to 5ET POSITION position to set and press the SET key Move the cursor to the Oth column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the up down left and right keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to SNPUT SIGNAL and press the SET key Select AUXRLY C000 0 to 127 with the left and right keys change the setting to C112 with the up and down keys and press the SET key c A logic symbol will be displayed in the 0 column of INPUT 0 PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C112 LOGIC I 5 Move the cursor to GDUTPUT SIGNAL and press the SET key Select OUT YOO 0 to 15 with the left and right keys Specify YOO with the up and down keys and press the SET key C A symbol indicating an output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C112 Yoo LOGIC lt gt 6 Move the cursor to GUPPER MENU and press the SET key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu Y Continued on the following page 3 12 Operation Examples Position measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 10 Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU 1 Press the ESC key gt The screen will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu Move the cursor to SAVE IN FLASH ME
183. 01 to 376 The data in the result output relays YO to Y15 16 points on the IV S20 is transferred from registers 09004 to 09005 to addresses 0412 and 0413 A normal termination signal is output The judgment OK NG of the result output relay YO is output The judgment OK NG of the result output relay Y1 is output When a time out or an error occurs it is output When a time out or an error occurs it is reset 4 Timing chart 1 scan time Operation start 00040 Start signal input 00007 Execution of Data writing measurement Operation of the IV S20 IV S20 5 gt JW70H through a computer link 77777777 S Normal termination 05 a 04100 YO Y1 6 Error output 00013 14 31 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Item 1 shows problems which may occur when the IV S20 measurement system is started If any error the termination code is not 00 occurs during image processing on the IV S20 take the steps described in item 2 Perform the recommended daily inspection following the maintenance procedures listed in item 3 1 Symptoms and checks The following symptoms may not be malfunctions Before asking us to repair your equipment check the recommended parts Phenomenon Checks The power is not turned ON The power lamp on the IV S20 does not light 1 Make sure that the power cord has been connected properly t
184. 0911 or equivalent Amplitude 2mm 10 to 61 Hz 147m s 61 to 150Hz No of sweeps 10 1 octave min 3 directions X Y Z Shock resistance JIS C 0912 or equivalent 147m s each 3 times in directions X Y and Z directions Outside dimensions mm 76 9 x 73 6 x 25 0 except camara angle bracket Weight Approx 230g IV 60LD body Approx 140g Camera angle bracket Approx 90g Accessories One camera angle bracket 6 installation screws M3 x 6mm One instruction manual Outline dimensions drawings The dimensions shown below are when an the IV S20 camera is attached 2 places Unit mm The dimensions will vary according to the installation direction of the camera Camera center 32 5 77 8 44 8 62 62 90 25 73 6 104 or 98 5 93 25 16 7 B Area filter A function used to eliminate an island if it area is smaller that the specified size after each of the objects in an image have been identified E Arrangement of the square pixels This refers to CCD elements whose pixels are square and arranged at the same vertical and horizontal interval If this type of CCD element is used length corrections do not need
185. 1 8 to 16 Starting point conditions distance and angle measurement Center of gravity eie aet dat beet bese t pet re e sd lata etel 9 62 Edge detectlon i s e Ue m eb eie Lot ud M etd nete sales 9 61 Gray scale ie Het ere Et de Maen dg coe uada 9 59 to 60 Starting point mode distance and angle measurement sss 9 59 Starting point number distance and angle measurement 9 59 Starting point X Y distance and angle measurement ssssssssseeeennn 9 67 Stat s OUtpUL Ru aet ete da ned ae eat eee 11 1 Station number o oe eet ca e Hee t ER ee ce Educ fev do Minti er Eta E DOE Yu ed P PEL UA 11 20 op I 11 18 Sub pixel Precision 1 2 10 Subtraction ana IT CIE 9 24 9 25 System configuration Basic system configuration nennen nnne nennen inen nnns nnn nnns 4 1 System configuration examples 4 3 System I O for each object type calculation between images 9 25 System 12 1 SYSICM SCHINGS 9 115 1 13 System I O setting for each item calculation between images
186. 1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 3 EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 8BNUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU a o a 1 Move the cursor to 1 MEAS SELECTION select measurement with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to POINT MEAS point measurement with the left and right keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 6 MES PRG COND conditions of measurement program with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The MEASURING COND measurement condition menu will be displayed v Continued on the following page 3 39 Operation Examples Point measurement Continued from the preceding page Y b Operation on the MEASURING COND menu image adjustment 3 MEASURING COND TYPEO0 MEAS1 POINT MEAS F C1 PROCESSING MODE BIN CONV AV LIGHT LEVEL Press the TRG BRT key on the BINARY CONV COND FIXED THRESHOLD ADJ remote key pad and the level THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 Se 4 OSET POINT TO NEXT SUB MENU 7 MENU Indicates camera 1 5 1 Press the SEL key c The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed f the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see press the TRG BRT key to reduce the brightness of the image Then the brightness indicator in the upper right corn
187. 10 Methods for eliminating noise from binary images expansion contraction and Eliminating binary noise in Shared settings 2NUM OF FILTR PASS the number of binary noise elimination processing UPPER MENU v Continued on the following page Separately set the number of cycles that the expansion and contraction binary noise elimination processes will be repeated 0 to 5 This will return you to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu 9 51 Degree of match inspection Continued from the previous page When the BINRY IMG PROC binary processing mode is selected Setting sequence for reference criteria This is the sequence to follow when model 1 object to be measured is set to NO REFERENCE DETECTED COORD IMAGE M detection coordinates S THRESHOLD VALUE INVERT B W BINARY PROCESS IMAGE PRE PROCESS black and white inversion binary conversion process image pre processing BINARY NOIS FILTR OF FILTR PASS the number of cycles that the api gt PPER MEN eliminating binary noise binary noise elimination process is applied Bu i Information about the recording of a reference image In order to record a reference image it is necessary to use the freeze frame The specifications for a rectangular window are as follows Solid line Units of 4 pixels Units of 4 pi
188. 2 7 8 SELECT MEAS TYPE Select MEAS POSITION DEVIATE positional deviation measurement MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs I Mode 1 or 2 point search I Conditions for gray scale search 1or2 point edge Conditions for edge detection gt Conditions for gray scale search 1 point search 1 point edge g Conditions for edge detection OUTPUT CONDITIONS EVALUATION COND output condition evaluation conditions NUMERIC CALC COND conditions for numeric calculation E OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for object types FINAL CALC RESULT final numerical calculations see 9 2 4 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for object types FINAL OUTPUT COND final output conditions see PC function in MAIN OPS MENU Chapter 10 These settings are found in the TYPEO00 MEASQ object type measurement 0 menu 9 35 Positional deviation measurement 2 Setting details An explanation of item 4 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs from the TYPEO00 MEASO object type measurement 0 menu On the MAIN OPS MENU item move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET
189. 40 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 5 MES AVE GRYS 000 0 NOTE AVG LIGHT LVL EXEC REG AVE GRYS 000 0 77 BUPPER MENU Monitoring window 8 qe 3 Press the SEL key to enter the through image mode c T through will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen 4 Select item 1 SIZE and item 2 POSITION using the up and down keys and press the SET key Then set the size and position of the monitoring window using the direction keys The monitoring window should be placed in a location with medium brightness which does not contain any objects to be measured The monitor window is a rectangle 4 to 32 pixels tall and 4 to 64 pixels wide se in multiples of 4 pixels The monitor window can be moved one pixel at a time The average light level in the monitoring window is displayed on MES AVE GRYS average measured light level in item 3 When monitoring changes in the lighting environment If not go to item 6 5 Select item 3 THRESHOLD VALUE using the up and down keys and press the SET key Select the upper and lower limits using the left and right keys and set the light level range 0 to 255 using the up and down keys Then press the SET key gt When the average light level in the monitoring window is out of the preset light level range OVR ILLM RANGE light level over range will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU 9 115 System settings When the threshold value fo
190. 48 When the BINRY IMG PROC binary processing mode is selected You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately using the ESC key Menu Setting detail REFERENCE IMAGE Record a reference image DETECTED COORD detection coordinates 3 THRESHOLD VALUE Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window If FREE is selected then position of cursor is optional Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to 255 CP See page 9 7 Setting threshold values in Shared settings INVERT B W black and white inversion BINARY PROCESS the binary conversion process Set the inversion of black and white in the image to YES or NO Selecting NO means that the white area is measured after the image has been converted to binary values Selecting YES means that the black area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary values Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion processing method VAR DIFF or VAR RATE 5 See page 9 8 Methods for binary conversion in Shared settings IMAGE PRE PROCESS image pre processing DBINARY NOIS FILTR eliminating binary noise Select a method for pre processing the image data gt See page 9 9 Pre processing in Shared settings Select a method for eliminating binary noise gt See page 9
191. 58 8 351 6 375 1 16 2 732 6 223 8 238 7 9 1526 4 4 2 2981 3 744 6 794 3 8 0 1551 3 373 8 398 8 16 2 778 9 238 0 253 9 1800 1515 5 1616 6 4 2 3157 5 789 0 841 6 396 0 422 5 825 1 252 2 269 0 1900 1600 1 1706 9 4 2 3333 7 833 4 889 0 418 2 446 2 871 4 266 4 284 2 2000 1684 7 1797 1 4 2 3509 9 877 8 936 4 440 4 469 8 917 6 280 6 299 3 2500 2107 5 2248 1 4 2 4390 9 1099 8 1173 2 551 4 588 2 1148 9 351 6 375 1 3000 2530 4 2699 2 4 2 5271 9 1321 8 1410 0 662 4 706 6 1380 2 422 7 450 9 2 3150 3 4 2 6152 9 1543 8 1646 8 8 0 3216 4 773 4 825 1 16 1 1611 4 493 7 526 7 25 2 1028 7 1 2601 4 4 2 7033 9 1765 8 1883 6 8 0 3678 9 884 4 943 5 16 1 1842 7 564 8 602 5 25 2 1176 7 4500 3798 9 4052 4 4 2 7914 9 1987 8 2120 4 4141 4 995 4 1061 9 2074 0 635 8 678 2 5000 4221 8 4503 5 4 2 8795 9 2209 8 2357 2 4604 0 1106 4 1180 3 2305 2 706 8 754 0 5500 4644 7 4954 6 4 2 9676 9 2431 8 2594 0 5066 5 1217 4 1298 7 2536 5 777 9 829 8 6000 5067 5 5405 6 4 2 10557 9 2653 8 2830 9 5529 0 1328 4 1417 1 2767 7 848 9 905 6 6500 5490 4 5856 7 4 2 114389 2875 8 3067 7 8 0 5991 5 1439 411535 5 16 0 2999 0 920 0 981 4 913 2 6307 e 42 12319 9 3097 8 3304 5 8 0 6454 1 1550 4 1653 9 16 0 3230 3 991 0 1057 1 7500 6336 1 6758 9 4 2 132009 3319 8 3541 3 8 0 6916 6 1661 4 1772 3 16 0 3461 5 1062 0 1132 9 25 4 25 4 466 2 495 8
192. 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC ___ INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC The input signals which may be set depend on the selection at item 3 as follows Selection of 3 Input signals Degree of match M OM to 3M Coordinate X OX to 3X Coordinate Y OY to 3Y Number of objects K OKO to 3K7 Calculation N NOO to N15 The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers The numbers ranging from 0 to 7 after the characters are numbers for the object to be mesured For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following page 9 80 Lead inspection Continued from the previous page Pressing the TRG BRT key will measure the distance and angle after manually measuring the starting point Below is an example of the results displayed for a distance measurement gt Display of the inspection results TYPEO0 FH C1ALLC2NO VX X Final evaluation result gt OK Measuring time gt MEAS XXXXXXms Measurement number and MEAS1 CAM1 INSPECT LEAD camera number Registration number for the measurement conditions Central coordinates of the reference image and evaluation E REGST NO 0 0 3 Degree of match with the reference 09957 OK image and evaluation results MEAS OBJ 0 0 0 7 Number for the object to be NUMBER 005 OK measured DISTANCE 040 0 OK Number of le
193. 60 0 298 0 OK lt Coordinates of start point 01 MATCH 09949 OK Degree of match with reference image MATCH 09944 means that the degree of match percentage of pixels that match measurement image and the reference image is 99 44 The final evaluation result will be displayed as OK in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the items have been evaluated as acceptable If there is a single unacceptable item NG will be displayed When the final evaluation result is OK YO is turned ON and a filled box lis displayed When the result is NG an empty box lis displayed When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON YO is turned ON according to the condition set in step 11 for final evaluation output 3 30 Operation Examples Lead inspection 3 5 Lead inspection An example of the operations used to inspect IC lead pitches is given below Lead pitch Lead Lead length T Line to be inspected 1 Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU after initialize all conditions MAIN OPS MENU TYPEO0 FL C1ALLC2NO VX X MESR ms MESRO CAM1 NO X0 6 OOO Yo77 OOOO BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 1 Move the cursor to SET SCRN with the right and left keys and press the SET key gt The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed
194. 76 3 503 9 537 5 35 21049 8 350 0 231 4 246 8 76 2 5500 5546 591 6 35 2H155 5 385 5 411 3 50 5 803 2 255 0 1272 11 76 0 531 3 6000 605 4 645 8 35 21261 2 421 1 449 1 50 4 877 2 278 7 76 0 580 7 6500 656 1 699 9 35 21367 0 456 6 487 0 50 4 951 2 302 4 322 6 75 9 7000 706 8 754 0 35 21472 7 492 1 524 9 50 4 1025 3 326 1 347 8 75 8 7500 757 6 808 1 1578 4 527 6 562 8 50 3 099 3 349 8 373 1 6 7 Installation Conditions and Method 6 2 Connection installation and wiring of IV 8520 main housing 1 Connection Connect the cameras up to 2 cameras remote key pad and monitor to the IV S20 main housing i e es 89 sHare IV S20 main IV S20 GS housing ru O plan view VIDEO CAMERA CAMERA2 RS232C RS422 REMOTE Camera 2 connector CAMERA2 Remote key pad Camera 1 connector CAMERA1 connector REMOTE Monitor connector VIDEO ZS OC NC f lo s IV S20 main eQO IEEE housing side view Monitor 9 4 O a N Camera 1 ON Camera 2 g a gv T N 5 Remote key pad D Connect the camera cable connectors to the camera 1 CAMERA1 and came
195. 8 31 i 1 4 20 UNC threaded hole 20 PEE NES for attachment to the mounting surface 28 6 25 Installation Conditions and Method When the IV S20HC3 camera conversion cable is bent its bending radius should be larger than 40 mm If the IV S20HC3 camera conversion cable will be bent repeatedly during operation design the cable layout so that the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use components that can be flexed up to 2 million times IV S20HC3 o Bending radius Min 40 mm 6 26 Installation Conditions and Method 3 Installing and connecting the IV S30C2 1 Connections Up to two IV S30C2 micro cameras can be connected to the IV S20 main housing using the IV S20HC3 camera conversion cables Camera 2 connector CAMERA 2 IV S20 main housing Camera 1 connector CAMERA 1 KS view 5 D eT IN o TN Camera 1 Le IV S30C2 IV S20HC3 camera Connector Plug Micro camera conversion cable
196. 9 75 Positional deviation measurement eee nennen nnne nnne nnn 9 37 Point 1 2 3 distance and angle measurement sss 9 64 to 66 Point POSIION seeni EE 9 110 Point TegistlatlOni s nime RT acetal E DP e EISE 9 110 9 109 110 Seta coh et 9 110 Position COMSCUION ent 9 20 Operation example uniia eni egeat ei Hi da ted eed eee ace eddie 3 44 Positional deviation absolute position measurement Measurement data block Communication general purpose serial I F 13 14 to 15 Computer linke cou ciat ea tete set e dm stie eddie Ret FD eles 14 5 to 6 Operation example d min va ete a dI a care Le sod tee 3 8 I 1 3 9 34 Setting Procedure gt 9 35 Aaa eae e ege eae e eve Y png dada 9 36 Power lamp 5 2 Power terminal block ea et te ed Ets 5 2 Pre processirig 32 inet He e iad ER e oad need ti He dae edie ae 9 9 G 9 Pre proCessirig t o emt fu e eR tat t el Ite 9 9 Area measurement by binary conversion 9 85
197. ADJ CAM POSITION camera position adjustment and press the SET key On the ADJ CAM POSITION menu set item G SELECT A CAMERA to YES ADJ CAM POSITION DSELECTA CAMERA 1 1 2 NO YES WINDOW POSITION MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 INVERT B W NO YES amp AREA FILTER 000000 PIXEL LOWER LIMIT DISP DEG OF MATCH SET KEY INTIAL CAM IMG REG _ LABL10 81MG AFTR CAM CHNG SET KEY When the data has been SDISPLAY LABELS gt LABLOO BER CHGIAFT CHG Stored the SET key is pressed the number of 7 GRAVTY X 310 0 labels will be displayed GRAVTY Y 220 0 gt FILLET X040 5 FILLET Y 032 AV LLVL 100 5 UPPER MENU 1 Set the image conditions for adjustment before replacement window position and threshold value after binary conversion Set these conditions in items 2 3 and 4 on the ADJ CAM POSITION camera position adjustment menu Set the conditions in the freeze display mode 2 Store a binary image for rough adjustment Store all of the conditions 3 Store the characteristic parameters by going to item 7 on center of gravity and fillet diameter of a binary image the ADJ CAM for dimensional and positional adjustment POSITION menu 4 Store the average light level for brightness adjustment Store them in the freeze display mode 5 You can check the st
198. AS 3 CHG PAGE TEST RUN TEST RESULT OUT 2 P000 OK NO 1 poot 2 WH OK NO P002 WH OK NO 5 P003 WH OK NO 6 P004 WH OK NO Z P005 WH OK NO 8 P006 WH OK NO 9P007 MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY 3 MENU 4 Move the cursor 2 P000 with the up down keys and press the SET key Select WH white with the up and down keys and press the SET key Specify WH white for point No P001 to P006 the same as in steps 1 and 2 In this operation the images binary images in the windows at point No P000 to P006 are checked to see if they are white or black If they are all white the program can decide that the object exists Move the cursor to MAKE A TEST RUN with the up and down keys and press the SET key A test will be executed and the test result OK NG will be displayed Continued on the following page 8 41 EN ENS 005 5 Operation Examples Point measurement Co ntinued from the preceding page 4 Move the cursor to 1 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu 5 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu Y Setting the final evaluation output condition This setting is used to output the result of the final ev
199. BIN CONV binary mode and 128 point registration locations 0 to 127 for the AV LIGHT LEVEL average light level mode The point identifying a block of pixels is the starting point 3 START POINT POS Set the starting point position A group of pixels used as a point are treated as a single pixel The point identifying a block is the starting point BLOCK LAYOUT Set the number of vertical objects times the number of horizontal objects that will be registered as a block 5 BLOCK Set the vertical and horizontal intervals for points in the objects that SPACING will be registered as a block in unit of 1 pixel Min 0 pixel 9 60 STORE BLOCK COND Store the settings as a block 7 DELETE BLOCK COND Delete all of the registered points in a block PRIOR MENU Returns you to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu Example of a block registration Set the starting point in items 2 and 3 above X X EM _ Binary image Enter 002 vertical x 008 horizontal in item 4 BLOCK LAYOUT and enter lis ea Y d X intervals in item 5 BLOCK SPACING select Hon STORE BLOCK COND to store the settings for the block Return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu and select item 5 UPPER MENU Item 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation condition in the TYPEO0 to MEAS1 to 3 menu
200. BJ AREA R000 0 127 CAL N00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICALSYMBOL k l DEL 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL 6 UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC EN i INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC If item 1 PAGE NO register number is set to YES then items 2 to will be displayed The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made in item 3 as follows Selection of 3 Input signals OA to SA Number of objects K OK to 3K ORO00 to 38127 NOO to N15 C000 to C127 The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following page 9 105 Object identification labeling by binary conversion Continued from the previous page When the TRG BRT key is pressed the labeling measurements are performed manually Display of measured results Final evaluation results Measuring time Measurement number camera number measurement program name Registration number Number of labels and evaluation result Total area in pixels and evaluation results Label number Area in pixels of the label number being displayed and the evaluation result Center of gravity main axis angle fillet width and perimeter of the label number being displayed Measurements set to
201. BLOOO 0 127 NO0 0 15 DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 5 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 9RUNA TEST SET KEY UPPER MENU Noo R ORO0 o __ Yo 00001950 0 00002050 0 00002000 0 OK MULT RU comet ese INO2 ori ta RETENIR TRA NO3 Numerical Setting details calculation CD CALC RESULT See the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for specified calculation result data at any value from 00 to 15 OBJECT TYPE type Select the type of data being calculated A number of formula settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2 Total area A number of objects K Registration O 0 to 3 NOO 0 to 15 Area by label R Registration 0 0 to 3 Label 000 0 to 127 Center of gravity by label GX GY 0 to 15 8 FORMULA Main axis angle of label B Fillet width by label FX FY Circumference by label CR Numerical calculation NC ABS TAN NOO 0 to 15 The second line is not be displayed Constant C 00000000 0 The second line is not be displayed Note Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N 00 to 15 than that used for 1 CALC RESULT N 00 to 15 4 UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT Set the upper and lower limits for decisions 5 OUTPUT Set the evaluation output for the results
202. C See methods for binary conversion in shared settings on page 9 8 BINARY PROCESS binary conversion Enable or disable boundary processing C See setting the window boundary in shared settings on page 9 7 When disabled a workpiece contacting the window will not be measured BOUDARY PROCESS boundary processing Select the order for labeling objects C See order of labeling in shared settings on page 9 8 IMAGE PRE PROCESS Select a method for pre processing image data image pre processing See pre processing in shared settings on page 9 9 BINARY NOIS FILTR Select a method for eliminating binary noise eliminating binary noise 5 gt See methods for eliminating noise from binary images expansion contraction and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on page 9 10 8 LABEL ORDER 2 NUM OF FILTR PASS the number of noise elimination cycles Set the number of cycles that the binary noise elimination process will be carried out 0 to 5 Enter number of times for expansion and contraction separately After the labeling the area filter is a function used to identify small islands whose area is less than a specified amount It eliminates them from the object which is being measured 3 AREA FILTER Set the maximum number of pixels Enter any number from 0 to 245760 To enter number select 3 AREA FILTER using up and down keys and press the SET key twice Select a required digit using the lef
203. C during measurement C Ov P C When the object type is changed all Y output and auxiliary relays turn OFF Parallel output YO to Y7 Result output x Result output Parallel output is valid for PC control after the measurement result is determined D X Result output 11 14 Setting the Input Output Conditions 10 Measurement start input CCD trigger start sampling auto object type change general purpose serial result output general purpose serial parallel The general purpose serial command code 550 is used to change the object type Setting order 1 2 O gt Configuration example SETTINGS Camera 1 image capturing CCD trigger D MEAS TRIG INP PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG EL m 2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVI PARALEL SERIAL Camera 2 image capturing OUTPUT OBJ PARALLEL o CCD SAMPLING AUTOMATIGQ ANM of Personal computer the following CI Data SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU Monitor Cy Remote key pad 1V S20 main housing Settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger Power supply 24 VDC sg EISISISISISIETSIST Measurement is started when the
204. CCD TRIGGER COND with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The CCD TRIGGERING menu and a CCD trigger window will be displayed The items displayed will vary according to the setting in item 3 TRIGGER CCD START When the average light level method has been selected When the binary method has been selected CCD TRIGGERING CCD TRIGGERING SIZE X 08 4 32 XY 08 4 64 SIZE X 08 4 32 X Y 08 4 64 2 POSITION 256 240 2 POSITION 256 240 8 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 INVERTB W NO YES UPPER MENU MES AVE GRYS 000 0 5 UPPER MENU 8 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 A Es 8 3 Press the SEL key to change the image display mode from the through mode to the freeze mode and capture an image 4 Move the cursor to item 1 SIZE with the up and down keys and press the SET key Set the CCD trigger window size Select the height or width field with the left and right keys set the height or width pixel count with the up and down keys and press the SET key The window size height width must be 4 to 32 and 4 to 64 respectively The smaller the window size the shorter the CCD trigger sampling cycle When the shutter speed is 1 4000 sec and the window size is 8 x 8 pixels the sampling cycle is approx 4 ms 5 Move the cursor to item 2 POSITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key Set the position of the CCD tri
205. CH 10000 OK ANGLAR DEVIT 001 7 OK X COORD MDL1 X 534 0 OK Y COORD MDL1 Y 480 0 OK X DEVIAT MDL1 X 001 0 OK MATCH MDL1 09999_ OK 1 Y DEVIAT MDL1 Y 001 0 FH C1ALLC2NO TYPEO0 FH C1ALLC2NO MEAS XXXXXXms MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION xo 6 QOO0000 N07 00000000 BUSY 0 MSR CHNG REG CHI When the display mode has been set to NO PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG xo 6 Q000000 Yo 7 Q0000000 BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG Press the SEL key to delete Press the SET key Press the ESC key MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG The menu bar will be displayed Run Menu Conditions and Settings 4 Pattern display Select MEAS RESULT OUT or NO to determine whether to display windows and other marking over an image displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key RUN MENU SETTINGS DMONITOR OUTPUT CAM 182 CAMERA182 1 CAM2 MD CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO NO PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO 5 BINARY IMAGE YES NO SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR OBJ NO MANL MODE YES DIMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH QUPPER MENU _
206. D SET SCRN QOBJECT TYPE COND MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 MEASUREMENT 3 COMPARE IMAGES comparative calculations between images See page 9 2 6 CDMEAS SELECTION select INSPECT LEAD lead inspection SERI gt INITIALIZATION See section 9 2 7 8 When gray scale search for line correction is enabled Conditions for the reference search MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs Conditions for the inspection object length of lead measurement enabled disabled When gray scale search for line adjustment is disabled __ Conditions for the inspection object gt length of lead measurement enabled disabled evaluation conditions EVALUATION COND IN amp NUMERIC CAL COND numerical calculation condition QOUTPUT CONDITION output condition OBJECT TYPE COND 3 FINAL CALC RESULT 2 final numerical calculations See section 9 2 4 OBJECT TYPE COND 4 FINAL OUTPUT COND final output conditions See PC function in Chapter 10 k MAIN OPS MENU These settings are found in the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 object type measurement 1 to 3 menu Gray scale search for line correction enabled means that the
207. D TYPE00 MEAS1 DST amp ANGL MEAS START POINT NO 00 0 15 REGNO YES START POINT MODE GRAY SEARH EDGE DETECT START POINT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU AUX CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU DSTANCE COND NEXT SUB MENU ANGLE CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 2 Move the cursor to START POINT MODE starting point mode with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to GRAY SEARH gray scale search with the left and right keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to START POINT COND start point conditions with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The gray scale search matching setting menu image window and search window will be displayed Y Image adjustment 3 1 O Press the TRG BRT key on the remote key pad and the brightness of the screen will be switched between H and L a Image window 1 1 1 M Search window Wiel aoe Indicates camera 1 MEASURE WINDOW RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE 1 Press the SEL key The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed f the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see press the TRG BRT key to reduce the brightness of the image Then the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from H to L 2 Adjust the focus and aperture iris of the camera lens see page 5 1 so that the object to be measured is clear and eas
208. DOW MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE _ UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 __ lt TYPE measuring window is MASK WINDOW TYPE NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE _ MASK WINDOW POSIT MOVE _ UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 1 This is how the display looks THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 When item S MASK WINDOW INVERT B W NO YES TYPE shape of mask window BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD ADJ VAR DIFF VAR RATE S Setto RECTANGLE 8IMAGE PRE PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE EMPHASIS ALL EDGE HORZ EDGE VERT EDGE BINARY NOIS FILTR EXP gt CONTR CONTR EXP NUM OF FILTR PASS EXPD 0 0 5 CONTRO 0 5 UPPER MENU Item will be displayed unless item is set to NO Menu Setting details CDMEAS WINDOW TYPE Select the measuring window type RECTANGLE rectangular CIRCLE measuring window circular or ELLPSE elliptical Set the size and position of the window in units of 1 pixel 2 WINDOW POSIT If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1 then the two variables you need to set are the center and diameter Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type rectangular round or elliptical MASK WINDOW TYPE A mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window and screens out those parts of the image which are not needed in the measurement process Set the size and position of the mask window which is drown with a dotted line using units of 1
209. E COND conditions for object types menu TYPEO0 MEAS1 MEAS SELECTION SELECT CAMERA COPY INITIALIZATION 6 MEAS PROG COND EVALUATION COND amp NUMERIC CALC COND OUTPUT CONDITIONS QQUPPER MENU NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 CAM1 2 EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO EXEC TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU This is how the line looks when the object type is set to 00 and the selected measurement is 1 Set the DST amp AGL MES measurement of distance and angle which can be found under item MEAS SELECTION select measurements to either GRAY amp EDGE gray scale search and edge detection or GRAV center of gravity Item 2 COMPARE IMAGES calculation between images will be displayed unless NO is selected in item NUMERIC CALC COND camera selection which is in the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Select item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs This is how the display looks when GRAY amp EDGE are selected START POINT NO AUX CONDITIONS DUPPER MENU MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 DST amp ANGL MEAS START POINT MODE GRAY SEARCH EDGE DETECT START POINT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU DISTANCE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU ANGLE CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU 00
210. E with the left and right keys and press the SET key Move the detection line to the left of the lead to be measured with the up down left and right keys A Detection line 7 When the position of the line is correct press the SET key 5 Move the cursor to LO R lower right with the left and right keys and press the SET key Extend the detection line to the right lead with the right key Detection line a When the position is correct press the SET key and ESC key 6 Move the cursor to UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu 7 Press the ESC key gt The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu 3 35 Continued on the following page Operation Examples Lead inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 9 Operation on the EVALUATION CONDITION evaluation condition menu Y 1 Move the cursor to 7 EVALUATION CONDITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The EVALUATION CONDITION menu will be displayed EVALUATION CONDITION TYPEO0 MEAS 1 INSPECT LEAD DREGST NO gt 0 0 3 OUT xX COORD 000 0 511 0 NO Y COORD 000 0 479 0 NO 10000 10000 NO 1 CRT 0 0 0 7 i NUMBER 000 128 NO 51 DISTANCE 000 0 702 0 NO MAKE RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU
211. ECK DEG OF MATCH looks when the ob DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV Ject type is set to INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA 00 and the selec CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ e easurement POINT MEAS COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2 copy EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU BNUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU Select LABEL BIN OBJ object identification by binary conversion in item D Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item SELECT CAMERA IMG camera selection which is in the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu 2 a Select item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 LABEL BIN OBJ REGST NO 00 0 3 REG NO YES BINARY AREA COND TO NEXT SUB MENU FIND CENT GRAVITY NO YES MAIN AXIS ANGLE YES amp FILLET DIAMETER NO YES i PERIMETER LENGTH NO YES UPPER MENU If YES was specified in item 1 REGST NO registration number then items 2 to 6 will be displayed D REGST NO Set this to any number from 0 to 3 and select NO or registration number YES to store it 2 BINARY AREA COND The conditions for binary areas are set on the next 3 FIND CENT GRAVITY center of gravity 5 FILLET DIAMETER fillet width 6 PERIM
212. EGST NO 0 0 3 REG NO YES i SEARCH CRITERIA TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJ NO FOR MEAS CRT 0 0 0 7 REG NO YES LEAD LENGTH YES 5 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS TO NEXT SUB MENU OUPPER MENU If YES is specified in item 1 REGST NO registration number then item 2 will be displayed If YES is specified in item 3 OBJ NO FOR MEAS object number then items 4 and 5 will be displayed Enter number 0 to 3 and select NO or YES disable enable of CDREGST NO registration registration number If you want to enable the gray scale search for line correction select YES in this line SEARCH CRITERIA Set gray scale match which will be reference search conditions in criteria search the next menu conditions This setting is enabled when YES is selected in item 1 above OBJ NO FOR MEAS ID Enter number 0 to 7 correspond to the object to be measured and number for object to be select NO or YES enable disable registration measured If you enter 0 for CRT criteria number it will correspond to registration number 0 to 3 entered in item 1 above LEAD LENGTH MEAS Choice of NO YES disable enable lead length measurement lead length measurement 5 CONDFOR MEAS Set edge detection which will be conditions for object to be conditions for object to measured in the next menu MA be measured This setting is enabled when YES is selected in item 3 above 6 UPPER MENU This will r
213. ENGLISH amp RECEIVING PARMS EXEC INIT ALL PARMS EXEC 2 SSELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS 2 Move the cursor to NIT ALL PARMS total initialization using the up and down keys press the SET key c The INITIALIZE DATA message will be displayed on the upper area of the screen 3 Press the SET key She system will be initialized 4 Press the ESC key 5The display will return to the MAIN OPS MENU without initialization 3 1 Operation Examples Area measurement by binary conversion 3 1 Area measurement by binary conversion An example of area measurement is given using the following object The area will be measured by counting the number of pixels after binary conversion Object to be measured white 1 Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU after initialize all conditions MAIN OPS MENU TYPE00 FH CtALLC2NO VX X MEAS ms MEASO CAM1 NO X0 6 Y0 7 J BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 Move the cursor to SET SCRN item using the left and right keys and press the SET key SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Y 2 Operation on the SSYSTEM SETUP menu SYSTEM SETUP OPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 11 SVO CONDITIONS
214. ERRE P P P P Halt PC operation P P PIP PIPIP P condition during measurement C C C C C C C C C auring measurement C C C C C C C C C C C When the object type is changed Parallel output is valid for PC all Y output and auxiliary relays control after the measurement turn OFF result is determined if Parallel t V n ng tov e f Result output output amp Result output 11 8 Setting the Input Output Conditions 6 Measurement start input CCD trigger start sampling parallel object type change parallel result output computer link parallel When the start sampling input X0 is turned ON the CCD trigger is enabled Sampling starts Setting order 1 2 9 Configuration example Camera 1 image capturing CCD trigger VO SETTINGS hp D MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG Camera 2 image capturing START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIAL HI Monitor SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL LI CCD SAMPLING PARALLEL Data Remote keypad Computer link SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU E 9 COMPUTER LINK TO NEXT SUB MENU 9 IV S20 main housing Settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger Power supply rs Pro
215. ES RESULT NO NOJ S selected 1 amp 2 will be dis PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO played SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO 8DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR i OBJ NO MANL MODE NO YES IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH UPPER MENU Item 2 will be displayed if CAM1 amp 2 has been selected in item 1 Select the camera whose image will be displayed on the screen If CAM1 amp 2 is selected the picture taken by camera 1 will be D MONITOR OUTPUT displayed on the upper half of the screen and the picture taken by camera 2 will be displayed on the lower half of the screen Each images taken by Ene and 2 is Siem parts i e the upper middle and lower parts Select the part you 2 CAMERA1 amp 2 want displayed on the screen When CAM1 amp 2 has been speci 1 MONITOR OUTPUT Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu shown above move the cursor to item 1 MONITOR OUTPUT with up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to CAM1 CAM2 or CAM1 amp 2 with the left and right keys and press the SET key If CAM1 amp 2 is specified continue with steps 3 and 4 3 Move the cursor to 2 CAME1 amp 2 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 4 Select CAM1 or CAM2 with the left and right keys the select UP MD or LO for each camera with the up and down keys and press the SET key Display examples on the MAIN OPS MENU
216. ET key c The window 8 pixels x 8 pixels for point No 000 will start blinking Move the cursor to 3 START POINT POS point position starting with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the window for point No POOO to the desired position in the object and press the SET key c The binary image will be displayed in the window according to the conditions set in item 5 Move the cursor to 2 STO PNT POSITIONS point registration individual with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 001 with the up key Move the cursor to YES with the right key and press the SET key Move the window for point No P001 the same as in steps and 4 and press the SET key Create windows for point Nos P002 to P006 the same way Move the cursor to 8 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to MEASURING COND measurement condition menu On the MEASURING COND menu move the cursor to 5 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu On the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 menu move the cursor to 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation condition with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The EVALUATION COND menu will be displayed 7 Operation on the EVALUATION COND evaluation condition menu Y EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS1 POINT ME
217. ETER LENGTH circumference 7 UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Select item 2 BINARY AREA COND conditions for binary areas Select YES NO for each of the measurements v Continued on the following page 9 100 Object identification labeling by binary conversion Continued from the previous page This is how the display looks MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE when item D MEAS WINDOW MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE _ UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 TYPE measurement window is MASK WINDOW NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE set to RECTANGLE MASK WINDOW POSIT MOVE _UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 Thee howdhadisuBvicok THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 Al pir eee 100 when item 3 MASK INVERT B W NO YES WINDOW mask BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD ADJ VAR DIFF VAR RATE window is set nt 8BOUNDARY PROCESS VALD INVLD LABEL ORDER SACN ORDER SIZE ORDER IMAGE PRE PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE EMPHASIS ALL EDGE HORZ EDGE VERT EDGE BINARY NOIS FILTR EXP gt CONTR CONTR gt EXP NUM OF FILTR PASS _EXPD 0 0 5 CONTRO 0 5 3AREA FILTER 000000PIXEL LOWER LIMIT UPPER MENU Item will be displayed unless item 3 is set to NO MEAS WINDOW TYPE Select the measurement window type RECTANGLE rectangular CIRCLE circular measurement window or ELLIPSE ellipse MEAS WINDOW POSIT Set th
218. G of each measurement function and the data from a specified measurement block are output E Command 1 Object type ment Measure Block scisc cR m Response 1 1 Object Rcirc type H L Output evaluation result YO Yi Y15 1 1 1 Specified block data SC SC CR L The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement execution function code 12 13 8 Communication 4 Measurement execution function 8 evaluation result logical result and calculation result code 1B The measurement for a specified object type is executed and the evaluation result from the measurement results the logical results and the calculation results of each measurement are output il Command 1 Object 1 1 1B pe g 5ISC SC us E Response L Object Output evaluation mento e e Auxiliary relay 2 of the i type result B S lanaa ME measurementlan 1 BYRCIRC vovYt YS 5 5 0710127 No specified SC SC CR HO 3 E gt the command H L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The contents of the command and response are the same as those for the measurement execution function 4 code 13 2 Result reading Data from the last measurement is rea
219. GGER COND CCD COMPUTER LINK OUT TRIGGER 11 17 amp SERIAL OUTPUT 11 20 SHUTTER SPEED 9 117 DSTORE REF IMAGE 9 26 amp BUPPER MENU SERIAL COMM 11 18 COMPUTER LINK 11 19 ADJUST GAIN amp OFFSET 11 22 Setting and Operating Outlines gt 1 from the preceding page The numbers in parenthesis refer to the pages describing the operations in detail MEASURING COND 9 36 REGST NO QSELECT MODE GRAY SCALE COND EDGE DETECT COND 4 B UPPER MENU gt 2 from the preceding page MEAS SELECTION Degree of match inspection lt Gray scale search matching conditions gt 9 37 lt Edge detection conditions gt 9 39 MEASURING COND 9 47 REGST NO QMODE GRAY IMG PROC BINRY IMG PROC MODEL 0 POSITION MODEL 1 MEAS OBJ EVALUATE CRITERIA Mode In gray scale image processing mode UPPER MENU lt Gray scale search matching conditions gt 9 48 Mode In binary conversion processing mode lt Binary image matching conditions gt L EVALUATION COND 9 53 i NUMERIC CALC COND 9 54 OUTPUT CONDITIONS 9 55 9 51 angle measurement v Continued on the following page gt Distance and 1 MEASURING COND In GRAY amp EDGE MEASURING COND 9 59 START POINT NO START POINT MODE GRY SRH EDG DET START POINT COND In gray scale s
220. GNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL 6 UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC Items to will be displayed when item 1 is set to YES The input signals which maybe set depend on the selection made in item 3 as follows Selection of item 3 Input signals Point number P000 to P255 Auxiliary rely C000 to C127 When AV LIGHT LEVEL average light level is selected for the processing mode the setting range is POOO to P127 For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Returns to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following page 9 113 Existence inspection by point measurement Form the preceding page When the TRG BRT key is pressed manual measurement will start and the points will be measured The following is how the display of the results will look when BIN binary was selected for the processeing mode TYPEO0 FH C1ALLC2NO OK VX X Display of the measured results Final evaluation result MEAS XXXXXXms Measuring time MEAS1 CAM1 POINT MEAS m PS Evaluation of the correct black or white P000 D OK P001 O OK color detected at registered points P002 O OK P003 O OK P004 O OK P005 O OK P006 P007 P008 P009 P010 P011 P012 P013 P014 P015 Evaluation condi Object to tion OK be measured White display O Black display 6
221. INT MEAS COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2 COPY EXEC lt TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU To select the CHECK DEG OF MATCH degree of match with the reference image go to item D MEAS SELECTION Item COMPARE IMAGES will be displayed unless NO is selected in item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG select camera one of two images which is in the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Select item MEAS PROG COND condition for measurement programs MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 DEG OF MATCH MEASURING COND TYPEQ0 MEAS 1 DEG OF MATCH REGST NO 00 0 15 REG NO YES REGST NO 00 0 15 REG NO YES MODE GRAY IMG PROC BINRY IMG PROC MODE GRAY IMG PROC BINRY IMG PROC MODELO POSITION NO SEARCH SEARCH MODEL 1 MEAS OBJ NO YES NO SEARCH YES SEARCH EVALUATE CRITERIA TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATE CRITERIA TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU _ UPPER MENU _ The display will look like this when item 2 The display will look like this when item 2 MODE is set to GRAY IMG PROC gray scale MODE is set to BINRY IMG PROC binary processing processing Items 2 to 5 will be displayed if item 1 REGST NO registration is set to YES However if BINRY IMG PROC binary processing is selected in item 2 then items 3 and 4 will not be displayed and so ca
222. IV 1A0302 MML2 65D Telecentric lens C mount 2x IV 1A1101 ML17 07516 CCTV lens 17 mm mount f 7 5 mm IV 1A1102 IV 1A1103 ML17 1520 ML17 2431 CCTV lens CCTV lens 17 mm mount f 15 mm 917 mm mount IV 1A1301 MML1 65D CM1 Telecentric lens 917 mm mount IV 1A1302 MML2 65D CM1 Telecentric lens 917 mm mount IV 2A0101 MHF H50LR Halogen light source 50W IV 2A0102 IV 2A0103 MHF D100LR Halogen light source Halogen light source 100 W 150 W IV 2A0201 Halogen lamp 12V 50 W IV 2A0202 Halogen lamp 12 V 100 W IV 2A0203 Halogen lamp 12 V 150 W high luminous IV 2A0204 Halogen lamp 12 V 150 W long life IV 2A0301 MRG31 1500S Ring light guide 31 x 1500 mm IV 2A0302 MRG48 1500S Ring light guide 48 x 1500 mm IV 2A0401 MSG4 1100S Straight light guide 4 mm 1100 mm IV 2A0701 MPP60 1500S Surface illuminating light guide 60 x 60 mm 1500 mm IV 2A0901 KA 03 Crystal adapter The items listed above are all Moritex products Appendix 2 Needed when the IV 2A0701 is used with an IV 2A0102 Appendix 2 Software version information Described below are the details of the upgrade of the IV S20 system program software Bl Software version 2 09 Software version 2 09 does not contain any new or improved functions not found in the software v
223. Input 1 9 Page 2 E Input 2 i Page 3 Input 3 4 4 0 4 5 6 7 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC Ladder circuit cursor Set the kind of input signal and its number down keys and press the ESC key Y Continued on the following page 1 Move the cursor to item 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key The ladder circuit cursor can be moved with the up down left and right keys Move the cursor to the position where you want to place an input terminal and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to item 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET key After moving the cursor to the kind of input signal you want select a number with the up and PC Function From the preceding page Kind of Data input signal memory No Externalinput terminals to X6 external input terminals XO to X6 can be assigned When any of the timer instructions TMO to TM7 causes a time out to TM7 the corresponding terminal is turned ON When a timer instruction input is switched OFF the terminal is turned OFF Timer terminals When any of the counter instructions CNO to CN7 counts out the corresponding terminal is turned ON When any of the counter reset relays C120 to C127 for the respective counters is turned ON the corresponding terminal is turned OFF When the final numerical calculation res
224. L Object type Output evaluation result L number 0 TN i camera 2 no setting Termination code pnt Na Dr measurement numbers positional deviation absolute to Processing code position measurement 064006E00D98069000008E CR L 1 l J i 1 X coordinate of Angular deviation 1st point Y coordinate of 2nd point Y coordinate of 1st point X coordinate of 2nd point The coordinates of the 1st and 2nd points are determined as follows based on the values contained in the response and the angular deviation is 0 Values hexadecimal Pixel coordinates in response decimal X coordinate Y coordinate X coordinate Y coordinate Coordinates of 1st point 640 6E0 160 0 176 0 Coordinates of 2nd point D98 690 348 0 168 0 3 Measurement execution function 3 evaluation result measurement numerical data code 125 The measurement for a specified object type is executed and the evaluation result OK NG of each measurement function and data in a specified measurement block are output See pages 13 15 to 13 25 for details about the measurement data blocks ill Command Objeact type Object type for which the measurement JObject s Block was executed 00 to 15 1 2 type 25 sciscicn Measurement sp Number of the measurement whose QE numerical data will be output 0 to 3 Block Specified block from which the data of a W Response specified measurement function will be outp
225. Lock screw for securing the lens holder Connector connected to the e ee IV S20 main housing Front view view of the Lens holder camera cable The holder is used to make fine adjustment to the distance back plane fo cus between the CCD section and camera lens using a focus fixed lens The distance has been adjusted before shipment Usually it does not need to be adjusted To adjust it loosen the upper lock screw and turn the lens holder coun ter clockwise The maximum allowable distance is 1 5 mm The cable is 3 m long Extension camera cables IV S20EC2 2 m and IV S20EC4 4 m are available 2 Camera IV S30C1 Lock screw for securing the lens holder A Front view view A of the CCD 2 Cable connector D Lens holder XN Name The holder is used to make fine adjustment to the distance back plane fo cus between the CCD section and camera lens using a focus fixed lens Lens holder The distance has been adjusted before shipment Usually it does not need to be adjusted To adjust it loosen the upper lock screw and turn the lens holder coun ter clockwise The maximum allowable distance is 1 5 mm Connect this connector to the camera con
226. M save data in flash memory or OPERATIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen DATA SAVE Do you want to save data YES MOVE NO ESC Press the SET key E C The data saving operation will start and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen SAVING REFERENCE IMAGE MEBEN SYSTEM I O MEAS CONDITIONS When the data has been saved in the IV S20 flash memory the display will change from SAVING to SAVING COMPLETE Note If the ESC key is pressed the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV S20 flash memory In this case if the power to the IV S20 main housing is turned OFF or if the type No is changed the settings will be deleted 2 Press the ESC key D The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU If the cursor was moved to OPERATIONS in step 1 above the screen will automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following page 3 13 Operation Examples Position measurement Continued from the preceding page 11 Measuring the positional deviation Press the TRG BRT key and the result of measuring the positional deviation absolute position from the stored positioning mark image will be displayed 1 2 8 TYPEOO FH C1ALLC2NO vxx Displa
227. MEAS 0 CAMERA 2 POS ADJ CAMERA 2 9 21 SELECT CAMERA IMG 9 25 COMPARE IMAGES 9 25 OMESUREMENT 1 TYPEO0 MEASO 9 36 DSELECT MEAS TYPE 9 36 COPY 9 29 INITIALIZATION 9 31 MEAS PROG COND EVALUATION COND NUMERIC CALC COND A L EVALUATION gt 1 Go to the next page MESUREMENT 2 OUTPUT CONDITIONS 4 CONDI 9 41 MESUREMENT 3 UPPER MENU L NUMERIC 3FINAL CALC RESULT CALC 9 42 FINAL OUTPU COND OUTPUT d5SYSTEM IN OUT HALT MEAS ON NG 9 2 IN OUT SETTINGS 11 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F 11 2 START CCD SAMPLE 11 2 SERIAL OUTPUT 11 2 CHG MEAS NO X5 X6 11 2 PARALLEL INPUT X5 11 1 PARALLEL INPUT 6 11 1 GOUTPUT STATUS 11 1 SERIAL CONDITIONS COMPUTER LINK OGAIN OFFSET UPPER MENU 7 4 CONDITIONS 9 43 TYPEO0 MEAS1 9 47 etc DMEAS SELECTION 9 47 etc COMPARE IMAGES 9 27 SELECT CAMERA 9 47 etc COPY 9 30 GINITIALIZATION 9 31 MES PRG COND EVALUATION COND 12 NUMERIC CAL COND SOUTPUT CONDITIONS Goto the next page OUPPER MENU _ TYPE00 MEAS2 The same as TYPEOO MEAS1 TYPEO00 MEAS3 The same as TYPEOO MEAS1 NUMERIC CALC 9 18 RESULTS OUTPUT 10 8 OBJECT TYPE I O 11 17 MONITOR LIGHT LVL 9 115 LIGHT LEVEL COND LIGHT TRIGGER CCD START 11 16 MONITOR 9 115 CCD TRI
228. MEASR BIN AREA __ comparative calculations CAMERA LX GXINTIALIZATION area measurement after between images select a See section 9 2 7 8 binary conversion See section 9 2 6 i camera BNUMERIC CALC aie BINARY AREA COND COND COND measurement programs Conditions for binary areas evaluation numerical condition calculation condition TYPE COND TYPE COND OUTPUT l FINAL CALC RESULT FINAL OUTPUT COND CONDITIONS final numerical M final output conditions MAIN OPS MENU calculation see PC function in x see section 9 2 4 Chapter 10 These settings are found in the TYPEO00 MEAS 1 to 3 menu 9 83 Area measurement by binary conversion 2 Setting details An explanation of item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs in the TYPEOO MEAS1 to 3 menu cp On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key cy Go to item MEASUREMENT 1 item 10 MEASUREMENT 2 or item 2 MEASUREMENT 3 on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu and press the SET key This is how the line looks TYPE00 MEAS 1 _ DE when the object type is set MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH to 00 and the selected DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV measurement is 1 INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1
229. MEM EXEC OPERATIONS 1 Move the cursor to item 7 INIT ALL PARMS initialize all parameters with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Press the SET key again Press the ESC key to abort initialization Initialization will start and the progress of the initialization will be displayed on the bottom of the screen INITIALIZING REFERENCE IMAGE SR SYSTEM I O OBJECT TYPE DATA BA AREER When initialization is complete the message INITIALIZING initializing will change to 12 NIT COMPLETE complete initialization 12 3 Other Settings and Operations 4 Saving to flash memory All the data entered on the SYSTEM SETUP menu and sub menus OPS MENU SETTING OBJECT TYPE COND I O CONDITIONS and ADJ CAM POSITION menus are saved in the IV S20 flash memory If the power is disconnected from the IV S20 main housing or if the object type number is changed before the data is saved in the flash memory the data will be deleted Operating procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key SYSTEM SET UP DOPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU CONDITIONS NEXT SUB MENU ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH RECEIVING PARMS EXEC INIT ALL PARMS EXEC 8 SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS ol a
230. MENU _ _ _ _ _ Setting procedure Items set on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Enter the object type number 0 to 15 1 OBJECT TYPE NO Y Editing copying and initialization 2 EDIT See Editing in section 9 2 7 and 8 Selecting the difference between ___ SELECT CAMERA IMG 9 COMPARE IMAGES images calculation See section 9 2 6 IGNES Gr mE Setting the measurement program ___ MEAS 0 CAMERA 1 conditions MEAS 0 CAMERA 2 i i i See item 1 outline of setting MEASUREMENT 1 ihe measurement program 0MEASUREMENT 2 2 MEASUREMENT 5 POS ADJ CAMERA 1 gt Boe ADJ CAMERA J See section 9 2 5 Determine whether or not correct image position which will be mesured by measurement 1 to 3 based on the measure positional deviation by the measurement 0 Correct the camera position Yes Set position correction value Set final value numeric calculation ___ FINAL CALC RESULT See section 9 2 4 IRE AEN M Set final output condition r FINAL OUTPUT COND See Chapter 10 System inputoutput SS YSTEM IN OUT See section 9 11 and Chapter 11 Y Enabling disabling ahaltonanNG ___ HALT MEAS ON NG measurement See item 2 Halting on an NG measurement ee To return to SYSTEM SETUP ras AO THE DUPPER MENU v Save in flash memory 9 1 Setting The Criteria For Each
231. MENU i Noo NO1 No2 i Move the cursor to 1 CALC RESULT calculation result with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter NOO with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to OBJECT TYPE with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to CORD X coordinate X with the left and right keys and press the SET key gt The details of item 3 FORMULA will be displayed FORMULA REG 00 0 15 MDLO 0 1 NOO 0 15 il DEL END D Continued on the following page 3 45 Operation Examples Numeric calculation Continued from the preceding page Y 3 Move the cursor to 3 FORMULA with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to REG 00 0 15 with the left and right keys and enter 01 with the up and down keys Move the cursor to MDLO 0 1 with the left and right keys enter 0 with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt 01X0 will be displayed in the formula field Noo px 01Xo 00000000 0 00000000 0 01X0 means model registration No 01 image 1 and X coordinate of the detection point and model Move the cursor to with the left and right keys and press the SET key gt A dash will be displayed in the formula field Move the cursor to REG 01 0 15 and enter 00 Move the cursor to MDLO 0 1 and press the SET k
232. N NOO to N15 The numbers ranging from 0 to 7 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following page 9 43 Positional deviation measurement Continued from the previous page Pressing the TRG BRT key will display the results of a positional deviation measurement for the new image that you have recorded Shown below is the display when a 2 point search has been specified Display of the measured TYPEOO FH C1ALLC2NO results VX X Final evaluation result O K Measuring time gt MEAS XXXXXXms MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION Registration number REGST NO 0 0 7 Detection coordinates in the X COORD MDLO X 176 0 OK reference image for model 0 Y COORD MDLO Y 322 0 OK Amount of deviation from X DEVIAT X 000 0 OK Lieto ead 0 Y DEVIAT MDLO Y 000 0 OK Model 1 reference image for model 0 MATCH MDLOJ n TODO QK Only displayed for a 2 point search gt ANGULAR DEVIT 001 7 OK Detection coordinates in the X COORD MDL1 X 534 0 OK reference image for model 1 Y COORD MDL1 Y 480 0 OK Amount of deviation from X DEVIAT MDL1 X 001 0 OK Model 0 the reference image for model 1 Y DEVIAT MDL1 Y 001 0 OK Degree of match with the MATCH MDL1 09999 OK reference image for model 1
233. NEXT SUB MENU FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU HALT MEAS ON NG NO YES UPPER MENU Item 9 COMPARE IMAGES calculation between images will be displayed unless item 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG is set to NO Select item 1 OBJECT TYPE NO using the up and down keys and press SET key Using the up and down keys enter the object type number 00 to 15 for the target of the copy Select item 2 EDIT using the up and down keys and press SET key Move the cursor to COPY copying using the left and right keys and enter the object type number 00 to 15 for the source of the copy using the up and down keys When the number has been selected press SET key While something is being copied the message COPYING will appear at the top of the screen This message will disappear when the copying is complete RON Do not disconnect the power while the IV S20 is copying Once data has been corrupted it will be necessary to start after initializing the setting all over again Unless this is done it will not be possible to restart the machine The reference images used for the gray scale seach function are not copied with the operation above Make sure reset them 9 28 Shared settings 2 Copying between measurement programs Copying a specific measuring program s settings from on object type number to another
234. NU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for the evaluations that you have set This can be done using item 9 MAKE A TEST RUN For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9 2 3 Evaluation conditions between edge centers Measurement example The distance between the center of 2 adjacent leads Lead length all 5 leads T ath Line used in 7 99 detecting the object The center point between edge detection points Detection mode center dark The brightness of the Light part above the line used to inspect the object Even if only one measurement of the distance between the center points of 2 adjacent leads as shown above falls outside the range of the upper and lower limits specified it will result in an NG evaluation eturn to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu and select item 8 NUMERIC CALC COND numerical calculation conditions D v Continued on the following page 9 78 Lead inspection Continued from the previous page NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 INSPECT LEAD CALC RESULT N00 0 15 OBJECT TYPE NO MATCH M CORD X Y QTY K MAX DIST MXD MIN DIST MND MAX L LENG MXL MIN L LENG MNL NUM CALC NC CNST C REG 0 0 3 MES OBJ 0 0 7 00 0 15 DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 OUTP
235. O00 0 15 OUT Y00 0 15 LOGICAL SYMBOL 4 H t DEL OUTPUT SIGNAL OUT Y00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 0 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 CNT CNO 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 DEL UPPER MENU Column No PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT i INPUTO LOGIC INPUTI N pr LOGIC ow No Ladder circuit INPUT2 display area LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC Y Continued on the following page 10 8 PC Function From the preceding page in all one row contains 8 terminals and 1 output relay A ladder circuit can be created on each page from 0 to 7 consisting of 4 rows each of which has 8 terminals and 1 output relay Therefore a ladder circuit can be created that consist of 32 rows Calculations will be carried out in the order of the page numbers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 y 2 Ladder circuit creation 1 setting input signals EK Ae L4 DEL LOGICAL SYMBOL DEL UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 37 SOUTPUT SIGNAL OUT Y00 0 15 AUXRLY 000 0 127 TMO 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 CNT CNO 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 RESULTS OUTPUT TYPEO0 DPAGE NO 0 7 REG NO YES Q SET POSITION MOVE 17 SINPUT SIGNAL AUXRLY 112 0 127 EXT INP X0 0 6 2 TMO0 0 7 CNT CNO 0 7 ANO0 0 15 OUT 00 0 15 Page 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Output 9 Input 0 i 4 0 1 4
236. OBJ POINT MEAS IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA 1 CAM2 i EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 2 Z EVALUATION TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 1 Select item COPY using the up and down keys and press SET 2 Select TYPEO0 or MEAS with the left and right keys Next enter the object type number 00 to 15 and the measurement program number 1 to 3 for the source of the copy using the up and down keys the name of the measurement program for the source of the copy will also be displayed When the numbers have been entered press the SET key Itis possible copy a new measurement program choice to the same object type number i e specify another measurement program during the copying process The target object type number will be the same as originally specified The only change is the target measurement program number where the copy will be placed 3 Once the measurement program has been copied INSPECT LEAD lead inspection will now be underlined whereas CHECK DEG OF MATCH degree of match inspection is previously the underlined entry at item 1 4 Move the cursor to item UPPER MENU and press SET key c This will return you to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu When processing item 4 COPY by itself the IV S20 will not copy
237. OINT NO 3 that was selected in 2 will be displayed next to each point UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu The auxiliary when MID PNT The auxiliary when PERIMETR has been selected has been selected Point 1 X1 Y1 x Point 2 Point 2 X2 Y2 oin ra Center point _ N Point Center of the circle The center point is the coordinate The center of the circle is the central coordinate of three half way between points 1 and 2 points positioned on the circumference of the circle The auxiliary when C GRAV The auxiliary when LEG has been selected has been selected Point 1 X1 Y1 xL 7 Point 2 X2 Y2 P d Point 3 X3 Y3 Center of Gravity Point A x1 X2 X3 1 2 3 3 The center of gravity between points 1 to A straight line between points 1 and 2 3 is calculated as the mean of the three The auxiliary when INTRSCT PT has been selected Point 2 Po Aux 2 P line Aux 2 P line Crosspoint of the two lines that were specified in AUX TYPE LEG Return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu and select item 6 DISTANCE COND distance conditions if the GRAY amp EDGE is selected and select item 3 DISTANCE CONDITIONS distance conditions if the GRAV center of gravity mode is selected Continued on the following page 9 64 Distance and angle measurement Continued from the previous page GRAY amp EDGE GRAV
238. ONS TO NEXT SUB MENU q QUPPER MENU 1 Select item 5 INITIALIZATION initialize using the up and down keys and press SET key 2 When the SET key is pressed the initialization will begin 9 31 a Shared settings 2 Initialize measurement condition of each type The measurement conditions for a specified object type data for the object type you are in the process of entering will be initialized Operation procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND condition of object type and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE COND 2 OBJECT 00 0 15 Q EDIT COPY OBJ TYPEOO INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU 4 MEAS 0 CAMERA1 TO NEXT SUB MENU B POS ADJ CAMERA1 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 8 MEAS 0 CAMERA2 TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 8 SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 COMPARE IMAGES NO _ SUB I1 T1 DIFF ABS 11 T1 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MMEASUREMENT 2 TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT TO NEXT SUB MENU i 3FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU i HALT MEASONNG NO YES UPPER MENU Item 9 COMPARE IMAGES will be displayed unless item SELECT CAMERA IMG is set to NO 1 Select it
239. ORD MDL1 000 0 479 0 0000 OK NO X DEVIAT MDL1 000 0 511 0 X 000 0 OK NO DEVIAT MDL1 000 0 479 0 0000 OK NO MATCH MDL1 10000 10000409000 NO 3MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU Items ANGULAR DEVIT to 17 Y DEVIAT MDL1 are displayed when you specify a 2P SCH 2 point search 2P EDGE 2 point edge or a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge Item MATCH is displayed when you specify a 1P SCH 1 point search 2P SCH 2 point search or a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge Item 12 MATCH MDL1 is displayed when a 2P SCH 2 point search is specified Evaluation condition Setting details CDREGST NO registration number Enter any number from 0 to 7 X COORD MDLO Enter the range of X coordinates for model 0 which will produce an X coordinates OK decision Y COORD MDLO Enter the range of Y coordinates for model 0 which will produce an Y coordinates OK decision DX DEVIAT MDLO Enter the maximum amount of difference in the X direction in model range of X deviation 0 which will still produce an OK decision DEVIAT MDLO Enter the maximum amount of difference in the Y direction in model range of Y deviation 0 which will still produce an OK decision MATCH MDLO Enter the percentage of pixels that must match the reference image degree of match with the reference image for model 0 which will still produce an
240. Other Settings and Operations SYSTEM SETUP menu 12 1 to 8 12 1 Settings 12 1 1 Change the Japanese or English display mode 12 1 2 Download all parameters 12 2 3 Total initialization 12 3 4 Saving to flash memory 12 4 12 2 Maintenance 12 5 1 Camera position adjustment 12 5 2 Self diagnosis 12 8 Chapter 13 Communication General Purpose Serial Interface 13 1 to 25 13 1 List of processing functions 13 1 13 2 Data flow 13 3 1 When the measurement execution processing code is 10 11 12 or 13 13 3 2 When the measurement execution processing code is 18 19 1A or 1B 13 3 3 Processing other than measurement execution processing 13 3 13 3 Communication format 13 4 13 4 Processing functions 13 6 1 Measurement execution functions 13 6 2 Result reading 13 9 3 Setting initialization and diagnosis of the operation screen 13 12 13 5 Measurement data blocks 13 15 1 Number of blocks 13 15 2 Contents of the measurement result block for each measurement function 13 15 Chapter 14 Computer DC RES Ru DEP aD E pu e Ea MN CREER Van 14 1 to 31 14 1 Compatible models 14 1 14 2 Data flow 14 2 14 3 Register setting 14 3 1 Number of blocks 14 5 2 Contents of the measurement result block for each measurement function 14 5 14 4 Interface 14 16 1 Setting items for the IV S20 14 16 2 Connection with a Sharp PC 14 17 3 Connection with a Mitsubishi PC 14 23 4 Connec
241. Point No 120 to 127 Dummy data 2 2 Point No Average light level 4 4 Point No Average light level Point No 127 Average light level 4 Note If a point number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brought forward 14 13 Computer Link 9 Final numeric calculation result Decimal Sign ME figit Auxiliary relay Results of numerical calculations measurement 0 camera 1 Evaluation Dummy data None Provided Provided Dummy data None Result Provided Provided Evaluation None Dummy data None Result Provided Provided Results of numerical calculations measurement 0 camera 2 to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical calculations measurement 1 Results of numerical calculations measurement 2 to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical calculations measurement 3 Results of the final numerical calculations to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 ANOO to AN15 contain the same data as those in the NOO to N15 of item measurement 0 camera 1 Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 NG 1 OK or 2 no evaluation No
242. RT ERA 9 51 Gray scale processing mrien aiee 9 48 Distance and angle measurement gray scale search sese 9 60 LGAGINSPECTION MEN 9 75 Positional deviation measurement esssssssssseseseee eren nennen 9 37 Reference image between 9 26 Reflective lighting retient 6 1 Register change MTM 7 3 Register SOUUING 14 3 Registration number Area measurement by binary conversion Evaluation Conditions tette deitate nene edid 9 86 Measurement conditions nnn nn nnn rn naar nn nene ener en 9 84 Counting quantities by binary conversion eds fade eet dede e 9 04 Measurement _ 9 92 Degree of match inspection for shape and size Eval ation conaitioris ac tet ec ree son is Sea askin vapeur aput fepe te theese eee 9 53 Measurement conditions oe ete doe lock ede ie augue 9 47 Distance and angle measurement Evaluation conditions cccccccccccecceceececece
243. RTER center of a circle C GRAV center of gravity LEG lines on two points INTRSCT PT crosspint over two lines or NO disabled may also be displayed here 00 0 15 DIST BETW 2PT lt DIST BETW X DIST BETW Y NO may also be displayed here HORI 2 point horizontal VERT 2 point vertical or NO disabled may also be displayed here Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for the evaluation that you have set For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9 2 3 Evaluation conditions 5 2 numeric calculation condition eturn to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to and select item NUMERIC CAL COND v Continued on the following page 9 67 Distance and angle measurement Continued from the previous page GRAY amp EDGE GRAV NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 DST amp ANGL MEAS CALC RESULT N00 0 15 OBJECT NO MATCH M CORDIX Y AUX HX HY DIST D ANGL B NUM CALC NC CNST C i FORMULA REG 00 0 15 NOO 0 15 lt DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 RUNATEST SET KEY UPPER MENU i Noo D 00D ores cutie Penh _ YO 00000350 0 00000355 0 00000352 0 OK CNN RR Aaa gc aa lance tae i N03 Numerical calculation Setting details CDCALC RESULT Set the recording and display the results from arit
244. Returns you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3 as follows QFORMULA Number of formulas Degree of match M Coordinates X Y OM to 3M OX to to Number of objects K maximum distance MXD minimum distance MND OKO to 3K7 0MXDO to 3MXD7 OMNDO to 3MND7 Maximum lead length MXL minimum lead length MNL OMXLO 3MXL7 OMNLO 3MNL7 Numerical calculation NC ABS TAN ATAN 00 to 15 Constant C 99999999 9 to 99999999 9 The numbers ranging from 0 to 3 in front of the characters are registration numbers The numbers ranging from 0 to 7 after the characters are numbers for the object to be measured For more information on numerical calculations see section 9 2 4 Numerical calculations Note You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS Continued on the following page 9 79 Lead inspection Continued from the previous page OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO0 MEAS 1 INSPECT LEAD DPAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 0 0 3 i MATCH M CRD X CRD Y DST D0 0 7 QTY K0 0 7 L LEN LO 0 7 CAL N00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 i LOGICALSYMBOL d k AF DEL 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL 6 UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5
245. SCRN and press the SET key cOn the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key c Move the cursor to item 45 SYSTEM IN OUT on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE I O MONITOR LIGHT LVL 1 1 2 YES LIGHT LEVEL COND NEXT SUB MENU TRIGGER CCD START REG NO YES BIN AVG LIT LVL TRIGGER COND NEXT SUB MENU amp COMPUTER LINK OUT BLOCK 00 MESR O CMRO1 amp SERIAL OUTPUT SHUTTER SPEED 1 00060 1 30 to 1 10000 i STORE REF IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP 8UPPER MENU The shutter speed can be set arbitrarily in the range of 1 30 to 1 10 000 of a second Initial value 1 60 Unit second Setting procedure r1 Select item 6 SHUTTER SPEED using the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to the digit you want to set using the left and right keys 1 10 0060 This will move the cursor to the left and right 3 Set the value using the up and down keys 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set each digit After setting all of the digits press the SET key Since the same shutter speed can be used for all of the object types Since the shutter speed can be set continuously in the range of 1 30 to 1 10 000 of a second very fine adjustment is possible If you want to measure moving objects and increa
246. SERIAL CCD TRIG Items 2 and 9 are not displayed When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F is set to CCD TRG and item 2 START CCD SAMPLE is set to PARALLEL D MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG 2 START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIAL 9 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL CCD SAMPLING PARALLEL When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F is set to CCD TRG and item 2 START CCD SAMPLE is set to SERIAL MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIAL Items are not displayed When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F is set to CCD TRG and item 2 START CCD SAMPLE is set to AUTO EDGE LEVL MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIAL OUTPUT OBJ TYPE PARALEL SERIAL CCD SAMPLING AUTOMATIC Setting the Input Output Conditions 2 Measurement number switching terminals X5 and X6 If item 4 CHG MEAS NO X5 X6 on the I O SETTINGS menu has been set to YES the measurement program numbers in combination with measurement number 0 can be specified from the following 4 combinations by turning ON or OFF the input terminals INPUT X5 and X6 VO SETTINGS Measurement program X6 D MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG Measurement 0 Measurement 0 amp 1 Measurement 0 amp 2 Measurement 0 amp 3 Set to YES CHG MEAS NO X5X6 NO
247. The name of the measurement program for this object type number will also be displayed When the number has been entered press the SET key 3 Once the measurement program has been copied the underlined entry at item 1 SELECT MEAS TYPE select measurement will now be MEAS POSITION DEVIATE positional deviation measurement whereas NO was previously underlined 4 Move the cursor to item UPPER MENU and press SET key twice c This will return you to the OBJECT TYPE COND menu When processing item 2 COPY by itself the IV S20 will not copy to the flash memory To save the copied settings in flash memory go to item 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM or item OPERATIONS which are both found on the SYSTEM SETUP menu 9 29 Shared settings The procedure for copying measurement programs 1 to 3 Example Copying the settings from object type 00 measurement 2 lead inspection into object type 01 measurement 1 degree of match inspection On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key gt On the OBJECT TYPE COND menu set item 1 OBJECT TYPE NO object type number to 01 and select MEASUREMENT 1 TYPE01 MEAS1 MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV PECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN
248. The source of the copy The target of the copy The specific measuring program The settings for the same measuring settings stored in a particular gt program in a different object type object type number The data is number The data is used to simplify copied from flash memory setting the target object s parameters The procedure for copying measurement program 0 Example Copying the object type number 00 measurement 0 program settings for positional deviation measurements into the settings for object type number 01 measurement 0 program setting no On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and pess the SET key c On the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for object type menu set item 1 OBJECT TYPE NO object type number to 01 and select item 4 MEAS 0 CAMERA1 TYPEO1 MEASO DSELECT MEAS TYPE NO MEAS POSITION DEVIATE lt 73 COPY EXEC TYPE00 CMR1POS DEVIATION 17 GINITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG SUB M EVALUATION COND SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 4 1 Select item 2 COPY using the up and down keys and press SET key 2 Enter the object type number 00 to 15 for the source copy using the up and down keys
249. U TYPE00 MEAS 1 DST amp ANGL MEAS INO iNO DOBJECT Select the object for evaluation Alternatively EDGE DETECT tip ST PNT AUX DIST TESTRESULT OUT Of the edge or GRAVITY label ANGLE c center of gravity may also be 00 0 15 GRAY SEARCH displayed here Use the up and down keys to select NO YO to 7 or C000 to C127 REGST NO registration number A TEST RUN results CDOBJECT When AUX auxiliary is selected OBJECT ST PNT AUX DIST ANGLE i REGSTNO 00 0 15 CNTR PNT AUX X COORD 000 0 511 0 AUX Y COORD 000 0 479 0 Jl CDOBJECT When DIST distance is selected DOBJECT ST PNT AUX DIST ANGLE REGST NO DIST BETW 2PT_ DISTANCE 000 0 702 0 PIXEL OBJECT When ANGLE is selected ST PNT AUX DIST This can be done using item 6 MAKE A TEST RUN Set this at any number from 0 to 15 DOBJECT ANGLE REGSTNO 00 0 15 3PT ANGL SEL ANGE ANGLE 180 0 180 0 Enter the ranges that will produce an OK decision The titles of items 3 to 5 will change according to the settings in item CD The example above shows the display when starting point has been selected See below for the displays when other object settings are selected Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition display the test OBJECT ST PNT UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu T PERIM
250. UPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC 0 0 4 REG NO YES MOVE REGT NO 00 0 7 MATCH M0 0 1 CRD X0 0 1 CRD YO 0 1 DEVIAT x0 0 1 DEVIAT y0 0 1 AGL DV B CAL N00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 SDL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL 3 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 1 Move the cursor to item 1 SELECT MEAS TYPE with the up and down keys and press the SET key Then move the cursor to MEAS POSITION DEVIATE with the left and right keys and 2 Move the cursor to item 7 OUTPUT CONDITIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key 5 gt The OUTPUT CONDITIONS menu will be displayed 3 After moving the cursor to item 1 PAGE NO with the up and down keys and after pressing the SET key specify page number 0 with the up and down keys Set the REG item to YES with the left and right keys and press the SET key c Items 2 to 5 will be displayed TYPE00 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION Column No 0 to 7 Ladder circuit display area A ladder circuit program can be created on each page from 0 to 4 consisting of 4 rows each of which has 8 terminals and 1 output relay Therefore a ladder circuit can be created that consists of 20 rows in all one row contains 8 terminals and 1 output relay Calculations will be carried out in the order of the page numbers 0 1 2 3 and 4 Page 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Output Page 1 Input
251. UT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 RUNATEST SET KEY UPPER MENU NOO MXD FORMULA 00000050 0 00000052 0 00000051 0 OK NO1 N02 Numerical calculation Setting details CALC RESULT Set the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for calculation result specified output data at any value from 00 to 15 OBJECT TYPE Select the type of data being calculated A number of formula settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item Selection of 2 The first line of the display The degree of match with the reference image M coordinates XY Number of objects K maximum distance MXD minimum distance MND maximum lead length MXL and minimum lead length MNL Record 0 0 to 3 NO 0 to 15 Record 0 0 to 3 Object to be FORMULA measured 0 0 to 7 NO 0 to 15 ABS TAN ATAN NOO 0 to 15 the second line will not be displayed 00000000 0 the second line will not be displayed Note Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N 00 to 15 than that used for 1 CALC RESULT 00 to 15 Set the upper and lower limits for decisions Set the output conditions for the results of calculations Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test Numerical calculations NC Constant C UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT OUTPUT RUN A TEST make a test run UPPER MENU
252. UXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICAL SYMBOL l DEL 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL UPPER MENU Mr Column No PAGE 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC PS INPUT1 N3 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUT3 LOGIC 3 Move the cursor to 2 SET POSITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to the Oth column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the up down left and right keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to 3 INPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to CAL NOO 0 to 15 with the left and right keys enter CAL NOO with the up and down keys and press the SET key 5 Move the cursor to 4 LOGICAL SYMBOL with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to and press the SET key c The logical condition will be displayed in the Oth column of INPUT 0 PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO 00NO0 LOGIC 00300 means the results of the calculation entered on the NUMERIC CALC menu for registration No 00 6 Move the cursor to 2 SET POSITION setting position with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to the 1st column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the left and right keys and press the SET key Enter CAL N01 as an input signal as described in steps 4 and 5 PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO 00N00 00NO1 LOGIC 7 Move the cursor
253. VDC tart sampling input S X0 photo sensor or proximity sensor External output YO to Y7 Type selection switch X1 to X4 Note 1 When the settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger have not been made a CCD TRIGGER NOT SET error 34 will occur Note 2 Start sampling input XO 1 Sampling will be performed while this terminal is ON When it is turned OFF the sampling will stop During sampling O will flash in the upper right corner of the MAIN OPS MENU 2 After the measurement is terminated the sampling will be restarted when the terminal is changed from OFF to ON Time chart Measurement i 7 i start input 7 7 s X0 Start accd sampling by turning ON measurement start input XO Start sampling m T A by turning OFF CCD trigger d measurement start cycle i input XO Object type number input Specified object type number X1 to X4 CCD trigger Black White Black window n not highlighted Trigger Trigger BUSY output Measurement result is valid atthe end s of a measurement a PC calculation P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P
254. Version 2 3 SHARP Produced in July 2002 Compact image sensor camera Model IV S20 Applied for software version 2 09 S2 09 Thank you for purchasing the SHARP IV S20 compact image sensor camera Read this user s manual care fully to thoroughly familiarize yourself with the functions and proper procedures for operation Store this user s manual in a safe place We are confident that the manual will be helpful whenever you encounter a problem This user s manual provides you with information about the IV S20 softwares version 2 09 All IV S20 cameras with an 52 09 mark are compatible with software version 2 09 See page 5 1 For details about the upgrade version of the software see Appendix 2 This manual was written with the utmost care However if you have any questions or inquiries concerning the product please feel free to contact our dealers or us Copying all or part of this booklet is prohibited The contents of this manual may be revised or modified for improvement without prior notice Safety Precautions Read this user s manual and the attached documents carefully before installing operating or performing maintenance and checking in order to keep the machine working correctly Make sure you understand all of the equipment details safety information and cautions before using this machine In this user s manual the safety precautions are divided into Dangers and Cautions
255. When a write mode nonconformity error code 10 4 occurs after a result write command WRG is transmitted when the power is disconnected from the PC When a Mitsubishi or OMRON PC is connected The data in items 2 and 3 are divided into packets for transmission 14 2 Computer Link 14 3 Register setting Use PC register writing up to 512 bytes to provide the IV S20 with a computer link Setting item Applicable range of address Sharp 09000 to 99776 Write register up to 512 bytes Mitsubishi 00000 to 09999 OMRON DM0000 to DM9999 Enter the write start address in item 3 WRITE TOP ADDRESS on the COMPUTER LINK menu page 11 19 under the I O SETTINGS menu Note 1 When a Sharp PC is used specify an even address for the write start address Note 2 When 512 bytes are used for the write register in a Sharp PC use one of the following write start addresses 09000 19000 29000 39000 49000 59000 69000 79000 89000 99000 Write register map The write register contains the following data Mitsubishi OMRON L Termination code 00 normal termination codes DM0000 other than 00 abnormal termination See page 15 3 Appended information error code in an error response Object type number 0 to 15 00 to OF DM0001 E x T r L DM0002 H R
256. X6 on the I O SETTINGS menu See page 11 1 and 11 2 Result of logical calculation output Specify in item FINAL OUTPUT COND on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu gt See page 10 8 to 13 When BUSY is active this terminal outputs an ON signal while the IV S20 is executing the measurement and opening the all set menu BUSY When READY is active this terminal outputs an ON signal while the IV S20 is waiting for a trigger To specify BUSY or READY go to item OUTPUT STATUS in the I O SETTINGS menu Seetings gt See page 11 1 Time chart etc gt See page 11 4 to 11 15 4 Input output port The input output terminals are isolated by photocouplers to prevent malfunctions due to noise Use them within the rated range The specifications of the input output ports are listed below Wem 0 0 Input voltage range 10 5 to 26 4 VDC Input Input impedance 3 3 k ohm Rated output voltage 12 24 VDC Load voltage range 10 5 to 27 VDC Rated max output current 20 mA DC Output Output type 5 Wiring to IV S20 main housing i e i al ULIS Dum NETTEN EA o2 jose PB dieses HKS F 7 Fuse 0 5A XO X6 C YO Y7 BUSY C steels LZ 2 p I des 9 B KE MU BA UE ia UE Installation Conditions and Method 5 Connection
257. YES 11 2 Measurement start input and result output settings The combinations of various settings for item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F item 2 START CCD SAMPLE and item 3 SERIAL OUTPUT OUTPUT OBJ TYPE on the I O SETTINGS menu page 11 1 are explained below Measurement start input IF Result output Parallel 7 Parallel gt 1 Computer link parallel 2 General purpose serial parallel 3 General purpose serial General purpose serial parallel 4 CCD trigger Object type Start sampling change Result output Parallel Parallel r Parallel gt 5 Computer link parallel 6 L General purpose serial parallel 7 Generalpurpose General purpose serial serial General purpose serial parallel 8 Auto 1 Parallel Parallel gt 9 General purpose serial parallel 10 The time required to change object types is calculated differently according to the type of measurement start input I O as follows Measurement start input I F Parallel I O Included in the measurement execution time Not included in the measurement execution time Not included in the measurement execution time General purpose serial CCD trigger Setting the Input Output Conditions 1 Measurement start input parallel object type change parallel result output parallel Sett
258. YES are displayed in the MEASURE measurement condition menu FL C1ALLC2NO VX X TYPEO0 OK MEAS XXXXXxms MEAS1 CAM1 LABEL BIN OBJ REGST NO 0 0 3 NUMBER 004 OK TOTAL ARA 006168 OK LABEL NUM 000 0 003 001542 OK GRAVITY 206 0 303 0 AXIS ANGL 28 0 FILLT DIA X 042 Y 037 PERIMETER 00138 8 oop BUSY REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG By moving the cursor to REG CHNG change registration and pressing the up key you can see the measurement results for different registration numbers labels and numerical calculations They are displayed as follows Registration number 0 label numbers 0 gt 127 registration number 3 label numbers 0 127 results of numerical calculations to N15 registration number 0 screen also has this feature Unregistered numbers will be skipped When the down key is pressed the display can scroll through the data in reverse order The measurements When there are no recorded numbers other than those currently on display or if no measurement has actually been carried out then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data 9 106 Existence inspection by point measurement 9 10 Existence inspection by point measurement The presence or absence of target objects is examin
259. ___ NUMERIC CALC 9 87 L OUTPUT CONDITIONS 9 88 Counting quantities by binary MEASURING COND 9 92 REGST NO BINARY AREA COND BINARY AREA COND 9 93 UPPER MENU L EVALUATION COND 9 94 L NUMERIC CALC 9 95 OUTPUT CONDITIONS 9 96 MEASURING COND 9 100 REGST NO BINARY AREA COND BINARY AREA COND 9 101 FIND CENT GRAVITY MAIN AXIS ANGLE FILLET DIAMETER PERIMETER LENGTH UPPER MENU ___ EVALUATION COND 9 103 L NUMERIC CALC 9 104 OUTPUT CONDITIONS 9 105 MEASURING COND 9 109 PROCESSING MODE BIN CONV AV LIGHT LEVEL BINARY CONV COND THRESHOLD VALUE SET POINT SET POINT 9 110 UPPERMENU I EVALUATION COND 9 111 112 OUTPUT CONDITIONS 9 113 7 6 Setting and Operating Outlines 3 Set condition configuration The chapters to refer to are shown in square brackets Monitor output image capture message display pattern dis Run screen play binary image display 0 angle correction image display Chapter 8 conditions crosshair cursor display object type manual set Title registration position correction calculation using two images camera selection final numerical calculation final output conditions system I O setting halt on NG measurement Chapters 9 and 11 Measurement 0 gt Positional deviation m
260. a as the No 1 to 15 registration No 0 6 Counting quantities by binary conversion No of labels Evaluation Number of labels Registration No 0 Evaluation Total area Total area Registration Registration No 1 to 3 contain the same data as the No 1 to 3 registration No 0 14 10 Computer Link 7 Object identification by binary conversion Decimal Item AES point digit No of labels 2 Dummy data 2 Registration No 0 Evaluation No of labels 2 None 0 Evaluation Total area 2 Total area 8 Registration Registration No 1 to 3 contain the same data as the No 1 to 3 registration No 0 Label 0 Lavel 1 Registration No 0 Evaluation Label area None 1 to to Lavel 127 2 Registration Registration No 1 to 3 contain the same data as the No 1 to 3 registration No 0 Label unit area 8 None Window label center X 4 1 of gravity Y 4 1 19 Registration No 0 Label 0 Window label main axis angle 4 1 Window label fillet X 4 diameter Y 4 None Window label circumference 8 1 Label 1 to 31 0 32 to 63 Labels 1 to 127 contain the same data as 0 64 to 95 label 0 0 96 to 127 Registration No 1 0 to 31 1 32 to 63 Labels 0 to 127 contain the same data as 1 64 to 95 label 0 in block 10 1 96 to 127 Registration No 2 Label Oto 31 2 32 to 63 Labels 0 to 127 contain t
261. ads and evaluation 039 0 results 084 0 OK 5 Lead pitch and evaluation results 032 0 Lead length and evaluation muximum minimum in pixels 000 BUSY NG REG CHNG MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG By moving the cursor to REG CHNG change registration and pressing the up key you can see the inspection results corresponding to the registration number the first number and the number of the object to be measured the second number then the results of the numerical calculations All of these may be scrolled through in this order 0 0 0 0 7 1 1 01 7 2 2 0 2 7 3 3 0 3 7 to N15 0 0 is the number on display in the above illustration Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll backwards through the results Unregistered numbers will be skipped When there are no recorded numbers other than those currently on the display or if no measurement has actually been carried out then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data When a distance or a lead length results in an NG evaluation the point in the image will be marked with a circle Example of the display Distance between the center of Lead length NG the leads NG marked with a circle marked with a circle Longest lead length Shortest lead length Longest distance Shorte
262. aluation externally see the following page The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112 When the final evaluation result is OK C112 is ON and when the result is NG it is OFF The result of final evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112 The setting procedures are the same as described in item 9 in section 3 2 position measurement PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C112 Yoo LOGIC 4H L gt Y 9 Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU Con 1 Press the ESC key c The screen will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM save data in flash memory or OPERATIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The following message will be displayed on the upper corner of the screen DATA SAVE Do you want to save data YES MOVE NO ESC Press the SET key C The data saving operation will start and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen SAVING REFERENCE IMAGE MEE SYSTEM I O MEAS CONDITIONS When the data has been saved in the IV S20 flash memory the display will change from SAVING to SAVING COMPLETE Note If the ESC key is pressed the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV S20 flash memory In this case if the power to the IV S20 main housing is turned OFF or if the type No
263. amera 2 image Remote key pad Data computer link d h o So Programmable controller IV S20 main Monitor LJ housing Power supply 9 24 VDC Type selection parallel I F External trigger a photo sensor or proximity sensor etc System Configuration 3 When a personal computer is connected Purpose application Measurement is started by an external trigger a photo sensor or proximity sensor etc and the measurement data is output to a personal computer The object type number is selected by the personal computer Camera 1 image Camera 2 image Monitor HW 20 gem Personal computer H L selection data IV S20 main housing Power supply 24 VD External trigger a photo sensor or proximity sensor etc 2 System configuration example for measurement triggered by the internal CCD sensor trigger The internal CCD trigger can be used with camera 1 but with camera 2 1 When IV S20 is used in a stand alone mode Purpo
264. an ellipse is selected in item 1 then the two variables you must set are the center and diameter The mask window can be set exceeding the measurement window THRESHOLD VALUE Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to 255 gt See page 9 7 Setting threshold values in shared settings INVERT B W black and white inversion Set the inversion of black and white in the image to YES or NO NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary values YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary values BINARY PROCESS binary conversion process Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion processing method VAR DIFF or VAR RATE 5 gt See methods for binary conversion in shared settings on page 9 8 BOUNDARY PROCESS boundary processing LABEL ORDER Enable or disable boundary processing C See setting the window boundary in shared settings on page 9 7 Select the labeling order C See labeling order in shared settings on page 9 8 IMAGE PRE PROCESS v Continued on the following page Select a method for pre processing image data C See pre processing in shared settings on page 9 9 9 62 Distance and angle measurement Continued from the previous page Setting the DST amp AGL MES measurement of distance and angle for GRAV center
265. and after the camera is replaced which are shown in item DISPLAY LABELS AFTR CAM CHNG on the ADJ CAM POSITION menu 10 Store the image after replacing the camera by pressing the SET key in item IMG ADJ CAM POSITION DISP DEG OF MATCH SET KEY 87 INTIAL CAM IMG REG LABL10 LABLOO BER CHG AFT CHG GRAVITY X 310 292 0 GRAVITY Y 220 0 219 0 FILLETX 040 040 FILLETY 040 032 AV LLVL 100 100 0 UPPER MENU Other Settings and Operations 2 Self diagnosis The IV S20 can check all of its own hardware to ensure that it is operating normally 1 Diagnostic items and methods VRAM SDRAM Memory Measurement conditions Flash System program ash memory Checksum 2 Operating procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key SYSTEM SETUP OPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU DADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE _ENGLISH RECEIVING PARMS EXEC INIT ALL PARMS EXEC 8SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC 1 9SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS SS Ne 1 Move the cursor to item 8 SELF DIAGNOSTICS with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The SELF DIAGNOSITICS menu will be displayed and each item will be checked If the result of each diagnosis is normal OK will be displayed If the result is abnormal NG will b
266. arative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out The reference image T1 1 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 1 The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the reference image T1 1 and the image taken by camera 1 CAM2 camera 2 CAM 1 amp 2 cameras 1 amp 2 None Comparative calculations of differences between images will not be carried out Subtraction I2 T2 The reference image T2 1 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 2 The absolute value of the difference between 12 2 Subtraction 11 12 Subtraction 12 11 The absolute value of the difference between 12 12 v Continued on the following page The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the reference image T2 1 and the image taken by camera 2 The image taken by camera 1 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 2 The image taken by camera 2 is subtracted from the image taken by camera 1 The absolute value of the difference is calculated between the image taken by camera 1 and the image taken by camera 2 1 The reference images T1 and T2 may be set in item 7 STZORE REF IMAGE reference images for comparison between images which can be found on the OBJECT TYPE menu see the next page 2 The size of the areas covered by 11 and I2 the images taken by cam
267. arch area Dotted line In the case of a vertical line T Line type Movement Minimum length Maximum length Reference image Solid line a horizontal direction units of 1 pixel Units of 4 Dotted line n a vertical direction units of 4 pixels pixels 8 pixels 480 pixels Search area When using either a horizontal or vertical line please bear the following in mind The length of the reference image must be less than that of the search area An example of recording This example is of a 2 point search in a rectangular measurement window Model 2 E DEED 1 NEM p T Sede O0 Reference image model 2 eference image Model 1 I Search area model 2 Search area _ m Msc pcd Model 1 For an example of a horizontal or vertical line measurement window see page 9 50 Returns you to the MEASURING COND If you specified a 1P SCH 1 point search or a 2P SCH 2 point search select item 5 UPPER MENU If you specified a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge Continued on the select item EDGE DETECT COND edge detection conditions following page gt Go to page 9 41 9 38 Positional deviation measurement Continued from the previous page or from page 9 36 When you specified a 1P EDGE 1 point edge 2P EDGE 2 point edge or 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1
268. arch window will be displayed 4 Move a reference image and search area for the detection point 1 to be registered as the start point 01 in the same manner as in steps 7 2 to 6 Image window Detection point 1 start point 01 Set the image window crosshair b cursor to the detection point 1 Search window Set the detection point 1 on the same level as the detection point 0 start point 00 on the Y axis to measure the horizontal distance The coordinates are displayed on the screen 5 Move the cursor to 2UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND menu v Continued on the following page 3 26 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 9 Operation on the DISTANCE SETTINGS distance conditions menu setting the distance No 00 1 On the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu move the cursor to 5 DSTANCE COND distance selection with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The DISTANCE SETTINGS menu will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to DISTANCE TYPE distance selection with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to DISTANCE BETWEEN 2PNTS between two points with the left and right keys and press the SET key c Items Gand Gwill be displayed DISTANCE SETTINGS TYPEO0 MEAS1 DST amp ANGL MEAS
269. area used to 1 establish the position 1 4 ren Image used to establish the position establish the position New image to be checked Image used to i establish the position SERIAL NO 8F053G26 MODEL l 8F053G26 MODEL Y IV S20 SERIAL NO IV S20 New image to be checked Good label ANG label Checking sequence D Conduct a gray scale search of the image used to establish the position Using the image coordinates obtained in step 1 first adjust the position of the new image and then begin the matching process 9 If the level of match between the images is too low then a label NG decision will result 9 45 Degree of match inspection 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU gt SYSTEM SETUP gt OBJECT TYPE COND SET SCRN OBJECT TYPE COND J conditions for object type MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 MEASUREMENT 3 CDMEAS SELECTION COMPARE IMAGES SELECT COPY Select CHECK DEG OF comparative calculations CAMERA INITIALIZATION MATCH between images select a initialization degree of match inspection See page 9 2 6 camera See page 9 2 items 7 8 evaluation conditions condition for numerical calculations MEAS PROG COND conditi
270. ared settings From the previous page Select item 10 MEASUREMENT 1 0 MEASUREMENT 2 or 12 MEASUREMENT 3 on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu This indicates that the display is for object type 00 and measurement 1 TYPE00 MEAS 1 lt MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV This indicates that the selected measurement INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA lt program is the MEASR BIN AREA area meas CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ urement by binary coversion POINT MEAS CAM This refers to the camera which has been select 1 CAM2 LT NEN ed in item B SELECT CAMERA IMG camera selection on the OBJECT TYPE COND con OP EXEC TYPEO0 MEAS1 NO dition of object type menu BNITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU QOUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU 1 Using the up and down keys select item 2 COMPARE IMAGES calculation between images 2 Select YES enable calculation using the left and right keys This will display the results of the comparative calculations between images Then item 3 SELECT CAMERA will disappear 2 a wae With this the settings concerning comparative calculations between images are complete 9 27 Shared settings 7 Copying editing When there are many common parameters betw
271. ata Halogen lamp Light source with halogen gas in the bulb When a halogen lamp is lit the halogen gas and vaporized tungsten combine When the filament is heated these combined particles reattach to the tungsten in stead of being deposited on the glass bulb so that the original brightness of the lamp is maintained throughout its life span m High frequency lighting If a fluorescent lamp is powered by commercial electricity it will flicker at 50 Hz or 60 Hz Since the CCD scans images at 60 Hz the brightness of the image may fluctuated due to the flickering of the fluorescent lamp By increasing frequency sued to power the fluorescent lamp employing a high frequency light this type interference is eliminated and a stable image can be obtained G 6 Glossary I m Illumination monitor alarm density setting The illumination light level monitor is a function which automatically monitors the environmental light ing conditions when measuring objects If the illuminance exceeds the alarm density setting the IV S20 will display an alarm message E Interline transfer system The interline transfer system is an electrical charge transfer system which consists of two separate ar eas the area where the light beams are converted into electrical charges by the CCD elements and the area where the charges are transferred m island An island is a separate area which is created after labeling object identification pro
272. ation result preset reference light level are read E Command vs ya 1 1 219 8 sc scln Camera No gt 1 camera 1 2 camera 2 L 1 1 m Response Object Corrected Reference i type gt light level light level 2 9 RORO 1 Ld i ated este i soc A SCLSO OR 2 1 0 1 2 1 0 1 i ot pon ras cue ee n TOIT D eo tay 6 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Object type Object type for which the measurement was executed 00 to 15 Result 0 NG 1 OK Corrected light level Corrected light level 0 to 255 0 Reference light level s Light level used as the criterion 0 to 255 0 13 11 Communication 3 Setting initialization self diagnosis and manual measurement coordinate of the operation screen Shown below are only the instructions and responses of these processing functions Process function Setting operation screen Read operation Screen lock Process code E Command Communication format 5 0 510 T SC SC H L Lock operation screen 0 Lock 1 Unlock Set operation Screen lock status 5 E Command E m Response D Lock operation screen 0 Lock 1 Unlock Read object type number il Command 5 4 SC SC H L m Response 4 RC RC 0
273. ayed if REGST NO registration number is set to YES on the MEASURING COND mesurement condition menu Evaluation conditions Setting details CDREGST NO Enter any number from 0 to 3 registration number NUMBER Set the range for the number of objects that will produce an OK number of objects evaluation TOTAL AREA Set the range for the total area that will produce an OK evaluation MAKE A TEST RUN Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions display the test results 5 UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for evaluations that you have set This can be done using item MAKE A TEST RUN For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9 2 3 Evaluation conditions Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 menu and select item NUMERIC CALC COND numerical calculation conditions y Continued on the following page 9 94 Counting quantities by binary convension Continued from the previous page NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 CNT BIN OBJ CDCALC RESULT 00 0 15 OBJECT TYPE NO T AREA A QTY K NUM CALC NC CNST C FORMULA REG 00 0 15 N00 0 15 DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 i RUNATEST SET KEY UPPER MENU Noo A 00 YO 00009000 0 00010000 0 00009500 0 OK N01 N02 i
274. bject images will be taken Use flicker free lighting equipment such as a high frequency fluorescent lamps or halogen lamps Consult us about the right lighting equipment for your application Backlighting Light should uniformly illuminate the field behind an object so that the IV S20 measure the object with it s shadow Since the shadow picture will be converted to binary values reliable measurements can be executed Example CE IV S20 Miss processed product Backlighting using surface illuminance LED Reflective lighting A light shone on the front of an object with angle will be reflected and the IV S20 will pick up the reflected light If too much light is reflected such as from a metallic surface or similar materials a proper image may not be obtained Example IV S20 Light beam Light beam Label detection Measurement of the center coordinates of a hole 6 1 Installation Conditions and Method E When using the IV 60LD This paragraph describes how to use Sharp IV 60LD LED lighting equipment For details about the installation and wiring of the IV 60LD see the instruction manual The distance between the IV 60LD and an object distance at which to install lighting equipment should be approximately 150mm and the lit area is approximately 50mm x 50mm If the lighting distance is reduced approximately 60mm the lighting may be uneven 77 IV S20 camera WE m Camera angle bracket
275. ccuracy Used to determine the position of machine parts and substrates Determining the location of the positioning the fiducial mark mark that identifies the position of the substrate 1 1 point search Detecting the deviation in position in X and Y directions Reference image Center coordinates X1 Y1 Inspection Image Center coordinates X2 Y2 Center coordinates X2 Y2 Amount of deviation X2 X1 Y2 Y1 Measured result 5 K Search area 2 2 point search Determining positional deviation in X and Y directions as well as rotational deviation Reference image a Center coordinates Xa1 Ya1 Inspection image a Center coordinates Xa2 Ya2 Reference image b Center coordinates Xb1 Yb1 Ya2 Ya1 Inspection image b Center coordinates Xb2 Yb2 Example 8 A Search area image a Yb2 Yb1 Xa2 Xa1 Anglar deviation 0 Xb2 Xb1 Search area image b Measured result Center coordinates of image a Xa2 Ya2 Amount of deviation of image a Xa2 Xa1 Ya2 Ya1 Center coordinates of image b Xb2 Yb2 Amount of deviation of image b Xb2 Xb1 Yb2 Yb1 Deviation angle 0 The deviation angle 0 determined in the 2 point search is used to readjust the rotation of the image for measurements 1 to 3 Detailed Operating instruction example See 3 2 Position measurement
276. ce image registration number only for the Specified measurement program camera 1 2 will be stored in the IV S20 flash memory Calcula ON Ud paralel input X5 one rep d TYPE ae screen is H is ON the reference image that previously registered for PARALLEL INPUT X5 tion calculation between images is stored in the IV S20 flash Parallel input X5 ace memory Calculation between images gt See page 9 24 to 9 27 Measure ment 0O to 3 When the parallel input X5 on the OBJECT TYPE COND screen is ON and if the IV 8520 measurements are any of the followings the upper and lower limits of the final area judgment conditions will be corrected automatically at the specified ratio Correction ratio range 0 to 50 Correction compatible measurements Binary area measurement counting number of objects after binary conversion and object identification labeling after binary conversion Correction of final area judgement Select the type of input terminal INPUT X6 External input uses the terminal as an external input signal See RAGAELELINPDTXOS tput Th it tti the MAIN OPS MENU i itched S mage outpu e monitor setting on the is switched See Parallel input X6 camera switching item 1 Output monitor in Chapter 8 Runs only the measurement program for the assigned camera No Camera When X6 is OFF camera 1 when X6 is ON camera 2 is measureme
277. cess the binary image M m Main axis angle The center of gravity is the geographical center of the image It is determined by treating the binary image to be measured as an object that has mass b 30 2 30 m Mask window The image being examined may contain an area that does not need to be processed To eliminate such an area a mask window is used Lee Measurement window Object to be measured Mask window N Normalization correlation To determine whether the levels between the reference image and the input image match the IV S20 uses an information processing method called normalization correlation This is a method used to cal culate relationship between two groups of data Factors determining the correlation value If the densities of the two images have the same tendency positive correlation the two images are said to resemble each other If the densities of the two images have opposite tendencies negative correlation the two images are said not to resemble each other Therefore areas of the reference image and the input image which resemble each other the areas of both images are brighter or darker are positive and areas which do not the areas of one is brighter and the other is darker are negative Correlation formula A Y B x C x 10000 Ix T Xl x LT Correlation between input image and reference image B NX 1 1 LI x 31 Correlation between input image
278. ch inspection for shape and size eene 9 48 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity 9 62 Distance and angle measurement gray scale search 9 60 1 8 Lead inspection seti d RR t t met esaet 9 75 Object identification by binary conversion ssssssesssseeeeneeeeenenen nnne nennen 9 101 Positional deviation measurement sssssssssseeseeeeneene eene eene nennen nennen 9 37 I EI EID 7 3 Menu configurano sereis i aieiaa iA EEE nena ce cn eae dec e dee ee d depu en ned n dv epi e deed deed 7 4 Message 2 5 cd 8 4 Mode Degree of match inspection for shape and size sse enne 9 47 Positional deviation measurement sssssssssssseeneeeeeene 9 36 Model 0 1 degree of match inspection for shape and 9 47 MONO e 4 1 NIOINITON LEE EC EHE 4 1 Monitor Connector E 5 2 MONOT OUTDUL ss acts siete iere et ee reni ie ene MM diea MN M 8 1 Monochrome monitor IV 09MT nnne nnnn nnn trennen nnne 4 2 16 6 N NormalizationcortelatlOti 2 too end a er ed aaa tecta o d da aede eda va d rte RU Ta dads 1 2 G 7 Number change Rte etia I ettet tpe at
279. ch is treated the same way If the two values are identical the command is considered to be valid I F they are not identical an error has occurred during transmission Value increment range for checksum m Command Processing code Header L Terminator L Text Checksum code Value increment range for checksum m Response l IRCIRC JHL gt 5 5 H L __Termination code Processing code Header __ Text 13 4 Terminator Checksum code Communication Method for creating a checksum code The ASCII code for each byte of data from the processing code to the end of text prior to the checksum code is added together The lower 1 byte of this sum is divided into the upper 4 bits and the low order 4 bits The hex character 0 to F is converted to the ASCII code for that character and sent as one byte Thus the checksum code consists of two bytes Ex 1 Command for the measurement Ex 2 Command for the measurement execution function 1 code 10 execution function 7 code 1A Checksum code Checksum code This manual uses the following notation to represent addresses and set values Octal numberl Ex 377 Decimal number Ex 255 Hexadecimal number Ex FF 13 5 Communication 13 4 Processing functions 1 Measurement execution functions 1 Measurement execu
280. code 11 i E Response Object Output evaluation Measuremento 2 12 Measurement o i type results i 7 yo y4 2 vag Camera 1 Camera 2 5 8 Camera 1 Camera 2 NE 981818 data data i 2 2i2 T Data from Data from Data from Data in the i measurement 1 measurement 2 measurement specified SC SC CR data data data block H L 1 See page 13 5 for details about 1 and 2 Note The response returned by the measurement run command 2 processing code 11 will not contain the specified block 2 Setting operating procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET key gt On the OBJECT TYPE COND menu move the cursor to item 5 SYSTEM IN OUT and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE I O CDMONITOR LIGHT LVL CAM1 1 2 NO YES Z22LIGHT LEVEL COND NEXT SUB MENU CCD TRIGGER COND NEXT SUB MENU SHUTTER SPEED 1 00060 1 30 1 10000 B UPPER MENU TRIGGER CCD START REGNO YES BIN AVG LIT LVL B COMPUTER LINK OUT BLOCK 09 MESR O CMRQ1 amp SERIAL OUTPUT 2 STORE REF IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 287 271 REG DISP down keys and press the SET key 2 Enter the program No camera No and block No of
281. contact exists only on the first row if the contact is deleted also the Y output relay will be deleted Continued on the following page 10 4 PC Function From the preceding page Y 3 Ladder circuit creation 2 setting output signals 11 INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 00 0 7 OUTPUT SIGNAL 2 UPPER MENU down keys and press the SET key key the SET key Display example gt AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO0 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION PAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE MATCH 0 1 CRD X0 0 1 CRD YO 0 1 DEVIAT x0 0 1 DEVIAT y0 0 1 AGL DV B CAL N00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICAL SYMBOL SHE L 4 DEL Y PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO 0MO C000 LOGIC 4h l gt Tx 1 Move the cursor to item 2 SET POSITION and press the SET key Move the cursor to a row where a ladder circuit output signal will be placed with the up and An output signal can only be placed on rows where input signals have already been placed 2 Set the cursor to item 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET Select an output auxiliary relay number see page 10 7 with the up and down keys and press The output symbol and auxiliary relay number will be displayed on the row specified in step 1 steps 2 and 3 4 Create a ladder circuit for the page numbers registered in step 1 repeating the operations in Creation e
282. conversion 0 upper limit 255 lower limit B Threshold value Threshold value Binary conversion 255 255 upper limit A lower limit B Upper Black White Lower Lower limit B limit B Black Black 0 0 Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Degree of match inspection for shape and size binary conversion page 9 51 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity page 9 62 Area measurement by binary conversion page 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion page 9 93 Identifying object by binary conversion page 9 101 Point measurement binary images page 9 109 3 Setting window boundaries enable disable This function enables and disables the labeling object identification of binary images located that cross over the window frame boundary Window abeling enable Binary window ee boundaries Labeling disable window boundary Images 1 and 3 cross over the window frame edges and are measured together with the areas outside the window frame edges Condition Labeling in order they are connected Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Distance and angle measurement center of gravity page 9 62 Counting quantiities by binary conversion page 9 93 Identifying object by binary conversion page 9 101 9 7 Shared settings 4 Object identification and numbering function labeling
283. d No instruction is sent to execute an operation See pages 13 15 to 13 25 for details about the measurement data blocks 1 Measurement data reading function 1 fixed measurement data code 21 The final evaluation result based on the results of the last measurement and the data in block 0 which comes from the measurement functions specified for measurement numbers 0 to 3 are output ll Command 2 1 SC SC CR 1 L E Response D Measure 1 1 Object Output evaluation ment 0 Aa s Measurement 0 1 type result wi N IS Selso 2 1 RCRC 1 Y0 Y1 YI5 5 5 ls zls zls z Camera 1 Camera 2 HO C E aia E El E data data Data Data Data measure measure measure SC SC CR ment 1 ment 2 Q ment 3 2 H i L Object type Object type for which the measurement was executed 00 to 15 Output evaluation result YO to Y15 9 0 NG or unspecified 1 OK D Measurement functions 0 to 3 Measurement function O 0 none 1 positional deviation absolute position measurement Measurement functions 1 to 3 Measurement data The measurement functions vary in terms of the data they produce Only the data in block 0 is output from the complete output data produced by each measurement function 0 none 2 shape and size comparison 3 distance angle measurement gray edge 4 di
284. d the display of the OK NG result will depend on of the final evaluation result C112 Turned OFF when the illumination exceeds the upper or lower warning level of the illuminance monitor set on the MONITOR LIGHT LVL menu page 9 115 Warning light levels can be set for each of the cameras 1 and 2 separately This relay is turned OFF when either one of them exceeds the upper or lower level C117 monitor error C118 measurement operation error Turned ON when a measurement processing error occurs However except the end code 34 35 36 3E gt See page 15 4 C119 measurement termination Turned ON upon termination of measurement processing and turned OFF when a measurement start input signal is given C120 to C127 h for i ignals counter reset o not use these relays for input signals OK NG 10 7 They are turned ON to reset counters CNO to CN7 C120 to C127 correspond to CNO to CN7 Create a circuit for sending an output signal to one of these relays on the row following a row that contains a counter instruction Counter instruction gt See page 10 12 displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU gt See page 7 2 PC Function 2 Procedure for creating the final output conditions in a ladder circuit A ladder circuit can be created for each object type 0 to 15 using the following procedure 1 Operation to invoke the FINAL OUTPUT COND
285. d a programmable controller and it can be used in a variety of production lines such as those for electrical electronic semi conductor or liquid crystal parts as well as for food chemical cosmetics and other production lines 1 1 Features 1 Features of the CCD camera 1 Arrangement of the square pixels The vertical and horizontal pixel aspect ratio is 1 1 so there is no need for image correction This allows maximum precision and processing speed CCD pickup with square pixels CCD pickup with rectangular pixels 1 Pixel 1 28 1 1 2 Full pixel reading progressive scan The IV S20 employs a full pixel reading system which scans every horizontal lines on the CCD in order This system does not suffer from reduced image resolution which is caused by the conventional NTSC interlaced system which only reads half the lines in each frame Comparison of capturing moving objects image Progressive scan system Conventional NTSC interlaced system 512 Odd line DICENTE Even line z Full line Even line line Image signal 3 Random shutter The IV S20 shutter operation can be triggered by an external signal or by the CCD It can be used to mesure moving object 4 Reading full and partial images Since the IV S20 can be used to capture just the part of the image needed for image processing it can read images at very high speeds F
286. d settings 2 Image settings What follows is a description of how to use the image settings to control the measuring program 1 Gray scale processing pixel contraction and detection precision Settings menu screen Positional deviation measurement Distance and angle measurement gray gray scale search scale search Degree of match inspection for shape Lead inspection criteria search and size gray scale processing ocom PIXEL MDL 0 1 2 3 conn PIXEL MDLO 1 2 3 CONTR PIXEL MDL 1 1 2 3 DETECT ACCURACY STANDARD HI PRC DETECT ACCURACY STANDARD HI PRC Menu Description 5 O CONTR 1 Search the scanned image in groups of 2 pixels pixel 2 Search the scanned image in groups of 4 pixels contraction 3 Search the scanned image in groups of 8 pixels STANDARD standard Detection precision of 1 pixel unit level HI PRC High precision Detection precision of 1 10 pixel unit level High precision Search coordinates use a Sub pixel level of precision 1 10 Reference image DDETECT ACCURACY Standard detection Search coordinates 7 21 useatpixellevel gf 1 of precision rT L T L LI T Tt Degree of Degree of match High precision Standard pixel pixel detection Camera image detection Point of detection Pixel Point of detection To increase the speed
287. de F Freeze mode N No camera input LOCK M L Flashes during communications System program version number Run menu lock LOCK is not displayed while the screen is unlocked C1 0022 OK Average density during measurement and judgment OK NG Camera No C1 camera 1 C2 camera 2 This item is displayed when the illuminance monitor MONITOR LIGHT LVL on the OBJECT TYPE 1 0 menu has been set to YES See page 9 115 Measurement No 0 to 3 camera No 1 or 2 and measurement program name 7 2 Setting and Operating Outlines Menu bar Menubar Description __ _____ Y The display of evaluation results can be cycled through in the order of the MSR CHNG measurement numbers using the up and down keys Measurement 0 camera 1 Measurement 0 camera 2 gt Measurement 1 Measurement 2 Measurement 3 measure ment change REG CHNG The display of the measurement results numerical calculation results can be registration cycled through in the order of the registration numbers the measurement change program using the up and down keys The PC monitor screen is displayed by pressing the SET key See section 10 5 PC monitor screen X input Y input auxiliary relay timer counter final numerical calculation result PC MONTR PC monitor Press the SET key and the screen will change to the next SYSTEM SETUP SET SCRN menu
288. del 0 LIGT LVL MDL 0 023 0 OK MATCH MDL 1 09306 OK Detected coordinates for model 1 X COORD MDL 1 X 389 0 OK Average light level for model 1 Y COORD MDL 1 Y 355 0 OK LIGT LVL MDL 1 023 0 OK Degree of match for model 1 REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG By moving the cursor to REG CHNG change registration and pressing the up key you can see the measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations This is done by scrolling through them in the following order Registration numbers 0001 02 15 00 These are followed by the results of the numerical calculations NOO to N15 The measurements screen also has this feature Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll back through the results in the opposite order Unregistered numbers will be skipped When there are no recorded numbers other than those currently on display or if no measurement has actually been carried out then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data 9 56 Distance and angle measurement 9 5 Distance and angle measurement The distance and angle of the centers of detected points can be measured by the Purpose center detection function and the edge detection function a gray scale search and the center of grevity detection function which is a part of the labeling pr
289. determined The specified pixel area is converted to a binary image The number of objects total size of the white area the objects and the area center of gravity main axis angle fillet diameter and circumference of each white area can be measured Application Counting the number of food products or parts measuring the sloped angle or center of gravity of parts and measuring the size of food products Example Measurement of 6 objects Objects Measured results Object identification labeling No 1 bis O No 3 and numbering number of objects present total area Area center of gravity main E nus his axis angle fillet diameter and No 6 O circumference of each object No 1 No 6 Inspection sequence Image capture Convert it to E Object identification a binary image labeling and numbering Measure the area center of gravity main axis angle fillet diameter and circumference 9 98 Object identification labeling by binary conversion 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU 7 SYSTEM SETUP OBJECT TYPE COND SET SCRN 2 OBJECT TYPE COND MEASUREMENT 1 Q MEASUREMENT 2 2 MEASUREMENT 3 j MEAS SELECTION 2 COMPARE 9 SELECT COPY measurement selection IMAGES CAMERA I 5 INITIALIZATION Select LABEL BIN OBJ calculation between came
290. dge detection sssseeee 9 61 Lead n 9 76 Positional deviation measurement sssssssssseseeseeeeen nennen nnne nen 9 39 Arrangement of square pixel 1 1 G 1 Assignment of output DOCK rors natenn E nnne ennemi nnn n nnn inen nennen 11 20 Auxiliary change AUX CHNG sssssssssessseseeenen 10 16 Auxiliary condition setting distance angle measurement 9 64 Auxiliary point number distance and angle measurement 9 64 Auxiliary point type distance and angle measurement sese 9 64 Auxiliary relay C000 to 127 10 7 B 3 eee tete Rot RB aae 1 1 Backlighting SER 6 1 Binary area conditions Area measurement by binary conversion essessseeene ennemis 9 84 to 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion sssssssssssseeeeeeeenneee nennen nnne nens 9 92 Object identification by binary conversion sssssssseeeeneennnee nenne 9 100 to102 Binary image display sit sissies ie et tede ee Rp RR TRE 8 6 Binary processing fixed threshold sssssssessssseeeene nnns 9 8 G 2 Area measurement by
291. ds the limit The image lines have not been set Divide by 0 numerical calculation Overflow numerical calculation No numerical calculation setting No label camera adjustment The search area is smaller than the reference image Equivalent label exceeded Edge center point exceeded lead inspection Coordinates range exceeded distance angle measurement Same inclination intersection of two straight lines Divide by 0 center of circle perpendicular bisector distance between point and straight line Perpendicular inclination O perpendicular bisector The CCD trigger has not been registered The CCD trigger is not being sampled by a serial interface signal The SIO trigger has not been set x o E o A A start point has not been set Distance angle measurement The auxiliary point conditions are not thoroughly specified Distance angle measurement The auxiliary line conditions are not thoroughly specified Distance angle measurement The distance conditions are not thoroughly specified Distance angle measurement The angle conditions are not thoroughly specified Distance angle measurement Image reading writing is impossible The range of calculations using two images has exceeded the specified range The reference image cannot be registered from paralle
292. dth of edge flat S Light u TO i Edge S9 Brightness icis detection oF n ig Detection direction Point Dark A Direction The edge detection point is used as a reference coordinates when the positional deviation is detected Compared with a gray scale search the edge detection is quicker but the position detection is less accurate Return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu and select item 5 UPPER MENU Y Continued on the following page 9 40 Positional deviation measurement From page 9 38 When you specify a 1P SCH 1 point search or a 2P SCH 2 point search From the previous page When you specify a 1P EDGE 1 point edge 2P EDGE 2 point edge or a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge for the MODE Select item 5 EVALUATION COND evaluation conditions on the TYPEO00 MEASO menu EVALUATION COND TYPE00 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION DREGST NO 0 0 7 TEST RESULT OUT X COORD MDLO 000 0 511 0 0000 OK Y COORD MDLO 000 0 479 0 0000 OK NO DEVIAT MDLO 000 0 511 0 0000 OK NO Y DEVIAT MDLO 000 0 479 0 0000 OK NO MATCH MDLO 10000 10000 09000 NO ANGULAR DEVIT 180 0 180 0 4010 0 NO eal De using the up and down keys The choices are NO YO to 7 C000 to C127 8X COORD MDL1 000 0 511 0 0000 OK NO SY CO
293. e de crease increase and area filters are available 7 Rotation correction Rotation correction determines the angle for correction by locating two points with a gray scale search and edge detection 8 Calculation between images Calculation of difference between images captured by camera 1 and camera 2 and calculation of differences between a stored standard image and captured images are both possible Subtraction and absolute difference in value can be used for calculation 9 Integrated PC function The integrated calculation functions of a programmable controller are included so that the IV S20 can directly output detection and measurement results after calculation external equipment This can greatly reduce the total processing time and produce cost savings when setting up a system 10 High speed programless communication The IV S20 has a computer link function and general purpose serial communication function for communication with external devices It can have a user settable communication speed up to 115 2 kbps which contributes to increased processing speed for the whole system The computer link function can write the measurement results to an external programmable control ler register without any programing Using the general purpose serial communication function the IV S20 can execute commands from a host computer and return the result to the host computer 11 Compact The IV S20 can be connected to a maximum of two
294. e Shutter speed s Settable between 1 30 and 1 10 000 for each object Shutter type Method Random shutter Connector Round 12 pin female connector Connection to IV S20 main housing Using camera conversion cable IV S20HC3 Operation ambient temperature 0 to 45 C Operation ambient humidity 35 to 8596 RH non condensing Operation atmosphere Outside dimensions mm Camera body No corrosive gases or dust 30 W x 32 H x 40 D 30 W x 32 H x 50 D Head 17 35 6 mm Head cable 1m Weight 50 g not including the lens 125 g The head weighs approximately 12 g Accessories 1 camera angle bracket 2 securing screws Variable as per with the partial image reading specified 1 camera angle bracket 1 camera head bracket 3 securing screws 1 Instruction Manual Specifications 3 Camera lens IV S20L16 Item Specifications Focal distance 16 mm Maximum f stop 1 6 Aperture range 1 6 to 16 close Focal range 50 mm to infinite Filter installation dia 25 5 P 0 75 U1 Mount system C mount Applicable cameras IV S20C1 IV S30C1 IV S30C3 cameras for IV S30 4 Camera conversion cable IV S20HC3 Item Specifications Cable length 3m Cable sheath Polyvinyl chloride Connector Main housing side Round 13 pin female connector Camera side Round 12 pin male con
295. e 02 search None 01 OK None 01 OK Mode Evaluation Angular deviation None Evaluation 1st point Degree of match ong point Evaluation 1st point X coordinate 2nd point Evaluation 1st point Y coordinate 2nd point Registration No 0 st point Provided 4 None 1B18 6936 Degree of match P Ex 2nd point Provided EX None 0055 3413 8 None 00000000 01 Reserved area Evaluation None Deviation None None X Provided eet Provided Deviation The values shown in the data example column have been converted the same way as wad done in example of the data in block 0 Note If a registration number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brought forward 13 16 Communication 2 Degree of match inspection for shape and size Si l No Decimal Block Item ign digits point digit Registration No 0 Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same data as the registration No 1 to 15 No 0 Degree of match positioning Provided Degree of match of measured obiect Provided Position coordinates x Noe positioning Position coordinates None measuring object Registration No 0 Evaluation Position coordinates Evaluation eem 2 Light level Measured object 2 4 Positioning Light level Measured object Registration
296. e RS 232C port Communication connector Connector shield JW 32CUH H1 M1 on JW 33CUH H1 H2 H3 the IV S20 RS232C RS422 PG COMM port 15 less RS 232C 2 Communication through the RS 422 port 4 wire system JW 32CUH H1 M1 JW 33CUH H1 H2 H3 Communication connector on the IV S20 RS232C RS422 PG COMM2 port 9 Connector shield Shielded twisted pair cable 1 km or less RS 422 A v 14 20 Computer Link 3 When a JW 1324K 1342K 1424K 1442K 1624K 1642K is used The IV S20 can only be connected to the RS 422 port When the communication port is used provide a 2 wire RS 422 system When the MMI port is used provide a 4 wire RS 422 system 1 When the communication port is used JW 1324K 1342K 1424K Communication connector on 1442K 1624K 1642K the IV S20 RS232C RS422 Communication port Pin No Signal name Terminal name Connector shield 1 km or less RS 422 2 wire system 2 When the MMI port is used JW 1324K 1342K 1424K Communication connector on 1442K 1624K 1642K the IV S20 RS232C RS422 MMI port R 7 TB 8 RA Connector shield FG Shielded twisted pair cable 1 km or less RS 422 4 wire system gt 4 When a Z 3114J 312J is used 1 Communication
297. e a 1 1 G 2 1 connectors iR eI tiere HR Notat eR Bee 5 2 Camera 2 conhrector o tiu iet tei cU e ep rs ondes Get ute 5 2 Gamera angle bracket nid een aderat Ede ed ce d eeu od Po ve dde ad eee 4 1 ler 4 1 5 1 EL 5 1 Camera installation 1 6 4 6 6 Camera lens IV S20L 16 esses ener nennen nennen rrr nnne nnns 4 1 5 1 16 3 Camera measurement parallel input nnn nennen nennen 11 1 Camera position adjustment ssssssssssssessesesses seen nennen enters nter rennen 12 5 to 7 Camera selection between images ssssssssssssseseseee eene nennen eren 9 25 Cameras anda os tee tte deett du cede Pee eodein ce d dead Pra M d Qa E dex dia 8 1 9 25 CCD charge capture device ccceeeeececeeeceneeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeesaeeeseaeeessaeeeeenaeeeeaes G 2 CCD camera specifications esssesssssssesesesseeeenee nennen nenne nennen nnns enter nennen nnns 16 2 Le B SCCHOM PROPRE EP vr Pc tro TREE 5 1 15 5 COD Trgger RE Est Qe eee AR Bo ke NR ee rr 1 1 4 4 11 17 G 2 Center of gravity measurement object identification by binary conversion 9 102 G 2 Change the Japanese or English display mode
298. e displayed If any abnormality occurs consult our service center Example of the display if 2 SELF DIAGNOSTICS abnormalities are found _ amp VRAM CHECK 1 OK i ING SDRAM CHECK ING 5 FROM TYPE CHECK OK ING ERROR 2 FROM PROG CHECK ING OK __ ANY KEY 5 4 3 n the FROM TYPE CHECK object type check the conditions are checked in the order of the object type numbers 00 gt 01m 915 If an abnormality is found the corresponding object type number will be displayed and the next FROM PROG CHECK program check will be started without checking the conditions of the remaining object types 2 Press any key on the remote key pad and the screen will return to the SSYSTEM SETUP menu 12 8 Chapter 13 Communication General Purpose Serial Interface The IV S20 can communicate with a personal computer that transmits commands and receives responses to measurement execution commands 13 1 List of processing functions The following functions can be used for communication between the IV S20 and a personal computer using the general purpose serial interface Measurement execution Result reading Setting operation scree t Ref Processing function Description page Measurement execution 10 Executes a measurement for a specified object function 1 evaluation result type and outpu
299. e previously specified threshold difference Value to the light level variation difference Measured light level reference light level specified threshold value Variation in lighting Threshold value adjustment Correct the threshold value by multiplying the previously threshold value to the light level variation rate Measured light level reference light level x specified threshold value Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Degee of match inspection for shape and size binary conversion page 9 51 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity page 9 62 Area measurement by binary conversion page 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion page 9 93 Identifying object by binary conversion page 9 101 Point measurement binary images page 9 109 9 8 Shared settings 6 Pre processing Pre processing includes various image manipulation processes that create more readable images by removing noise and distortion in the image data And by extracting or emphasizing certain image features it is easier to evaluate or identify target objects by converting the images into standard patterns In the IV S20 you can select from smoothing horizontal vertical pre processing techniques Item Contents Display smooth images decreasing the noise Smoothing Use to eliminated surface flaws and unevenness in the reflected light caused by protrusions or dents edge emphasis
300. e same registration number specified on the EVALUATION COND menu Positional deviation measurement 0 to 7 Degree of match inspection 0 to 15 Lead inspection 0 to 3 Object counting by binary conversion 0 to 3 L Label measurement by binary conversion 0 to 3 After moving the cursor to the kind of input signal you want with the left and right keys select a number with the up and down keys Then press the ESC key See page 10 6 for the kinds of input signals available for each measurement program and see page 10 7 for details about the auxiliary relays 4 Move the cursor to item LOGICAL SYMBOL with the up and down keys and press the SET key 5 Move the cursor to the logic symbol to be used for the input signal selected in step 3 and press the SET key c The logic symbols and the input signals will be displayed as a ladder circuit Display example PAGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO 0MO LOGIC ele eec EE ae Logic symbol Function a contact on a series circuit ON when the evaluation result is OK b contact on a series circuit OFF when the evaluation result is OK Deletes a contact on the cursor Contacts after the deleted contact will not be brought forward Note This symbol cannot be used on the first row Used to create an OR circuit Used to create an OR circuit Deletes the contact on the cursor Contacts after the deleted contact will be Deletion brought forward When a
301. e saved in the IV S20 flash memory In this case if the power to the IV S20 main housing is turned OFF or if the type No is changed the settings will be deleted 2 Press the ESC key The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU If the cursor was moved to OPERATIONS in step 11 above the screen will Y return to the MAIN OPS MENU 12 Inspecting the lead Press the TRG BRT key and the number of leads lead pitches max and min distances the center coordinates and the degree of match with the reference image will be displayed TYPEOO0 FH C1ALLC2NO Display of inspection result VX X OK Final evaluation result 1 MEAS XXXXXXms Measuring time MEAS1 CAM1 INSPECT LEAD REGST NO 0 0 3 X COORD 202 0 OK lt Center coordinates of reference Y COORD 281 0 image and judgment results MATCH 09957 lt Degree of match with the MEAS OBJ 0 0 0 7 reference image NUMBER 005 Number of leads DISTANCE 040 0 Lead pitches 039 0 Upper Max distance pixel count Lower Min distance pixel count 2 X0 6 f BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 The final evaluation result will be displayed as OK in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the items have been evaluated acceptable If there is a single unacceptable item NG
302. e selected INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA measurement is 1 CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA 1 CAM2 COPY EXEC TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC amp MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 8NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU Select POINT MEAS point measurement in item 1 MEAS SELECTION Item 2 will be displayed unless NO is selected in item SELECT CAMERA IMG which is in the OBJECT TYPE COND menu Select item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs MEASURING COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 POINT MEAS MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 POINT MEAS D PROCESSING MODE BIN CONV AV LIGHT LEVEL D PROCESSING MODE BIN CONV AV LIGHT LEVEL 2 BINARY CONV COND FIXED THRSHOLD ADJ VAR DIFF VAR RATE 8 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 1 SET POINT TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 UPPER MENU UPPER MENU When item 1 PROCESSING MODE When item 1 PROCESSING MODEis set to is set to BIN CONV binary conversion AV LIGHT LEVEL average light level Measurement conditions Setting details D PROCESSING MODE Select the processing mode BIN CONV binary or AV LIGHT LEVEL averabe light level 4 SET POINT TO NEXT SUB MENU When the BIN CONV binary processing mode is selected BINARY CONV COND Select eithe
303. e size and position of the window in units of 1 pixel position of measuring If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1 then the two variables you need to window set are center and diameter Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type rectangular round or MASK WINDOW TYPE elliptical SDN mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window and screens out those parts of the image which are not needed in the measurement process Set the size and position of the mask window which is framed with a dotted line in units of 1 pixel MASK WINDOW POSIT If a circle or ellipse was selected in item 1 then the two variables you need to set are mask window position center and diameter It is possible to enter dimensions that make the mask window bigger than the measurement window 8 THRESHOLD VALUE Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to 255 gt See setting threshold values in shared settings on page 9 7 Select whether to invert the black and white in the image YES or NO INVERT B W NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary black and white inversion values YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary values Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion processing method VAR DIFF or VAR RATE
304. ea Do not use these relays Turned ON when all of the evaluation items have been judged OK and turned OFF if any single item has been judged NG If C116 is not used OK NG will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU which correspons to ON OFF of C112 If an error occurs C118 is turned ON C112 will be turned OFF NG C112 Final evaluation result C113 Continuous measurement start input When C113 is ON continuous measurements will be executed Ex When is ON continuous measurements will be executed X0 f 113 O Ne Output the CCD trigger status to C114 regardless of the Yes No setting for the start of the measurement When binary conversion is specified if the white area is 5096 or more of the image C114 will be turned ON and if it is less than 50 C114 will be turned OFF When the average light level is specified C114 will be turned ON when the image is within the specified level range and turned OFF when it is out of the range C114 CCD trigger status output The same signal as the BUSY READY signal is output internally C116 programmable output If an output signal is passed to C116 the display of the OK NG result on the MAIN OPS MENU will depend on the ON OFF state of C116 Ex OK is displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU when C000 is ON NG when the C000 is OFF C000 C116 1 V If C116 relay is not use
305. eadings together and displaying each one separately using the ESC key Evaluation condition Setting details DREGST NO registration number Enter any number from 0 to 15 MATCH MDLO degree of match with Set the percentage of match with the reference image for model 0 the reference image that will still produce an OK decision X COORD MDLO Set the range of X coordinates for model 0 that will produce an OK X coordinates decision Y COORD MDLO Set the range of Y coordinates for model 0 that will produce an OK Y coordinates decision LIGT LVL light level OMATCH MDL1 degree of match with the reference image X COORD MDL1 X coordinates Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item 2 to above Y COORD MDL1 Y coordinates LIGT LVL MDL1 light level OMAKE A TEST RUN Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition display the test results UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND measurement condition The X and Y coordinates come from either the point of detection in the reference image Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for the evaluations that you have set This can be done using item MAKE A TEST RUN For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9 2 3 Evaluaation condi tions Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 and select item NUMERIC CALC COND conditions for nu
306. eaeaeaeaeaeaseeseesssseeeceeeceseeeeeceseesecesesaeaeaeaaaaaaaaaeeseeees 9 67 Lead inspection Evaluation conditions cccccccccccecceceececececaeaeeeseaeaeseeeseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesesaeaeaeuaasaeagsaseseeess 9 78 Measurement conditions 9 74 Object identification by binary conversion Eval ation coridltioris 2 pre ceste cetus teas fua 9 103 Measurement Conditions 9 100 Positional deviation measurement Evaluation 9 41 Measurement Conditions oen sco eti e AoA ec ae quere ae De eee gna ga c 9 36 Remote Key pag Dm 4 1 5 3 Remote key pad connector agranir aE E RAEO 5 2 Remote key pad E EKEUR en nennen 7 9 FRRESOMITO Ms fes De A A E a EE AE E E T 6 3 G 9 Result output settings oiii etude osea dat ee dee Lee een de UL dex uds 11 3 R ri menu conditlons score tee Ee ir ee tete eo ecc Eats Pere aar e eater Bh boa eoe dob cabins 8 1 1 12 2255 RCM LIT 8 9 S Saving to flash memory ohh epe pe eese tee ee aati erae ies 12 4 Screen specifications reat iie cis t a OR E Qd RSS E REED ER S 7 2 SII ol G 9 Degree of match inspection for shape and size
307. earch mode AUX CONDITIONS Gray scale search DISTANCE COND matching condition gt 9 60 n edge detection mode Binary image matching conditions 9 61 amp ANGLE CONDITIONS UPPER MENU AUX CONDITIONS 9 64 In label center of gravity DISTANCE SETTINGS 9 65 MEASURING COND 9 62 START POINT MODE QJAUX CONDITIONS BINARY AREA COND with labels 9 62 one CE CONDITIONS L TAUX CONDITIONS 9 64 UPPER MENU L DISTANCE SETTINGS 9 65 ANGLE SETTINGS 9 66 EVALUATION COND 9 67 NUMERIC CALC 9 68 OUTPUT CONDITIONS 9 69 7 5 Setting and Operating Outlines From the preceding page m gt Lead inspection Area measurement by binary conversion conversion conversion Point measurement Label measurement by binary The numbers in parenthesis refer to the pages describing the operations in detail MEASURING COND 9 74 REGST NO SEARCH CRITERIA Gray scale search OBJ NO FOR MEAS matching condition 9 75 LEAD LENGTH MEAS CONDFOR MEAS Edge detection conditions 9 76 UPPER MENU L EVALUATION COND 9 78 I NUMERIC CALC 9 79 OUTPUT CONDITIONS 9 80 1 MEASURING COND 9 84 REGST NO BINARY AREA COND BINARY AREA COND 9 85 UPPER MENU ___ EVALUATION COND 9 86
308. easurement 13 15 to 16 Computer link Area measurement by binary conversion enne nnne 14 10 Counting quantities by binary conversion 14 10 Degree of match inspection for shape and 2 14 7 Distance and angle measurement sssssssssssseeene 14 8 Final numeric calculation result essen nennen nnne 14 14 lead Inspection eui oi tede eie e et pesi iz LR RR E Die 14 9 Object identification by binary 14 11 to 12 ard e 14 13 Positional deviation absolute position 14 5 to 6 Boundary PrOCESSING ree ro eei eet et Beso gap e ex deut E Bree eo re reco ioris G 1 Counting quantities by binary conversion sesssssseseseeeeneeeeeeennenene nennen nnne 9 93 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity sse 9 62 Object identification by binary 51 nennen nens 9 101 BUS Moe ci oL MEUM UA A tM 6 16 7 2 C vetat eode aaa d gre bc La an eaves aded ec Ve tv Led rr d rbv c
309. easurement Measure Measurement 1 J Degree of match inspection distance and programs Measurement 2 angle measurement lead inspection area 4 7 measurement after binary conversion Measurement 3 counting the number of objects after binary conversion label measurement after binary conversion point measure ment o gt an 42 c o c The same as Type 00 Type 15 Input output I F measurement number switching X5 X6 Input output parallel input X5 X6 status output BUSY READY Chapters 11 conditions serial communication conditions computer link gain offset Others Camera position adjustment display mode all parameter receiving all initialization self diagnosis saving to flash Chapters 12 memory Setting and Operating Outlines 4 Image display 1 Image display modes There are two image display modes i e through moving images and freeze still image Display mode Description A single image taken by a camera is displayed This mode is used for adjusting the camera focus adjusting an image and moving a workpiece during testing When a measurement trigger is input and an image is captured the still image is displayed This mode is used for setting measurement conditions while looking at the still image and for performin
310. easurement triggered by a com mand from a personal computer See Chapter 11 Setting the Input Output Conditions for the details about the settings 1 System configuration example for measurement triggered by an external trigger such as a photo sensor 1 When IV S20 is used in a stand alone mode Purpose application Measurement is started by an external trigger a photo sensor or proximity sensor and the measurement result is output externally warning lamp The object type number is selected by an external switch Camera 1 image PE msn Camera 2 image Remote key pad CT IV S20 main housing Power supply 24 VDC ess Monitor Warning lamp etc External output 2 When a programmable controller is connected Purpose application External trigger a photo sensor or proximity sensor etc Type selection switch Measurement is started by an external trigger a photo sensor or proximity sensor and the measurement data is output to a programmable controller The object type number is selected by the programmable controller Camera 1 image C
311. ecified 1 OK Auxiliary relay CO to C127 00 OFF 01 ON Data 2 for the measurement No specified by the command evaluation result and calculation result of the numerical calculation When measurement No 0 is specified Camera 1 Camera 2 Calculation NO Calculation N15 Calculation Calculation N15 Judgment Result Judgment Result Judgment Result Judgment Result 2 digit 8 digit 2 digit 8 digit 2 digit 8 digit 2 digit 8 digit When measurement No 1 2 or 3 is specified E coe Judgment 2 digit gt 00 NG 01 OK Calculation NO Calculation N15 zh Judgment Result Result Result 8 digit Hexadecimal number 2 digit 8 digit 2 digit 8 digit Data 0 is entered for unregistered calculation numbers gor from NO to N15 13 7 Communication 5 Measurement execution functions 5 6 7 and 8 codes 18 19 1 The measurement execution functions 5 to 8 can be processed when the measurement is started by a CCD trigger camera 1 and is controlled by start sampled instructions The contents of the commands and responses are the same as those for the measurement run functions 1 to 4 except for the processing code 1 Measurement execution function 5 evaluation result code 18 The measurement for a specified object type is executed and the data obtained is compared with
312. ection for shape and size 9 45 9 5 Distance and angle measurement 9 57 9 6 Lead inspection 9 72 9 7 Area measurement by binary conversion 9 82 9 8 Counting quantities by binary conversion 9 90 9 9 Object identification labeling by binary conversion 9 98 9 10 Existence inspection by point measurement 9 107 9 11 System settings 9 115 1 llluminance light level monitor 9 115 2 Shutter speed 9 117 Chapter 10 PC Function X ERES am COE Nie REC Eni ed 10 1 to 16 10 1 Operation cycle 10 1 1 Power ON sequence 10 2 2 PC scan clycle 10 2 3 Measurement processing cycle 10 2 10 2 Ladder circuit program creation 10 3 1 Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder circuit 10 3 2 Procedure for setting the final output conditions in a ladder circuit 10 8 10 3 Program examples shape and positional deviation inspection 10 14 10 4 Examples of a final output conditions ladder circuit 10 15 10 5 PC monitor screen 10 16 Chapter 11 Setting the Input Output Conditions 11 1 to 22 11 1 Outline 11 1 11 2 Measurement start input and result output settings 11 3 11 3 CCD trigger 11 17 11 4 Setting for serial communications 11 18 11 5 Computer link 11 19 11 6 Output block assignment computer link output and general purpose serial output 11 20 1 Data in specified blocks 11 20 2 Setting operating procedure 11 21 11 7 Gain offset adjustment 11 22 Chapter 12
313. ed See page 10 7 for details about the auxiliary relays C000 to C127 Y Continued on the following page 10 12 PC Function From the preceding page 4 Create a ladder circuit for the page numbers registered in s tep 1 repeating the operations given in steps 2 and 3 Creation example PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C000 C001 Y00 LOGIC gt INPUT1 X0 LOGIC J INPUT2 C001 X1 TMO LOGIC Jj H 0150 INPUT3 TMO YO1 LOGIC circuit b Circuit a x Circuit b O C010 C001 C010 1 m O C001 C011 O Y 5 Storing the circuit in the IV 820 memory RAM LOGICAL SYMBOL Lt DEL OUTPUT SIGNAL OUT Y00 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 TMO 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 CNT CNO 0 7 SET VL000 000 999 DEL 14 UPPER MENU Note Output relays cannot be used in series on a ladder circuit Change circuit a to 1 Move the cursor to item 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND menu and the ladder circuit creation process will be finished 10 13 PC Function 10 3 Program examples shape and positional deviation inspection The positional deviation measurement one point search in measurement 0 allows the degree of match and coordinates to be measured and the result OK or NG is output Refere
314. ed A simple black or white evaluation is made in the specified pixel area of binary Purpose images The light level in the specified pixel area is averaged and a decision is made whether or not it is within the specified lightness range in gray scale images Checking the presence or absence of packed parts inspecting the working condition of LEDs or fluorescent character display tubes and sorting household Applications electric appliances Inspection at 6 points Number of points max 128 points at average light levels 256 points in binary images L1 Point size 2 m x 2n pixels m n 2 1 to 16 e 115 Inspection sequence Image capture Binary image Black white evaluation conversion of points Average light Light level evaluation level of points 9 107 Existence inspection by point measurement 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU SYSTEM SETUP m gt OBJECT TYPE COND SET SCRN OBJECT TYPE COND MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 2MEASUREMENT 3 OMEAS SELECTION COMPARE IMAGES GSELECT copy gt Select the POINT MEAS P comparative calculations CAMERA G INTIALIZATION area measurement by between images select a binary conversion see section 9 2 6 see section 9 2 7 8 camera MEAS PROG COND gt conditions for measurement programs
315. ed figure using the up and down keys 4UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu Continued on the following page 9 93 Counting quantities by binary convension Continued from the previous page Information about the window settings In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the frame First freeze the frame Then operate the camera normally Finally freeze the frame again The first frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final binary image The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating steps 1 to 3 above Example of recording Measurement window rectangular amp The binary image will be the contents of the measurement window after the portion excluded by the mask window de has been removed O Mask window rectangular Y Return to the MEASURING COND menu and select item 3 UPPER MENU Select item 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation condition on the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 CNT BIN OBJ DREGSTNO 0 0 3 TEST RESULT pur These displays can be set using NUMBER 0000 3000 00004 OK NO the up and down keys The TOTALAREA 000000 245760 002000 Choices are NO YO to 7 C000 MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY 06127 SUPPER MENU Items to will be displ
316. ed for reference Then an image of defective specimen is compared for degree of match Finally an image of another good specimen is compared These comparisons establish the degree of match to be used for setting the limits used for working comparisons For example the degree of match for a non defective object is 9096 or more and that for a defective object is 70 or less then the threshold value for degree of match can be set to approx 85 This allows the evaluation acceptability to be made 4 When the final evaluation result is OK YO is turned ON and a filled box llis displayed When the result is NG an empty box is displayed When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON YO is turned ON according to the condition set in step 10 for final evaluation output 3 21 Operation Examples Distance measurement 3 4 Distance measurement Below is an example of the operation for determining the length L of a target object Object to be measured rectangle Length L 1 Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU after initialize all conditions MAIN OPS MENU TYPEOO FL C1ALLC2NO VX X MEAS ms MEASO CAM1 NO 6 000000 vor DO susv MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 Move the cursor to SET SCRN with the left and right keys and press the SET key c The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Y 2 Operation on the SYSTEM SETUP
317. ed reaches a specified position in the camera s field of view In order to make a partial reading of the CCD image at high speed the IV S20 is equipped with the detection function described above with the works just like a proximity sensor to trigger the CCD A proximate sensor can also be connected to the system m Resolution The CCD in the IV S20 contains 512 pixels horizontally and 480 pixels vertically If it takes a full picture the resolution will be X 512 and Y 480 S B Search area A portion of the target image to be compared with the reference image using the gray scale search function B Search pixel The relationship between detection precision and search speed and also between pixel contraction reduce the number of pixels in the image that must be searched and search speed is shown below DETECT ACCURANCY High speed 4 STANDARD HIGH gt Low speed dectection precision standard high precision CONTR PIXEL High speed 3 2 1 Low speed pixel contraction Search speed G 9 Glossary Setting window boundaries enable disable This function enables and disables the labeling object identification of binary images located that cross over the window frame boundary Window Labeling 1 2 nable Binary window conversion boundaries 1 Labeling Disable window Images 1 and 3 cross over the boundary window frame edges and are measu
318. ee Chapter 10 The PC Function Previous menu 2 Halting on an NG measurement All measurements can be halted if an NG measurement occurs whilst operating the IV S20 This is done by selecting item 6 HALT MEAS ON NG on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu OBJECT TYPE COND TYPE NO 00 0 15 C SYSTEM IN OUT NEXT MENU HALT MEAS ONNG NO YES UPPER MENU HALT MEAS ON NG Halting on an NG Description measurement Halt all measurements if an NG evaluation occurs Allows measurements to continue when an NG evaluation occurs Shared settings 9 2 Shared settings 1 Window shape selection and settings This section describes how to select and set the window shapes used for image processing e g rectangular windows horizontal or vertical line boundaries round windows and elliptical windows This can be done using the up down left and right setting keys on the remote key pad 1 Arectangular window Line type Image processing used Measurement programs Reference image gray Positional deviation measurement gray scale search degree scale search binary of match inspection for shape and size distance and angle image matching measurement gray scale search locating the center of Solid lines gravity lead inspection Window containing a Area measurement by binary conversion counting quantities binary image by binary conversion identifying objects by binary co
319. een measurement programs or object types it is most efficient to access those existing sets of parameters in order to copy and then modify them There are two types of copy functions on the IV S20 Copying between object types and copying between measurement programs 1 Copying between object types The parameters of a previously specified object type are copied into another object type after which they can be modified The source of the copy The target of the copy The measurement conditions of The measurement conditions of the target the source object type The data gt object type The data is used to simplify is copied from flash memory setting the target object s parameters Operation procedure On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND condition of object type and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE COND we 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPEOQ INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION NE N MEAS 0 CAMERA1 NO TO NEXT SUB MEN 4 POS ADJ CAMERA1 NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 6MEAS 0 CAMERA2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 8SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 9COMPAREIMAGES NO SUB I1 T1 DIFF ABS 11 1 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO
320. el 127 Label 0 Main axis angle in registration No 3 to Label 127 Label 0 Fillet diameter in registration No 0 to Label 127 Fillet diameter in registration No 1 Label 0 to 127 Fillet diameter in registration No 2 Label 0 to 127 Fillet diameter in registration No 3 Label 0 to 127 Label 0 8 Circumference in registration No 0 to to Label 127 8 Circumference in registration No 1 Label 0 to 127 Circumference in registration No 2 Label 0 to 127 Circumference in registration No 3 Label 0 to 127 Each label contains the same as block 70 Each label contains the same as block 74 Reference Item comparison table of block 0 in each software version Shown below is an item comparison table of the block 0 for each software version which is the general purpose serial I F used for object identification by binary conversion Ver 2 01 or earlier Ver 2 02 Ver 2 03 to Ver 2 09 No of labels Dummy data 00 Dummy data No of labels Evaluation No of labels No of labels No of labels Registration Dummy data 00 Evaluation No of labels Evaluation No of labels Evaluation Total Evaluation Total Evaluation Total block No 0 valuation Total area valuation Total area valuation Total area Total area Total area Total area Registration Registration No 1 to 3 contain the same data as the No 1 to 3 registrat
321. el output based on the output conditions Itis possible to use the parallel output for the evaluation results from the calculations by selecting the PC function in the output conditions the general output conditions are taken from the output conditions set for each measurement program Shared settings Types and number of styles of entered for each measurement program Measurement functions Positional deviation measurement Model 0 OMO to 7MO Model 1 OM1 to 7M1 Input types Degree of match to 7X0 0X1 to 7X1 Model 0 Coordinate X Model 1 Degree of match inspection Distance and angle for shape and size measurement Model 0 positioning to 15MO Model 1 object measurement to 15M1 Model 0 positioning 0X0 to 15X0 Model 1 object measurement 0X0 to 15X1 Lead inspection OM to 3M Starting point 00M to 15M Starting point 00X to 15X OYO to 7YO OY1 to 7Y1 Model 0 Coordinate Y Model 1 0x0 7 0 0 1 7x1 Model 0 Model 1 Coordinate deviation x Model 0 positioning OYO to 15Y0 Model 1 object measurement OY0 to 15Y1 Starting point 00Y to 15Y OX to 3X OY to 3Y Model 0 Model 1 OB to 7B OyO to 7yO Oy1 to 7y1 Coordinate deviation y Angular deviation B to 15B Light level G Auxiliary points HX Auxiliary points HY Number of objects K Model 0 positioning OGO to 15GO Model 1
322. em 1 OBJECT TYPE NO object type number using the up and down keys and press SET key 2 Select the object type number 00 to 15 to be initialized using the up and down keys 3 Select item 2 EDIT using the up and down keys and press SET key 4 Select EXEC INIT start initialization using the up and down keys and press SET key c While the initialization is in progress the message Initialization of data is in progress will appear at the top of the screen When the initialization is complete this message will disappear Do not disconnect the power while IV S20 is initializing The set data other than currently initializing may be corrupted Unless all of the data is initialized it will not be possible to restart the machine i e partial initialization is not possible 9 32 Shared settings 9 Title registration A title for a object type number can be entered and saved when the object type number is displayed on the screen Purpose The title is used to make it easier to control the details of the settings for the object type Title characters A maximum of 16 letters and symbols may be entered Operation method On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key c OBJECT TYPE COND menu move the cursor to 3 TITLE REGISTRATION and press the SET key
323. en eene nennen 9 93 Distance and angle measurement RE E nnns nennen enn 9 62 Object identification by binary conversion ssssssseseeeeeneeneenennnenen 9 101 Measurement change toe knee rae ere deae dme e EXER Hee EU de e Y de oa 7 3 Measurement data blocks doe pasion Ce oa ete eve er Per gant 13 14 14 5 Measurement number switching X5 6 11 1102 Measurement object lead inspection ssesesseeenee eee eene enne 9 78 Measurement output conditions nnn nennen nnns 8 5 Measurement processing cycle 10 2 Measurement program outline of the settings seseeeeenene e 9 2 Measurement start input I F corneriana aiie anea nennen nmn 11 1 to 2 Measurement start input settings ssssssssseseeene 11 3 Measurement start brightness select key TRG BRT 5 3 7 9 Measurement window positional Area measurement by binary conversion enne nennen nne nnns 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion ssssssssseeeeeeeeennenn nennen nennen nnns 9 93 Degree of mat
324. en nnne nnn nnn nennen 9 70 Existence inspection by point measurement nennen 9 114 EM 9 81 Men cer ee aad eet 10 16 Object identification labeling by binary conversion sseseseeneennnn 9 106 Positional deviation measurement nnne nennen nnn nennen 9 44 OTEO EEEE n pacer utut d be Tas M A 1 i i cm 7 10 oie go Elie Ec 10 16 Output conditioris s ce etm suite et dte fern v Yas feet edes te Ne 10 1 to 7 Area measurement by binary conversion ssseseeseseeeeeeneeeeene eren 9 88 Counting quantities by binary conversion essssssseseseeeeeenee enne 9 96 Degree of match inspection for shape and size sese enne 9 55 Distance and angle measurement nnne 9 69 Existence inspection by point measurement nennen 9 113 Kinds of input signals in each measurement program 10 6 Lead Inspection i m rete M HER ACUTA ee eb ee PHOT eed 9 80 Object identification by binary conversion sssssssssee enne nennen nnne 9 105 Positional deviation measurement essen nnns 9 43 Outp tmonitor Change ertet tete tad atu addatur edd edm aee Rae
325. ension camera cable IV S20EC2 4 leading to the camera body IV S20C1 is bent its bending radius should be longer than 40 mm If the camera cable will be bent repeatedly during operation design the cable layout so thail the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use components that can be flexed up to 2 million times Camera cable H Bending radius Min 40 mm 6 22 Installation Conditions and Method 2 Installing and connecting the IV S30C1 1 Connections Up to two IV S30C1 cameras can be connected to the IV S20 main housing using the IV 520HC3 camera conversion cable Camera 2 connector CAMERA2 IV S20 main housing Camera 1 connector CAMERA 1 3 side view Orr D Ix Camera 1 5 vA Camera amera conversion C onnector Plug IV S30C1 cable IV S20HC3 o D i i Camera 2
326. er of the screen will change from H to L 2 Adjust the focus and aperture iris opening of the camera lens see page 5 1 so that the object to be measured is clear and easily destinguished 3 Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode C The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T through to F freeze To store a threshold value in the following step the screen must enter the free image mode See section 7 2 Screen specifications for the through freeze mode 4 Move the cursor to THRESHOLD VALUE threshold value with the up and down keys and press the SET key c An binary image of the reference object will be displayed 5 Move the cursor to the lower limit with the left and right keys and adjust the lower limit threshold value with the up and down keys Adjustment of threshold An example of adjustment is shown below using a white object on a black background When the dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image if the lower limit is set higher the black part in the binary image will become larger If the lower limit is set lower the white part will become larger Increase and decrease the lower limit value find the value at which the white part in the binary image starts growing and the value at which the black part starts growing Then set the lower limit at the value halfway between these points This will ensure reliable operation The size of the whi
327. eras 1 and 2 may be set in item 7 SET IMAGE WINDOWS setting areas for comparison between images which can be found in the OBJECT TYPE I O menu see the next page 9 25 Shared settings From the previous page After selecting item 45 SYSTEM IN OUT on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu When the selected camera is either CAM1 or CAM2 OBJECT TYPE I O MONITOR LIGHT LVL CAM1 1 2 NO YES TRIGGER CCD START REG NO YES BIN AVG LIT LVL 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT BLOCK 00 MESR 0 CAM 1 amp SERIAL OUTPUT OSHUTTER SPEED 1 00060 1 30 1 10000 STORE REF IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP UPPER MENU N Z gt ie 1 Use the up and down keys to set item 7 STORE REF IMAGE reference images for comparison between images for comparison between images 2 Display an image by pressing the SEL key Then focus the lens and adjust the camera s iris to adjust the image After adjusting the image press the SEL key to freeze the frame 3 Creating the window for the reference image Select one of the following MOVE UP L or LO R Then adjust the window to suit your needs Decide on the position of the window for the reference image before every operation and then press the SET key 4 When the position of the image window has been defined record the selection by using the left and right keys to go to REG register Then press SET key E Using the left a
328. ersion 2 07 and 2 08 Bl Additional functions in software version 2 07 compared with version 2 06 Added function Distance and angle Added LINE 2P and INTERSECTION measurement Reference page Serial communication Added 4 8 kbps communication speed Bl Additional functions in software version 2 06 compared with version 2 04 Added function A reference image used for the calculation between images can also be registered Parallel input X5 Ls Automatic correction of the upper and lower limits used for the final area judgement condition Reference page Automatic setting of the initial value for manual Manual measurement measurement General purpose serial Added reading and specifying functions for the manual I F measurement coordinates processing codes 70 71 13 1 13 13 Bl Additional function and detalis about the improved functions on software version 2 04 compared with version 2 02 Additional function Additional function General purpose I F Block 51 has just been added Reference page Computer link Block 51 has just been added SETTINGS menu The CAM MEAS has been added to the 6 PARALLEL INPUT X6 The DIST BETW X and DIST BETW Y have been added to the DISTANCE TYPE on the DISTANCE SETTINGS menu Distance and angle measurement The MANL MESR have been added to the DISPLAY CURSOR RUN MENU This is used to get the overall
329. ess the SET key Select a digit with the left and right keys and then set the value to 09000 with the up and down keys Criteria for a successful match 90 00 to 100 0095 MATCH MDL 0 09000 10000 After defining the lower limit press the SET key and ESC key 5 Move the cursor to 1 REGST NO register number with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter the number 01 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 6 Move the criteria for a successful match 90 00 to 100 00 for registration No 01 the same as you did in steps 3 and 4 7 Move the cursor to 1 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu 8 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu 0 Setting the final evaluation output condition Y This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally see the following page The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112 When the final evaluation result is OK C112 is ON and when the result is NG it is OFF The result of final evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112 The setting procedures are the same as described in item 9 in section 3 2 Position measurement PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 56 7 INPUTO C112 Yoo LOGIC dk L gt
330. essage display Error display Yes Displaying the measurement result value decision etc N 2 Pattern display Yes Positional correction yes No Yes ion Pattern display during setting Pattern display after correction Determining the measuring time timer stop Parallel output YO to Y15 BUSY OFF External interface enabled communications Computer link Serial output General purpose Computer link output External interface enabled key parallel General purpose serial output Waiting for a measurement start input signal or key input If HALT MEAS ON NG halt operation on NG measurement has been set to YES page 9 2 measurement will be interrupted at any point in the process if an NG measurement occurs the same as when an error occurs 7 13 Setting and Operating Outlines 7 5 When using the IV S30SP The IV S30SP is support software used to design the IV S20 S30 system configuration It will run on Windows 95 98 or NT 4 0 computers You can easily set the various measuring conditions for the IV S20 using your personal computer It also facilitates the setting uploading and downloading the IV S20 parameters saves the displayed image and messages and can test the commands upgrade the software It can create and point documents such as the set of parameters using the tools common of the Window environment
331. esult output YO to Y15 L L Measurement function 0 using camera 1 DM0003 H H Measurement function 0 using camera 2 L L Measurement function 1 DM0004 H Measurement function 2 09012 L L Measurement function 3 D0005 DM0005 E 09013 H H 09014 L L Output data from measurement 0 block 0 D0006 DMO0006 09015 H H L L Output data from measurement 1 block 0 JH m b H L Output data from measurement 2 block 0 H H L L Output data from measurement 3 block 0 H H 19000 L L Assigned block data D0256 DM0256 f 6 19001 1 to 6 5 See the next page The register map shown above is established when the write start addresses have been set as shown below Manufacturer Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON 09000 D0000 DM0000 14 3 Computer Link 1 When the termination code is 08 error response received error the error code is contained in the appended information Example 0A on a Sharp parity error 2 Result output YO to Y15 H 09005 09004 Bt 7 6543 2 1 76543210 Vis Via VIB I2 Vit 0 9 Ye Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 YO 8 Measurement program for measurement 0 00 01 positional deviation absolute position measurement 4 Measurement programs for measurements 1 to 3 00 none 024 shape and size comparison 034 distance angle measurement gray edge 04 dista
332. etection mode detection direction L gt DUPPER MENU DETECT AREA MDLO area of detection THRESHOLD MODELO threshold values PRC PROJECT MDLO artifact processing 6 DETECT MODE MDL1 detection mode C DETECT DIR MDL1 detection direction 8 DETECT AREA MDL1 area of detection THRESHOLD MODEL1 threshold values PROJECT MDL1 artifact processing PUPPER MENU Information about the settings for edge detection In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame Specifications for the area of detection Dotted line Units of 1 pixel Units of 1 pixel O x O pixels 512 x 480 pixels Example of an edge detection point in detection mode shown with different directions of detection Point of change from light to dark horizontal Point of change from light to dark vertical Width of Width of ige flat I 4 Edge detection point Light LEM Edge detection point A P 9 pow 2 o Brightness Difference d 88 inlight 6 Dark Detection direction B 2g A Direction Point of change from dark to light horizontal Point of change from dark to light vertical Width of Wi
333. ettings UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu For more information about the setting for edge detection see page 9 11 Edge detection in shared settings Setting sequence of the starting point conditions of edge detection CDDETECT MODE gt Q DETECT DIRECTION gt DETECT AREA 4G THRESHOLD VALUE PROC PRJECTION gt UPPER MENU Information about setting the starting point conditions of edge detection In order to record a reference image it is necessary to freeze the frame Specifications for the area of detection Units of 1 pixel Units of 1 pixel 0X0 pixels 512X480 pixels Return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu and select item AUX CONDITIONS auxiliary condition Y Go to page 9 64 Distance and angle measurement Continued from page 9 59 Setting the DST amp AGL MES measurement of distance and angle for GRAV center of gravity operations MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 DST amp ANGL MEAS DSTART POINT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU QAUX CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU DISTANCE CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU ANGLE CONDITIONS NEXT SUB MENU UPPER MENU Select item 1 START POINT COND starting point conditions MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE ___ when item amp D MEAS WINDOW TYPE is se
334. eturn you to TYPEO00 MEAS to 3 menu If you disabled the gray scale search for line correction select item 5 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS conditions for object to be measured v Go to page 9 76 If you condi lt gt enabled to gray scale search for line correction select item SEARCH CRITERIA tions for criteria search Y Continued on the following page 9 74 Lead inspection From the previous page When gray scale search for line correction is enabled then select the 2 SEARCH CRITERIA conditions for criteria search DMEASURE WINDOW RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE REFERENCE IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP S SEARCH AREA MOVE UP L 216 200 LO R 295 2794X This is how the display looks BEER oe when the 1 MEASURE DETECTED COORD CNTR FREE 256 240 WINDOW measurement CONTRACT PIXELS 1 2 3 window is RECTANGLE mm DETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HI PRC UPPER MENU _ _ _ You can switch between displaying all the headings together and displaying each one separately using the ESC key Menu Setting details MEASURE WINDOW measurement window REFFERENCE IMAGE Record a reference image and then set the search area IF X LINE horizontal line or Y LINE vertical line is selected then SEARCH AREA the UP L upper left LO R lower right choices in the screen above will be ST PNT starting point and E PNT end
335. evaluation TOTAL AREA Set the range for the total area that will produce an OK total surface area evaluation LABEL NUM Enter a number from 0 to 3 After performing a MAKE A TEST RUN at item 6 and a label number is entered the results displayed in item 5 will change Enter the maximum label size area that will produce an OK result 5 OBJ AREA The center of gravity main axis angle fillet width perimeter will be displayed when measurement is set to YES on the MEASURING COND menu 6 MAKE A TEST Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions display RUN the test results 7 UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEOO0 to MEAS to 3 menu Set the maximum number of objects total area area per label after checking the test results from item 6 MAKE A TEST RUN For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9 2 3 Evaluation conditions Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 object type measurement menu and select item 8 NUMERIC CALC CON numerical calculation conditions v Continued on the following page 9 103 Object identification labeling by binary conversion Continued from the previous page NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 LABEL BIN OBJ CALC RESULT N00 0 15 OBJECT TYPE NO T AREA A OBJ AREA R OBJ GRAVTY GX GY OBJ ANGLE B OBJ FILLET FX FY OBJ PERIMETR CR NUM CALC NC CNST C FORMULA REG 0 0 3 LA
336. ey C 00X0 will be displayed in the formula field Noo X 01XO 00X0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00X0 means registration No 00 image 0 X coordinate of the detection point and model Press the ESC key 4 Move the cursor to UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to the upper limit with the left and right keys and press the SET key Select a digit with the left and right keys Enter the number 0160 0 with the up and down keys and press the SET key LIMIT 00000000 0 00000160 0 N Upper limit Move the cursor to the lower limit with the left and right keys and press the SET key Select a digit with the left and right keys Enter the number 0140 0 with the up and down keys and press the SET key UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000140 0 00000160 0 N Lower limit Press the ESC key C 00000140 0 to 00000160 0 will be displayed in the upper and lower limit fields 5 Move the cursor to 1 CALC RESULT with the up and down keys and press the SET key Enter N01 and press the SET key As described in steps 2 to 4 enter 01Y0 00YO in the formula field and enter 00000090 0 to 00000095 0 in the upper and lower limit fields NOO X 01X0 00X0 sir o ercecsdetoc obe ed ooh coe ee 00000140 0 00000160 0 NO1 Y 01YO 00YO 00000090 0 00000095 0 6 Move the cursor to 6 RUN A TEST with the up and down keys and press the SET key
337. f the final evaluation externally see the following page The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112 When the final evaluation result is OK C112 is ON and when the result is NG it is OFF The result of final evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112 The setting procedures are the same as described in item 9 in section 3 2 Position measurement PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C112 Yoo LOGIC 4H SS Continued on the following page 3 36 Operation Examples Lead inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 11 Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU 1 Press the ESC key gt The screen will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM save data in flash memory or OPERATIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen DATA SAVE Do you want to save data YES MOVE NO ESC Press the SET key C The data saving operation will start and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen SAVING REFERENCE IMAGE BE SYSTEM I O MEAS CONDITIONS When the data has been saved in the IV S20 flash memory the display will change from SAVING to SAVING COMPLETE Note If the ESC key is pressed the settings you entered will not b
338. for binary conversion in shared settings on page 9 8 Enable or disable boundary processing BOUDARY PROCESS See setting the window boundary in shared settings on page 9 7 boundary processing When this function is disabled if a workpiece contacts with the window this workpiece is not measured Select the order for labeling objects LABEL ORDER C See order of labeling in shared settings on page 9 8 DIMAGE PRE Select a method for pre processing image data PROCESS C See pre processing in shared settings on page 9 9 DBINARY NOIS FILTR Select a method for eliminating binary noise eliminating binary C See methods for eliminating noise from binary images expansion contraction noise and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on page 9 10 42 NUM OF FILTR PASS Set the number of cycles that the binary noise elimination process will be carried the number of noise out 0 to 5 Set number of times for expansion and contraction separately elimination cycles After object identification and labeling the area filter is a function used to identify small islands whose area is less than a specified amount It eliminates them from AREA FILTER the object which is being measured Set the maximum number of pixels Enter any number from 0 to 245760 To enter number select 3 AERA FILTER using up and down keys and press the SET key twice Select a required digit using the left and right keys and select the requir
339. g External dimensions of the IV 8530C2 camera head Unit mm M15 5x0 5 S 6 28 Installation Conditions and Method 2 Installation of the camera head CD Put the camera head through the bracket supplied with the IV S30C2 from the cable side and slide the camera head into position Camera head bracket accessory Installed position of the camera head Mounting hole 63 4 For securing the camera assembly in place 8 Secure the camera head assembly in place using the mounting hole 63 4 on the camera head bracket Front view Side view Ei Installation surface Gy Installation surface Note The camera head bracket supplied with the camera is for simple installations and is not vibration damping To meet specific needs the user may have to make a specialized bracket External dimensions of the camera head bracket o9 Unit mm 20 8 M3 hole 31 4 pa 29 d S 0 4 6 Jw 101 ANLA Shape before installation Installation Conditions and Method 3 Installation of the camera body CD Attach the camera mounting bracket comes with the IV S30C2 t
340. g Outlines 7 2 Screen specifications 1 Operation run screen Supply power to the IV S20 main housing and the MAIN OPS MENU startup screen will be displayed on the monitor Before applying the power make sure that the power cable monitor cable camera cables and remote key pad have been connected to the IV S20 main housing D 3 D C12002 2 5 C2 100 0 OK Select BUSY or READY on the I O CONDITIONS menu D Object type No 00 to 15 and the name assigned by the user for each object type 2 Display of the results of the programmable output auxiliary relay C116 If C116 has not been set the results of C112 are output See page 10 7 Display OK is displayed when all of the individual evaluation results are acceptable NG is displayed if any single evaluation result is unacceptable Error An error code and the measurement number that caused the error are message displayed on the upper line The error message is displayed on the lower line FL C1 ALL C2NO Operation status display flashing running flashing CCD trigger sampling Output monitor status Camera 1 C1 camera 2 C2 All upper middle lower none mage brightness H Original brightness of captured image L Brightness reduced to half that in the captured image Image display mo
341. g brackets and the IV S20 main housing are shown on the following page 6 10 Installation Conditions and Method External dimensions of IV S20 main housing Unit mm 130 lt ele 7 89 eS eS SHARP bje ie ees FS 89 HIS 89 8 C aro POWER E x LH IA Ly i Ix Ix Ix i px i IR i 1 ds erra d 1 a r Y VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERAZ SZOSA 7 REMOTE i Y L4 Y 30 30 130 lt essel o ru n c n B 2 tapped holes M3 r 2 tapped holes M3 for attaching the a 1 for attaching the housing bracket H9 housing bracket Y 130 lt External dimensions of housing bracket Unit mm 2 holes 3 2 mm in diameter for attaching the bracket to the IV S20 co MEME ENTE tel me u 10 5 70 10 5 91 Mounting position 2 places for securing the bracket to the mounting surface 6 11 Installation Conditions and Method 3 Connecting
342. g settings on the MAIN OPS MENU The operation run screen is only displayed in the FREEZE MODE and the ADJUST GAIN amp OFFSET screen is only displayed in the through mode Status display At the upper right of the screen T is displayed in the through mode and F is displayed in the freeze mode On the MAIN OPS MENU only the word FREEZE is displayed Run screen Setting screen TYPEO0 FL C1ALLC2NO OBJECT TYPE COND FC1H O VX X OBJECT TYPE NO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPE0O INITIALIZE MEAS XXXXXXms TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS1 CAM1 MEAS BIN AREA MEAS 0 CAMERA1 TO NEXT SUB MENU amp POS ADJ CAMERA1 ADJ REG 0 PNTSXY Shown in freeze mode In freeze mode T in through mode To register a reference image for gray scale searches and to test evaluation conditions If these operations are started in the through mode the message CHANGE TO FREEZE MODE will be displayed Before starting these operations change to the image F freeze display mode Displaying binary images In the through mode the image captured when the freeze mode is invoked while be displayed after binary conversion 2 Adjustment of image brightness The image brightness can be adjusted on any setting screen other than the run screen output on the monitor Purpose This function is used when the image is so bright that the characters and pattern display are difficu
343. g_ SEARCH CRITERIA TO NEXT SUB MENU pa OBJ NO FOR MEAS CRT 0 0 0 7 REG NO YES LEAD LENGTH MEAS NO YES 5 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS TO NEXT SUB MENU 10 UPPER MENU 10 Move the cursor to 6 OBJ CONDFOR MEAS object conditions with the up and down keys and press the SET key The object condition setting menu and a horizontal line will be displayed Horizontal line DDETECT MODE CNTR BRT DRK Continued on the following page 3 34 Operation Examples Lead inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 8 Operation for setting the object conditions 1 Press the ESC key and all of the menus used for setting the edge detection condition will be displayed DDETECT MODE CNTR BRT DRK DETECT DIRECTION lt VERT 1 DETECT AREA MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 THRESHOLD GRYS 050 0 255 EDGE W 2 1 8 FLAT W04 1 16 5 PROC PROJECTION NO YES curren MENU 2 Move the cursor to 1 DETECT MODE detection mode with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to CNTR DRK center dark with the left and right keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 2 DETECT DIRECTION detection direction with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to HORI horizontal with the left and right keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to 3 DETECT AREA detection window with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to MOV
344. ge 0 Object to be measured After the image window position has been defined move the cursor to REG register with the left and right keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to DISP display with the left and right keys and press the SET key Then the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen After checking the image press the ESC key 4 Press the ESC key and move the cursor to 3 SEARCH AREA search window Then press the SET key 5 Create a search window dotted line to be used as the search area The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with the image stored in step 2 and 3 The gray scale search function performes the search operation see Glossary The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3 Search window dotted line Object to be measured After defining the search window size and position press the ESC key Y Continued on the following page 3 18 Operation Examples Degree of match inspection Continued from the preceding page Y 6 Move the cursor to 4 DTECT COORD with the up and down keys and press the SET key If the crosshair cursor does not need to be moved proceed to step 9 Move the cursor to FREE with the left and right keys and press the SET key Move the crosshair cursor to the detection point 0 with the up down left and right keys in units
345. ge capturing CCD trigger P D D MEAS TRIG INP PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG C T 2 Wn START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIAL AT 2 image capturing Monitor 8 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL L m CCD SAMPLING PARALLEL Personal computer j h SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU LJ ype C pen 8 COMPUTER LINK TO NEXT SUB MENU 520 main i housing Settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger Power supply 24 VDC External trigger photo sensor or proximity sensor Note 1 When the settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger have not been made a CCD TRIGGER NOT SET error 34 will occur Note 2 Start sampling input X0 1 Sampling will be performed while this input terminal is ON When it is turned OFF the sampling will stop During sampling will flash the upper right corner of the MAIN OPS MENU 2 After the measurement is terminated sampling will be restarted when the terminal is changed from OFF to ON 11 10 Setting the Input Output Conditions Time chart Measurement start input 4 X0 7 5 S 1 Start sampling by turning ON i Start sampling measurement s
346. gger 1 point fixed type change 4 points fixed Users selectable terminals One external input for storing a reference image and running measurement program 1 One external input for storing a refernece image and running meaurement program 2 Usable as input terminal for any programmable controller Image output 1 0 Vp p Power supply Input terminal 7 points Common for input 1 point common 1 point for BUSY READY selectable 8 points for user assigned logical output YO to 7 Ouput terminal 9 points Common for output 1 point common Power supply 2 points 24 VDC 1 point OV 1 point Storage ambient temperature 20 to 70 Operation ambient temperature O to 45 Operation ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH non condensing Operation atmospher No corrosive gases or dust JIS C 0911 or equivalent Vibration resistance Amplitude 0 15 mm 10 to 57 Hz 9 8m s 57 to 150 Hz No of sweeps 10 1 octave min three directions X Y Z JIS C 0912 or equivalent 147m s each 3 times in X Y and Z directions Noise immunity 1000Vp p 1ms width impulse by noise simulator Outside dimensions mm 130 W x 92 D x 30 H except protuding portions Weight 280 g Shock resistance Specifications 16 2 Camera section 1 Camera main body IV S20C1 Item Specifications Lens mount system Optical sy
347. gger window After determining the position with the direction keys press the SET key 6 Move the cursor to item 3 THRESHOLD VALUE with the up and down keys and press the SET key Set the threshold values for the CCD trigger window Select the upper or lower limit field with the left and right keys set the threshold value 0 to 255 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 7 When the binary method has been selected move the cursor to item 4 INVERT B W with the up and down keys and press the SET key Select YES or NO with the left and right keys and press the SET key When is selected the CCD trigger will trip when an image changes from black to white When YES is selected the CCD trigger will trip when an image changes from white to black 8 Move the cursor to item 5 UPPER MENU and press the SET key Press the SET key again to store the settings in the IV S20 flash memory 11 4 Setting for serial communications When SERIAL general purpose serial has been specified in item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F on the I O SETTINGS menu page 11 1 and when SERIAL or PC LINK has been specified in item 3 SERIAL OUTPUT the serial communication conditions must be set on the SERIAL COMM menu Set the items to match the communication conditions of the other device On the I O SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 8 SERIAL CONDITIONS and press the SET key SERIAL COMM COMM
348. ght forward Example of the data in block 0 Only registration No 0 082005280FAO00EBOFF76 X X Y Angular Center coordinates Center coordinates deviation of 1st point of 2st point Registration No 0 These data are in hexadecimal They are converted to the actual decimal measurements as shown below Data Decimal Measurement ome number result value Center coordinates 2080 208 0 of 1st point 1320 132 0 Center coordinates 4000 400 0 PARURE m 3760 _ 3760 Angular deviation 76 14 5 Computer Link No Data example Sign Decimal igits decimal ment result 2 2 point search OK Mode Evaluation Angular deviation Evaluation 1st point Degree of match ong point Evaluation 1st point X coordinate 2nd point Evaluation 1st point Y coordinate 2nd point 1st point Provided Degree of match Registration 2nd point Provided 0055 Nog Reserved a 00000000 01 Evaluation Deviation Provided Provided Provided Provided Registration Registration No 1 to 7 contain the same data as the No 1 to 7 registration No O Deviation The values shown in the data example column have been converted the same way as wad done in example of the data in block 0 Note If a registration number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brought forward 14 6
349. grammable 24 VDC 7 ER controller i Start sampling a Object type change input XO paralell I F Note 1 When the settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger have not been made a CCD TRIGGER NOT SET error 34 will occur Note 2 Start sampling input XO 1 Sampling will be performed while this input terminal is ON When it is turned OFF the sampling will stop During sampling O will flash in the upper right corner of the MAIN OPS MENU 2 After the measurement is terminated the sampling will be restarted when the terminal is changed from OFF to ON Time chart Measurement start input i 0 7 7 D Start sampling by turning ON l Start sampling measurement start input X0 by turning OFF CCD tri E measurement start ri X M X 4 i 3 gger 4 4 6 input X0 cycle Object type u number input Specified object type number X1 to X4 Result Result A output A output Computer link 1 1 CCD trigger j Windaw Black White Black not highlighted Trigger i x Trigger 1 1 i BUSY signal is turned OFF at the clusion of i the result output A BUSY output oo Terminate measurement C119 _ Measurement resu
350. gth on the MEASURING GPROC PROUECTIONNO YES ea erate LEAD LNG MEAS DIR Y 240 _ 55 If VERT 1 f vertical is selected item DETECT DIRECTION detection direction then the horizontal setting HORI X 256 will You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately using the ESC key Menu Setting details MODE Set the detection mode to BRT or DRK center bright or center dark detection mode 2 DIRECTION Select the detection direction detection direction f Draw a dotted line rectangle around the search area werde iam In order to enhance detection performance make the Y dimension as short as possible 4 THRESHOLD VALUE Set the width of the edge 1 to 8 and the flat 1 to 16 as well as the threshold values difference in the light level 0 to 255 Select whether to employ artifact processing or not iras icem For more information about artifact processing see page 9 12 9 Artifact processing using shared settings LEAD LNG MEAS DIR When the measurement of lead length item is set to YES set the direction of lead direction in which the measurement will take place length measurement UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu Setting sequence of the conditions for objects to be measured of edge detection QDDETECT MODE Q DETECT DIRECTION
351. h a remote keypad integrating frame AC adapter with the IV 10MT 10MTV 10MTK 1 pc Access Installation brackets with the IV 10MTV 10MTK 4 pcs ories Cable with the IV 10MTK 1 pc Instruction manual with the IV 10MT 10MTV 10MTK 1 set LED lighting equipment main body 1 set Instruction manual 1 set Camera angle bracket 1 pc IV 60LD 3 EE Screw M 3 x 6 for securing camera angle bracket 6 pcs Instruction manual 1 set ories Parameter setting support software for IV series CD ROM 1 pc RS 232C communication cable 1 5 m 1 pc IV S30SP 4 Access USB cable 3 m 1 pc ories User registration card 1 sheet Instruction manual 1 set 1 An explanation of the monochrome monitor IV 09MT in detail is shown in page 16 6 of IV 09MT instruction manual 2 An explanation of the LCD monitor IV 10MT 10MTV 10MTK in detail is shown in IV 10MT 10MTV 10MTK instruction manual 3 An explanation of the LED lighting equipment IV 60LD in detail is shown in pages 6 2 and 16 7 of IV 60LD instruction manual 4 An explanation of the parameter setting support software IV S30SP in detail is shown in page 7 14 of IV S30SP instruction manual System Configuration 4 2 System configuration examples This section outlines the system configurations for measurement using an external trigger such as mea surement using a photo sensor measurement using CCD trigger and m
352. h model see the following page Place your order according to your system configuration Ex When two cameras are connected the IV S20L16 lense is used 1 set each of the IV S20 IV S20C1 and IV S20L16 are needed Up to two cameras can be connected to the IV S20 main housing camera 1 and camera 2 However it is possible to connect only one camera In this case the camera must be connected in the camera 1 position The numbers in circles correspond to the component numbers shown on the following page 4 1 System Configuration Bl Product configuration The product configurations of IV S20 IV S20N IV S20M etc are listed below The numbers in circles correspond to the component numbers shown in the previous page Model type Components V S20 main housing 1 set Camera body IV S20C1 1 set Camera lens IV S20L16 1 pc Remote key pad 1 pc Camera angle bracket 5 1 pc Housing bracket 8 2 pcs Monitor cable D 1 pc Conversion connector 6 1 pc D sub connector 1 pc 9 pin D sub male rock screw M2 6 communication connector for the IV S20 main housing Screw M x 6 for securing angle bracket 6 pcs Instruction manual 1 set IV S20N V S20 main housing 1 set Camera body IV S20C1 1 set Remote key pad 3 1 set Camera angle bracket 5 1 pc Housing bracket 8 2 pcs Monitor cable D 1 pc
353. h the Window95 98 or NT environment 1 port is recommended supporting USB port only with Windows98 Windows is a registered trade mark of the Microsoft Corporation USA Pentium is a registered trade mark of the Intel Corporation USA For details about the IV S30SP see the IV S30SP instruction manual Chapter 8 Run Menu Conditions and Settings 1 Output monitor When two cameras have been connected to IV S20 you can switch back and forth between the image from the cameras on one monitor Also the monitor screen can be divided into two parts to display the two images simultaneously Purpose of the setting To set the conditions in which an image captured during measurement will be displayed on the run menu Output monitor switching The monitor can be switched by two methods i e key pressing or parallel input 1 Output monitor switching by key presses To specify a monitor select the 1 MONITOR OUTPUT and 2 1 82 options you want on the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key RUN MENU SETTINGS FCIL QDMONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 CAM CAM182 er inb Q CAMERA182 CAM1 MD CAM2 MD MONITOR OUTPUT C2 will be CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO dis played and when CAM1 amp 2 MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK Y
354. he SYSTEM SETUP menu by pressing the SET key If you do not save the data the data will disappear if you turn OFF the power to the IV S20 main unit or if you change the item numbers to be processed SYSTEM SETUP DOPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM EXEC OPERATIONS L_ Move the cursor to 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM or OPERATIONS menu line and press the SET key The message below will appear on the upper part of the screen Press the SET key at this point All of the image data and data settings will be stored in the flash memory DATA SAVE YES SETJ NO ESC We recommend that you save the data settings and reference images on a floppy diskette using the data backup tool 5 Storing the devices Do not put any object on top of any of the devices or the device may malfunction 6 Maintenance Be careful not to get any dirt or stains on the CCD surface or camera lens This may cause mis measurement 2 1 Chapter 3 Operation Examples This chapter explains how to operate each measurement program Be sure you understand the general operation procedures described in this chapter 3 1 Area measurement by binary conversion 3 2 to 7 3 2 Position measurement 3 8 to 14 3 3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 3 15 to 21 3 4 Distance measurement 3 22 to 30 3 5 Lead inspection 3 31 to 37 3 6 Existence inspection by point measurement 3 38 to 43 3 7 Pos
355. he SET key 2 Move the cursor to FREEZE or THROUGH with the left and right keys and press the SET key the screen cannot be changed to SET SCRN The operation is carried out on the POWER ON SETTINGS menu LOCK will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU Chapter 9 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type 9 1 Outline The measuring conditions for each object type are set on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for object type menu Settings screen On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE COND DOBJECT 00 0 15 QEDIT COPY OBJ TYPEOO INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 1 TO NEXT SUB MENU SPOS ADJ CAMERA1 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY MEAS 0 CAMERA2 NEXT SUB MENU DPOS ADJ CAMERA2 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY amp SELECT CAMERA IMG NO 1 CAM1 1 amp 2 COMPARE IMAGES NO SUBII T1 DIFF ABS 11 T1 Unless item 8 is set to MEASUREMENT 1 TO NEXT SUB MENU NO then item will MEASUREMENT 2 TO NEXT SUB MENU 80 be displayed MEASUREMENT 3 TO NEXT SUB MENU FINALCALC RESULT NEXT SUB MENU i FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU HALT MEAS ON NG NO YES UPPER
356. he SET key Move the cursor to SEARCH and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to 5 EVALUATE CRITERIA criteria condition and press the SET key gt The gray scale search matching setting menu image window and search window will be displayed Y Image adjustment O Press the TRG BRT key on the remote key pad and the brightness of the screen will be switched between H and L Image window 1 n Search window Indicates camera 1 MEAS WINDOW MDLO RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE 1 Press the SEL key gt The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed f the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see press the TRG BRT key to reduce the brightness of the image Then the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from H to L 2 Adjust the focus and aperture iris of the camera lens see page 5 1 so that the object to be measured is clear and easily distinguished 3 Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode c The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T through to F freeze To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations the screen must be in the freeze image mode See section 7 2 Screen specifications for details about the through freeze mode v Continued on the following page 3 17 Operation Examples Degree of match in
357. he same data as 32 2 64 to 95 label 0 in block 10 33 2 96 to 127 40 Registration No Label Oto 31 4i 3 32 to 63 abels 0 to 127 contain the same data as 42 3 64 to 95 label 0 in block 10 43 3 96 to 127 Continued on the following page 14 11 Computer Link Label unit area in registration No 0 Label 0 Decimal point digit to None Label 127 Label unit area in registration No 1 Label unit area in registration No 2 Label unit area in registration No 3 Center of gravity in registration No 0 Label 0 to 127 Label 0 to 127 Label 0 to 127 Label 0 to Each label contains the same as block 60 Label 127 Center of gravity in registration No 1 Label 0 to 127 Center of gravity in registration No 2 Label 0 to 127 Center of gravity in registration No 3 Main axis angle in registration No 0 Label 0 to 127 Label 0 Each label contains the same as block 64 to Label 127 Main axis angle in registration No 1 Label 0 to Label 127 Main axis angle in registration No 2 Main axis angle in registration No 3 Label 0 to Label 127 Label 127 Fillet diameter in registration No O Label 0 to Label 127 Fillet diameter in registration No 1 Fillet diameter in registration No 2 Label 0 to 127 Label 0 to 127 Fillet diameter in registration No
358. he specified power source Connection to the wrong power source may cause a fire Wiring should be performed by a qualified electrician Improper wiring may lead to a fire breakdown or electric shock 3 Use D Danger Don t touch the terminals while the power is supplied or you may receive an electric shock Assemble an external emergency stop circuit and interlock circuit outside of the IV S20 com pact image sensor camera Otherwise a breakdown or damage to the machine may occur due to a problem with the IV S20 Caution Take special care to follow all safety guidelines if you are changing the parameters for the operating conditions or performing an enforced output run or stop during operation Misoperation may damage the machine or cause an accident Turn ON the power supplies in the specified sequence Turning ON the supplies in the wrong order may lead to a machine breakdown or cause an accident 4 Maintenance Prohibit Don t disassemble or modify the camera Fires breakdowns or malfunctions may occur if the camera is disassembled A Caution Turn OFF the power source before connecting or disconnecting the IV S20 If you don t electric shocks malfunctions or breakdowns may occur Organization of This Manual The following chart shows the sequence of the chapters to be read for details about each operation Operation
359. heck the monitor screen to make sure that there are no spots on the screen If the iris is open even a little then even if spots exist they will not be visible on the monitor screen Fine adjustments to the iris are required CCD section Front view view A of the CCD 3 When measurement errors and or evaluation errors occur frequently check The illumination of the lighting equipment and lamps The inspection object is within the window The cables for looseness or disconnection The lens for dirt and dust The lens focus and aperture have not changed The power is being supplied normally and The parameters you set have been stored If the parameters have changed reset the parameters from the beginning Reference When a camera has been replaced or when a camera has been dislocated use the camera adjustment function of the IV S20 This function facilitates adjustment of camera position and lens aperture See item 12 2 1 Adjustment of camera 15 5 Chapter 16 Specifications 16 1 IV S20 main housing 1 Image processing specifications Item Specifications Image sampling system 256 level gray scale binary conversion edge detection Binary conversion With threshold value fixed and automatic correction function and object identification function Image memory One screen per camera Operation method Using remote key pad direction up down left a
360. hether or not the levels match using the normalization correlation method the system slides the reference image one pixel at a time in the measurement objective range measurement win dow and calculates correlation value between the reference image and the target image The position where the maximum correlation value can be obtained is treated as the position where the target image might exist and the IV S20 calculates resemblance level at this position The normalization correlation method also can be applied to binary images However gray scale images images with shades of light contain large volumes of information compared with binary images images with 256 levels of gray have 256 times the volume of information than in binary images Therefore gray scale images offer more precision and more reliable results However the larger the information volume the larger the number of calculations that must be made for correlation values This means that high speed processing hardware and software are required to use the normalization correlation method on the gray scale images G 5 Glossary H Gray scale search corrected gray scale search The gray scale search function is a system for detecting a point where the input image and the refer ence image match after calculating the matching levels in the input image and the reference image Procedures D Store the reference image as a gray scale image with 256 levels of gray
361. hich is the type of data currently on the display in the illustration above Pressing the down key in these situations will scroll backwards in the opposite order Unregistered numbers will be skipped When there are no recorded numbers other than those currently on display or if no measurement has actually been carried out then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data The following are some examples of other displays Example of the display of angle results Angle number angle type Measurement of angle and results of decision Starting point number X and Y coordinates ANGLOO 3PT ANGL 88 2 OK ST PNT00 259 0 178 0 ST PNT01 466 0 178 0 ST PNT02 361 0 228 0 ANGLO1 2P T ANGL HORI 03 5 OK ST PNT00 259 0 178 0 ST PNT02 361 0 228 0 9 70 Distance and angle measurement Example of the display of starting point results Starting point number mode ST PNT00 GRAY SEARCH Coordinates for starting points 132 0 298 0 OK and results of decision MATCH 09944 OK Match with the reference image This is how the display looks ST PNT01 GRAY SEARCH when the gray scale mode is 360 0 298 0 OK selected MATCH 09949 OK Example of the display of auxiliary results Auxiliary number type of auxiliary operation AUX00 MID PNT Coordinates for auxiliary 362 5 178 0 OK and results of decision ST PT00 259 0 178 0 ST PT01 466 0 178 0 Starting point number X
362. hmetical operation for calculation result specified output data at any value from 00 to 15 2 TYPE type Select the type of data being calculated A number of formula settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item Selection of The first line of the display The degree of match with the reference image M coordinates XY auxiliary Record 00 0 to 15 NOO 0 to 15 HX HY distance D and angle B FORMULA Numerical calculations NC ABS v TAN ATAN NO 0 to 15 the second line will not be displayed Constant C 00000000 0 the second line will not be displayed Note Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N 00 to 15 than that used for 1 CALC RESULT N 00 to 15 io ae LIMIT Set the upper and lower limits for decisions upper and lower limits B OUTPUT Set the output conditions for the results of calculations RUN A TEST Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test make a test run UPPER MENU Returns you to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 menu The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3 as follows 2 TYPE Number of formulas Degree of match M 00M to 15M Coordinates X Y 00X to 15X 00Y to 15Y Auxiliary HX HY OOHX to 15Hx 00HY to 15HY Distance D 00D to 15D Angle B to 15B The numbers rangi
363. hold adjustment function the IV S20 can cope with variations in light ing c c Note In order to use the THRESHOLD i ADJ threshold adjustment 5 function the monitor brightness gt functions must be selected to Threshold correction onvalug Fixed measure variations in lighting If you don t select the monitor brightness function a BINARY CORR LIGHT LVL NOT SET correcting binary value monitor illumination not selected error will occur Fails to convert the image due to a variation in lighting C CCD charge capture device A charge capture device CCD converts light into electric signals It consists of a photo electric converter to convert light and store it as an electric charge signal a scanner to read the stored electric charges and an output section to transmit the signals as a stream of data m CCD trigger The CCD trigger allows sampling a part of the CCD camera image at high speed When the sampled image changes the camera starts the shutter operation to capture a new image With this build in shutter operation an external sensor such as a photo sensor is not needed to trigger the shutter A window can be created to trigger the shutter operation The window can be set for each item on the production line so that adjustments to the position of an external sensor are no longer needed This feature reduces the down time needed to change items on production lines Item 1 Item 2
364. i PC Applicable models A series computer link units 1 AJ71C24 Sx AnA or AnN In the case of the AnA a computer link can be created if a CPU from the AnA series is used and the link module version is S6 or later 2 A1SJ71C24 A1S When the A1SJ71C24 R2 is used the station number is fixed at 00 because it does not have a station number switch 3 A0J72C2481 A0J2 1 Module setting D Example using an AJ71C24 Sx module Item Description Format 191 Transmission control procedure mode RS 232C Station No 00 to 31 Transmission speed kbit sec 19 2 9 6 Parity None odd even Data bit 7 8 bits ASCII Stop bit 1 2 bits Checksum Executed Transmission code Writing while running Possible Switch setting Ex To set as shown below Mode RS 232C Station No 00 Transmission speed 19 2 K bytes sec Parity Even Data bit 7 bits Stop bit 2 bits 8 rotary DIP switches STATION No STATION No MODE X 10 DIP switches SW11 to 13 SW14 to 24 OFF ON 14 23 Computer Link 2 Example using an A1SJ71UC24 R4 module Switch setting Ex To set as below Mode RS 422 Transmission speed 19 2 K bytes sec Parity Even Stop bit 2bits C N SW ON OFF STATION No 01 7 8 00N 3 6 9 03 X10 04 E X1 MODE 2 Using memory To allow the memory to be used by the IV S20 use a result write start addre
365. ily distinguished 3 Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode c The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T through to F freeze To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations the screen must be in the freeze image mode See section 7 2 Screen specifications for details about the through freeze mode v Continued on the following page 3 24 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 7 Operation for the gray scale search matching setting setting the starting point 00 1 Press the ESC key and all menus used for the gray scale searh matching setting will be displayed MEASURE WINDOW RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE REFERENCE IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP SEARCH AREA MOVE UP L 216 200 LO R 295 279 TOSS DETECTED COORD CNTR FREE 256 240 CONTRACT PIXELS 1 2 3 N 3 O A X DDETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH UPPER MENU f the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image settings is hindered press the ESC key Only item will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to REFERENCE IMAGE reference image with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Create an image window solid line for reference image Move the cursor to MOVE UP L or LO R with the left and right keys and press the SET key Then position the window When the p
366. ing Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 9 Setting the Conditions for Each Object Type Appendix Arphabetical index Table of contents Safety PrecautionsSafety Precautions Organization of this manual eire ls A H 1 1 to 7 1 1 Features 1 1 1 Features of the CCD camera 1 1 2 IV S20 features 1 2 1 2 Measurement program 1 3 1 Positional deviation absolute position measurement 1 3 2 Degree of match for shape and size 1 4 3 Distance and angle measurement 1 4 4 Lead inspection 1 5 5 Area measurement by binary conversion 1 5 6 Counting quantities by binary conversion 1 6 7 Object identification labeling by binary conversion 1 6 8 Existence inspection by point measurement 1 7 Chapter 2 Precautions for Use 2 1 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 to 49 3 1 Area measurement by binary conversion 3 2 3 2 Position measurement 3 8 3 3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 3 15 3 4 Distance measurement 3 22 3 5 Lead inspection 3 31 3 6 Existence inspection by point measurement 3 38 3 7 Position correction example of point measurement 3 44 3 8 Use of numeric calculations example of shape and size inspection 3 45 Chapter 4 System Configuration 4 1 to 7 4 1 Basic system configuration
367. ing IV S20 POWER iira Saar E a TE a z VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2 RS232C RS422 REMOTE 1 Input terminals INPUT to X4 Measurement start input output setting condition 1 5 gt External input Measurement start input output setting condition 2 5 gt Measurement start input Measurement start input output setting condition 1 5 gt External input Measurement start input output setting condition 2 5 gt Object type input 0 to 15 Object type Input output condition setting See Chapter 11 Measurement start input I F General purpose serial interface signal Measurement start input I F CCD trigger CCD sampling start General purpose serial interface signal or auto detect edge or level Measurement start input I F Parallel Measurement start input I F CCD trigger CCD sampling start Parallel interface 6 14 Installation Conditions and Method 2 Input terminals INPUT X5 and X6 Parallel selection input When X5 and X6 are used to External input reference image registration etc and specify a measurement number X5 measurement number specification lower bits Specify in item 5 PARALLEL INPUTX5 on the I O SETTINGS menu em m MeasurementO OFF OFF Emm ab Measurement 0 amp 1_ OFF External input image change etc and measurement Measurement OFF number specification upper bits Specify in item 6 PARALLEL INPUT
368. ing order 1 gt 3 Configuration example Camera 1 image capturing I O SETTINGS m 20 MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG Le Camera 2 image capturing Monitor 8 SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL H xd INPUT PARALLEL Remote keypad is ES p c1 IV S20 main housing Power supply 24V DC External trigger eJ Warning lamp photo sensor or proximity sensor External output YO to Y7 Type selection switch X1 to X4 The conditions for outputting the results to the output signals YO to Y7 are set by the PC function See Chapter 10 PC Function Time chart 10 ms or more lt gt Measurement start input X0 a 10 10ms e a Object type number input X1 to X4 Specified object type number Specified object type number BUSY output _ Measurement result is valid atthe end ofameasurement x EY PC calculation Halt PC operation during P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation during P P P P P condition C C C C measurement C C C C C C C C measurement C C C C C When the object type is E Parallel output is valid for PC control changed
369. ings for the IV S20 r Sharp 2 See item 1 below Mitsubishi 3 1 Setting items for the IV S20 Communication speed k bit sec OMRON 4 Seiting details 115 2 57 6 38 4 19 2 9 6 Data length bit 7 8 Parity None odd even Stop bit 1 2 Error check Checksum Station No Write address up to 512 bytes Sharp 00 to 37 Mitsubishi 00 to 31 OMRON 00 to 31 Sharp 09000 to 99776 Mitsubishi D000 to 09999 OMRON DM0000 to DM9999 14 16 Computer Link 2 Connection with a Sharp PC Applicable models 1 Control module JW 22CU can be used with ROM version 2 2 or later JW 70CUH 100CUH JW 32CUH H1 M1 JW 33CUH H1 H2 H3 2 Basic module JW 1324K 1342K 1424K 1442K 1624K 1642K 3 CPU board Z 311J 312J 4 Link module JW 21CM JW 10CM 5 Communication board Z 331J 332J 1 Module setting When a JW 22CU or a JW 70CUH 100CUH and Z 311J 312J are used Store the communication port conditions in system memory addresses 236 and 237 Bits D to D are stored in memory address 236 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 236 Do Transmission speed k bit sec 1 9 6 0 19 2 237 Station No 001 to 037 8 Enter the station No for the current station In the initial state addresses 236 and 237 are set to 000 When a JW 32CUH H1 M1 or a JW 33CUH H1 H2 H3 is used 1 Whe
370. inside the external equipment ZZZ LETS 9277727 Installation floor Grounded positive line Wraparound current f the positive terminal of the 24 VDC power supply must be grounded for facility construction reasons make sure to provide an independent power supply exclusively for use with the IV S20 which does not ground either the positive or negative terminals Installation Conditions and Method 4 Connecting to the input output terminals parallel I F 7 input terminals and 9 output terminals are available on the input output terminal block on the IV S20 main housing The input terminal block has INPUT terminals XO to X6 and C and the output terminal block has OUTPUT terminals YO to Y7 BUSY and Bl input output terminal block on the IV S20 main housing Input terminals INPUT XO X1 X2 X4 X5 X6 C 4 G S S 69 G9 G9 SHARP BLO 1 S G9 G9 G9 G9 YO Y1 Y2 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 BUSY C Output terminals OUTPUT INPUT I POWER x x2 x3 x4 5 x eo sv ov yo Yi Y2 y4 Y5 ye vr BUSY co l OUTPUT S ARP IV S20 main hous
371. ints 0 and 1 Output point for register 0 Detect point 0 for manual measurement Output point for register 1 Detect point 1 for manual measurement Run Menu Conditions and Settings 3 Select NO 0 CHG using the left and right keys When NO 0 CHG is selected you can move designated point 0 When you select NO 1 CHG you can move designated point 1 4 Move designated point 0 using the up down and left right keys When it reaches the desired position press SEL to confirm the position 5 Designate point 1 by repeating steps 2 to 4 above C Now the distance between designated points 0 and 1 designated manually above and X coordinate distance and Y coordinate distance can be displayed Coordinates of MANL MESR designate point 0 DTC CORDO 192 191 Coordinates of DTC CORD1 410 256 designate point 1 DIST BETWE 227 4 DIST BETW X 218 0 DIST BETW Y 000 0 8 Manually setting the object type On the MAIN OPS MENU the object type 00 to 15 can be changed manually using the remote key pad RUN MENU SETTINGS OUTPUT CAM1 2 182 CAMERA1 amp 2 CAM1 MD CAM2 MD CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO NO B PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO 8DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR QOBJ NO MANL MODE NO YES IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH
372. ints search one point on edge two points on edges one point serach one point on edge Degree of match inspection 16 Gray search Two points search yes no search yes no Binary matching One point matching Distance angle measurement 16 gray scale search edge detection 1 object identification Measure distance between two points from gray search center edge end point center of gravity functions three points horizontal vertical Auxiliary point Center gravity center of three points center of circle 2 point line intersection Lead inspection 4 8 leads with gray scale search and with edge line detection Area measurement 16 Area Binary Quantity count 4 Quantity max 3000 pieces total area conv ersion Measurement 1 2 3 Object identification 4 Total area quantity maximum 128 objects identified in each window area of each object center of gravity spindle angle fillet diameter circumuference length Point 1 256 points binary 128 points average density Image storage capacity Maximum two full screens or 200 reference images Start Internal CCD trigger using CCD camera measure ment signal External Trigger input parallel I F general purpose serial I F key pad trigger for manual measurment Output Parallel I F general purpose serial I F computer link Other functions D
373. inued on the following page EVALUATE CRITERIA criteria conditions 9 47 Degree of match inspection Continued from the previous page Se lect item 5 EVALUATE CRITERIA criteria conditions This is how the display looks when the GRAY IMG PRCC gray scale processing mode is selected To see how the display looks when the BINRY IMG PROC binary processing mode is selected GDMEAS WINDOW MDLO REF IMAGE MODELO SEARCH AREA MDLO DTECT COORD MDLO CONTR PIXEL MDLO MEAS WINDOW MDL1 REF IMAGE MODEL1 BSEARCH AREA MDL1 DTECT COORD MDL1 CONTR PIXEL MDL1 DETECT ACCURANCY UPPER MENU v Go to page 9 51 RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE MOVE MOVE UP L 216 200 LO R 295 279 lt CNTR FREE 256 240 UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP These entries are displayed t when SEARCH search yes 1 2 3 RECTANGLE X LINE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP MOVE UP L 224 512 LO R 287 512 CNTR FREE 256 240 lt 123 is selected for model 0 These entries are displayed when YES NO SEARCH yes search no or YES SEARCH yes search yes is selected for model 1 This is displayed when YES STANDARD HI PRC SEARCH yes search yes is selected for model 1 You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately u
374. ion No 0 13 22 Communication 8 Point measurement 1 In the binary mode Block Item No of os Evaluation Point Point No 0 to 7 White black information Evaluation Point Point No 8 to 15 White black information Evaluation Point Point No 16 to 23 White black information Evaluation Point Point No 248 to 255 White black information Note If a point number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brought forward Data example Only point No 1 to 8 Dea Contents Judgment ED FA OK NG Point No pg P7 P6 P5 P4 P2 Judgment OK OK OK NG OK OK NG OK Judg White 0 NG 1 OK ment black information White black 111 information Point No P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 White black White White White White White Black White Black 0 black 1 white 2 In the average light level mode No of digits Point No 0 to 7 Evaluation Point Point No 8 to 15 Evaluation Point Point No 16 to 23 Evaluation Point Point No 120 to 127 Evaluation Point Point No Average light level Point No Average light level Point No 127 Average light level Note If a point number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brought forward 13 23 Communication 9 Final numeric calculation result Decimal point digit C000 C001
375. ions such as the window position one by one 1 Adjusting method Differences in size position or brightness between two binary images before and after a camera is replaced or a camera is dislocated will be displayed as a white image When the adjustment is complete the image is displayed as black Display examples Image before a camera is replaced S When the camera conditions When the image position are completely identical has changed When the size has changed No white area Position deviation White area Size difference White area To make a fine adjustment the camera position can be adjusted by comparing the fillet diameters centers of gravity and average light levels before and after a camera is replaced or a camera is dislocated 2 Adjustment items and methods Differential image Center of gravity Average light level 12 5 Other Settings and Operations 3 Operating procedure On the ADJ CAM POSITION camera position adjustment menu store the data needed for later adjustment before a camera is replaced or dislocated and then adjust the camera position after the camera is replaced or dislocated Storing the data needed for adjustment before a camera is replaced or dislocated On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key On the SYSTEM SET UP menu move the cursor to item
376. ions in system memory addresses 234 236 and 237 234 Communication mode for the communication port 00 5 Set to 00 computer link 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 236 m Set bits Do to Ds and D7 in memory address 236 D 1 0 0 1 9 6 19 2 11111 38 4 237 Station No 001 to 037 8 Enter the station No for the current station In the initial state addresses 234 236 and 237 are set to 000 14 18 Computer Link 2 When the MMI port is used Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses 226 and 227 Set bits D to D in memory address 226 Use of the MMI port ensures a one to one connection between the IV S20 and the JW10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 226 0 7bits 1 8 bits al Transmission speed k bit sec 1 1 9 6 19 2 11111 38 4 Invalid 227 Station No 001 Set to 001 In the initial state addresses 226 and 227 are set to 000 4 When a JW 21CM or JW 10CM is used Set the switches SWO to SW4 and SW7 on the module as shown below Switch Setting Set value SWO Command mode 4 SW1 Stach No upper a 01 0 37 SW2 Station No lower bit g SW3 1 Invalid OFF SW3 2 4 wire system ON SW3 3 Invalid E parity OFF even parity ON OFF or OFF or ON Transmissio
377. is 9096 or more and that for a defective object is 70 or less then the threshold value for degree of match can be set to approx 85 This allows the evaluation acceptability to be made When the final evaluation result is OK YO is turned ON and a filled box llis displayed When the result is NG an empty box is displayed When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON YO is turned ON according to the condition set in step 9 for final evaluation output 8 14 Operation Examples Degree of match inspection 3 3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size Below is an example of an operation to determine the degree of match of the images 0 and 1 and the coordinates of the detection points with respect to the following object Image 0 Image 1 Detection point 0 Detection point 1 Object to be measured 1 Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU after initialize all conditions MAIN OPS MENU TYPEO0 FL C1ALLC2NO VX X MEAS ms MEASO CAM1 NO 6 000 yo 7 00000000 BUS YD MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 Move the cursor SET SCRN item and press the SET key c The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Y 2 Operation on the SYSTEM SETUP menu SYSTEM SETUP OPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 11 CONDITIONS
378. is changed the settings will be deleted 2 Press the ESC key The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU f the cursor was moved to OPERATIONS in step 1 the screen will automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU Y tinued on the following page 3 42 Operation Examples Point measurement Continued from the preceding page 10 Existence inspection Press the TRG BRT key and OK or NG will be displayed to indicate the result of the evaluation of the color white or black according to the setting in step 7 2 at each point from P000 to P006 TYPEOO0 FH C1ALLC2NO Display of inspection result Q K Final evaluation result 1 MEAS XXXXXXms lt Measuring time MEAS1 CAM1 POINT MEAS Presence absence of each point P ra P000 D OK P001 O OK P002 D OK P003 P004 O OK P006 O OK P008 P010 P012 P014 is shown the points P000 to P006 to indicate that the inspected object is white and the result is OK White display O OK NG evaluation result Black display e 1 The result of the final evaluation will be displayed as OK in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the points have been judged acceptable If a single point has been judged unacceptable NG will be displayed 2 When the final evaluation result is OK YO i
379. is is how the display looks when the DMEASURE SEARCH AREA MOVE UP L 216 200 LO R 295 279 WINDOW measurement DTECT COORD CNTR FREE 256 240 window is a RECTANGLE G CONTR PIXEL 1 2 8 rectangle X DETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HI PRC UPPER MENU You can switch between displaying all the headings together and displaying each one separately using the ESC key Men Setting details MEASURE WINDOW measurement window 2REFERENCE IMAGE Record a reference image and then set the search area If X LINE horizontal line or Y LINE vertical line are selected then SEARCH AREA the UP L upper left and LO R lower right choices in the screen above will be ST PNT starting point E PNT end point DETECTED COORD Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window detection coordinates If FREE is selected then the cursor may be positioned as desired Set the number of pixel contractions 5 CONTRACT PIXELS C See page 9 6 gray scale processing using shared settings pixel contraction When either a X LINE horizontal or a Y LINE vertical are selected in item D the choices here will be 1 or 2 DDETECT ACCURANCY Select the level of precision used for detection artifact processing C See page 9 6 gray scale processing using shared setting UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu Select the shape of the measurement window
380. ision 3 Simultaneous shutter triggering of two cameras Pixel detection Camera image Image search with i M at sub pixels conventional system When a trigger signal is input two cameras will start their shutter operation at the same time and transfer hat ot the captured image signals at the same time This can 1 reduce the total processing time for taking simulta neous pictures of moving objects Detection point Pixel Detection point 4 8 kinds of integrated measuring programs including measurement and inspection functions The IV S20 integrates the following measurement programs Positional deviation absolute position measurement matching level inspection distance and angle measurement lead inspection area measurement by binarization counting by binarization labeling measurements by binarization and point measurements The IV S20 can process any three measurements from 7 programs plus po sitional deviation and absolute position measurements with one scanned image 5 Binarization processing is effective in controlling variations in brightness Since the binarization process employs a brightness level monitoring function the threshold value will follow variations in brightness 6 Image pre processing and binary noise elimination function In order to process images precisely and reliably the binarization process uses edge emphasis edge extraction and leveling operations To eliminate noise binary increase decreas
381. isplay measuring time manual measurements including manual assignment of windows PC function crosshair cursor display change between Japanese and English run screen lock function image display change through freeze gain offset adjustment monitor brightness adjustment 16 1 Specifications 2 PC specifications Item Specifications Input relay 7 points for parallel input XO to X6 8 points for parallel output YO to Y7 1 point for BUSY 16 points YO to Y15 for general purpose serial I F or computer link 128 points CO to C127 11 points for special area C117 to C127 Timers 8 points Timer setting time 0 01 to 9 99 sec count down timer Output relay Auxiliary internal relays Counters 8 points Counter setting value 000 to 999 count down timer 3 Hardware specifications Item Specifications Image No of cameras 2 maximum input Applicable cameras Dedicated camera IV S20C1 IV S30C1 IV S30C2 Image Display standard EIA 525 lines 2 1 interlace output monitor output Connector RCA pin Inter Parallel I F Input 7 points 12 24 VDC approx 7 mA 24 VDC face Output 9 points 12 24 VDC max 20 mA Tr output with CS CRSA external Purp 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 k bits sec devices Computer link Can be connected to Sharp OMRON Mitsubishi computers Power consumption current 250mA 24 VDC 10 LED When the power is ON External tri
382. ition correction example of point measurement 3 44 3 8 Use of numeric caluculations example of shape and size inspection Preparation for operation 1 Connection Before turning ON the power connect the IV S20 main housing the camera monitor remote key pad and power supply 24 VDC Connect the camera to the camera 1 connector CAMERA 1 on the main housing See Chapter 6 Installation Conditions and Method for connecting procedures Camera 1 H 1 Monitor Remote setting key pad L E IV S20 main housing Y Power supply 24 VDC 2 Turning ON the power Turn ON the monitor and the 24 VDC power supply The monitor displays the MAIN OPS MENU It does not show any images Procedure for complete initialization In sections 3 1 to 3 6 the programs are discussed in their initial configuration Before starting any program perform the following total initialization operation 1 On the MAIN OPS MENU see the following page move the cursor to SET SCRN item using the left and right keys and press the SET key cPhe SYSTEM SETUP menu will appear SYSTEM SETUP DOPS MENU SETTING TO NEXT SUB MENU OBJECT TYPE COND TO NEXT SUB MENU CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU 4 ADJ CAM POSITION TO NEXT SUB MENU DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE
383. itional deviation measurement degree of match inspection distance angle measurement lead inspection area measurement by binary conversion object counting by binary conversion label measurement by binary conversion and point measurement The procedure for creating a ladder circuit for positional deviation measurement is given below A ladder circuit can be created the same way for other measurement just change the input contact point setting 1 Operation to invoke the OUTPUT CONDITIONS menu for positional deviation measurement On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND condition of object type and press the SET key gt On the OBJECT TYPE COND menu move the cursor to item MEAS 0 CAMERAt or item 6 MEAS 0 CAMERA2 and press the SET key COPY TYPE00 MEASO SELECT MEAS TYPE INITIALIZATION MEAS PROG COND EVALUATION COND amp NUMERIC CALC COND OUTPUT CONDITIONS UPPER MENU Displa yed when the object type 00 NO MEAS POSITION DEVIATE has been specified EXEC TYPE00 CMRI1DIFF MESURE 1 EXEC TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU err a press the SET key OUTPUT CONDITIONS DPAGE NO 31 SET POSITION INPUT SIGNAL LOGICAL SYMBOL 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL
384. ize Binary processing MEE 9 51 Gray scale processing iivit ie ded Lene iaaa a tienen dde e v Dre Dx e uec 9 48 Distance and angle measurement gray scale 9 60 Lead 9 75 Positional deviation measurement eeesesiees sees eiie nennen rennen einen 9 37 Deviation positional deviation measurement sssssssseseeeene enne nnns 9 41 Blei EP 5 3 7 9 Direction of lead length measurement ssssssssseeeeeeee eee nennen enne nnns 9 76 BINAE EET 12 1 Distance Distance and angle measurement ssssssssssssseseseee eene enne nennen ennemi nnns 9 65 Lead INSPOCHION ELE 9 78 Distance and angle measurement Measurement data block Communication general purpose Serial I F seen 13 18 aee rette a bdo hate Fan da DR 14 8 Operation ea M e 2 5 2 ote veta tee dic M OR E eR AER ae teenies 3 22 Ain D xk oA DE E ce Doo eer ed on 1 4 9 57 Setting SEQUENCE 9 58 Setting details EET 9 59 Distance between X coordinates distance condition 9 65 Distance between X coordinates manual measurement sese 8 8 Distance between Y coordinate
385. ject types menu OBJECT TYPE COND set item OBJECT TYPE NO object type number to 01 and select item 4 MEAS 0 CAMERA 1 TYPEO0 MEASO SELECT MEAS TYPE NO MEAS POSITION DEVIATE COPY EXEC TYPE00 CMR1POS DEVIATION INITIALIZATION EXEC MEAS PROG COND NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU BUPPER MENU 1 Select item S INITIALIZATION using the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 When the SET key is pressed the initialization will begin Operation procedure for measurement programs 1 to 3 This is an example of the initialization of object type 02 measurement 1 On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCHN and press the SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET key c On the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for object type menu set item 1 OBJECT TYPE NO to 02 and select MEASUREMENT 1 TYPEOO MEAS1 DMEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ POINT MEAS i COMPARE IMAGES NO YES CAM1 SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2 COPY EXEC lt TYPE00 MEAS1 NO INITIALIZATION EXEC amp MEAS PROG COND TO NEXT SUB MENU EVALUATION COND TO NEXT SUB MENU NUMERIC CALC COND TO NEXT SUB MENU OUTPUT CONDITI
386. k White Black window not highlighted A Trigger Trigger BUSY output 3t Se 1 i Measurement result is valid at the end of a measurement x PC calculation P PIP P Halt PC operation PIP PI P P P P P P Halt PC operation P C C C C C Ov Ov P condition C during measurement during measurement C When the object type is changed all Y lt Parallel output is valid for PC control after output and auxiliary relays turn OFF the measurement result is determined i Parallel output s z YO to Y7 K Result output Result output 11 13 Setting the Input Output Conditions Time chart when auto mode level is selected for as the CCD sampling start Restarts CCD sampling automatically after measurement is completed CCD trigger cycle Object type X fe Specified object type number alge Black White Black White Black not highlighted A A n Trigger Trigger Trigger BUSY output Measurement result i valid at the end of x a measurement x CIC PC calculation p al Halt PC operation Halt PC operation P PIP P Halt PC operation E P condition t during measurement C during measurement C C C
387. ken by camera 1 will be displayed fthe image is so bright that the menu is hard to see press the TRG BRT key to reduce the brightness of the image Then the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from H to L 2 Adjust the focus and aperture iris of the camera lens see page 5 1 so that the object to be measured is clear and easily distinguished 3 Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode C The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T through to F freeze To store an image for the following gray scale search matching setting operations the screen must be in the freeze image mode See section 7 2 Screen specifications for details about the through freeze mode zi Operation for gray scale search matching setting Y 1 Press the ESC key and all menus to be used for gray scale search matching setting will be displayed DMES WINDOW MDLO RECTANGLE XLINE YLINE QJQREFIMAGE MDLO MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP 2 SEARCH AREA MDLO MOVE UP L 216 200 LO R 295 279 Wc 4 DTECT COORD MDLO CNTR FREE 256 240 4 CONTR PIXEL MDLO 1 2 3 oN DETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH UPPER MENU If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image setting is hindered press the ESC key Only item will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to QREF IMAGE reference image and press the SET key
388. l Command 7 0 Response T 7 10 RC RC L D X coordinate 000 to 511 for detect point 0 2 gt Y coordinate 000 to 479 for detect point 0 8 gt X coordinate 000 to 511 for detect point 1 Manually 4 Y coordinate 000 to 479 for detect point 1 measured points E Command Q B s TE TE Mr D X coordinate 000 to 511 for detect point 0 2 Y coordinate 000 to 479 for detect point 0 8 gt X coordinate 000 to 511 for detect point 1 4 gt Y coordinate 000 to 479 for detect point 1 E Response Assignment The coordinates for detect points 0 and 1 correspond to the detect coordinates 0 and 1 used in manual measurements gt See page 8 8 13 14 Communication 13 5 Measurement data blocks 1 Number of blocks The measurement functions vary in the number of measurement data blocks they use Measurement function Positional deviation absolute position measurement Size and shape comparison Distance angle measurement Lead inspection Area measurement by binary conversion Counting quantities by binary conversion Object identification labeling by binary conversion 0 1 10 to 13 20 to 23 30 to 33 40 to 43 60 to 77 Existance detection by point measuremet Binary conversion 0 Average light level 0 1
389. l input X5 Exceeded the number of reference images registered Image not captured CCD trigger The reference images has not been set up yet The reference image edge is not registered yet CCD trigger disabled through image The object type cannot be changed No corresponding block run errors The output camera cannot be changed 15 4 Check the abnormal setting Troubleshooting 3 Maintenance Check the equipment for the following items 1 Operation check Change the measurement number on the MAIN OPS MENU and change the monitor screen to the freeze or through mode Then make sure that the image is normally displayed 2 Checks Check the illumination from the lighting equipment Make sure that the monitor screen is in focus and that the aperture setting is proper Check the cable insulation for breaks and make sure that the cable connectors are not loose Carefully wipe dust off the lens with a soft dry cloth If dust has landed on the CCD surfaces of this camera wipe them with a clean cotton swab soaked in isopropyl alcohol Move the cotton swab lightly and slowly in one direction Change cotton swabs frequently Do not clean more than one CCD surface with one cotton swab Procedure for checking after cleaning 1 Mount the lens mirror tube on this camera 2 Close the lens iris all the way 3 Point the lens toward the light source and c
390. l parallel The CCD trigger is enabled after a measurement execution command is entered Setting order 1 2 gt Configuration example I O SETTINGS Camera 1 image capturing CCD trigger MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG n START CCD SAMPLE AUTO EDGE LEVL PARALEL SERIAL T 2 image capturing P 0 51 de SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU Personal computer Sampling start object type change Data Settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger IV S20 main housing Power supply 24 VDC 4 See pages 13 9 and 13 10 for details about the measurement execution commands codes 18 19 1A and 1B When one of the measurement execution commands codes 18 19 1A and 1B normally received during sampling the sampling will stop Note When the settings listed in section 11 3 CCD trigger have not been made a CCD TRIGGER NOT SET error 34 will occur Time chart Mesurement Mesurement Mesurement Mesurement Serial trigger Result trigger Result trigger trigger command 1 JL output command output Y command command
391. lculations No monitor Needed to create a ladder program Added output of final evaluation result C112 and continuous trigger relay C113 Square root absolute value TAN and ATAN calculation functions are added Added final numerical calculation function Only numerical calculation for each measurement General purpose serial input Computer link Load and save displayed image Save only Communication function between another IV module for creating a clone Assignable output block as well as block 0 Not available Block 0 only To the next page Appendix 5 Hem Ver 2 0 Ver 1 6 or earlier Added calculation functions for comparison between registered images and captured images balance No calculation functions for comparison absolute value balance value Added calculation function for comparison between camera 1 image and camera 2 image balance absolute No calculation functions for comparison value balance value Windows can be set in units of one pixel in units of 4 In units of 8 pixels in units of 32 pixels pixles for a gray search for object identification Introduced pop up menus for screen display Others Can display binary images Only dark and bright image Can display programmable OK NG No OK NG display Displays COMMUNICATING indicates that the IV S20 i icati No displ is currently communicating o display Displays input terminals No
392. le corrected image will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU A 0 angle corrected image will not be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item 7 SHOW CORRECT IMG with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to YES or NO with the left and right keys and press the SET key Display examples Reference image Measured image m Position of 2 17 reference image When the 0 angle correction image display mode has been set to YES When the 0 angle correction image display mode has been set to NO See Positional correction page 9 20 for details about 0 angle correction 8 7 Run Menu Conditions and Settings 7 Crosshair cursor display A crosshair cursor can be displayed at any point on the MAIN OPS MENU item and used to manually position a workpiece On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key ex RUN MENU SETTINGS MONITOR OUTPUT CAM1 2 CAM1 amp 2 zu SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO amp DISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR OBJ NO MANL MODE YES IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH UPPER MENU MAIN OPS MENU 255 240 A crosshair cursor can be displayed at any p
393. lect any number from 0 to 15 registration number AREA Set the range for the area that will produce an OK evaluation MAKE TEST RUN Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation condition display the test results PRIOR MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Check your selection by testing the upper and lower limits for evaluations that you have set This can be done using item 3 MAKE A TEST RUN For more information about evaluation conditions see section 9 2 3 Evaluation condition Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu and select item NUMERIC CALC COND numerical calculation conditions v Continued on the following page 9 86 Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the previous page NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 MEAS BIN AREA CALC RESULT 00 0 15 OBJECT TYPE NO T AREA A NUM CALCINC CNST C FORMULA REG 00 0 15 N00 0 15 gt DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 i RUNATEST SET KEY UPPER MENU Noo A 00 YO 00009000 0 00010000 0 00009500 0 OK NO1 N02 i Numerical calculation Setting details CDCALC RESULT See the recording and display the results from arithmetical operation for calculation result specified output data at any value from 00 to 15 QQOBJECT TYPE Select the type of data being calculated A nu
394. lel output based on the output conditions are exactly the same as those used for item 1 individual numerical calculations for each measuring programs On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCHN and press the SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key c On the OBJECT TYPE COND menu move the cursor to 9FINAL CALC RESULT final numeric calculation and press SET key NUMERIC CALC TYPEO00 DCALC RESULT 0 0 15 OBJECT TYPE NO INDV MEAS RSLT N FINAL RESULT AN NUM CALC NC CNST C FORMULA MEASO 0 3 CMR1 1 2 NOO 0 15 DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 5 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 Example RUNATEST SETKEY Results of the calculations for measurement 0 camera PUPPER MENU ii NOO Results of the Noo N 01300 02300 33014 Y1 calculations for 00009800 0 00010000 0 00009800 0 OK measurement 0 camera 2 N01 N00 Results of the C EU calculations for N02 measurement 3 NO1 NOS L 22222222222l222222222222222222022222222222 The display areas on the screen are in the same places as those for item 1 individual numerical calculations for each measuring program Numerical calculation Setting details The location where the rule 4 calculation result
395. locks The measurement functions vary in the number of measurement data blocks they use Measurement function Boas Positional deviation absolute position measurement Size and shape comparison Distance angle measurement Lead inspection Area measurement by binary conversion Counting quantities by binary conversion Object identification labeling by binary conversion Existance detection by point measuremet 0 1 10 to 13 20 to 23 30 to 33 40 to 43 60 to 77 Binary conversion 0 Average light level 0 1 2 Contents of the measurement result block for each measurement function 1 Positional deviation absolute position measurement No of Decimal point Block Item Sign digits digit 1st point None center coordinates None Registration 2nd point None center coordinates None Angular deviation Provided Registration The registration No 1 to 7 contain the same data as the No 0 to 7 registration No 0 No 0 When a sign is provided if the highest order bit of the data is on 1 a minus sign is used and if the bit is off 0 a pulus sign is used The value decimal is expressed two s comple ment notation A two s complement number is obtained by inverting the Os and 1s in a binary number and adding 1 Note If a registration number has not been used yet the data for the next registered number will be brou
396. lt Provided Provided Evaluation None None Result Provided Provided Result Provided Provided Results of numerical calculations measurement 0 camera 2 Results of numerical calculations measurement 1 NOO to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical calculations measurement 2 NOO to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical calculations measurement 3 NOO to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of the final numerical calculations ANOO to AN15 contain the same data as those in the NOO to N15 of item measurement camera 1 Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 NG 1 OK or 2 no evaluation Note Blank items are omitted and the remaining lines are moved up 13 25 Chapter 14 Computer Link A programmable controller hereafter referred to as a PC can be connected to the IV S20 so that the computer link can be used to have the IV S20 execute measurements 14 1 Compatible models The IV S20 is applicable with the computer links for the following models of Sharp Mitsubishi and OMRON Sharp J board Host communication port in models Z 31 1J 812J JW10 Communication port and MMI port in models 1424 1442 1624
397. lt is valid at the X end of a measurement PC calculation operation P P P P P P P P P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P condition C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C during measurement When the object type is changed Parallel output is valid for PC control after all Y output and auxiliary relays the measurement result is determined turn OFF i OU Y 1 Parallel output Me d Result output di Result output YO to Y7 11 9 Setting the Input Output Conditions When a Sharp PC is used a write enable command EWR is transmitted from the IV S20 to the PC in the following cases When the power is applied to the IV S20 When a write mode nonconformity error code 104 occurs after a result write command WRG is transmitted when the power is disconnected from the PC When the output method is changed from the serial interface to the computer link 7 Measurement start input CCD trigger start sampling parallel object type change parallel result output general purpose serial parallel When the start sampling input X0 is turned ON the CCD trigger is enabled Sampling starts Setting order 1 2 3 9 9 Configuration example VO SETTINGS Camera 1 ima
398. lt to see Status display The brightness level or L is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Level The image captured by the camera is displayed at the original brightness of the image L The image captured by the camera is displayed at half the brightness of the original Examples of brightness displays At H level At L level O0 D 15 EXE CPYCe TVPEDD EXEC INIT c xig slt Wa EXT r a IR WT o HERT PERU Setting and Operating Outlines CD Direction keys 7 3 Remote key pad specifications U up down Direction keys up down left and right Set select key SET Image change key SEL E Measurement start brightness select key TRG BRT 2 Set select key SET 3 Cancel key ESC Function Selecting an item ona menu screen Setting a window Description Select an item with the up down left and right keys Set each coordinate Setting a value Determine a highlighted item Determine the setting value Select a digit or an item with the left and right keys and then specify a value with the up and down keys Specify a value with the up down right and left keys Cancel key ESC Image change key SEL Returning a setting to its original state before be ing changed Ret
399. lts Measuring time Measurement number camera number and measurement program title Registration number Area in pixels and evaluation results By moving the cursor to REG CHNG change registration and pressing the up key you can see the measurement results for different registration numbers and numerical calculations This is done by scrolling through them in this order registration numbers 00 0 15 numerical calculation result 00 0 N15 and then returns to registration numbers The measurements screen also has this feature Unregistered numbers will be skipped When there are no recorded numbers other than those currently on display or if no measurement has actually been carried out then it will not be possible to switch back and forth between data 9 89 Counting quantities by binary convension 9 8 Counting quantities by binary conversion Checks the number of objects max 3000 pcs when there is more than one object Purpose in an image Measurement of the object s position is optional When the specified pixel field has been converted to a binary image the white areas are measured or identified as separate objects and counted Application Counting the number of food products or parts Measurement result Objects Example Number of objects total area Inspection sequence Capture an image gt Convert itto a binary image gt Measure
400. mask window has been removed Mask window Return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu and select item 2 AUX CONDITIONS auxiliary condition v Continued on the next page 9 63 Distance and angle measurement Continued from pages 9 60 9 61 and 9 63 GRAY amp EDGE GRAV AUX CONDITIONS TYPEO00 MEAS 1 DST amp ANGL MEAS DAUX NO 00 0 15 AUX TYPE NO MID PNT PERIMETR C GRAV LEG INTRSCT PT i read POINTNO ST PNTOO AUXNO anon POINTNO 2 ST PNTOO AUXNO lt established for auxiliary oints may also be used as SPOINTNO 3 ST PNTOO AUXNO u A NEA i m rement conditions UPPER MENU L easurement conditions Items 3 and will be displayed unless NO is selected in item If either PERIMETR center of circle or C GRAV center of gravity is selected item 2 then item will be displayed Auxiliary conditions Setting details DAUX NO auxiliary number Set this to any number from 0 to 15 Select from NO none MID PNT set 2 points PERIMETR set 3 points C GRAV set 3 points LEG set 2 points or INTRSCT PT auxiliary type set 2 points POINT NO 1 If the starting point number either the starting point number or the POINT NO2 label number is entered for points 1 to 3 points 1 and 2 when MID PNT LEG or INTRSCT PT is selected then the type of auxiliary 5 P
401. mber of formula settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item 2 Total area A Record 00 0 to 15 NOO 0 to 15 FORMULA ABS ATAN NO 0 to 15 the 2 Numetical calculations INE second line will not be displayed 00000000 0 the second line will not Constant C be displayed Note Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N 00 to 15 than that used for 1 CALC RESULT N 00 to 15 UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT Set the upper and lower limits for decisions 5 OUTPUT Set the evaluation output for the results of the calculations RUN A TEST Pressing the SET key will record the settings details as well as run a test make a test run UPPER MENU Returns you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3 as follows KIND type Number of formulas Total area A 00A to 15A Numerical calculation NC ABS TAN ATAN 00 to 15 Constant C 99999999 9 to 499999999 9 The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on numerical calculations see section 9 2 4 Numerical calculations Note You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS v Continued on the following page
402. ment programs which are affected by these settings Degee of match inspection for shape and size binary conversion page 9 51 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity page 9 62 Area measurement by binary conversion page 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion page 9 93 Identifying object by binary conversion page 9 101 Shared settings 8 Edge detection The edge refers to the boundaries between the brighter white and darker black parts in an image The edge detection function is used to detect this boundary by processing the image An example of detecting a point using the edge detection function and user specified criteria Horizontal transition point Vertical transition point from from light to dark moving light to dark moving from top from left to right to bottom Edge detection _ Edge zu point Light Edge detection point A we 1 pm EAS L Detection area 66 Brightness Difference B level in level ee eee ar eS z Detection direction B E TRI A Direction Horizontal transition point Vertical transition point from from light to dark moving light to dark moving from from right to left bottom to top Edge Flat A Light width width REA Detection area 7 2 NN 4 A B 55 Brightness Difference Edge detection Mee level meyer p ensest point 7 Bev 25 Detection direction Dark
403. menu 2 UPPER MENU Setting details D CHG PAGE Point numbers 2 to 9 can be displayed as groups of 8 objects using page change the up and down keys Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions display the test results Set the range of the average light level for all point numbers from 0 to 127 The numbers of the selected point will flash No light level is displayed for unregistered point numbers STORE ALL The light level is collectively averaged for all of the point numbers that E COND have been registered 1 MAKE A Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions display the test TEST RUN results 2 UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Set the measurement value range of the average light level that will produce a result of OK in item 17 MAKE A TEST RUN Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS v Continued on the following page 9 112 Existence inspection by point measurement From page 9 111 When BIN CONV binary was selected for the processing mode Continued from the previous page When AV LIGHT LEVEL average light level is selected for the processing mode OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPEO0 MEAS 1 POINT MEAS D PAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE INPUT SIGNAL POINT NO 000 0 255 AUXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICAL SYMBOL 2H L DEL 5 OUTPUT SI
404. menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE COND OBJECTTYPENO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPEO0 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 CAMERA1 TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 POS ADJ CAMERA1 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY OMEAS 0 CAMERA2 TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 ADJ REG 0 1 PNTSXY BSELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 QMEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU YMEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 5 SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS ONNG NO YES UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to item FINAL OUTPUT COND with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The RESULTS OUTPUT menu will be displayed 2 After moving the cursor to item 1 PAGE NO register number with the up and down keys and pressing the SET key specify page number 0 with the up and down keys set the REG register item to YES with the left and right keys and press the SET key gt Items to 5 will be displayed RESULTS OUTPUT TYPEO0 PAGE NO 0 7 REG NO YES 2 SET POSITION MOVE INPUT SIGNAL AUXRLY 112 0 127 EXT INP X0 0 6 1 TMR TMO 0 7 CNT CNO 0 7 AN
405. mera lens and IV S30C1 camera are connected to the IV S20HC3 camera conversion cable Unit mm 37 28 5 to 34 3 37 43 3000 52 2 gen ie ASR D S RISE i cL UP 10 gt o 30 is 2 tapped holes 2 tapped holes lt 2 M3 tapped holes eDi nal ol Attach the camera angle bracket to one of the 25 20 5 tapped holes 20 mm mounting pitch 3 L 30 places External dimensions of camera angle bracket 4 slotted holes wide e 49 Unit mm for securing on the camera body n gt A 20 25 A U 39 ge spt 05 5 2 slotted holes 3 2 mm wide ee for attachment to the mounting surface 2
406. merical calculations v Continued on the following page 9 53 Degree of match inspection From the previous page NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 DEG OF MATCH DCALC RESULT N00 0 15 OBJECT TYPE NO MATCH CORD X Y LEVL G NUM CALC NC CNST C FORMULA REG 00 0 15 MDLO 0 1 NOO 0 15 lt DEL END UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 amp RUNATEST SET KEY UPPER MENU Noo M YO 00009800 0 00010000 0 00009800 0 OK NO1 N02 Numerical calculation Setting details CDCALC RESULT Set the specified output data for recording and displaying the results of calculation result arithmetical operation to any value from 00 to 15 OBJECT TYPE type Select the type of data being calculated A number of formula settings are used The first line will change according to the selection made in item Selection of The first line of the display Coordinates XY the degree of match with the reference image M and the Record 0040 0 19 mode tod FORMULA level of light G 010 15 ABS TAN NOO 0 to 15 Numerical calculations NC the second line will not be displayed 00000000 0 the second line will not Constant C be displayed Note Please use a smaller number for the number of formulas at N 00 to 15 than that used for 1 CALC RESULT N 00
407. mpleted Yes Transmitting from flash memory to RAM Measurement conditions for each object type Processing after the power is turned ON Obtaining images capturing specific lines of an image Setting the MAIN OPS MENU in the locked state To the next page 7 10 Setting and Operating Outlines From the preceding page Message display Display of results Pattern display When they have been set to YES Crosshair cursor display System Display YES Communication processing Yes Communication processing le Receiving a measurement Parallel general purpose serial CCD start input signal trigger OFF Measurement start Main loop processing PC calculation 702 See item 2 Ls a ee Es Vv Measurement result output processing Parallel general purpose serial No Process key strokes Processing on sub menu See page 7 4 to 7 7 for the menu configuration 7 11 Setting and Operating Outlines 2 Operation flow after a measurement start input signal is given Start measurement start input ON Y PC calculation Parallel output YO to Y15 BUSY ON External interface inhibit key communications parallel Measurement timer start Reading the object type No Image capturing camera 1 2 m
408. n the Japanese The menu display details in the English display mode have totally English display changed modes Bl Newly added functions on software version 2 01 compared with version 2 0 litm Additional function Reference page Latch the measurement results on the operation Description of Operation screen screen after resetting the power paragraph 9 on page 7 2 to 7 3 When the measurement start input is general purpose Object type serial input the object type can be changed using the change type number specification instruction processing code 55 11 7 and 13 1 Appendix 4 Bl Detalis about the improved functions in software version 2 0 compared with version 1 6 Item Ver 2 0 Ver 1 6 or earlier Gray search Edge detection High speed Improved processing speed from 55ms in version 1 6 to 37ms in version 2 0 when the search area is 256 x 256 a 64 x 64 model is used and the reduction ratio is 3 Processing speed improved approximately 60 for the large model size Gray search line can be used Register a reference image from external equipment Detection coordinates can be set at any position Rectangles only Not available Limited to the center of the reference image Gray search precision level can be set independently for each reference image Lines and rectangles can both be detected Could only be set for each emasurement Rectangles only Center
409. n among the camera installation distance the field of view and the focal length Lens focal length f 4 2mm Lens focal length f 8mm Lens focal length f 16mm Lens focal length f 25mm View mm Focal length Hori zontal distance mm installation 3 Focal length 3 Resolution 3 Focal length 5 Resolution Vertical 5 0 5 3 42 9 6 4 6 8 38 9 13 3 we ed asf 519 55 4 8 5 1082 275 294 181 574 163 17 4 30 4 of 1285 197 1 al 2878 60 8 64 9 8 5 126 7 320 34 1 17 8 66 6 19 2 20 5 29 6 400 167 4 178 6 8 2 3487 85 2 0 9 16 7 177 6 53 3 56 8 26 7 111 0 296 7 7788 189 61 202 2 8 1 395 0 96 3 102 8 16 6 200 7 604 644 26 5 125 8 107 4 114 6 129 6 138 3 151 8 162 0 174 0 185 7 al 8047 42 5717 389 4 415 4 8 1 811 3 196 2 209 3 16 3 408 9 124 3 132 6 25 7 259 0 894 9 42 1747 9 433 8 462 7 8 1 903 8 218 4 233 0 16 3 455 1 138 5 147 8 25 6 288 6 1100 923 5 985 1 42 1924 1 478 2 510 1 8 1 996 3 240 6 256 7 16 21 501 4 152 7 162 9 25 6 318 2 1200 1008 1 1075 4 4 2 2100 3 522 6 262 8 280 4 1300 1092 7 1165 6 4 2 2276 5 567 0 285 0 304 1 1400 1177 2 1255 8 4 2 2452 7 611 4 307 2 327 7 195 4 208 4 1500 1261 8 1346 0 4 2 2628 9 655 8 329 4 351 4 209 6 223 6 4 1436 2 42 2805 1 700 2 746 9 8 0 14
410. n communication port 1 PG COMM port is used Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses 234 and 235 Set bits D to D in memory address 234 Only an RS 422 cable can be connected to the PG COMM1 port 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 234 Parity None Applicable only to the JW 32CUH1 M1 and JW 33CUH1 H2 H3 235 Station No 001 to 037 8 Enter the station No for the current station In the initial state addresses 234 and 235 are set to 000 14 17 Computer Link 2 When communication port 2 PG COMM2 port is used Store the communication conditions in system memory addresses 222 236 and 237 Either RS 232 or RS 422 cable can be connected to the PG COMN2 port 222 Communication method for the PG COMM2 port 00 Set to 005 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 236 Set bits Do to Ds in memory address 236 Do Transmission speed k bit sec 0 0 None 0 1 Odd 1 0 Even Applicable only to the JW 32CUH1 M1 and JW 33CUH1 H2 H3 237 Station No 001 to 037 Enter the station No for the current station In the initial state addresses 222 236 and 237 are set to 000 When a JW 1324K 1342K 1424K 1442K 1624K 1642K is used 1 When the communication port is used Store the communication condit
411. n example of light to dark averaging DETECT MODE BRT DRK while scanning horizontally DETECT DIR HORI gt with artifact processing enabled PRC PROJECT YES Duration of dark area in the line scan Average light vertical Edge detection point with artifact processing enabled When artifact processing is disabled in the above example the edge detection point changes Edge detection point with artifact processing off Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Positional deviation measurement edge detection page 9 39 Distance and angle measurement edge detection page 9 61 Lead inspection edge detection page 9 76 Shared settings 3 Evaluation conditions The setting details and procedures for setting the evaluation conditions are the same for all measurement programs In this section we explain the use of the EVALUATION COND evaluation conditions menu when counting quantities by binary conversion Evaluation conditions EVALUATION COND menu for counting quantities by binary conversion Using the up and down keys you can set the output to NO no output YO EVALUATION COND TYPEO00 MEAS 1 CNT BIN OBJ to 7 output on these relays or C000 REGST NO 0 0 3 TEST RESULT OUT to C127 output on these secondary 9 NUMBER 00000 59999 00004 OK relays in the output area of the 5 d menu 9 TOTAL AREA 000000224560 002000 OK Noe If the test
412. n not be set REGST NO First select the REGST NO registration number from 0 to 15 then chose registration number YES or NO depending on whether you wish to record that selection MODE Select either GRAY IMG PROC gray scale processing or BINRY IMG PROC binary processing When the GRAY IMG PROC gray scale processing mode has been selected then NO SEARCH or SEARCH search must be selected for the MODEL 0 POSITION positioning of model 0 When the GRAY IMG PROC gray scale processing mode has been MODEL 1 MEAS OBJ selected then NO YES NO SEARCH or YES SEARCH existance non object to be measured existance of an object search do not search must be selected for the MODEL 1 MEAS OBJ object to be measured in model 1 5 EVALUATE CRITERIA Criteria conditions are set in the next menu criteria condition UPPER MENU This will return you to TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 Settings sequence This is the sequence for gray scale processing CDREGST NO Q MODE MODELO POSITION registration number set for gray scale processing positioning of model 0 MODEL 1 MEAS OBJ object to be measured G EVALUATE CRITERIA criteria conditions This is the sequence for binary processing CDREGST NO registration number MODE set for binary processing Y Cont
413. n speed bit sec or 1 0 or 1 With a termination resistance ON OFF 5 When a Z 331J 332J is used Set the switches SWO SW4 and SW7 on the board as shown below Switch Setting Set value SWO Computer link 4 Swi Station No upper bit 011037 SW2 Station No lower bit e SW3 1 Invalid OFF SW3 2 Only the 2 wire system can be used OFF SW3 3 Invalid OFF SW3 4 Odd parity OFF even parity ON OFF or ON Transmission speed k bit sec owe 19 2 0 9 6 1 ver With a termination resistance 2 Using memory To allow the memory to be used by the IV S20 enter a result write start address in the following range Range address 09000 to 99776 14 19 Computer Link 3 Connections QD When a JW 22CU or JW 70CUH 100CUH is used 1 Communication through the RS 232C port JW 22CU Communication connector on JW 70CUH 1 00CUH the IV S20 RS232C RS422 Communication port 15 mor less RS 232C 2 Communication through the RS 422 port 4 wire system jw _oocu Communication connector on JW 70CUH 1 00CUH the IV S20 RS232C RS422 Communication port 4 7 8 9 Connector shield andis twisted pair cable 1 km or less RS 422 A v 2 When a JW 32CUH H1 M1 or JW 33CUH H1 H2 H3 is used 1 Communication through th
414. n the longitudinal and horizontal directions with the center of gravity treated as the base 511 479 Fillet width 9 i 5 z Fillet width horizontal ic Peripheral The number of pixels in the boundary line of an object Inclination V2 times v Continued on the following page 9 102 Object identification labeling by binary conversion Continued from the previous page Select item 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation condition on the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 LABEL BIN OBJ DREGST NO 0 0 3 TEST RESULT OUT NUMBER 000 128 006 OK NO These displays can be set using STOTALAREA 000000 245760 008276 the up and down keys The hoi NO Y 7 t LABEL NUM 000 0 005 choices are NO YO to 7 C000 to C127 5 OBJ AREA 000000 245760 0 OK NO GRAVITY 206 0 303 0 After performing a MAKE A TEST AXIS ANGL 38 0 RUN at item 6 the number of FILLT DIA X 042 Y 030 objects identified will be displayed PERIMETER 00138 8 in item A TEST RUN SET KEY UPPER MENU Items 2 to will be displayed if REGST NO registration number is set to YES on the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu Evaluation conditions Setting details REGST NO registration number NUMBER Set the range for the number of objects that will produce an number of objects OK
415. nal deviation measurement gray scale search detection degree of match inspection for shape and size distance and angle measurement gray scale search lead inspection criteria search Dotted lines How to set horizontal lines The following items on the settings menu can be used to define lines move starting point ending point Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line 1 Move Up key Down key Left key Right key t V 2 Specifying the starting point 3 Specifying the ending point Left key Right key Left key Right key q The up and down keys function the The up and down keys function the same as in the move item same as in the move item 9 How to set vertical lines 1 Move Up key Down key Left key Right key lt gt t V 2 Specifying the starting point 3 Specifying the ending point Up key Down key Up key Down key The left and right keys function the The left and right keys function the same as in the move item same as in the move item Shared settings 3 Circle window Line type Image processing used Measurement programs Distance and angle measurement center of gravity area measurement by binary conversion counting quantities by binary conversion identifying objects by binary conversion Solid lines Window containing a binary image Distance and angle measu
416. nce angle measurement center of gravity 05 lead inspection 06 4 area measurement after binary conversion 07 object counting after binary conversion 08 label measurement after binary conversion 094 existence detection with a point measurement 5 Output data from measurements 0 to 3 block 0 The data in block 0 is output for measurement data of measurement number 0 to 3 Max 500 bytes See pages 14 5 7 to 11 13 for details about the measurement data of block 0 The data block 0 from any unselected measurement number will not be output Its space will be filled by the next item 6 Assigned block data When a measurement number camera No or block number is specified the IV S20 will output its measurement data For details about how to specify measurement see pages 11 19 to 11 20 No data is output if block 0 00 is specified For details about the measurement data block see pages 14 5 to 14 15 The top address where the specified block of data is written will be an address made by adding 512 bytes to the top address for wiring results Sharp Mitsubishi OMRON Uomooool Termination code D0000 DM0000 H Appended information Result write top address Output data from measurement 3 block 0 Result write top E block data address 4 512 bytes D0256 L IDM0256 14 4 Computer Link E Measurement data blocks 1 Number of b
417. nce image registration No 0 Object to be measured as Reference image registration window Shape NG degree of match NG Positional deviation NG X coordinate Y coordinate NG Criteria Coordinate model 0 X 200 0 to 250 0 acceptable Coordinate model 0 Y 150 0 to 200 0 range Degree of match model 0 09500 to 10000 Output conditions ladder circuit for measurement 0 using camera 1 When the X coordinate Y coordinate and degree of match within acceptable ranges the auxiliary relay C000 is turned ON 0X0 0YO C000 m O 0k Coordi Coordi Degree nate X nateY match Final output conditions ladder circuit 2 C119 CO00 100 C NG output Measurement ox termination vot C118 Measurement operation error output Measurement operation error 02 FN Illuminance monitor error output Illuminance monitor error 10 14 PC Function 10 4 Examples of a final output conditions ladder circuit 1 Circuit for keeping the external output ON until the next external trigger is received C119 C000 Yoo D NG output Measurement termination External trigger input BUSY External output i i YOO 2 Circuit for controlling the ON time of the external output using the timer
418. nd calculation result 13 9 1 24 Reads the results of the last measurement 9 measurement data from block 0 Reads the result of the last measurement Measurement data Reading 2 22 evaluation result and measurement data from a specified block Reading 3 23 Reads the result logical result and calculation 13 10 result of the last evaluation Reads the amount of illumination measured by Illumination reading 28 lighting monitor function and the evaluation result Reads the corrected light level measured by the Corrected light level reading 29 lighting monitor function evaluation result and 13 11 preset reference density Read lock unlock condition of the operation Read 50 Operation lock status Screen Set 51 Set lock unlock for the operation screen Read 54 Read object type number to measure 13 12 Object type number Used to assign an object type using the Assign 55 general purpose serial I O Gubutimade camara Read 58 Read camera number set for output P 9 Set 59 Set camera number for output 13 1 Communication Processing function Description Set all set condition to initial values including I O settings and system setting area Set measurement conditions of the assigned objec type to initial values Initialize reference image Clear reference image data Set I O conditions to inital values including I O settings and system setting area Initialize system Set the system conditions t
419. nd press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu 5 On the MEASURING COND menu move the cursor to 3UPPER MENU and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu Continued on the following page aie Operation Examples Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the preceding page Y 9 Setting the evaluation conditions and results output Y 1 On the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu move the cursor to 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation conditions and press the SET key c The EVALUATION COND menu will be displayed EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 MEAS BIN AREA 00 0 15 OUT 000000 245760 3 SMAKEATESTRUN SETKEY UPPER MENU 5 2 Move the cursor to TREGST NO register number and press the SET key Select the desired number in this case 00 using the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to AREA size and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to the upper limit value with the left and right keys and press the SET key Select the digit you want to change with the left and right keys and enter the value 002000 with the up and down keys area 000000 002000 After defining the upper limit press the SET key 5 Move the cursor to OUT output with the left and right keys Select YO with the up and down keys and
420. nd press the up or down key Then the results of the numeric calculation will be displayed 3 49 Chapter 4 System Configuration 4 1 Basic system configuration D IV S20L16 2 IV S20C1 camera lens camera body MI Em CU 5 Camera angle bracket Monitor D 9 IV S30C1 camera IV 60LD LED lighting Iis equipment IV S20HC3 camera Lens conversion cable IV 09MT IV 10MT etc 4 qj IV S30C2 micro camera Peete compatible video input ter 1 The cable length can be extended using EES Lminals the IV S20EC2 2 m or IV S20ECA 4 m Conversion General purpose connector Personal serial I F computer 2 Parameter setting support software IV S30SP can be used by IBM PC AT Programmable Computer link coment 7 Monitor cable 2 m long Q Do IV S20 main housing o9 Housing bracket 8 Remote key pad Power supply 24 VDC Rex es e fex ex enn n Programmable controller l Input output Limit switch Warning lamp etc Parallel I F The IV S20 series includes the IV S20 IV S20N IV S20M IV S20C1 IV S30C1 C2 IV S20L16 and IV S20EC2 ECA Configurations varies with eac
421. nd right set release image change measurement start brightness adjustmenent Window shape Rectangle circle ellipse circle and ellipse are used for size inspection in binary image No of assignable object types 16 types maximum CCD image capture time 33 3 ms for a full image Time 1 Measurement time Gray search 37 ms when processing a search area of 256 x 256 pixcels and measuring an area of 64 x 64 pixels Calculation Image comparision between Between camera 1 image captured and the reference image Between camera 2 image captured and the reference image Between camera 1 and camera 2 images captured images Calculation Absolute value of subtraction difference Image pre processing Edge extraction all horizontal vertical edge emphasis smoothing Binary conversion Threshold value fixed automatic object identification function Positinal correction Gray scale search XY correction of edge positions angle correction Binary noise elimination Contraction expansion expansion contraction area filter Numeric calculation function Arithmetic operation x absolute value TAN ATAN Light monitor function Automatic threshold adjustment in binary conversion processing Measurement program No of windows Measurement function Positional deviation 8 x no of cameras 2 One point search two po
422. nd right keys go to DISP display and then press SET to display the image 5 in the bottom right hand corner of the screen When you have finished checking your selection press the ESC key to exit 5 After pressing the ESC key move the cursor to item 8 UPPER MENU with up and down keys and press the SET key c This will return you to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu When the selected camera is CAM 1 amp 2 OBJECT TYPE I O DMONITOR LIGHT LVL 1 1 2 NO YES TRIGGER CCD START REG YES BIN AVG LIT LVL COMPUTER LINK OUT BLOCK 00 MESR 0 CAM 1 amp SERIAL OUTPUT SHUTTER SPEED 1 00060 1 30 1 10000 STORE REF IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 2208 LO R 287 271 UPPER MENU i 3 1 Use the up and down keys to set item 7 SET IMAGE WINDOWS area setting for comparison between images 2 Display an image by pressing the SEL key Then focus the lens and adjust the camera s iris to adjust the image 3 Select the area of the image to be used Select one of the following MOVE UP L LO R and then define the area Define the position of the window to be used with the reference image and then press the SET key 4 Press the ESC key move the cursor to item UPPER MENU with up and down keys and press the SET key Y v C This will return you to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu Continued on the following page 9 26 Sh
423. ne 9 101 i Te WINDOW CR 9 5 Equipment connections Connecting a power supply sseesssesesssesseseseneee nennen nnne nensis nrte sentent nennen nn 6 14 Connecting to the input output terminal parallel I F ssssseeeeen 6 16 Connecting a PC when using the computer link function sese 6 20 Connection for communications with personal computer general purpose serial I F 6 18 ESG cancel Key endet de rede ed tote teed 5 3 7 9 Evaluation conditioris dose e e Le ed ee aloe eae Led eb e Leap tance ns 9 13 Area measurement by binary conversion esssssesssseeeenenee nennen nennen nnne nen 9 86 Counting quantities by binary conversion esssssssesseseeee eene 9 94 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 53 Distance and angle measurement nennen nnne nennen nnne nein 9 67 Existence inspection by point measurement enne 9 111 to 112 aki 9 78 Object identification by binary 9 103 Positional deviation measurement sess enne nnnm nnne ennemis 9 41 Existence inspection by point measurement Measurement data block Communication general purpose
424. ne terminators CR LF In version 2 01 only FORM 1 was available Select either WW or QW for the block write command WW Data writing address range 00000 to 01023 QW Data writing address range D000000 to D008191 In version 2 01 only WW was available If SHARP or OMRON is selected items 4 and 5 will not be displayed CONTROL PROCEDURE BLOCK WRT COMMAND See Chapter 14 Computer Link for applicable models made by these manufacturers Note 1 Use an even address as the write start address Note 2 When 512 bytes are used for a write register on a Sharp model select a write start address from the following addresses 09000 19000 29000 39000 49000 59000 69000 79000 89000 99000 11 19 Setting the Input Output Conditions 11 6 Output block assignment Computer link output and general purpose serial output When measurement is controlled by a computer link or a communication interface general purpose serial IF 1 in addition to other block 0 blocks can be specified whose measurement data will be output from the IV S20 to a programmable controller or a personal computer 1 In the case of a communication interface general purpose serial IF output blocks can be specified only when the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel IF signal and the results are set by a general purpose serial IF signal See page 13 2
425. nected to these terminals for input and output parallel I F See page 6 14 Power terminal block POWER 24V OV Power lamp POWER Commercially available constant voltage power supply 24 V DC 10 350 mA or more is connected here See page 6 12 When the power is applied to the IV S20 main housing the green lamp will light Monitor connector VIDEO A monitor is connected here The monitor connector is an RCA jack Camera 1 connector CAMERA1 Camera 2 connector CAMERA2 The camera cable connector is connected here The camera connected to the CAMERA 1 position is camera 1 and the camera connected to the CAMERA 2 position is camera 2 Communication connector RS232C RS422 9 pin D sub female rock screw M2 6 Remote key pad connector REMOTE This connector is used to connect a personal computer for communications general purpose serial I F or to connect a programmable controller for a computer link See page 6 16 The remote key pad connector is used to make selections from the menues on the screen to set parameters It is connected here Frame ground terminal Be sure to ground the housing frame ground terminal together with the frame ground of the constant voltage power supply in accordance with class 3 grounding procedures gt See page 6 12 5 1 Part Names and Functions 5 2 Camera section 1 Camera 1 Camera body IV S20C1
426. nector Minimum bend radius 75 mm 5 Camera extension cable IV S20EC2 EC4 Item Specifications Cable length 2 m IV S20EC2 4 m IV S20EC4 Cable sheath Polyvinyl chloride Connector Main housing side Round 13 pin female connector Camera side Round 13 pin male connector Minimum bend radius 75 mm 16 5 Specifications 16 3 Peripheral device 1 Monochrome monitor IV 09MT specifications SiS Speictications Power input voltage 90 to 110 VAC 50 60 Hz Input capacity 25 VA Signal voltage 1 0 Vp p 75 ohms Screen display resolution 900 scanning lines center 60 scanning lines edge Scan method EIA 525 lines 2 1 interlace Scan frequency Horizontal 15 75 kHz vertical 48 to 62 Hz Image size 8 under scan Horizontal 10 or less vertical max 10 Linearity Image input connector Image input impedance 75 ohms High Z Video output connector TE adjustment contrast adjustment vertical position adjustment horizontal position adjustment Adjustment function Focal adjustment vertical width adjustment horizontal linearity adjustment sub bright adjustment used only by our service staff Storage ambient temperature Operation ambient temperature 20 to 60 C 0 to 45 C Operation ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH non considering Atmosphere No corrosive gases JIS C 0911 or
427. nector of the IV S20 Controller connector body 5 4 Part Names and Functions 5 3 Remote key pad Connector connected to the IV S20 main housing E Cable length 3 m 4 Image change key SEL D Direction keys up down left and right 5 Measurement start brightness select key TRG BRT i B 2 Set select key SET T Dimensions mm 130 W X 61 D X 22 5 8 Cancel key ESC Direction keys an item on a menu up down left and right Setting a window Setting a value Set select key Determine a highlighted item SET Determine the setting value Returning a setting to its origi Cancel key nal state before being changed ESC Returning to the previous menu deg Switching the image mode Image change between the through mode key SEL and the freeze mode see page 7 8 Measurement Start measurement input start brightness TUE select key Switching the brightness TRG BRT level H and L 5 5 Chapter 6 Installation Conditions and Method 6 1 Installation conditions 1 Lighting equipment Lighting for the workpieces is an important factor in image processing The lighting conditions affect the measurement results Select the proper lighting equipment Make sure there is uniform illumination of the whole measurement field where o
428. ng from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on numerical calculations see section 9 2 4 Numerical calculations Note You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS output condition Continued on the following page 9 68 Distance and angle measurement Continued from the previous page GRAY amp EDGE GRAV L OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPE00 MEAS 0 DST amp ANGL MEAS DPAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE GINPUT SIGNAL MATCH M00 0 15 AGL B00 0 15 ST PT S00 0 15 0 15 DST D00 0 15 CAL NO0 0 15 AUXRLY C000 0 127 LOGICAL SYMBOL d l DEL OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL OUPPER MENU PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO LOGIC INPUT1 LOGIC INPUT2 LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC The input signals which may be set depend on the selection made at item 3 as follows Selection of 3 Input signals Degree of match M 00M to 15M Angle B 00B to 15B Starting point S 00S to 15S Auxiliary point H to 15H Distance D 00D to 15D Calculation N NOO to N15 Secondary relay C C000 to C127 The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on output conditions see the PC Function in Chapter 10 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued
429. ng measurement 1 of distance and angle measurement on an image that has been rotated around its center by the amount of angular diviation detected in step 1 Image that has been rotated around its center in step 1 9 23 Shared settings 6 Comparative calculations between images It is possible to run calculations on the differences between the images taken by camera 1 and camera 2 as well as on the differences between the current image and the already stored reference image 1 Type of calculation There are two types of calculation subtraction and the absolute value of the differences Light level in image 1 0 to 255 Light level in image 2 0 to 255 Subtraction Light level after calculation However a result less than 0 will give a result of 0 The absolute value Light level in image 1 0 to 255 Light level in image 2 0 to of the differences 255 c Light level after calculation 0 to 255 Example of comparative calculations between images Image A Light Image B level 0 Light level 180 l N Subtraction Image A Image B Subtraction Image B Image A The absolute value of the differences Image A Image B 9 24 Shared settings 2 Setting details On the MAIN OPS MENU move the curson to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE CND conditions of objec
430. ning is set to SEARCH search and model 1 object to be measured is set to YES NO SEARCH do not search GDMEAS WINDOW MDLO REF IMAGE MODELO measurement window reference image 7 0 SEARCH AREA MDLO DTECT COORD MDLO detection coordinates CONTR PIXEL MDLO pixel contraction amp MEAS WINDOW MDL1 F 9 measurement window REF IMAGE MODEL1 reference images DTECT COORD MDL1 detection coordinates DETECT ACCURANCY accuracy of detection k 2 UPPER MENU This is the sequence to follow when model 0 positioning is set to SEARCH search and model 1 object to be measured is set to YES SEARCH do not search MEAS WINDOW MDLO 2 IMAGE MODELO measurement window reference image F 9 L SEARCH AREA MDLO0 DTECT COORD MDLO detection coordinates CONTR PIXEL MDLO pixel contraction WINDOW MDL1 measurement window I 9 REF IMAGE MODEL1 DTECT COORD MDL1 reference images gt 8 SEARCH AREA MDL1 detection coordinates EN PIXEL MDL1 pixel contraction qdDDETECT ACCURANCY accuracy of detection
431. nnect the camera cable connectors to the camera 1 CAMERA1 and camera 2 CAMERA2 connectors on the IV S20 main housing Note Only connect or disconnect the camera connectors while the power is OFF Push the convex side of the connector into the concave side of the mating connector When the connector is all the way on it clicks To disconnect the connector hold the plug of the connector and pull it straight out A camera connected to the camera 1 connector CAMERA1 is treated as camera 1 by this system and a camera connected to the camera 2 connector CAMERA is treated as camera 2 Note You must have a camera connected to the camera 1 connector The camera cable length is 3m If you need a longer cable order extension camera cable IV S20EC2 cable length 2m or IV S20EC4 cable length 4m Extension camera cable IV S20EC2 4 zz Lu Xx Il Camera connector of IV S20 main housing 2 Screw and the IV S20L16 camera lens on the lens holder of the camera body and secure it in place Camera lens Lens holder IV S20L16 etc IV S20C1 Installation Conditi
432. nning direction B Edge An example of detecting a point using the edge detection function and user specified criteria Horizontal transition point Vertical transition point from from light to dark moving light to dark moving from top from left to right to bottom Edge detection Edge Pat point Light Edge detection point A Ws p x a Detection area 4 6 6 Brightness Difference _ B CD o0 level in level S99 E RN RM 05 Detection direction B A Direction Horizontal transition point Vertical transition point from from light to dark moving light to dark moving from from right to left bottom to top Edge Flat A 2 Light OM Detection area _ 66 3 A n Fa Brightness Difference Edge detection E level indevel pointy 2 49 289553 Bros l Detection direction Dark A Direction B Center dark horizontal left and right Edge detection point Detection area 1 Edge detection of the inside and outside edges of a two circles B Moving right horizontally from dark to light C Moving left horizontally from dark to light D Moving left horizontally from light to dark d P diameter between B and C External diameter between A and D A Moving right horizontally from light to dark Detection area gt
433. ns Measured result screen and Image brightness H L on the MAIN OPS MENU operation screen will be latched even after reapplying the power To store the data select 9 SAVE IN FLASH MEM or 40 OPERATIONS on the SYSTEM SETUP menu Image display area The size of the area in pixels where the image is displayed on the monitor is 512 horizontal 480 vertical 512 ral N X axis Origin 0 0 o Q x Unit pixels gt 511 479 RAM N 7 3 Setting and Operating Outlines 2 Menu configuration On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item on the menu bar at the bottom of the screen with the right and left keys and press the SET key Then the SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Select an item and the corresponding sub menu will be displayed MAIN OPS MENU MSR CHNG REG CHNG PCMONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG L SYSTEM SETUP DOPS MENU SETTING OBJECT TYPE COND CONDITIONS RUN MENU SETTINGS 8 1 to 10 The numbers in parenthesis refer to the pages describing the operations in detail OBJECT TYPE COND 9 1 ADJ CAM POSITION 12 6 DISPLAY MODE 12 1 amp RECEIVING PARMS 12 2 INIT ALL PARMS 12 3 amp SELF DIAGNOSTICS 12 8 SAVE IN FLASH MEM 12 4 OPERATIONS UPPER MENU OBJECT TYPE NO 7 7 9 1 EDIT 9 28 9 32 TITLE REGISTRATION 9 33 MEAS 0 CAMERA 1 4 POS ADJ CAMERA 1 9 21
434. nt PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C112 Yoo LOGIC H lt _ Y Continued on the following page 3 28 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 12 Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU 1 Press the ESC key gt The screen will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu Move the cursor to SAVE IN FLASH MEM save data in flash memory or OPERATIONS with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen DATA SAVE Do you want to save data YES MOVE NO ESC Press the SET key c The data saving operation will start and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen SAVING REFERENCE IMAGE Bi SYSTEM I O MEAS CONDITIONS When the data has been saved in the IV S20 flash memory the display will change from SAVING to SAVING COMPLETE Note If the ESC key is pressed the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV S20 flash memory In this case if the power to the IV S20 main housing is turned OFF or if the type No is changed the settings will be deleted 2 Press the ESC key c The screen will return to the MAIN OPS If the cursor is moved to DPERATIONS in step 1 above the screen will automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU v Continued on the following
435. nt 3 Point 1 is the point of intersection of the two lines Relative to the line between points 1 and 2 the line between points 1 and 3 will be said to be at a positive angle if the angle is measured in a counterclockwise direction and it will be at a negative angle if it is measured in a clockwise direction Angle When a 2 point horizontal angle Angle When a 2 point vertical angle is is specified specified x Point 2 pa Vertical line Point 2 x angle a Point 1 Horizontal line Point 1 Relative to the horizontal line the line from Relative to the vertical line the line from point 2 point 2 that intersects point 1 will be said to that intersects point 1 will be said to at a at a positive angle if the angle is measured positive angle if the angle is measured in a in a counterclockwise direction and at a counterclockwise direction and at a negative negative angle if it is measured in a angle if it is measured in a clockwise direction clockwise direction Return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu and select item 7 UPPER MENU v Continued on the following page 9 66 Distance and angle measurement Continued from the previous page GRAY amp EDGE GRAV EVALUATION COND OBJECT REGSTNO 00 0 15 GRAY SEARCH X START PNT COORD 000 0 511 0 X 285 0 OK Y START PNT COORD 000 0 479 0 Y 250 0 OK DEGREE OF MATCH 10000 10000 09800 OK 6MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY UPPER MEN
436. nt selected Items 5 and can be selected when 4 CHG MEAS NO X5 X6 is set to NO 11 1 Setting the Input Output Conditions Input output condition Setting details 7 OUTPUT STATUS Status output SERIAL CONDITIONS Set the conditions on the next menu when item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F has Serial communication been set to SERIAL general purpose serial and when item 3 SERIAL Select the IV S20 output status gt See page 6 15 7 2 and 10 16 conditions OUTPUT serial output has been set to SERIAL or PC LINK 9 COMPUTER LINK Set the conditions on the next menu when item SERIAL OUT has been Computer link set to PC LINK GAIN OFFSET Gain offset See section 11 7 Gain offset adjustment 0 UPPER MENU The screen will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu 1 The display of items and 3illepends on the specification in item MEAS TRIG INP I F I O SETTING CDMEAS TRIG INP I F_ PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC LINK SERIAL INPUT PARALLEL CHG MEAS NO X5 X6 NO YES PARALLEL INPUT X5 EXT INP REG REF IMG MSRO COMPARE IMAGES T ARA EVALUATION ADu 00 PARALLEL INPUT X6 EXT INP CHG IMG OUT CAM CAM MEAS OUTPUT STATUS BUSY READY 8 SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU 9COMPUTER LINK TO NEXT SUB MENU GAIN OFFSET TO NEXT SUB MENU 3 UPPER MENU When item 1 MEAS TRIG INP I F is set to SERIAL MEAS TRIG INP I F PARALLEL
437. nversion Gray scale search area Positional deviation measurement gray scale search degree detection of match inspection for shape and size distance and angle measurement gray scale search lead inspection criteria search Roneo ines Edge of an area Positional deviation measurement edge distance and angle detection measurement edge Binary image window Distance and angle measurement center of gravity Area mask measurement by binary conversion counting quantities by binary conversion identifying objects by binary conversion How to set a rectangular window The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the mask move upper left lower right Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line rectangular window 1 Moving the mask Up key Down key Left key Right key Ld 2 Specifying the upper left corner Up key Down key Left key Right key mim 3 Specifying the lower right corner Up key Down key Left key Right key 4 Shared settings 2 Horizontal vertical lines Line type Image processing used Measurement programs Gray scale search Positional deviation measurement gray scale search reference image degree of match inspection for shape and size distance and angle measurement gray scale search lead inspection Solid lines criteria search Edge of an area Lead inspection detection Gray scale search line Positio
438. o DISTANCE NUMBER 00 0 15 p DISTANCE TYPE NO DIST BETW 2PT DIST BETW X DIST BETW Y POINT NO 1 MEAS ST PTNO 34 POINT NO 2 MEAS ST PTNO 3 UPPER MENU N3 3 Move the cursor to POINT NO 1 point 1 with the up and down keys and press the SET key Change the measurement start point to 00 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to POINT NO 2 point 2 with the up and down keys and press the SET key Change the measurement start point to 01 with the up and down keys and press the SET key 5 Move the cursor to GUPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement conditions menu 6 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 measurement conditions menu Y 0 Operation on the EVALUATION CONDITION evaluation conditions menu 1 Move the cursor to EVALUATION CONDITION with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The EVALUATION CONDITION menu will be displayed EVALUATION CONDITION TYPEO0 MEAS1 DST amp ANGL MEAS DOBJECT ST PNT AUX PNT DIST OUT 2 ANGLE i REGST NO 00 0 15 CENTER GRAY SEARCH 3 X START PNT COORD 000 0 511 0 NO Y START PNT COORD 000 07479 0 DEGREE OF MATCH 100007 10000 NO RUN SET KEY 2 Move the cursor to TIDBJECT with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor
439. o the DC power terminal block on the IV S20 Make sure that the proper supply voltage is available and has not dropped After the power is first turned ON no images or characters are displayed on the monitor Make sure that the monitor cable has been connected correctly Make sure that the offset and gain are adjusted properly After the power is first turned ON no characters are displayed on the monitor 1 Make sure that the message display and pattern display modes are not set to the non display mode Make sure that the title field is not filled with spaces After the power is first turned ON no image is displayed on the monitor or the image on the display is abnormal The MAIN OPS MENU is always displayed in the freeze mode Change the mode to the through mode on the lower menu section Make sure that the lens iris is not closed Make sure that the shutter speed has not been increased Check the lens for contamination Check the CCD light receiving surface for contamination Make sure that the lens focus has been adjusted properly Make sure that the lighting equipment is providing adequate illumination The background is completely white or black even after the shutter speed is changed Make sure that the monitor screen is not too bright or dark Changes in brightness cannot be sensed c Adjust the lens aperture or
440. o the initial values Self diagnostic Check hardware error Read out the coordinates for manual measurement detection point 0 and 1 Assign the coordinates for manual measurement detection point 0 and 1 1 Measurement execution functions 1 to 4 can be executed when the MEAS TRIG INP I F measurement start input I F is the SERIAL general purpose serial interface However with the measurement execution 2 If the measurement start input I F has been set to CCD TRIG CCD trigger camera 1 or PARALLEL parallel the IV S20 only processes responses 2 Measurement execution functions 5 to 8 can be executed when the MEAS TRIG INP I F measurement start input I F has been set to the CCD TRIG CCD trigger camera 1 and is controlled by sampled start instructions 3 When you want to change the object type using processing code 10 to 13 18 to 1B object type change time is included in the measurement excecution time display on the monitor 4 Initialize both the stored data and the currently monitored data Initialize all parameters Initialize measurement conditions Initialize I O conditions c o oO N 4 c Readin Manual measurement 9 coordinates Setting 13 2 Communication 13 2 Data flow The data flow between the IV S20 and a personal computer is shown below 1 When the measurement execution processing code is 10 11 12 or 13 1 Data flow when the mea
441. o the three tapped holes spacing 20 mm on the camera body using the M3x 6 installation screws that come with the IV 30C2 2 Secure the camera mounting bracket on the installation surface using a 3 2mm long 20 mm difference screw or a 1 4 20 UNC screw hole Installation example Front view Side view Camera mounting bracket Camera bod Camera body accessory Y Installation Ee surface lt Camera mounting bracket D ET External dimensions of the camera IV S30C2 Unit mm 2 M3 tapped holes Attach the camera angle bracket to one of the tapped M3 holes 20 mm mounting 2 tapped holes pitch 3 places 6 30 Installation Conditions and Method External dimensions of camera angle bracket 4 slotted holes wide for securing on the camera mE 20 ex CD i5 CN Unit mm 39
442. object measurement OGO to 1561 OOHX to 15HX OOHY to 15HY OKO to OK7 3KO to 3K7 Distance D 000 to 15D Maximum distance MXD Minimum distance Maximum lead length MXL Minimum lead length MNL Numerical calculation N NOO to N15 Input types Total area A 00A to 15A NOO to N15 NOO to N15 NOO to N15 Area measurement by binary conversion Measurement functions Counting quantities by Label measurement 0A to 3A by binary conversion Number of objects K binary conversion OK to 3K Area with each labeling R Center of gravity with each labeling GX Center of gravity with each labeling GY 0A to 3A OK to 3K 3G Main axis angle B with each labeling Fellet diameter with each labeling FX 3GB127 OFX000 to OFX127 3FX000 to 3FX127 Fellet diameter with each labeling FY Circumference with each labeling CR OFY000 to OFY127 3FY000 to 3FY127 OCRO00 to OCR127 3CR000 to 3CR127 0R000 to 0R127 3R000 to 38127 OGY000 to OGY127 3GY000 to Numerical calculations N to N15 NOO to N15 0GXO000 to 0GX127 3GX000 to X127 3GY127 NOO to N15 0GBO00 to 0GB127 3GB000 to 9 17 Shared settings 2 Final numerical calculations Final numerical calculations can be set at item 3 FINAL CALC RESULT on the conditions of object types menu OBJECT TYPE COND The setting procedure error output settings calculation sequence and paral
443. ocess Applications Measurement for mounting electronic components Measuring an IC package 1 H 4 Reference image a Search area i reference image b Search area 1 D reference image a Reference images a and b are recorded when the crosshair cursor is placed on the edge of the IC package Measuring sequence D Obtain the center points of images a and b by running a 2 point gray scale search 2 Determine the distance between the two center points For details about measuring the distance X coordinate distance and Y coordinate distance of two manually designated points see the MANL MESR manual measurement section for the crosshair cursor display page 8 8 9 57 Distance and angle measurement 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU SYSTEM SETUP OBJECT TYPE COND _ SET SCRN OBJECT TYPE COND MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 2 MEASUREMENT 3 MEAS SELECTION COMPARE IMAGES COPY Select the GRAY amp EDGE comparative calculation between images S SELECT CAMERA 6 INITIALIZATION or GRAV on the DST amp AGL MES line See page 9 2 6 select a camera See page 9 2 items 7 8 D 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions of measurement program Starting point number The sequence when GRAY amp EDGE are selected m gt Starting point m
444. odd two digits of dummy data will be inserted at the end of each item 14 8 Computer Link 4 Lead inspection Block tem 1 ELE Quantity at center point Line No 0 Reference Dummy data No 0 Line No 1 to 7 Line No 1 to 7 contain the same data as line No 0 idle Reference No 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No 0 j No of Decimal Evaluation Quantity None 2 Evaluation Distance None Distance Shortest Distance Longest The lead number with an NG distance Number of leads Line No 0 with NG distance Evaluation Lead length 2 Dummy data 2 Lead length Shortest 4 4 Lead length Longest Reference The lead number with No 0 an NG length Number of leads with NG length None None Line No 1 07 Line No 1 to 7 contain the same data as line No 0 Evaluation X coordinate Reference Y coordinate Reference X coordinate detection coordinates Y coordinate Evaluation Degree of match Dummy data Degree of match Provided 4 Reserved area for the 2nd point fea Reference No 1 to3 Reference No 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No 0 14 9 Computer Link 5 Area measurement by binary conversion Block Item No of digits Window area Registration No 0 Evaluation Area Dummy data Registration Registration Nos 1 to 15 contain the same dat
445. ode Gray scale search gt Conditions for the starting point Auxiliary condition Distance condition Angle condition 4Edge detection y Conditions for the starting point Auxiliary condition Distance condition Angle condition J Conditions for the starting point The sequence when GRAV center of gravity is selected Auxiliary condition Distance condition Angle condition CONDITIONS EVALUATION COND 8NUMERIC CALC COND Q OUTPUT evaluation gt numerical conditions calculation condition reeset ee X These settings are found in the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 object type measurement 1 to 3 menu OBJECT TYPE COND 3FINAL CALC RESULT final numerical calculations see page 9 2 4 OBJECT TYPE COND OUTPUT COND final output conditions MAIN OPS MENU see PC function in Chapter 10 9 58 Distance and angle measurement 2 Setting details An explanation of item MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs from the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP move the cursor to item 2 OBJECT TYPE COND and press SET key o Select item MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 or 2 MEASUREMENT on the OBJECT TYP
446. of gravity operations Select a method for eliminating binary noise DBINARY NOIS FILTR C See methods for eliminating noise from binary images eliminating binary noise expansion contraction and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on page 9 10 2 NUM OF FILTR PASS Set the number of times that the elimination of binary noise process is number of noise carried out 0 to 5 Set separately for expansion and contraction cycles elimination cycles After object identification the area filter is a function used to identify small islands whose area is less than a specified amount It eliminates them from AREA FILTER the object which is being measured Set the maximum number of pixels Areas with fewer pixels will be ignored Enter any number from 0 to 245760 4UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu Information about the window settings In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the frame First freeze the frame Then operate the camera normally Finally freeze the frame again The first frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final binary image The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating steps 1 to 43 above Example of recording Measurement window 1 gt O The binary image will be the contents of the measurement window after the portion excluded by the
447. of your search you must take into account the settings listed below 1 When using the high precision setting a smaller image should be used 2 Reduce the size of the scanned image 3 After considering what the maximum out of position dimension would be make the search area as small as possible 4 f the size of the object is larger than 8 pixels then set the pixel contraction to 3 Measurement programs which are affected by these settings Positional deviation measurement gray scale search page 9 37 Degree of match inspection for shape and size gray scale processing page 9 48 Distance and angle measurement gray scale search page 9 60 Lead inspection criteria search page 9 75 9 6 Shared settings 2 Threshold value setting The IV S20 treats the areas darker than the lower limit value or brighter than the upper limit value as black It treats that the areas between the upper limit value and lower limit value as white However if the white black reverse function is enabled conversion to white black will be reversed Normally if you want to use only one threshold value for binary conversion set the upper limit value to 255 Then you only need to adjust the lower limit value to a threshold value that works for our application Threshold value 255 Threshold valve B Lower White Binary conversion gt limit A upper limit 255 lower limit A Threshold valve A B Black Captured image Binary
448. oint on the The initial coordinates of the crosshair cursor position are NO A crosshair cursor will not be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU MANL MESR Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu move the cursor to item DISPLAY CURSOR with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to YES or NO with the left and right keys and press the SET key When the cursor has been set to YES the crosshair cursor can be moved with the direction keys After defining the position press the SET key When YES is selected 1 Move the crosshair cursor using the up down and left right keys 2 When the position is correct press the SET key When MANL MESR 1 Return to the MAIN OPS MENU 2 Display MANL MESR using the SEL key Manual measurement TYPEO0 FL C1ALL C2NO O K VX X MEAS XXXXXXms MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION MANL MESR DTC CORDO 248 240 DTC CORD 264 240 DIST BETWE 016 0 DIST BETW X 016 0 DIST BETW Y 000 0 3 Detect point 0 NO 0 Detect point 1 NO 1 The distance X coordinate distance and Y coordinate distance of the two points that were manually designated on the MAIN OPS MENU can be measured Automatically enter the initial values When measurement 1 is a distance and angle measurement a degree of match inspection or a lead inspection the points for register numbers 0 and 1 are set automatically to the initial values for inspection po
449. on number to store it BINARY AREA COND The conditions for binary areas are set on the next conditions for binary areas menu UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Select item 2 BINARY AREA COND conditions for binary areas v Continued on the following page 9 92 Counting quantities by binary convension Continued from the previous page This is how the display looks MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE when item 1 MEAS WINDOW MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 e TYPE measurement window is MASK WINDOW NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE pace RECTANGLE MASK WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 This is how the display looks THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 ina eee INVERT B W NO YES RECTANGLE BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD ADJ VAR DIFF VAR RATE 8BOUNDARY PROCESS VALD INVLD 9 LABEL ORDER SACN ORDER SIZE ORDER IMAGE PRE PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE EMPHASIS ALL EDGE HORZ EDGE VERT EDGE BINARY NOIS FILTR EXP gt CONTR CONTR EXP NUM OF FILTR PASS EXPD 0 0 5 CONTRO 0 5 AREA FILTER 000000PIXEL LOWER LIMIT UPPER MENU Item 4 will be displayed unless item 3 is set to NO Mew Settingdetals O O CDMEAS WINDOW TYPE Select a measurement window type RECTANGLE CIRCLE or ELLIPSE measurement window Set the size and position of the
450. onitor set Yes Executing illuminance monitoring gt Executing measurement 0 using camera 1 An error was detected No urement 0 using Executing meas camera 2 Yes An error was detected No No 15 Positional correction Yes Setting the coordinate correction value X Y 0 Executing measurement 1 x An error was detected No y Executing measurement 2 Yes An error was detected No Executing measurement 3 k An error was detected No D To the next page y 2 To the next page 7 12 k amp The range of the lines to be captured as set in the measurement conditions is fetched Measurement program to be selected Positional diviation measurement Measurement programs to select Matching inspection for shape and size Distance and angle measurement Lead inspection Area measurement after binary conversion Counting by quantities by binary conversion Label measurement by binary conversion Detect existence using point measurements The window coordinates are corrected within the range set for each type of measurement based on the correction value determined in the steps marked with an Setting and Operating Outlines 2 From the preceding page CD From the preceding page hs Message display C calculation Yes M
451. ons and Method 2 Installing the camera body Attach the IV S20C1 camera body on the mounting surface with the camera angle bracket supplied with the IV S20 IV S20N and IV S20C1 Installation example 1 Camera front view Camera side view Camera angle bracket Camera Mounting surface c Installation example 2 Camera angle bracket Camera Mounting surface Installation example 3 Camera Camera angle bracket Mounting surface Bi Installation procedure D Attach the camera angle bracket to the tapped M3 hole on the camera body 20 mm mounting pitch one of three holes Two screws M 3 x 6 are supplied with the IV S20 IV S20N and IV S20C1 for attaching the angle 2 Attach the camera controller angle to the mounting surface with the slotted holes 3 2 mm wide 20 mm mounting pitch or 1 4 20 UNC threaded hole The external dimensions of the camera angle bracket camera body and extension camera cable are shown on the following page 6 20 Installation Conditions and Method External dimensions of camera body IV S20C1 and camera lens IV S20L16
452. ons for measurement programs Mode Gray scale Positioning of Measuring the objects Standard processing model 0 in model 1 conditions Search YES NO NO YES No search YES Do a search The binary conversion Rc processing EVALUATION COND amp NUMERIC CAL COND 9OUTPUT CONDITIONS OBJECT TYPE COND FINAL CALC RESULT see page 9 2 4 final numerical calculations OBJECT TYPE COND FINAL OUTPUT COND final output conditions see PC function in Chapter 10 MAIN OPS MENU These settings are found in the 1 to 3 menu 9 46 Degree of match inspection 2 Setting details An explanation of item 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs from the TYPEOO0 MEAS to 3 object type measurement On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu item move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND condition of object type and press the SET key c Select item 40 MEASUREMENT 1 1 MEASUREMENT 2 or MEASUREMENT 3 on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for object types menu TYPEOO MEAS1 This is how the line looks MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH when the object type is set to DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV 00 and the selected measure INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA ment is 1 CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ PO
453. ored values for center of gravity fillet diameter and average light level in item 6 If the number of labels exceeds the maximum number of labels which can be stored 32 use an area filter 7 You can check the centers of gravity fillet diameters and average light levels of each label from No 1 up to the maximum number using the up and down keys Y Go to the next page 12 6 Other Settings and Operations eun the preceding page Adjusting the camera position after the camera is replaced or dislocated Start 1 Adjusting the camera position direction Adjusting the lens aperture Rough adjustment Exists White area in the differential image Adjusting the camera position direction Mismatch Adjustment of size comparison of fillet diameters Adjusting the camera position direction Detailed adjustment Mismatch Adjustment of position comparison of the centers of gravity Adjusting the lens aperture Mismatch Adjustment of brightness comparison of average light level ee End Adjust these parameters using the following procedure Enter the through display mode y Adjust each parameter adjust the camera and lens Y Enter the freeze display mode Y 8 Press the SET key on item 6 DISP DEG OF MATCH 9 Compare the values before
454. osition is correct press the SET key The white rectangle is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time The upper left corner is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time The lower right corner is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time Image window Move the image window crosshair solid line cursor close the vertical line After the image window position has been defined move the cursor to REG registration with the left and right keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to DISP display with the left and right keys and press the SET key Then the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen After checking the image press the ESC key 4 Press the ESC key move the cursor to SBEARCH AREA search window with the up and down keys and press the SET key 5 Set a search window dotted line to be used as a search area The search area is the area within which the new image will be searched for a match with the image stored in step 3 see Glossary The procedure for defining the search area is the same as in step 3 Search window dotted line 1 Image window 77 solid line Create a search window with the same height as that of the image window registered in step 3 because the image window will be moved only in the X axis direction After defining the search wind
455. output and auxiliary relays turn OFF i the measurement result is determined Parallel output p zx a YO to Y7 amp Result output x Result output Note Result output The data in the block No set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT amp SERIAL OUTPUT on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu will be transmitted to the personal computer See page 11 20 Time chart when auto mode level is selected for as the CCD sampling start Restarts CCD sampling automaticallyafter _ 7 measurement is completed X Measurement result is valid 3l cycle When a trigger signal is input during i sending object type change command this command will be invalid Result 7 Result Serial Type J output CCD trigger Black White Black window te not highlighted 4 i i 1 Trigger Trigger i i Trigger i BUSY output EN N Terminate D measurement ps C119 i 4 atthe of a measurement x PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation EERE Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P P P condition C C C C during measurement C C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C When the object type is changed s_ Parallel output is valid for all Y output and auxiliar
456. ove the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND condition of object type with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The OBJECT TYPE COND menu will be displayed v Continued on the following page 3 38 Operation Examples Point measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 3 Operation on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu OBJECT TYPE COND FCIH OBJECTTYPENO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPEO0 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0 CAMERA1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA1 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 6MEAS 0 CAMERA2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU POS ADJ CAMERA2 ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY 8SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 MEASUREMENT 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 1 MEASUREMENT 2 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU MEASUREMENT 3 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU i FINAL CALC RESULT TO NEXT SUB MENU FINAL OUTPUT COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 45 SYSTEM IN OUT TO NEXT SUB MENU HALT MEASONNG NO YES UPPER MENU 1 Move the cursor to 10 MEASUREMENT 1 with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu will be displayed Y 4 Operation on the TYPEO0 MEAS1 menu TYPEO0 MEAS 1 MEAS SELECTION NO CHECK DEG OF MATCH 1 DST amp AGL MES GRAY amp EDGE GRAV INSPECT LEAD MEASR BIN AREA CNT BIN OBJ LABEL BIN OBJ x POINT MEAS SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM2 COPY EXEC TYPE00 MEAS
457. oving object or to increase the image processing speed set the shutter speed to 1 1000 sec or 1 2000 sec or faster However an extremely high shutter speed will require intense lighting thereby increasing the cost Relation between illuminance and shutter speed IV S20L16 camera lens focal length 16 mm with an aperture setting of f 1 6 lux 32000 16000 Proper range shaded zone 8000 4000 2000 1000 500 250 125 1 30 1 60 1125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 10000 The standard relationship between illuminance and shutter speed is given above for Shutter speed sec reference When actually installing the equipment make sure the proper combination is used for the actual system 6 3 Installation Conditions and Method 3 Optimum lens and resolution The optimum lens for your system can be selected based on the camera installation distance and the field of view workpiece size Vertical direction 2 Rounded surface of camera bod Horizontal direction Workpieces Hur n c 5 E x gt Camera installation Lens holder distance mm Workpieces N E H I Va
458. ow size and position press the ESC key Y Continued on the following page 3 25 Operation Examples Distance measurement Continued from the preceding page 6 Move the cursor to 4DETECTED COORD position to detect with the up and down keys and press the SET key If the crosshair cursor does not need to be moved proceed to step 7 Move the cursor to FREE with the left and right keys and press the SET key Move the crosshair cursor to detection point 0 with the up down left and right keys in units of 1 pixel Detection point 0 start point 00 D Move the image window crosshair cursor to detection point 0 After defining the crosshair cursor position press the SET key and ESC key 7 Move the cursor to 2UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu Y Operation for gray scale search matching setting setting the starting point 01 1 On the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu move the cursor to 18TART POINT NO start point number with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the number to 01 with the up and down keys move the cursor to YES with the left and right keys and press the SET key 3 Move the cursor to G START POINT COND start point condition with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The gray scale search matching setting menu image window and se
459. ows in horizontal direction One element is equivalent to one pixel G 8 Glossary B Pre processing Pre processing includes various image manipulation processes that create more readable images by removing noise and distortion in the image data And by extracting or emphasizing certain image fea tures it is easier to evaluate or identify target objects by converting the images into standard patterns In the IV S20 you can select from smoothing edge emphasis and edge extraction whole horizon tal vertical pre processing techniques Contents Display smooth images decreasing the noise Use to eliminated surface flaws and unevenness in the reflected light caused by protrusions or dents Edge Display images with sharp boundaries between brighter and darker areas emphasis Used to stabilize and create a binary outline of obscure objects Display images after extracting and clarifying the boundaries between the brighter and darker areas Edge Used to measure objects with low contrast extraction Horizontal edge extraction Display only the with horizontal boundaries o an object Vertical edge extraction Display only the vertical boundaries of an object See page 9 9 for descriptions about example for image B Progressive scan gt See Full pixel reading R m Random shutter function This function allows the CCD camera shutter operation to be triggered when even an object to be mea sur
460. page Y 6 Image adjustment y F C1 H Press the TRG BRT key on the remote key pad and the level Measurement window brightness of the screen will be switched between H and L MEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE Indicates Camera 1 1 Press the SEL key gt The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed f the image is so bright that the menu is hard to see press the TRG BRT key to reduce the brightness of the image Then the brightness indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from H to L 2 Adjust the focus and aperture iris of the camera lens see page 5 1 so that the object to be measured is clear and easily distinguished 3 Press the SEL key to enter the freeze image mode C The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T through to freeze To set a threshold value during the following binary zone setting procedure the screen must be in the freeze image mode See section 7 2 Screen specifications for details about the through freeze mode 7 Operation on the BIN AREA SET menu screen setting a measurement window Y 1 Press the ESC key and all the menus used for BIN AREA SET will be displayed DMEAS WINDOW TYPE RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE MEAS WINDOW POSIT MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 2 MASK WINDOW TYPE NO RECTANGLE CIRCLER ELLIPSE __ 5 THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L
461. pixel If a circle or ellipse is selected in item 1 then the two variables you need p to set are the center and diameter The mask window can be set exceeding the measurement window THRESHOLD VALUE Set the upper and lower limits for binary conversion within the range of 0 to 255 c See threshold setting in shared settings page 9 7 Select whether to invert the black and white in the image YES or NO INVERT B W NO means the white area will be measured after the image has been ee A converted to binary values black and white inversion YES means the black area will be measured after the image has been converted to binary values BINARY PROCESS Select either fixed or threshold value correction as the binary conversion processing method binary conversion t See methods for binary conversion in shared settings on page 9 8 8IMAGE PRE PROCESS Select a method for pre processing image data image pre processing C See pre processing in shared settings on page 9 9 Select a method for eliminating binary noise 9 BINARY NOIS FILTR c See methods for eliminating noise from binary images eliminating binary noise expansion contraction and eliminating binary noise in shared settings on page 9 10 d0 NUM OF FILTR PASS Set the number of cycles that the binary noise elimination process will be The number of noise carried out 0 to 5 Set number of times for expansion and contraction elimination cycles
462. press the SET key four YO AR After completing the settings press the ESC key 6 Move the cursor to UPPER MENU and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 type 00 measurement 1 menu 0 Returning to the MAIN OPS MENU Y 1 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu 2 Press the ESC key again C The screen will return to the SYSTEM SETUP menu Move the cursor to SAVE IN FLASH MEM save data in flash memory or OPERATIONS and press the SET key c The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen DATA SAVE Do you want to save data YES SET NO ESC Press the SET key c The data saving operation will start and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the screen SAVING REFERENCE IMAGE SYSTEM I O MEAS CONDITIONS When the data has been saved in the IV S20 flash memory the display will change from SAVING to SAVING COMPLETE Note f the ESC key is pressed the settings you entered will not be saved in the IV S20 flash memory In this case if the power to the IV S20 main housing is turned OFF or if the type No is changed the settings will be deleted 3 Press the ESC key E The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU f the cursor was moved
463. r binary conversion is automatically modified to take into account changes in the lighting environment If not go to item 8 6 Press the SEL key to enter freeze frame the image C F freeze will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Before reading and storing the next average light level sample it is necessary to enter the freeze frame 7 Select item NOTE AVG LIGHT LVL average light level registration using the up and down keys and press the SET key When the SET key is pressed again the REG AVE GRYS average light level will be registered This average light level is required when threshold value correction is selected in the binary conversion method If the average light level has not been registered you will see error 22 BIN MON LIGHT LVL NOT SET the light level check function has not been enabled The registered light level is the reference value used when threshold values are modified If the current screen is not a frozen image CHANGE TO FREEZE MODE change to freeze will be displayed 8 Select item 5 UPPER MENU using the up and down keys and press the SET key Press the SET key again to store the parameter settings in the IV S20 flash memory After the measurement monitoring function is turned ON and images have been captured the lighting monitoring function set above will be active 9 116 System settings 2 Shutter speed On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET
464. r fixed or threshold value correction as the binary processing binary conversion processing method VAR DIFF or VAR RATE images gt See page 9 68 Binary processing in shared settings When the BIN CONV binary processing mode is selected Set the threshold values upper and lower limits within the range of 0 to 255 gt See page 9 E7 Threshold value setting in shared settings 8 THRESHOLD VALUE o pan Sein Set a point on the next menu 5 UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEOO0 to MEAS1 to 3 menu Se lect item SET POINT point setting v Continued on the following page 9 109 Existence inspection by point measurement Continued from the previous page D POINT SIZE Y 08XX 08 2 to 32 e START POINTPOS MOVE YES This value will be 127 when AV LIGHT 1 LEVEL average light level is selected BLOCK LAYOUT 001X001 for the processing mode 5 BLOCK SPACING Y 004 X 004 6 STORE BLOCK COND EXEC 7 DELETE BLOCK COND EXEC UPPER MENU You can switch between displaying all of the headings together and displaying each one separately using the ESC key Menu Setting details Set the size of the point vertical and horizontal within the range of D POINT SIZE 2 to 32 in units of 2 pixels Set points individually and select NO YES to store each OS TO POSITIONS There are a maximum of 256 point registration locations 0 to 255 for the
465. r the ladder circuit Calculations will be executed by a ladder circuit The output relays are the auxiliary relays that will be used for calculation by the ladder circuit in the PC scan cycle B The relationship between the ladder circuit in the measurement processing cycle and the ET ladder circuit in the PC scan cycle Measurement processing cycle ladder circuit measurement output conditions Measurement 0 camera 1 Positional deviation Measurement 1 Measurement 2 measurement Binary area Point measurement C000 00A C001 P000 C002 O 1 O Degree Auxiliary Total Auxiliary Point Auxiliary of match relay area relay relay M PC scan cycle C000 C001 C002 Yoo ladder circuit final output conditions Externall output 128 auxiliary relays C000 to C127 can be set However identical auxiliary relay numbers cannot be used for measurement 0 using camera 1 and measurement 0 using camera 2 or for measurement 1 measurement 2 and measurement 3 The auxiliary relays C110 to C127 are special relays The special relays are used on the PC scan cycle ladder circuit Do not use them for the measurement processing cycle ladder circuit 10 2 PC Function 10 2 Ladder circuit program creation 1 Procedure for creating measurement output condition and a ladder circuit A separate ladder circuit can be created for pos
466. r to YES or NO with the left and right keys and press the SET key Display examples When the display mode has been set When the display mode has been set to YES TYPEO0 OK MEAS XXXXXXms MEAS1 1 CNT BIN OBJ FL C1ALLC2NO VX X REGST NO 00 0 3 NUMBER 00006 OK TOTAL ARA 004434 OK xo 6 0000000 7 0000000 Busy 0 MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG to NO MEAS XXXXXXms MEAS1 CAM1 CNT BIN OBJ FL C1ALLC2NO VX X REGST NO 00 0 3 NUMBER 00006 OK TOTAL ARA 004434 OK E 9 xo 6 0000000 yo 7 O0000000 Busv MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG Run Menu Conditions and Settings 6 angle correction image display Select YES or NO to display a angle corrected image on the MAIN OPS MENU On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu item move the cursor to item 1 OPS MENU SETTING and press the SET key RUN MENU SETTINGS MONITOR OUTPUT CAM 182 2CAMERA1 amp 2 1 CAM2 MD S CAPTURE AN IMAGE PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE NO MESSAGE DISPLAY YES RESULT OK YES RESULT NO NQ PATTERN DISPLAY MEAS RESULT OUT NO SHOW BINARY IMAGE YES NO I SHOW CORRECT IMG YES NO BDISPLAY CURSOR NO YES MANL MESR OBJ NO MANL MODE NO YES IMAGE DISPLAY FREEZE THROUGH UPPER MENU A 0 ang
467. ra initialize object identification by binary images selection See section 9 2 7 8 conversion see section 9 2 6 Y 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs BINARY AREA COND Enabling disabling measurement of binary area conditions center of gravity main axis angle fillet width circumference 7 EVALUATION COND NUMERIC CALC COND 9 OUTPUT evaluation conditons numerical calculation conditions CONDITIONS OBJECT TYPE COND MFINAL OUTPUT COND final output conditions L MAIN OPS MENU see PC Function in Chapter 10 OBJECT TYPE COND 3 FINAL CALC RESULT final numerical calculation see section 9 2 4 These settings are found in the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 menu 9 99 Object identification labeling by binary conversion 2 Setting details An explanation of the 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs from the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 object type measurement menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press SET key c On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key gt Select item 10 MEASUREMENT 1 1 MEASUREMENT 2 or 12 MEASUREMENT 3 on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu TYPEO0 MEAS 1 This is how the line GDMEAS SELECTION NO CH
468. ra 2 CAMERA2 connectors on the IV S20 main housing gt See page 6 19 6 23 and 6 27 Note Only connect or disconnect the camera connectors while the power is OFF Push the convex side of the connector into the concave side of the mating connector When the connector is all the way on it clicks To disconnect the connector hold the plug of the connector and pull it straight out A camera connected to the camera 1 connector CAMERA 1 is treated as camera 1 by this system a camera connected to the camera 2 connector CAMERA2 is treated as camera 2 Note You must have a camera connected to the camera 1 connector The camera cable length is 3m If you need a longer cable order extension camera cable IV S20EC2 cable length 2m or IV S20EC4 cable length 4m Extension camera cable IV S20EC2 4 Wi li X Camera connector of IV S20 main housing Installation Conditions and Method 2 Plug the remote key pad connector into the connector REMOTE on the IV S20 main housing 8 Connect the monitor to the monitor connector VIDEO RCA jack on the IV S20 main housing using the monitor cable supplied with the IV S20 IV S20N and IV S20M and a conversion con nector supplied with IV S20 IV S20N and IV S20M If the monitor has an RCA jack the conver sion connector is not required Use a moni
469. red together with the areas outside the window frame edges Condition Labeling in order they are scanned E 2 E Smoothing gt See Pre processing Sub pixel pixel Refers to the pixel precision level to be used with the gray scale search function A pixel is one picture element DETECT ACCURACY STANDARD detection precision standard in case of the IV S20 Sub pixel refers to a unit smaller than a single pixel DETECT ACCURACY HIGH detection precision high for 1 10 pixel in case of the IV S20 High precision Search coordinates use a Sub pixel level of precision Reference image Standard A Search coordinates use a pixel level of precision Degree of matching T m Threshold value The criteria used for binary conversion of a gray scale image If an area of the image is lighter than this threshold value it is converted to 1 If an area of the image is darker than the threshold value it is converted to O Glossary Threshold value setting The IV S20 treats the areas darker than the lower limit value or brighter than the upper limit value as black It treats that the areas between the upper limit value and lower limit value as white However if the white black reverse function is enabled conversion to white black will be reversed Normally if you want to use only one threshold value for binary conversion set the upper limit value
470. ree of match Reserved area for the 2nd point None Provided 4 20 None Reference No 1 to 3 Reference Nos 1 to 3 contain the same data as reference No 0 13 19 Communication 5 Area measurement by binary conversion a Registration No Evaluation Area Registration Registration Nos 1 to 15 contain the same data as the No 1 to 15 registration No 0 6 Counting quantities by binary conversion Block item of digits No of labels MENGE ee Evaluation Number of labels Registration No 0 Evaluation Total area Total area Registration Registration No 1 to 3 contain the same data as the No 1 to 3 registration No 0 7 Object identification by binary conversion Decimal point digit Dummy data No of labels Registration No 0 Evaluation No of labels Evaluation Total area Total area Registration Registration No 1 to 3 contain the same data as the No 1 to 3 registration No O Label 0 Registration No 0 Evaluation Label area o Lavel 127 13 Registration Registration No 1 to 3 contain the same data as the No 1 to 3 registration No 0 Continued on the following page An item comparison table of block 0 is shown on page 13 22 This is in the general purpose serial I F used for the object identification by binary conversion in each software version 13 20 Communication
471. relays 2 Ladder circuit calculation final output conditions The calculations are executed by the ladder circuit program which contains the data from input relays output relays auxiliary relays incl output which are obtained by the ladder circuit program calculation in the measurement processing cycle timer and counter 3 Output refresh The ON OFF data of the output relays obtained in calculation 2 is output to the parallel output terminals YO to Y7 The processing time for the three steps described above is called 1PC scan time and ranges from 0 3 to 3 0 ms depending on the settings 3 Measurement processing cycle When the measurement start input signal is given the measurement processing is carried out and the calculations of the ladder circuit program for measurements 0 to 3 are executed 1 Measurement processing measurement 0 to 3 The coordinates distance and degree of match are determined by the measurement programs If the numerical calculation conditions have been set calculations will be executed Each measurement obtained is judged to be OK or NG based on the criteria entered by the user If itis OK 1 ON will be used as the input condition for the following calculation on the ladder circuit and if itis NG 0 OFF will be used 2 Ladder circuit calculation based on output conditions for measurements 0 to 3 The values obtained from the measurement processing are used as the input conditions fo
472. rement center of gravity area measurement by binary conversion counting quantities by binary conversion identifying objects by binary conversion Binary image window Dotted lines mask How to set a circle window The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the circle window center radius Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line round window 1 Specifying the center Down key Left key Right key e 2 Specifying the radius en 09 lt Up right key Down left key 4 Elliptical window Line type Image processing used Measurement programs Distance and angle measurement center of gravity area measurement by binary conversion counting quantities by binary conversion identifying objects by binary conversion Solid lines Window containing a binary image Distance and angle measurement center of gravity area measurement by binary conversion counting quantities by binary conversion identifying objects by binary conversion Binary image window Dotted lines mask How to set an elliptical window The following items on the settings menu can be used to define the elliptical window center radius Shown here is an example of how to define a solid line elliptical window 1 Specifying the center Up key Down key Left key Right key BS eu 2 Specifying the radius Up key Down key Left key Right key O O OO 9 5 Share
473. required for inspection or tial image measurement will be captured 9 The processing time is shorter than the WHOLE IMAGE mode A whole image will be captured irrespective of the window WHOLE IMAGE settings for inspection or measurement whole image This mode is used to monitor portions of an image outside the window set up for inspection or measurement No image will be captured during operation Measurements will NO be carried out with an image being displayed no image This mode only used to carry out measurements on an image transmitted from a personal computer to the IV S20 Operation procedure 1 On the RUN MENU SETTINGS menu shown above move the cursor to item 3 CAPTURE AN IMAGE with the up and down keys and press the SET key 2 Move the cursor to PARTIAL IMAGE WHOLE IMAGE or NO with the left and right keys and press the SET key Example of a comparison of the capture times If the number of lines required has been set to 120 When PARTIAL IMAGE is specified Approx 8 ms When WHOLE IMAGE is specified Approx 33 ms regardless of the number of lines Whole image reading Partial image reading i y 480 lines approx 33 ms ij 120 lines co 8 ms Run Menu Conditions and Settings 3 Message display Select YES or NO to display messages on the MAIN OPS MENU On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c
474. result returns OK then the MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY output is turned ON If it is NG then it 5 UPPER MENU is turned OFF Items the regtangle are the same for each When carrying out a test using item 2 measuremet program MAKE A TEST RUN on the menu the resulting measurement values and the evaluation OK or NG will be displayed Evaluation conditions Settings details REGST NO Set to 0 to 3 corresponds to the registration number item REGT NO registration number registration number on the measurement condition menu MEASURING COND NUMBER Set the range for the number of objects which will produce an OK judgment number of objects 3 TOTAL AREA Set the range for the total surface area which will produce an OK judgment 4 MAKE A TEST RUN To carry out a MAKE A TEST RUN of the evaluation conditions push the SET key The results will be displayed This will also record the details of the settings 5 UPPER MENU Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 0 to 3 menu The setting procedure The setting headings from the EVALUATION COND evaluation conditions menu above Enter the registration number corresponding to the registration number from the REGST NO registration number MEASURING COND measurements condition menu Y Make the measurements MAKE A TEST RUN make a test run Y Enter the upper and lower limi
475. rpose serial parallel Setting order Configuration example SETTINGS Camera 1 image capturing D MEAS TRIG INP IF PARALLEL SERIAL CCD TRIG eco Camera 2 image capturing SERIAL OUTPUT PC LINK SERIAL LE jn LT INPUT PARALLEL L Personal computer bata zx IV S20 main housing Le SERIAL CONDITIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU Power supply 24 VDC sess Type selection switch X110 X4 External trigger photo sensor or proximity sensor The data in a block No set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT amp SERIAL OUTPUT on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu will be output from the IV S20 to the personal computer See page 11 20 Time chart 10 ms or more Measurement start input X0 10 ms 10 ms or more or more j Object type number input X1 to X4 Specified object type number Specified object type number BUSY output Lt a BUSY signal is turned OFF at the conclusion of the result output Terminate measurement E E C119 p a Measurement result is valid at the end s of a measurement C 03 x n 4 PC calculation P P P P Halt
476. rt address have been set correctly Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned ON the power Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the screen Make sure that measurement can be started by using the key pad to send a trigger signal Make sure that the camera cables have been correctly connected Measurement does not start even when a start trigger is given Make sure that the device to send a trigger signal have been properly connected to the input terminals the IV S20 main housing Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned ON the power Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the screen Make sure that the camera cables have been correctly connected Measurement results are not Make sure that the devices have been properly connected to the input terminals on the IV S20 main housing output Make sure that you waited about 5 seconds after you turned ON the power Make sure that the MAIN OPS MENU is displayed on the screen Make sure that the lighting equipment does not flicker Make sure that the lens has not fogged up Check the lens for contamination Measurement results are unstable or NG results occur Make sure that the focus ring has not turned Make sure that the camera lock screw has been secured frequently
477. s Registration Registration No 1 to 63 contain the same data as the registration No 1 to 63 No 0 No of Decimal Block Item Sign point digit Registration No 0 None Evaluation Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same Distance No 1to 15 data as the registration No 0 Registration No 0 Evaluation Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same Angle No 1 to 15 data as the registration No 0 Registration No 0 Evaluation Start Registration Registration No 1 to 63 contain the same No 1 to 63 data as the registration No 0 Registration No 0 None 2 None Evaluation q Auxiliary point Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same No 1 to 15 data as the registration No 0 Registra Auxiliary point dinate Bons Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same No 1 to 15 data as the registration No 0 Evaluation Registration No 0 None 2 None Degree of Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same match No 1 to 15 data as the registration No 0 Registration No 0 Provided Degree of Registration Registration No 1 to 15 contain the same match No 1 to 15 data as the registration No 0 Number of labels Dummy data RAE NN 5 places When evaluations are specified distance angle start point auxiliary point degree of match if the number of registered item is
478. s C N Tx T x XT Correlation between reference images N Area of reference image T Density of reference image I Density of input image ra G 7 Glossary Object identification and numbering function labeling Object identification and numbering labeling is a process for locating separate object and assigning serial numbers labels one at a time in a binary image By this process multiple objects in the same binary image can be handled separately or as a group Object identifi Binary cation conver in order of E sion scanning Island bject identification 4 in order of area 2 Island 1 P Partial CCD reading The partial CCD reading technique reads only that part of the CCD which contains the object needed for image processing This can shorten the data transfer time from the CCD camera to the image memory To read the entire CCD image 480 horizontal lines takes approximately 33 ms With the partial reading technique e g 120 horizontal lines can take only 25 96 of the time to read the entire image The IV S20 can automatically determine the width of the partial image window You can change back and forth between reading the whole image and a partial image Whole image reading Partial image reading 512 512 480 120 m Pixel On the CCD the electrically charged elements are in close proximity arranged in a matrix 480 lines in vertical direction 512 r
479. s angle fillet diameter and circumf erence of each object No 1 to No 6 Inspection procedure Image capture Convert to binary values Label with serial numbers Measurement area gravity center spindle axis angle fillet diameter and circumference Detailed Setting measurement program See 9 9 Object identification by binary conversion tion Overview 8 Existence inspection by point measurement The presence or absence of target objects is examined A simple black or white evaluation is made in the specified pixel area of binary Purpose images The light level in the specified pixel area is averaged and a decision is made whether or not it is within the specified lightness range in gray scale images Checking the presence or absence of packed parts inspecting the working condition of LEDs or fluorescent character display tubes and sorting household electric appliances Applications Inspection at 6 points L1 Number of points max 128 points at average light levels 256 points in binary images o o Point size 2 m x 2n pixels m n 1 to 16 Example Inspection sequence Image capture Binary image Black white evaluation conversion of points Average light Light level evaluation level of points Operating instruction example Detailed See 3 6 Existance inspection by point measurement instruction Set
480. s distance condition 9 65 Distance between Y coordinates manual measurement essen 8 8 Distance conditions distance and angle 9 65 Distance number distance and angle measurement essem 9 65 Download all parameters gt innen nennen nn nnns 12 2 Edge detection inert e Pe i EH REOR eR 9 11 G 3 Edge detection conditions Positional deviation measurement 9 36 Editing O70 011 10 ETE ERE 9 28 InitialiZatlOnz sioe eh ettet tet eet eter and debe ep dede reed n dees bugie s pedit 9 32 Edge extraction ais m RERO e CERAM PUR te RE eril eder ge PR deed 9 9 G 3 Eliminating binary noise the number of times Area measurement by binary conversion essssssesseseeeeeneeeeeene 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion esssssesseseeeeeeeenennennn enne 9 93 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 51 Distance and angle measurement nennen ennemis 9 62 Object identification by point measurement sssssssssseee en
481. s set using the up and down keys The numbers of the selected points will flash No color is displayed for unregistered point numbers MAKE A TEST RUN Pressing the SET key will test the evaluation conditions display the test results UPPER MENU This will return you to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Assign an OK measurement value of white or black after checking the test results OK NG from the item MAKE A TEST RUN Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS v Go to page 9 113 9 111 Existence inspection by point measurement From page 9 110 When AV LIGHT LEVEL average light level is selected for the processing mode Average light level of the points EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 POINT MEAS D CHGPAGE TEST RUN TEST RESULT UT ONSE a uomen 9 P000 000 255 106 OK 4 NO E OK when the average light level of a P001 000 255 400 point is within the range set NG when P002 000265 2010072 OK NO the SUBE me 5 P003 000 255 1100 OK iNO These displays can be set using the up 6 P004 000 255 100 iNO anddown keys The choices are NO 7 P005 NS MEC YO to 7 or C000 to C127 PO06 i i 8 P007 i lt Not displayed for point numbers which STORE ALL COND 000 255 have not been previously registered on MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY the point setting
482. s the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPEO0 MEASO type 00 measurement 0 menu 6 Press the ESC key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu Y Continued on the following page 3 11 Operation Examples Position measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 9 Setting the final evaluation output condition This setting is used to output the result of the final evaluation externally see page 3 14 The final evaluation result is always output to the auxiliary relay C112 When the final evaluation result is OK C112 is ON and when the result is NG it is OFF The result of final evaluation can be externally output by using the auxiliary relay C112 1 On the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu move the cursor to FINAL OUTPUT COND final output conditions and press the SET key gt The RESULTS OUTPUT final evaluation conditions menu will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to 1PAGE NO register number and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES and press the SET key c Items Gwill be displayed RESULTS OUTPUT 00 2 C DPAGE NO 077 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE 4 INPUT SIGNAL AUXRLY C112 0 127 EXT INP X0 0 6 TMO 0 7 CNT 077 0715 OUT 00 0715 LOGICAL SYMBOL l DEL OUTPUT SIGNAL __ OUT Y00 0715 AUXRLY 000 07127 TMO 077 SET VL000 0007999 CNT CNO 0 7 SET VL00
483. s turned ON and a filled box llis displayed When the result is NG an empty box is displayed When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON YO is turned ON according to the condition set in step 8 for final evaluation output 3 43 Operation Examples Position correction 3 7 Position correction example of point measurement In the setting example shown in section 3 6 Existence inspection by point measurement points were set on the segment of number display the object to be measured and the each of the points was checked for the correct condition However the object to be measured is not always located exactly at the preset points To deal with this problem use the position correction function Then the preset coordinates of the points are corrected according to positional deviation of the actual object and the measurement can be carried out correctly 1 Set the points using item 1 to 10 in section 3 6 Existence inspection by point measurement y 2 Using the decimal point in a 7 segment display as a positioning mark F Search window Qu Em image window Move the reference point as described in items 1 to 10 in section 3 2 Position measurement After the setting move the cursor to SSET SCRN on the MAIN OPS MENU and press the SET key gt The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Move the cursor to OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key
484. se application Measurement is started by a CCD trigger and the measurement result is output externally warning lamp etc In this case sampling operation is automatically started Camera 1 image CCD trigger H Camera 2 image Monitor Remote key pad LI IV S20 main housing Power supply 24 VDC 8 Warning lamp etc External output penes System Configuration 2 When a programmable controller is connected Purpose application Measurement is started by a CCD trigger sampling start input a photo sensor etc and the measurement data is output to a programmable controller The object type number is selected by the programmable controller 2 Remote key pad Camera 2 image Camera 1 image CCD trigger b v 1 Data computer link Monitor I qo ci IV S20 main housing Power supply Programmable controller LN Start sampling input Type switching parallel I F
485. se the image processing speed set the shutter speed to around 1 1000 or 1 2000 seconds However if you use a faster shutter speed than you need very bright lights will be necessary and bright lighting is not economical For details about the relationship between the brightness of objects objects to be measured and the shutter speed see section 6 1 2 Illumination and shutter speed Example When the shutter speed is slow When the shutter speed is fast 1 60 of a second 1 1000 of a second The object is blurred across the screen The object is frozen on the screen 9 117 Chapter 10 PC Function The PC function is designed to create a ladder circuit program based on the data coordinates distance degree of match and results of numerical calculations obtained from the measurements and calculations made by the IV S20 Then it outputs the results of the calculations performed by the circuit Use of the PC function enables the IV S20 to output measurement results to an external equipment such as a lamp by itself without the need for an external PC 10 1 Operation cycle The operation cycle of the IV S20 is outlined below This flowchart contains only the operations related to the PC function and does not show communications with external devices C PowerON 2 Power ON sequence gt Input refresh Ladder circuit calculation final output conditions
486. section 7 2 Screen specifications for Y details about the through freeze mode 7 Operation for the gray scale search matching setting 1 Press the ESC key and all of the menus used for setting the gray scale search conditions will be displayed MEASURE WINDOW RECTANGLE X LINE Y LINE REFERENCE IMAGE MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP SEARCH AREA MOVE UP L 216 200 LO R 295 279 VEN DETECTED COORD CNTR 256 240 CONTRACTPIXELS 1 2 3 4 X DDETECT ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH UPPER MENU If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image setting is hindered press the ESC key Only item will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to 2 REFERENCE IMAGE using the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Surround the image for correction of detection line in the image window solid line Move the cursor to MOVE UP L or LO R with the right and left keys and press the SET key Then position the window When the position is correct press the SET key MOVE The white rectangle is moved using the up down right or left key 4 pixels at a time The upper left corner is moved using the up down right or left key 4 pixels at a time The lower right corner is moved using the up down right or left key 4 pixels at a time Image window Image for correcting the detection line 4 After the image window position has been defined move the cursor to REG
487. serial 13 23 eto ajo aliu Se 14 13 Operation nnns nennen 3 38 Outline cette uon Conc AL aed Lue E ET i Ate esta at MER 1 7 9 107 Setting ARR 9 108 Setting details aie Ge erre dde ut acu nd Ld t ei E deae 9 109 Expansion binary noise elimination 9 10 G 3 G 4 Extension camera cable IV S20EC2 4 sssssssssssssssess ener nnne 4 2 6 8 External input terminals XO to 10 10 External output instructions YO to Y 15 eene nennen nnns 10 12 Externaltrgger seeren 3 iei e RR HS E Ed Pu eiii ees 4 3 F Fillet width object identification by binary conversion 9 102 G 4 Final calculation result terminals essseeseeeenneeene nennen E 10 10 Final evaluation result itti ta tee Ee A cea eed e ORE PER SERRE Re Ie nse 3 14 Final numerical calculations 9 18 Final numeric calculation result measurement data block Communication general purpose Serial I F sese 13 24 Gorputer links t iiec noe Cre bte dete 14 14 Final output conditions 2 ener eerta Hr a ee Ra Ene take de ERE 10 8
488. set point coordinates will be moved according to the actual position of the decimal point Then the point inspection will be conducted 3 44 Operation Examples Numeric calculation 3 8 Use of numeric calculations example of shape and size inspection Shown below is an example of the operation for evaluating and outputting the differences in the X Y coordinates between the points in images 1 and 2 based on the result of numeric calculations This example uses the example from section 3 3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size A Image 1 Image 2 Difference between X coordinates Detection point of image 1 Detection point of image 2 Object to be measured EH 1 Create the images following the instructions of items 1 to 8 in 3 3 Degree of match inspec tion for shape and size After creating the images move the cursor to 3 NUMERIC CALC COND on the matching level inspection menu and press the SET key c The NUMERIC CALC numeric calculation menu will be displayed Difference between Y coordinates Y 2 Operation on the NUMERIC CALC numeric calculation menu NUMERIC CALC TYPEO0 MEAS 1 DEG OF MATCH DCALC RESULT N00 0 15 14 OBJECT TYPE NO MATCH M CORDIX Y LEVL G 2 NUM CALC NC CNST C 5 FORMULA UPPER amp LOWERLIMIT 00000000 0 00000000 0 41 OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 RUNATEST SET KEY 67 UPPER
489. sing the smoothing function However it can also be dealt with through the expansion contraction noise elimination method D Expansion A single white dot or small groups of white dots in the middle of a black background can be eliminated from the image 2 Contraction A single black dot or small groups of black dots in the middle of a white background can be eliminated from the image D Expansion contraction When isolated dots of noise are eliminated by expansion the areas enlarged by the expansion are returned to their original size by contracting them again c c c 7 7 gt D c m e 1 coc Eo TE o mo O 2 Contraction gt expansion When isolated white noise is eliminated by contraction the areas shrunk by contraction are returned to their original size by expanding them again c c e o o eo 5 S 8 o gt lt mo O Lu The IV S20 has both contraction expansion and expansion contraction functions for eliminating binary noise Number of times of expansion and number of times of contraction can be set independenly When the number of contraction cycles is set to 0 and the number of expansion cycles is one or greater then only the expansion function will be used On the other hand if the number of expansion cycles is set to 0 and the number of contraction cycles is one or greater then only the contraction function will be used Measure
490. sing the ESC key Menu Setting details G MEAS WINDOW MDLO measurement window Select the measurement window shape for model 0 positioning QREF IMAGE MODELO reference images X LINE horizontal line Y LINE vertical line Record a reference image for model 0 The upper left or lower right area of the screen specified above will change according the setting in item 1 The selection The display in the upper left at item 1 lower right areas of the screen RECTANGLE rectangle Upper left lower right Starting point end point Q SEARCH AREA MDLO search area If model 0 is set to SEARCH search then enter the search area DTECT COORD MDLO detection coordinates 5 CONTR PIXEL MDLO pixel contraction MEAS WINDOW MDL1 measurement window model 0 contraction level REF IMAGE MODEL1 reference image amp SEARCH AREA MDL1 search area 0 numbers 1 to DTECT COORD MDL1 detection coordinates 0 CONTR PIXEL MDL1 pixel contraction DDETECT ACCURANCY accuracy of detection UPPER MENU Continued on the following page conditions menu 9 48 Set the position of the cursor inside the measurement window for If FREE is selected then the position of cursor is optional If model 0 is set to SEARCH search yes then enter the pixel C See page 9 6 gray scale processing in shared settings When either X LINE horizon
491. spection ssssssssssssssssseee eee nennen nnnm 9 78 Copying editing Copying between measurement programs sesenta 9 29 Copying between object types 9 28 Counter instructions CNO to 10 12 Counter terminals CNO to CN7 10 10 Counting quantities by binary conversion Measurement data block Communication general purpose serial I F sse 13 20 Gomip ter links iu ciiin erret ete eit Uca E ettet curte eu te ate ia 14 10 cce cde ote cec eet need ve tanta ims rt eL ELEME 1 6 9 90 Setting SEQUENCE s aes cag aera e ER usu exe EDGE RES E Deme Fe 9 91 Setting detalls etc 9 92 Criteria conditions degree of match inspection for shape and 2 9 47 Criteria search condition lead inspection 9 74 9 75 Crosshair Cursor display oci ine tinal ROAD aie as ae etes 8 8 D Dataflow Computer 2 222 4 0 ais d ie a eee eu ae ne adi nds 14 2 Data flow general purpose Serial l F eene 13 3 Data length Rte eet dt etti ente d 11 18 Degree of
492. spection Continued from the preceding page Y 7 Operation for the gray scale search matching setting setting the reference image 0 1 Press the ESC key and all menus to be used for setting the gray scale search conditions will be displayed DMES WINDOW MDLO RECTANGLE XLINE YLINE REF IMAGE MDLO MOVE UP L 224 208 LO R 287 271 REG DISP 27 SEARCH AREA MDLO MOVE UP L 216 200 HUE 5 DDTECT COORD MDLO CNTR FREE 256 240 6 SCONTRPIXEL MDLO 1 2 3 ACCURANCY STANDARD HIGH UPPER MENU If the menu overlaps the image to be measured so that further image setting is hindered press the ESC key Only item 1 will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to 2 REF IMAGE MDLO reference image with the up and down keys and press the SET key 3 Create an image window solid line for use as the reference image Move the cursor to MOVE UP L or LO R with the left and right keys and press the SET key Then position the window The white rectangle is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time The upper left corner is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time The lower right corner is moved using the up down right or left keys 4 pixels at a time When the position is correct press the SET key Image window for setting the range where the degree of match will be evaluated Ima
493. ss within the following range Range address D data register 0 to 999900 Note To write data from the IV S20 to a Mitsubishi PC use the WW QW write command The range that can be written using the write command WW QW is D0000 to D1023 D000000 to D008191 due to the limitation of Mitsubishi PCs The write all address can be set within the range of limitation for Mitsubishi PCs See page 11 19 14 24 Computer Link 3 Connections Shown below are the connections with a calculator link module 0 Example of RS 232C connection n Calculator link module Communication connector on Incaseof25 Incaseof9 the IV S20 RS232C RS422 pins connector pins connector Shielded cable i a Connector shield FG 15m or less RS 232C Note Jumper the RS CS DR and CD lines Do not jumper the SG For RS 232C communications create the sequence program shown below in order to set no CD terminal check for the CD terminal check setting For details see the instruction manual for Mitsubishi s calculator link module Xn7 TOP n1 H10B 1 K1 E 2 Example of RS 422 communication Communication connector on the IV S20 Calculator link RS232C RS422 Shielded twisted pair cable module mue Re pet k SDA SG sa F 1 km max RS 422 4 line system 14 25
494. st distance between center points between center points Area measurement by binary conversion 9 7 Area measurement by binary conversion This function is used to determine the existence and or size of a workpiece when the workpiece is in one place or when it has a fixed measurement position This function measures the area of the white field after the image has been converted to binary values i e black and white Purpose Checking for correctly inserted ball bearings preventing foreign objects from becoming mixed in with parts being processed distinguishing between different types of waterproof lids checking the existence of labels on packages checking the printing on electric cables checking for adequate coatings of grease and checking the existence of frozen foods Application Measured result The area of the workpiece Workpiece Example Checking sequence Taking an image gt Convert it to binary Measure area 9 82 Area measurement by binary conversion 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU SYSTEM SETUP OBJECT TYPE COND SET SCRN 2 TYPE COND MEASUREMENT 1 MEASUREMENT 2 2 MEASUREMENT 3 MEAS SELECTION COMPARE IMAGES SELECT Select the
495. stance angle measurement center of gravity 5 lead inspection 6 area measurement after binary conversion 7 object counting after binary conversion 8 label measurement after binary conversion 9 existence detection with a point measurement 13 9 Communication 2 Measurement data reading function 2 measurement numerical data code 22 The data last output and block data from a specified measurement function are output 1 Object Output evaluation M i type resu Specified i 2 Remo i vov mis block data SCiSC CR 2 E Command le Block 25 scisclcr ae 38 1 law MResponse H D Measurement gt Number of the measurement whose numerical data will be output 0 to Block Specified block from which the data from a specified measurement function will be output Object type Object type for which the measurement was executed 00 to 15 Output evaluation result YO to Y15 gt 0 NG or unspecified 1 OK Specified block data gt Numerical data in a specified block up to 512 bytes 3 Measurement data reading function 3 evaluation result logical result and calculation result code 23 The most recent final evaluation result and the logical result and final calculation result of each measurement are read E Command Object 2 3 YPE scisc cn E Response D T
496. stem C mount System Interline transfer system monocrome CCD Reading Picture taking Size Full pixel stand alone reading type a partial reading of selected lines us possible 1 8 inch element Effective no of pixels 512 horizontal x 480 vertical Element shape Square Shutter speed s 1 30 to 1 10000 Shutter Method Random shutter Storage ambient temperature 20to 70 C Operation ambient temperature 45 C Operation ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH non condensing Vibration resistance JIS C 0911 or equivalent Amplitude 2mm 10 to 55 Hz 147m s 55 to 150Hz Shock resistance JIS C 0912 or equivalent 980 m s each three times in X Y and Z directions Operation atmosphere Outside dimensions mm No corrosive gases or dust 30 W x 32 D x 40 H except lens and protruding portions Weight 240 g not including the lens Camera cable Cable length 3 m 16 3 Specifications 2 Camera IV 830C1 C2 Item Specifications Standard IV S30C1 Micro IV S30C2 Optical system Lens mount method C mount Custom 17 mm mount Method Interline transmission method monochrome CCD Reading system Full pixel type partial image scanning is available Picture taking Reading 39 TN No of effective 545 horizontal x 480 vertical pixels Pixel shape Squar
497. stem which reads all of pixels of image information from the CCD element one after another is referred to as full pixel reading system This system provides the same high resolution for moving objects as it does for static objects On the other hand conventional CCDs using the NTSC scanning technique must read an object two times First the odd lines are read and then the even lines Therefore NTSC system produces blurry images of moving objects In order to solve this problem the NTSC system can read only the odd lines The disadvantage is that only half the resolution is available Conventional NTSC system Full pixel reading system gt lt Odd line gt soe gt gt Even line gt E z SS gt EEE AARAA x gt gt lt CCD ERRARE lt Eo Odd line Even line Full lines Image signal LI LI LI G Gray scale check using the normalization correlation method Even when the IV S20 is looking at the same object as the object used for the reference image the new target image and the previously stored reference image may not match completely due to variations in the illumination conditions and the ambient light In order to check the resemblance between the two sets of image data the normalization correlation method can be used In order to check w
498. surement is started and the output of the results are controlled by a general purpose serial I F signal IV S20 Receiving a command Measuring 2 Transmitting a response for each object type measurement data and judgment Personal computer 2 Data flow when the measurement is started by a CCD trigger or a parallel I F signal and the output of the evaluation results are controlled by a general purpose serial I F signal IV S20 Inputting a trigger Measuring for each object type 2 Transmitting a response measurement data and judgment CCD camera or programmable controller Personal computer or programmable controller A response block can be specified in the settings on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu See page 11 21 2 When the measurement execution processing code is 18 19 1A or 1B IV S20 1 Start sampling T CCD camera eo oO ao 25 29 3 Transmitting 5 a response measurement data and judgment Personal computer sending a command or programmable controller parallel input Personal computer or programmable controller 3 Processing other than measurement execution processing Any processing can be executed irrespective of the input output settings measurement start input and result output IV S20 _ Receiving a command Processing 2 Transmitting a response
499. t RE 10 16 Number of objects Counting quantities by binary conversion sesssssssesseseeneeeeenennennn nnne nennen nnne 9 94 ESL 9 78 Objects identification by binary conversion sssssseseeseeneneeee ennemis 9 103 Numerical caleulations eie ite tee e Re dees edet esee etd eee ete 9 14 Final numerical calculations essere enne nennen nennen nennen 9 18 Operation examiple pata ag eve dua Sai aeu pc quede ea v die ee 3 45 Type and number of styles of entered for each measurement program 9 17 Numerical calculation conditions Area measurement by binary conversion ssssseseeseeeeeeneeeeee 9 87 Counting quantities by binary conversion seessssssseseseeeneeneneeennennn nnne nennen 9 95 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 54 Distance and angle measurement sssssssssssssseseeeeeee nennen nennen nnne nennt 9 68 Lead inspection tete ri Ht t st atest ee este uetus uso edendo euet 9 79 Object identification by binary conversion ssssssssseeeeneeeneeeen ennemis 9 104 Positional deviation measurement 9 42 O Object distance and angle measurement eene nennen nenne 9 67 Object conditions to be meas
500. t and right keys and select the required figure using the up and down keys UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND menu Y Continued on the following page 9 101 Object identification labeling by binary conversion Continued from the previous page Window settings In order to set a window it is necessary to freeze the image First freeze the image Then operate the camera normally Finally freeze the image again The first frozen image that was taken will be converted to binary values and this will be the final binary image The second frozen image that was taken may also be converted to a binary image by repeating steps 1 to 43 above Example of recording an image Measurement window rectangular The binary image will be the contents of the measurement window after the portion excluded by the mask window ee has been removed Mask window rectangular MEASURING COND TYPE00 MEAS 1 LABEL BIN OBJ DREGST NO 00 0 3 REG NO YES BINARY AREA COND TO NEXT SUB MENU FIND CENT GRAVITY NO YES MAIN AXIS ANGLE YES S FILLET DIAMETER NO YES PERIMETER LENGTH NO YES DUPPER MENU _ Set measurement items 3 to to NO or YES as desired Center of gravity main axis angle Center of gravity X1 Y1 Calculated from the area and the position of each object X1 1 ZX N Sy N N Area Main axis angle Angle betwee
501. t level 0 to 255 PRC PROJECT MDLO Select whether to employ artifact processing in model 0 or not artifact C See page 9 12 artifact processing DETECT MODE MDL1 detection mode DETECT DIR MDL1 detection direction 8 DETECT AREA MDL1 Set these items for model 1 just the same way as item 1 to area of detection above THRESHOLD MODEL1 threshold values PRC PROJECT MDL1 artifact processing REG REF COORD register Register a coordinate which is used as the reference point for reference coodinates edge detection 2 UPPER MENU This will return you to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu For more information about the settings for edge detection see page 9 11 Edge detection in shared settings v Continued on the following page 9 39 Positional deviation measurement Continued from the previous page Procedure for setting the conditions for edge detection When you specify a 1P EDGE 1 point edge or a 1P SCH 1P EDGE 1 point search 1 point edge CDDETECT MODE MDLO detection mode DETECT DIR MDLO detection direction G DETECT AREA MDLO area of detection Lx 4 THRESHOLD MODELO threshold values PRC PROJECT MDLO artifact processing When a 2P EDGE 2 point edge has been specified CDDETECT MODE MDLO DETECT DIR MDLO d
502. t to RECTANGLE lt This is how the display looks This is how the display looks THRESHOLD VALUE U LM 255 L LM 100 0 255 when item 3 MASK amp 1INVERT B W NO YES WINDOW TYPE is set to BINARY PROCESS FIXED THRSHOLD ADJ VAR DIFF VAR RATE RECTANGLE 8BOUNDARY PROCESS VALD INVLD 9 LABEL ORDER SACN ORDER SIZE ORDER IMAGE PRE PROCESS OFF SMOOTH EDGE EMPHASIS ALL EDGE HORZ EDGE VERT EDGE BINARY NOIS FILTR EXP CONTR CONTR EXP NUM OF FILTR PASS EXPD 0 0 5 CONTRO 0 5 i AREA FILTER 000000PIXEL LOWER LIMIT UPPER MENU Item will be displayed unless item 3 is set to NO G MEAS WINDOW TYPE measurement window Select measurement window type RECTANGLE rectangular CIRCLE circular or ELLIPSE elliptical MEAS WINDOW POSIT measurement window position Set the size and position of the window in units of 1 pixel If circle or ellipse is selected in item 1 then the two variables you must set are the center and diameter MASK WINDOW TYPE Decide whether a mask window will be employed and if so which type rectangular round or elliptical A mask window exists inside the boundary of the measurement window and screens out those parts of the image which are not needed for the measurement process MASK WINDOW POSIT mask window position Set the size and position of the mask window which is drawn with a dotted line using units of 1 pixel If a circle or
503. t type and press the SET key NO none CAM 1 camera 1 EDIT OBJECT TYPE COND OBJECT TYPE NO TITLE REGISTRATION MEAS 0 CAMERA 5 POS ADJ CAMERA 8MEAS 0 CAMERA2 POS ADJ CAMERA2 SELECT CAMERA IMG 00 0 15 COPY OBJ TYPEO0 INITIALIZE TO NEXT SUB MENU NO TO NEXT SUB MENU NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY NO TO NEXT SUB MENU NO ADJ REG 0 1PNTSXY NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT 2MEASUREMENT 5SYSTEM IN OUT UPPER MENU Q3FINAL CALC RESULT FINAL OUTPUT COND HALT MEAS ON NG 1 NO TO NEXT SUB MENU 2 TO NEXT SUB MENU 3 TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU NO YES At item SELECT CAMERA IMG camera selection select the NO CAM1 CAM2 or CAM1 amp 2 with left and right keys and press the SET key When you have specified the camera item 9 COMPARE IMAGES will be displayed The display seen when 8 is set to CAM1 8SELECT CAMERA IMG NO CAM1 CAM1 CAM1 amp 2 9 COMPARE IMAGES T NO SUB 1 T1 DIFF ABS TA When 8 is set otherwise 9 will be displayed as shown below in column 9 COMPARE IMAGES calculation between images Subtraction 11 1 The absolute value of the difference between I1 T1 The list of the settings which may be selected at item 9 COMPARE IMAGES comparative calculations between images is as follows Contents Comp
504. tal line or Y LINE vertical line are selected in item 1 you can select only 1 or 2 in item 5 The settings for these are the same for model 1 as they are for model Set the level of detection precision for models 0 and 1 C See page 9 6 Gray scale processing in shared settings This will return you to the MEASURING COND measurement Degree of match inspection Continued from the previous page When the GRAY IMG PROC gray scale processing mode is selected The setting sequence for criteria condition This is the sequence to follow when model 0 positioning is set to NO SEARCH do not search and model 1 object to be measured is set to NO CDMEAS WINDOW MDLO REF IMAGE MODELO DTECT COORD MDLO measurement window reference image detection coordinates mc DETECT ACCURANCY accuracy of detection 2 UPPER MENU gt This is the sequence to follow when model 0 positioning is set to SEARCH search and model 1 object to be measured is set to NO MEAS WINDOW MDLO IMAGE MODELO measurement window reference image m SEARCH AREA MDLO DTECT COORD MDLO 5 CONTR PIXEL MDLO detection coordinates DETECT ACCURANCY pixel contraction accuracy of detection p gt QQUPPER MENU This is the sequence to follow when model 0 positio
505. tandard The position is adjusted because of a detected angular deviation in rotation 2 point search 2 point edge 1 point search 1 point edge from measurement 0 The high precision angular correction settings allows the IV S20 to display a very precisely corrected image But this selection lowers rotation processing speed Angular correction high precision Example of a comparison between standard and high precision angular correction Scanned image 9 Image after correction N Jos 1 N jb 8 0 Ww gH 8 i O0 M lt B o E 3 5 D N ON o i 5 HE B 8 eh lt gt Ons T 95 Lm es i lt 5 E H mH Standard High precision 0 image after angular correction 9 20 Shared settings 2 Operation setting details Setting takes place at camera 1 2 in items 5 and 6 on the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE COND DOBJECT NO 00 0 15 EDIT COPY OBJ TYPEO0 INITIALIZE TITLE REGISTRATION TO NEXT SUB MENU MEAS 0
506. tart input i by turning OFF measurement start CCD trigger 4 n input X0 cycle Object type number input Specified object type number X1 to X4 Result Result Computer link Output ifs M output CCD trigger Black White Black window i i not highlighted i t Trigger i E Trigger 1 i BUSY signal is turned OFF i 1 d at the clusion of y 1 x the result output BUSY output x Terminate T IR ES measurement 119 m i Measurement result is valid at the i end of a measurement E PC calculation P P P P Halt PC operation CIE JHR P P P P Halt PC operation P P P P P P P P P P condition C C C C during measurement C C C C C C C C C C C C during When the object type is changed Ses Parallel output is valid for PC control after E all Y output and auxiliary relays the measurement result is determined 1 turn OFF E Parallel output een Result output ye Result output Note Result output The data in the block No set in item 5 COMPUTER LINK OUT amp SERIAL OUTPUT on the OBJECT TYPE 1 0 menu will be transmitted to the personal computer See page 11 20 11 11 Setting the Input Output Conditions 8 Measurement start input CCD trigger start sampling object type change general purpose serial result output general purpose seria
507. te All items will be output regardless of whether the registration is YES or NO 14 14 Computer Link No of Decimal Block Item Sign wet point z digits digit Dummy data None Result Provided Provided Evaluation None None Dummy data Results of numerical calculations Result Provided measurement 0 camera 1 Evaluation None Dummy data Provided Provided Results of numerical calculations measurement 0 camera 2 to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical NOO to N15 contain the same data as those calculations in the item measurement 0 camera 1 measurement 1 Results of numerical calculations NOO to N15 contain the same data as those measurement 2 in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of numerical calculations measurement 3 to N15 contain the same data as those in the item measurement 0 camera 1 Results of the final ANOO to AN15 contain the same data as those MEA pori in the NOO to N15 of item measurement 0 camera 1 Evaluation result values are expressed as 0 NG 1 OK or 2 no evaluation Note Blank items are omitted and the remaining lines are moved up 14 15 Computer Link 14 4 Interface The interface between the IV S20 and a programmable controller from each manufacturer is described below Programmable controller Sett
508. te area changes SAO 255 depending on the threshold setting As the value increases 9 the black part grows larger Stable range White As the value decreases a the white part grows larger 0 Horizontal coordinate Inspection image of the dotted line Changing the lower limit threshold is less than 20 actual measurement If the stable range in the lower limit threshold measurement errors may occur 6 After setting the lower limit press the SET key 7 Move the cursor to 4 SET POINT setting point and press the SET key c The point setting menu will be displayed Y Continued on the following page 3 40 Operation Examples Point measurement Continued from the preceding page Y 6 Operation for point setting Y 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the ESC key and all of the menus to be used for point setting will be displayed Point No registration P000 4 POINT SIZE Y 08X X 08 2 32 STO PNT POSITIONS 000 0 255 REG NO YES START POINT POS MOVE BLOCK LAYOUT 001 001 P001 BLOCK SPACING 004 004 2 STORE BLOCK COND EXEC DDELETE BLOCK COND EXEC 8UPPER MENU P006 P002 do P004 Am M AS Move the cursor to 2 STO PNT POSITIONS point registration individual with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES with the left and right keys and press the S
509. te diis 9 74 Lead length lead inspection aena 9 78 Lead length nnns 9 74 LED lighting equipment IV GOLD 4 2 6 2 16 7 Encre 6 3 1 Lens focal lengthi tere eae tette RR t RR 6 3 6 5 5 1 6 3 Lighting equipment 2 ccce ne et ete eee dee mei ee eL de eee eerie 6 1 A 1 Light level degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 53 LOCK KNDD ceniona ETT T 5 1 Noe EIE 5 1 M Main axis angle object identification by binary 9 102 G 7 mets reo ere CL ensued tre mE ser 12 5 15 5 Manual measurement crosshair cursor display eene 8 8 Manual setting the object type 8 9 Manual type changea esee i tet iot ea e ep iei D ui x CER Ro REA REESE Pu a USER 7 3 10 16 MET suns M G 7 Area measurement by binary conversion ssssssssseeeeene nennen nennen nnns 9 85 Counting quantities by binary conversion sssssseseseeeeeee
510. ter link 13 20 14 12 Changed data order for the block 0 of Label measurement after binary conversion 13 19 14 11 Changed data order for the masurement programs Block 2 in distance and angle measurements block 0 in lead 14 8 to 10 inspection block 0 in area measurement by binary conversion block 0 in label measurement after binary conversion Computer link The reference image registration function using input terminal X5 has been extended to make it available with camera 2 Binary image displays are set to Yes and the MAIN OPS MENU the measuring time is reduced Example of the measuring time Measurement conditions Parallel input X5 Capture all images registered window number 1 Area measurement Measurement window Rectangle upper left coordinates 0 0 by binary conversion lower right coordinates 511 239 Mask window Rectangle upper left coordinates 0 0 Counting quantity lower right coordinates 255 119 by binary conversion Measuring time When the shutter speed is 1 60 sec the measuring time is reduced from 143 ms version 2 01 to 101 ms version 2 02 When the shutter speed is 1 1000 sec the measuring time is reduced from 127 ms version 2 01 to 85 ms version 2 02 Auxiliary relay C112 Changed functions of the auxiliary relays C112 final evaluation result Auxiliary relay C114 and C114 CCD trigger status output Change betwee
511. the number of objects total area 9 90 Counting quantities by binary convension 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU gt SYSTEM SETUP OBJECT TYPE COND SET SCRN e OBJECT TYPE COND _ MEASUREMT 1 Q0MEASUREMT 2 2MEASUREMT 3 CDMEAS SELECTION Select the CNT BIN OBJ area measurement after binary conversion i COPY comparative calculations CAMERA PoE images gt INTIALIZATION see section 9 2 6 Select a see section 9 2 7 8 camera COMPARE IMAGES F SELECT 9 MEAS PROG COND BINARY AREA COND EVALUATION NUMERIC CALC L gt conditions for measurement conditions for binary m COND COND programs evaluation numerical condition calculation condition 4 OBJECT TYPE COND OBJECT TYPE COND 9OUTPUT _ FINAL CALC RESULT Ll FINAL OUTPUT COND MAIN OPS MENU CONDITIONS final numerical calculation final output conditions see section 9 2 4 see The PC function in Chapter 10 These settings are found the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 menu Counting quantities by binary convension 2 Setting details An explanation of 6 MEAS PROG COND conditions for measurement programs from the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 object type measurement menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the
512. tifying object by binary conversion NUMERIC CALC numeric calculation menu CALC RESULT NOO N15 final numerical calculations menu DCALC RESULT N00 N15 METRE OBJECT TYPE INDV MEAS RSLT N 9FORMULA 9 14 Shared settings 1 The individual numerical calculations for each measuring program The setting details and procedures for numerical calculations are the same for all measurement programs with the exception of the point measurement program In this section we explain the use of the numerical calculations menu NUMERIC CALC for out of position measurements The NUMERIC CALC numerical calculations menu for positional deviation measurement NUMERIC CALC TYPE00 MEAS 0 POS DEVIATION CALC RESULT NoO O 15 Q OBJECT TYPE NO COORD X Y DEVIAT x y MATCH M The display will be different for ANGL DEV B NUM CALC NC CNST C each measurement program FORMULA REG 0 0 7 MDLO 0 1 NOO 0 15 a Ex H lt DL END The coordinates X is multiplied UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT 00000650 0 00000700 0 NES and the results is stored in OUTPUT NO Y0 0 7 C000 0 107 1 The constant 2 is stored in TEST A RUN SET KEY Noo UPPER MENU 2 2 The X1 value of the registra tion number and the value in NOO y Ierd NOO are multiplied and the _ result is stored in NO1 Not x No2 N
513. ting measurement program See 9 10 Existance inspection by point measuremet Chapter 2 Precautions for use Pay attention to the points below when handling the IV S20 1 Installation Each device in the IV S20 system must be installed in an environment as specified in this manual Operating ambient temperature 0 to 45 C operating ambient humidity 35 to 8596 RH non condensing Do not install the devices in the following locations Installation in any of these locations may cause electrical shock fire or malfunction of the devices 1 Places exposed to direct sunlight 2 Places with exposed to corrosive gases 3 Places with excessive amounts of dust salt or metal powder in the air 4 Places exposed to water 2 Installation Make sure to tighten the mounting and terminal screws securely and check everything before supplying power A loose screw may cause faulty operation 3 Power source Do not use the IV S20 power supply for the IV S20 main housing power supply with any other equipment Do not turn OFF the power while the menu is displayed or while communicating with external equipment Turning OFF the power may erase the data settings 4 Data saving The data set by using the remote setting key is temporarily stored in the memory RAM of the IV S20 However it is not stored in the flash memory yet Therefore make sure to save the data settings before returning to the operation screen from t
514. tion distance of 500 mm is within the focal range and the IV S20L16 lens can be used 2 When another lens with a focal range of 16 mm is used if its focal range exceeds 500 mm install a commercially available C mount close up shot ring Use a ring that is 0 5 mm thick 16 5 16 2 0 5 mm Resolution When the displayed image fills the whole monitor screen and the view in the horizontal direction is 114 6 mm wide the resolution is 223 9 um 114 6mm 223 9 um 512 pixelcount See Glossary for the diefinition of resolution The values shown in the tables on page 6 5 and 6 6 are only reference data for installation These values may vary according to the characteristics of lenses you are using When using any lens check the data using the actual equipment If you want to use a camera lens other than the IV S20L16 buy a lens with a C type lens base The IV S20L16 has a C type lens base A lens with too short focal length f 2 4 2 mm or 8 mm will distort the edges of the field of view The spectral sensitivity characteristics of the CCD element used in the CCD camera are listed below Spectral sensitivity characteristics of the CCD element 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave length nm 6 5 Installation Conditions and Method Relatio
515. tion function 1 evaluation result code 1 0 H The measurement for a specified object type is executed and the data obtained is compared with the criteria Then the evaluation result OK NG is output il Command Note When the measurement start input signal is other than tha general purpose serial I F signal a command is not required m Response T Object Output evaluation type result 1 0 scisc YO Yi Yv15SC SC CR 1 HD NE HD Object type Object type for which the measurement was executed 00 to 15 Output evaluation result YO to Y15 gt 0 NG or unspecified 1 OK 2 Measurement execution function 2 evaluation result measurement data fixed code 11 ui The measurement for the specified object type is executed and evaluation result OK NG and the measurement data in block 0 from each measurement program are output See pages 13 15 to 13 25 for details about the measurement data blocks When the measurement start input signal is other than the general purpose serial I F signal a fixed response to the code Th is returned Command Object 111 Isciscicn L Response D T T Measure i Object Output evaluation mento lo Measurement 0 type i result 51 5 55 11112 ROROC 1 YojYt yis 5 5 1 Camera 2 EE 5 5 Sels else data data 1 1 1
516. tion is NG Operating instruction example gt See 3 3 Degree of match inspection for shape and size Setting measurement program See 9 4 Degree of match inspection for shape and size Pur Measure the distance and angle of two point using the center detection function in a gray pose scale search and the edge detection function as well as center of gravity detection by Measurement of mounted electronic parts 4 1 Criterion image a H Search area h criterion image b Search area criterion image a Criterion image b Register criterion image a and b by matching edges of the IC package Measurement procedure D Find the center points of criterion images a and b using a two point gray scale search 2 Determine the distance between the two center points Operating instruction example gt See 3 4 Distance measurement Setting measurement program X See 9 5 Distance and angle measurement 14 Overview 4 Lead inspection Pur Basedon positional information obtained from the gray scale search function inspect the pose condition of IC leads and connector pins No of detected lead pins Max 128 pieces Appli Inspect IC leads or connector pins Inspect the layout of the IC leads or connector pins ig P1 gig Lead inspection P1 to Distance between Lead EN leads Kal S 21 K1 un KA K1 to K4 Mid point of each h lead
517. tion with an OMRON PC 14 26 14 5 Program examples 14 28 Chapter 15 Troubleshooting 15 1 to 5 1 Symptoms and checks 15 1 2 Causes of termination codes when an error occurs and remedies 15 3 3 Maintenance 15 5 4 Chapter 16 du aa cya naa la pu nnda 16 1 to 7 16 1 IV S20 main housing 16 1 1 Image processing specifications 16 1 2 PC specifications 16 2 3 Hardware specifications 16 2 16 2 Camera section 16 3 1 Camera main body IV S20C1 16 3 2 Camera IV S30C1 C2 16 4 3 Camera lens IV S20L16 16 5 4 Camera conversion cable IV S20HC3 16 5 5 Camera extension cable IV S30EC2 EC4 16 5 16 3 Peripheral device 16 6 1 Monochrome monitor IV 09MT specifications 16 6 2 LED lighting equipment IV 60LD specifications 16 7 GIOSSANY P G 1 to 11 A 1 to 6 Support tool available on the markert A 1 Software version information A 3 Arphabetical Nde X QM 1 1 to 14 C 5 Chapter 1 Overview The IV S20 compact image sensor camera is equiped with a CCD image sensor which captures square pixels in full range Employing this state of art device it can be used to pick up high contrast images at high 1 speed It is also easy to interface to a personal computer an
518. tions Reference image Center coordinates X1 Y1 Measured result i Center coordinates X2 Y2 i Amount of deviation X2 X1 Y2 Y1 Search area 2 2 point search Determining positional deviation in X and Y directions as well as rotational deviation Reference image a Center coordinates Inspection image a Center coordinates Xa1 Ya1 Xa2 Ya2 i Reference image b Center coordinates i Xb1 Yb1 Inspection image b Centef coordinates Xb2 Yb2 Search area image a 2 1 2 1 Anglar deviation 9 9 Xb2 Xb1 Search area image b Measured result Center coordinates of image a Xa2 Ya2 Amount of deviation of image a Xa2 Xa1 Ya2 Yat Center coordinates of image b Xb2 Yb2 Amount of deviation of image b Xb2 Xb1 Yb2 Yb1 Deviation angle The deviation angle 0 determined in the 2 point search is used to readjust the rotation of the image for measurements 1 to 3 For details about rotational adjustments see section 9 2 item 5 Position correction 9 34 Positional deviation measurement 1 Setting sequence MAIN OPS MENU SET SCRN SYSTEM SETUP OBJECT TYPE COND conditions for 2 TYPE COND object types conditions for object types MEAS 0 CAMERA 1 measurement 0 camera 1 0 CAMERA 2 measurement 0 camera 2 COPY INITIALIZATION copy initialization see section 9
519. to 255 Then you only need to adjust the lower limit value to a threshold value that works for our application Threshold value B Captured image Binary conversion 3 upper limit A lower limit B Example for adjustment Threshold value A Threshold value 255 J Lower White Binary conversion limit A U limit 255 limit 2 A Upper limi ower limi Black Threshold value 0 Upper limit 2 255 lower limit 2 A Threshold value Threshold value 25 Black 255 sas A limit A White White Lower Lower imi limit B imitB Black mt Black 0 0 An example of adjustment is shown below using a white object on a black background When the dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image if the lower limit is set higher the black part in the binary image will become larger If the lower limit is set lower the white part will become larger Increase and decrease the lower limit value find the value at which the white part in the binary image starts growing and the value at which the black part starts growing Then set the lower limit at the value halfway between these points This will ensure reliable operation White Inspection image W m Window n2 Black The size of the white area changes depending on the threshold value setting As the value increases the black part grows larger Stable range White As the
520. to 5 OUTPUT SIGNAL with the up and down keys and press the SET key Specify C000 for the auxiliary relay number with the up and down keys and press the SET key gt The output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO OONO1 cooo LOGIC lt gt Y 8 Move the cursor to 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type menu Continued on the following page 3 47 Operation Examples Numeric calculation Continued from the preceding page Y 4 Operation for item RESULTS OUTPUT final output conditions on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu M 1 On the OBJECT TYPE COND menu move the cursor to 14 RESULTS OUTPUT with the up and down keys and press the SET key c The RESULTS OUTPUT final evaluation output condition menu will be displayed 2 Move the cursor to 1 PAGE NO with the up and down keys and press the SET key Move the cursor to YES with the left and right keys and press the SET key c Items 2 to 5 will be displayed RESULTS OUTPUT TYPE 00 2 a DPAGE NO 0 0 7 REG NO YES SET POSITION MOVE 4 37 INPUT SIGNAL AUXRLY C000 0 127 EXT INP X0 0 6 4 TMO 0 7 CNT CNO 0 7 AN00 0 15 OUT Y00 0 15 LOGICAL SYMBOL L DEL OUTPUT SIGNAL OUTY00 0 15 AUXRLY C 000 0 127 5 0 0 7 SET VL000 000 999
521. to OPERATIONS in step 2 above the screen will automatically return to the MAIN OPS MENU Continued on the following page 3 6 Operation Examples Area measurement by binary conversion Continued from the preceding page 11 Measuring the area Press the TRG BRT key and the size of the object in the image in the window will be displayed as a pixel count EYPEBO FL C1ALLC2NO Q K vx x Display of the measured result Final evaluation result 1 MEAS Measuring time MEAS1 MEAS BIN AREA EH REGST NO 00 0 15 AREA 001884 OK lt Area pixel count and evaluation result 2 xo 6 Yo 7 100000 BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 1 The final evaluation result will be displayed as in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the items have been evaluated acceptable If there is a single unacceptable item NG will be displayed When measuring an object area with the binary image only the size of the object is measured If the object meets to the conditions specified in step 9 within the range between the upper and lower limit values OK will be displayed 2 When the judgment result is OK YO will be turned ON because we set it that way in step 9 and a filled box ll will be displayed in the YO position at the bottom of the screen If the result is NG an empty bo
522. to 15 UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT Set the upper and lower limits for decisions BOUTPUT Set the output conditions for the results of calculations RUN A TEST Pressing the SET key will record the setting details as well as run a test make a test run UPPER MENU Returns you to the TYPEO0 MEAS 1 to 3 menu The number of formulas which can be set are dictated by the selections made in items 2 and 3 as follows 2 OBJECT TYPE Model 0 Modeli Coordinates X Y 00X0 to 15 0 00 to 15Y0 00X1 to 15X1 00Y1 to 15Y1 Degree of match M 00MO to 15MO 00M1 to 15M1 Light level G 00G0 to 1590 00G1 to 15G1 Numerical calculation NC ABS TAN ATAN 00 to 15 99999999 9 to 99999999 9 The numbers ranging from 00 to 15 in front of the characters are registration numbers For more information on numerical calculations see section 9 2 4 Numerical calculations Note You must run a test using item 6 RUN A TEST before making any calculations Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS to 3 and select item 9 OUTPUT CONDITIONS output condition v Continued on the follwing page 9 54 Degree of match inspection Continued from the previous page OUTPUT CONDITIONS TYPE00 MEAS 1 DEG OF MATCH DPAGE NO 0 0 4 REG NO YES 1 SET POSITION MOVE INPUT SIGNAL REGT NO 00 0 15 0 0 1 CRD X0 0 1 CRD Y0 0 1 LVL GO 0 1 CAL N00 0 15 AUXRLYCO00 0 127 LOGIAL SYMBOL JjrE 2HE DEL
523. to be calculated and the precision and processing time do not deteriorate Rectangular grid Square grid 1 28 1 7 CCD pick up elements One pixel The aspect ratio is 1 1 E Artifact processing Artifact processing is a method of processing that eliminates the false detection of the edge of the target object when an artifact is in the line being scanned This process can be used during edge detection The real edge of the target object is detected by computing the average duration of the dark area in the scan line which is much longer for a target object than for an artifact Example of detection An example of light to dark averaging DETECT MODE BRT 5 gt DRK while scanning horizontally DE DIR HORI 5 with artifact processing enabled PRC PROJECT YES L NI Duration of dark area in the line scan 4 Average light vertical Edge detection point with artifact processing enabled When artifact processing is disabled in the above example the edge detection point changes Edge detection point with artifact processing off B B Binary image Pixels in images are converted to one of two values 1 when the pixel is lighter than the specified threshold value level and 0 when it is darker than the specified threshold value level G 1 Glossary Binary processing fixed threshold value correction By setting THESHLD ADJ thres
524. tor case case FG Frame ground Received data 2 RD 3 SD Transmitted data 5 SG Signal ground Memory protection 1 Memory protection 1 1 FL1 6 FL2 RS 232C The maximum length of the communication cable depends on the communication speed Communication speed kbps Cable length Conduct a communication 9 6 19 2 15morless test before using the devices for 38 4 57 6 115 2 2to3m 16 measurements 6 Installation Conditions and Method 2 When communicating through the RS 422 Specify the 4 wire or 2 wire RS 422 system on the SERIAL COMM menu see page 11 17 5 1 9 pin D sub female 9 6 Communication p Signal standard name Details Transmitted data IV S20 gt Personal computer Received data Personal computer 5 gt IV S20 Connector field Frame ground Output Input D 4 wire system Shielded twisted pair cable Personal IV S20 9 pin D sub computer RS 232C 422 converter Function Connector frame ground Transmitted data IV S20 5 gt Personal computer Received data Personal computer 5 gt IV S20 FL1 Memory protection 1 6 FL2 Memory protection 2 or less 1 km or less gt lt RS 232C RS 422 2 wire system p Shielded twisted pair cable ersona IV S20 9 pin D
525. tor with either an EIA or NTSC compatible video input terminal Gently push the monitor connector straight in Q BNC connector IV S20 main housing Monitor F fifo Wes H Monitor connector VIDEO Conversion connector Monitor cable RCA jack Cable length 2 m Monitor Ss NE emN Lr If you need a monitor cable longer than 2 m you can purchase a one at a video store 4 For details about connecting and installing the camera see page 6 19 and after ll Leave enough space around the IV S20 In order to connect camera cables the remote key pad cable monitor cable and D sub connector to the IV S20 the following space min is required z 148mm 9mm 130mm 2 9mm BisieilsisiaiSisielie SHARP SII els Do not bend the camera cables repeatedly ER POWER i ER E Make sure the installation location allows a E enough space for the input output wires going to N
526. ts for an OK 2 NUMBER number of objects judgment iam Enter the target to output data 3 TOTAL AREA total surface area MAKE A TEST RUN make a stest run Record evaluation conditions Not done The recording is finished Y Return to the TYPEO0 MEAS 0 to 3 menu _____ UPPER MENU 9 13 Shared settings 4 Numerical calculations Numeric calculation fuction of the IV S20 consisits of numeric calculations which is set individually for each measurement program and final numeric calculations which are set according to object type The NOO to N15 results of the calculations which are set individually for each measuring program may be used according to the 2 OBJECT TYPE and 3 FORMULA style settings of the final numerical calculation OBJECT TYPE COND menu MEAS 0 CAMERA1 measurement 0 camera 1 OMEAS 0 CAMERA2 measurement 0 camera 2 MEASUREMENT 1 4 MEASUREMENT 2 L i TYPE00 MEAS 1 to 3 menu 2 MEASUREMENT 3 J FINALL CALC RESULT final numerical calculations gt TYPE00 MEAS 0 menu gt FINAL CALC RESULT Positinal deviation measurement NUMERIC CALC numeric calculation menu CALC RESULT N00 N15 Degree of match inspection distances and angles measurement lead inspection area measurement by binary conversion counting quantities by binary conversion iden
527. ts the evaluation result Measurement execution Executes a measurement for a specified object 13 6 function 2 evaluation result 11 and outputs the evaluation result and the measurement data fixed measurement data in block 0 4 Measurement execution Executes measurement for a specified object function 3 evaluation result 12 type and outputs the evaluation result and measurement numerical data measurement data from a specified block 13 7 Measurement execution function Executes a measurement for a specified object 4 evaluation result logical 13 type and outputs the evaluation result logical result and calculation result result and calculation result Measurement execution Executes a measurement for a specified object 18 function 5 evaluation result type and outputs the evaluation result Measurement execution Executes a measurement for a specified object function 6 evaluation result 19 and outputs the evaluation result and 13 8 measurement data fixed measurement data in block 0 2 Measurement execution Executes a measurement for a specified object function 7 evaluation result 1 and outputs the evaluation result and measurement numerical data measurement data from a specified block Measurement execution function Executes a measurement for a specified object 8 evaluation result logical 1B type and outputs the evaluation result logical result and calculation result result a
528. ull image reading Partial image reading lines 120 lines approx 33 ms approx 8 ms 5 CCD trigger The IV S20 samples a part of the CCD which can be set to any position with according to item and it will starts shutter operation when value of the area being monitored exceeds 5096 With this function there is no need for an additional photo sensor or proximaty sensor Since the IV S20 can set the CCD triggering position for each item being processed it can shorten the time needed to change the items being processed on a production line Item 1 Item 2 lt lt Moving direction direction E Window for triggering 6 The C mount module and back plane focus can be adjusted Since the IV S20 uses a standerd C mount module for installing the lens it can be used to adjust the back plane focus and is convenient for use with a fixed focus lens or for proximaty shots 1 1 Overview 2 IV S20 features 1 Gray scale search using normalization correlation The IV S20 processes 256 gray level images using template matching with normalization correlation This improves inspection and measure ment precision without being affected by variations in lighting 2 Sub pixel level precision When the IV S20 looks for the position of an object using gray scale NY E search function it can calculate a finer position than the actual CCD KE horizontal pixel size by interpolation to achieve sub pixel scale prec
529. ults ANO to AN15 are OK these terminals are turned ON If any of the results are NG they are turned OFF See item 9 2 4 for details about the final numerical calculation YO to Y15 They can be used as auxiliary relays for the external output terminals YO to Y15 See page 10 7 for details about the auxiliary relays C000 to C127 3 Move the cursor to item 4 LOGICAL SYMBOL with the up and down keys and press the SET key 4 Move the cursor to the logic symbol to be used for the input signal selected in step 3 and press the SET key c The logic symbols and the input signals will be displayed as a ladder circuit Display example Counter terminals CNO to CN7 Final calcu lation result terminals ANO to AN15 Output terminals PAGEO INPUTO LOGIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT C000 11 Logic symbol Function a contact on a series circuit ON when the evaluation result is OK b contact on a series circuit OFF when the evaluation result is OK Deletes the contact on the cursor Contacts after the deleted contact will not be brought forward Note This symbol cannot be used on the first row Used to create an OR circuit Used to create an OR circuit Deletes the contact on the cursor Contacts after the deleted contact will be brought forward When a contact exists only on the first row if the contact is deleted also the output relay will also be deleted Deletion Y
530. umerical calculation Setting details selections CALC RESULT You may set the location where the arithmetical operation results of the specified output data will be stored from locations 00 to 15 calculation results gt The results will be displayed 4 as one unit at position 1 above TYPE Select the type of data being calculated A number of style settings are used The style type is selected using the left and right keys and the numerical values are entered using the up and down keys gt The settings are displayed at NOO to N15 position 3 above The first line of the display will change according to the selection made in item 0 Item 2 selections The first line of the display Coordinates X and Y positional deviation Record 0 0 to 7 Model 0 0 to 1 NOO 0 to 15 FORMULA coordinates x and y degree of match M registation number Angular deviation B Record 0 0 to 7 NOO 0 to 15 ABS 7 TAN ATAN NOO 0 to 15 second line is not displayed Constant C 00000000 0 second line is not displayed Note Please enter a smaller number for N 00 to 15 in the formula than N 00 to 15 of item CALC RESULT UPPER amp LOWER LIMIT Enter the upper and lower limits for making a judgment gt This setting will be displayed in NOO to N15 at position 4 above Setting the output of the calculation results OUTPUT The output can be set to YO to Y7 or C000 to C107 gt This setting is displayed in to N15
531. ured lead inspection seeseeeeenenn 9 76 Object identification and numbering function labeling eeseseeeeeneee 9 8 G 8 Counting quantities by binary conversion eessssssesseseeee eene 9 93 Distance and angle measurement center of gravity sse 9 62 Object identification by binary 9 101 Object identification by binary conversion Measurement data block Communication general purpose serial I F 13 20 Gomputer link oct eat oe Ee SCR ROMA 14 10 Operation example nrin e d RO in RE 9 99 UIT T NRI TEC 1 6 9 98 SEMIN ASTANS MES 9 100 Object number to be measured lead 9 74 Object type number nitet eee ete eie BG Fei edu cete nde 9 1 9 28 Operations UN CY 10 1 Operation run Screen uiui aian eal tied e ded ae le al eee ne ee 7 2 8 9 Area measurement by binary conversion ssssssessseeeeeneneeeeenenneeen nennen nnne 9 89 Counting quantities by binary conversion esssssseseseeeee eene nnne 9 97 Degree of match inspection for shape and size 9 56 Distance and angle measurement sssssssssssessseeeeeen nenn
532. urning to the previous menu Switching the image mode between the through mode and freeze mode Switch the image mode between through and freeze on a setting screen See the preceding page When the mode is switched from through to freeze a new image is captured Note The run screen is only displayed in the freeze mode and the ADJUST GAIN amp OFFSET screen is only displayed in the through mode Measurement start brightness select key TRG BRT Start measurement input Switching the brightness level H and L Press this key on the run screen and a new measurement is triggered Change the displayed image brightness See the preceding page Use this key when the image is so bright that characters are difficult to see The brightness can be changed on any screen other than the run screen The direction keys have an auto repeat function holding them down is the same as pressing them repeatedly Setting and Operating Outlines 7 4 Operation flow 1 Processing after power is turned ON and main loop processing Power ON Y Start up Initializing CPU gate array Memory check Y Wi System program Transmitting from flash memory to RAM 9 Conditions other than the conditions for each object type Data setting CPU variables Gate array A Checksum checking NG Initializing NG type conditions Settings for all types co
533. user s setting due to changes in the actual brightness measured in the environment 2 Applications Used when the level of illumination changed due to changes in voltage or when the influence of sunlight in the workplace cannot be ignored 3 Setting procedure The following procedure describes how to handle the settings in the OBJECT TYPE I O menu and in the MONITOR LIGHT LVL check light level menu On the MAIN OPS MENU move the cursor to SET SCRN and press the SET key gt On the SYSTEM SETUP menu move the cursor to 2 OBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key c Move the cursor to item 5 SYSTEM IN OUT on the OBJECT TYPE COND menu conditions for each object type menu and press the SET key OBJECT TYPE I O MONITOR LIGHT LVL CAM1 1 2 NO YES 1 LIGHT LEVEL COND TO NEXT SUB MENU 2 TRIGGER CCD START REGNO YES BIN AVG LIT LVL 1 Select 1 MONITOR LIGHT LVL check light level using the up and down keys and press the SET key After selecting the camera number 1 or 2 using the up and down keys select YES using the left and right keys Then press the SET key 2 Select item 2 LIGHT LEVEL COND conditions for checking light level using the and down keys and press the SET key gt The LIGHT MONITR check light level menu and the monitoring window will be displayed 3 LIGHT MONITR T C1 H SIZE X 08 4 32 xY 08 4 64 44 POSITION 256 2
534. ut i Object Output evaluation M except block 50 1 2 RC RC type MN gol Y15 RE SCISC CR i CH Ly ae D Output evaluation result YO to Y15 0 NG or unspecified 1 OK Specified block data Numerical data in a specified block up to 512 bytes 4 Measurement execution function 4 evaluation result logical result and calculation result code 13 The measurement for a specified object type is executed Among the measurement results the evaluation results OK NG of output YO to 15 and the ON OFF state of the auxiliary relays CO to 127 are output Among the results of the numerical calculations for each measure ment the evaluation results and the calculation results of calculations NO to N15 are output Object type Object type for which the measurement ac d omman was executed 00 to 15 T Object Measurement Number of the measurement whose numerical data will be output 0 to 3 Ep The same as on the preceding page E Response 13 T T Measure zm T Object Output evaluation mento b Auxiliary relay 2 of the type result ss 2 229 pod measurement 1 3 RC RC YO Yi Y15 515 SE t Ung C127 No specified by SC SC CR P i 5 a 2 1 the command H L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Output evaluation result YO to Y15 0 NG or unsp
535. vary with RS 422 4 line system the module to be used 14 27 Computer link 14 5 Program examples An example of measurements using the IV S20 and a Sharp PC JW70H 2 point search for positional deviation measurement is explained below using data flow a flowchart and a timing chart Input terminal fo 69 9 8 9 pem m IV S20 main housing POWER plan view Sharp s PC JW70H port Output unit Communication I IT VIDEO CAMERA CAMERA2 RS232C RS422 REMOTE IV S20 main housing view Communication connector RS232C RS422 Camera 1 Camera 1 connector 1 Data flow Sharp PC JW70H IV S20 Output a start signal Output relay 00040 Start output Write data into the register ut Description b register ee paes 8 Transmit completion Termination code normal termination response FE c be o oO E nd o Lu Object type No 1 Result output YO to Y15
536. version cable IV S20H3 5 2 Part Names and Functions 3 Micro camera IV S30C2 2 Camera body Head cable D Camera head CCD section Cable connector Camera head e Cable length 1 m Lens mount section Camera head M 15 5 x 0 5 mm installation section Install a lens commercially available The maximum outside diameter of the camera head is 217 mm The lens mount bracket is M15 5 x 0 5 mm Camera body Connect the camera using the IV S20H3 camera conversion cable Part Names and Functions 2 Camera lens IV S20L16 1 Focus Lock knob 1 for fixing the iris 0 05m E E REP 3 r4 Hog To focus an image The focal length distance from an object is 50 mm to infinity from the front of lens To adjust the image brightness The iris aperture can be set from 1 6 to closed 3 Camera conversion cable IV 820HC3 b C eaded Ue 2 Controller connector Quick connect type i Cable length 3 m connector Connect to a connector of camera cable IV S30C1 C2 C3 C4 Connect to camera 1 connector or camera 2 con
537. x will be displayed in the YO position at the bottom of the screen 3 7 Operation Examples Position measurement 3 2 Position measurement An example of the operation for measuring the deviation from an absolute position of a positioning mark is shown below Positioning mark 1 Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU after initialize all condetions Y MAIN OPS MENU TYPEO0 MEAS ms MEASO CAM1 NO X0 6 OOO Yo 7 MSR CHNG REG CHNG PC MONTR SET SCRN BUSY FL C1ALLC2NO VX X MANL TYP CHG 1 Move the cursor to SET SCRN item and press the SET key c The SYSTEM SETUP menu will be displayed Operation on the SYSTEM SETUP menu Y SYSTEM SETUP amp DOPS MENU SETTING Q OBJECT TYPE COND 17 I O CONDITIONS DADJ CAM POSITION DISPLAY MODE amp RECEIVING PARMS INIT ALL PARMS SELF DIAGNOSTICS SAVE IN FLASH MEM OPERATIONS TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU TO NEXT SUB MENU JAPANESE ENGLISH EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC FC1H 1 Move the cursor to DBJECT TYPE COND conditions of object type and press the SET key c OBJECT TYPE COND menu will be displayed Continued on the following page 3 8 Operation Examples Position measurement Continued from the preceding page Y
538. xample PAGEO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT INPUTO C001 C000 LOGIC LF INPUT1 Logic 4 J INPUT2 N01 N02 C001 LOGIC N03 N04 LOGIC io Circuit a xX Circuit b O C010 C001 C010 V VU C011 e C001 C011 C v 5 Storing the circuit in the IV 820 memory RAM LOGICAL SYMBOL LJ DEL G OUTPUT SIGNAL AUX RLYC000 0 127 DEL UPPER MENU Note Output relays cannot be used in series on a ladder circuit Change circuit a to circuit b 1 Move the cursor to item 6 UPPER MENU with the up and down keys and press the SET key C The screen will return to the TYPE MEAS menu and the ladder circuit creation process will be finished 10 5 PC Function Kinds of input signals in each measurement program Measurement function Positional deviation Matching inspection for measurement shape and size Distance and angle Leia measurement Degree of Model 0 to 7MO Model 0 positioning 00MO to 15M0 Start point match Model 1 OM1 to 7M1 Model 1 measuring object 00M1 to 15M1 00M to 15M to 3M Model 0 0X0 to 7X0 Model 0 positioning 00X0 to 15X0 X X Coordinate X 1 0X1 to 7X1 Model 1 measuring object 00X1 to 15X1 0X to 3 Model 0 OYO to 7YO Model 0 positioning 00YO to 15Y0 Coordinate Y Model 1 0Y1 to 7 1 Model 1 measuring object 00 1 to 15Y1 Jefes
539. xels 32 X 32 pixels X X Y X X Y 65536 pixels Example of recording Reference image lt Object to be measured Return to the MEASURING COND measurement condition menu and select item 6 UPPER MENU v Continued on the follwing page 9 52 Degree of match inspection Continued from page 9 50 When the GRAY IMG PROC gray scale processing mode is selected Continued from the previous page When the binary processing mode is selected Select item 7 EVALUATION COND evaluation conditions from the TYPE00 MEAS1 to 3 menu EVALUATION COND TYPEO0 MEAS 1 DEG OF MATCH DREGSTNO 0 0 15 TEST RESULT OUT These displays can be set QMATCH 10000 10000 09000 OK INO using the up and down keys X COORD MDLO 000 0 511 0 X 000 0 OK INO The choices are NO YO to 7 4 Y COORD MDLO 000 0 479 0 Y 000 0 OK NO C000 to C127 lt 1 _ LIGT LVL MDLO 000 0 255 0 1160 OK This is how the display looks MATCH MDL1 10000 10000 409000 OK NO GRAV ING OXCOORD MDL 000 0 511 0 0000 OK ns Were COORD MDL1 000 0 479 0 0000 OK and MODELI MEAS LIGTLVL MDL1 000 0 255 0 1000 OK INO model 1 object tobe MAKE A TEST RUN SET KEY measured is set to YES MUPPER MENU You can switch between displaying all of the h
540. y of measured result OK Final evaluation result 1 MEAS XXXXXXms Measuring time MEASO CAM1 POS DEVIATION REGST NO 0 0 7 X COORD MDLO X 379 0 oh Y COORD MDLO Y 214 0 OK X DEVIAT MDLO X 001 0 ET Center coordinates of new image window and judgment result Deviation of the new object in the Y DEVIAT MDLO Y 000 00K window and final evaluation MATCH 09735 lt Degree of match 2 BUSY MSR CHNG REG CHNG PQ MONTR SET SCRN MANL TYP CHG 8 The final evaluation result will be displayed as OK in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the items have been evaluated acceptable If there is a single unacceptable item NG will be displayed MATCH 09735 means that the degree of match percentage of pixels that match between pixels in the new image and the stored image is 97 35 The acceptance and rejection criteria based on the degree of match In order to evaluate acceptability based on the degree of match first an image of a good specimen is stored for reference Then an image of defective specimen is compared for degree of match Finally an image of another good specimen is compared These comparisons establish the degree of match to be used for setting the limits used for working comparisons For example the degree of match for a non defective object
541. y relays PC control after the turn OFF measurement result is determined Parallel output P YO to Y7 iie IA Result output x Result output 11 16 Setting the Input Output Conditions 11 3 CCD trigger 1 Outline This function samples a specified part trigger window of an image captured by the CCD camera at a high rate and starts the measurement when the sampled image changes Therefore moving objects can be measured without requiring an external trigger such as a photo sensor To use this function set the input output the CCD trigger on the I O SETTINGS menu pages 11 1 to 11 16 and set item 3 TRIGGER CCD START and item CCD TRIGGER COND on the OBJECT TYPE I O menu gt gt See Item 2 There are two methods for starting the measurement when there is a change in a sampled image i e a binary method and an average light level method When a sampled binary image changes the white area exceeds 50 the measurement is started Binary A change in a binary image means a change in a binary image from method black background to white workpiece or from white background to black workpiece Average light When the average light level of a sampled image enters a specified level method range the measurement is started The trigger window can be set in any position for each object type In the past the position of an external sensor had to be adjusted every time the object type was

9 - Sharp

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents